contract provisions and plans · sctp digester maintenance and modifications. discovery clean water...

CONTRACT PROVISIONS AND PLANS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF:

Schedule A and B Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 92-2017-0053

VOLUME II – SPECIFICATIONS

A Discovery Clean Water Alliance Capital Project with Clark Regional Wastewater District as Administrative Lead

CLARK REGIONAL WASTEWATER DISTRICT 8000 N.E. 52nd COURT VANCOUVER, WASHINGTON 98665 (360) 750-5876FAX (360) 750-7570crwwd.com

January 2020

CONTRACT PROVISIONS AND PLANS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF:

Schedule A and B Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 92-2017-0053

VOLUME II – SPECIFICATIONS

FOR INFORMATION REGARDING THIS PROJECT CONTACT:

Tom Lebo Alliance Construction Program Manager CLARK REGIONAL WASTEWATER DISTRICT 8000 N.E. 52nd COURT VANCOUVER, WASHINGTON 98665 (360) [email protected]

CLARK REGIONAL WASTEWATER DISTRICT

VANCOUVER (CLARK COUNTY), WA

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

for the construction of the

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements

Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 92-2017-0053

AND

Schedule B: Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Repair and Replacement Projects:

SCTP Digester Maintenance and Modifications. Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2018-0086

SCTP Biosolids Cake Transfer Screw Replacement Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2018-0089

SCTP Boiler Exhaust Stack Replacement Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2018-0096

SCTP Boiler Gas Boosters Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2019-0012

SCTP HVAC Systems Replacement (Buildings 70 and 72) Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2019-0072

VOLUME II

JACOBS

Corvallis, OR

January 2020

© JACOBS 2020. All rights reserved. This document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein, as an instrument of professional service, is the property of Jacobs and is not to be used in whole or part, for any other project without the written authorization of Jacobs. Any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein is at the sole risk of the party(ies) reusing, modifying, or altering it. All references to Jacobs and its employees and all professional seals shall be removed prior to any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document.

Project No. 708335 Copy No.

SALMON CREEK TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

PW\DEN003\708335 SEALS PAGE JANUARY 2020 00 01 07 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS PAGE

SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

Digitally Signed on January 6, 2020

Benjamin Stephen Herman


SEALS PAGE PW\DEN003\708335 00 01 07 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE DIVISION 04 – MASONRY DIVISION 05 – METALS DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Section 44 42 25.02

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Luke Aaron Scoggins



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS DIVISION 09 – FINISHES DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Geoffrey Barlow Kirsten



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) Sections 23 05 93, 23 31 13, 23 31 16.16, 23 34 00, 23 34 01, 23 37 00 DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Sections 44 31 00, 44 47 28.26

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Kenneth J. Galardi



SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Sections 23 00 00, 23 07 00, 23 08 00, 23 09 00, 23 09 93, 23 20 00, 23 74 00, 23 81 00


Terry Leslie Gatlin

9



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Section 23 52 00 DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Section 44 46 23.02

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Jason Thomas Krumsick



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Tiana Afua Michaud



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Donald E. Martens

39454

WASHINGTON

OF

STAT

E

REGISTERED

DONALD

PROFESSIONAL ENGIN

EER

E. MARTENS

07Jan2020

Exp: 03/28/2020



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Matthew John Baldwin



SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Section 40 90 01


David I. Star

8



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS DIVISION 41 – MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT DIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT Section 43 12 01 DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Section 44 31 00 Section 44 42 25.04

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Craig W. Massie



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Sections 40 90 00, 40 91 00, 40 99 90

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Jeffrey David Kanyuch



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT Section 43 11 46

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Quinn Philip Behnke

END OF SECTION

8

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - i

TABLE OF CONTENTS for the

Contract Provisions and Plans

VOLUME I – CONTRACT PROVISIONS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

CALL FOR BIDS PROPOSAL FORM INSTRUCTIONS PROPOSAL FORM NOTICE TO BIDDER NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH WAGE PAYMENT STATUTES SUBCONTRACTOR LIST SUPPLEMENTAL CRITERIA INFORMATION FORM WORK EXPERIENCE FORM PROPOSAL SIGNATURE PAGE

CONTRACT FORMS

AGREEMENT CONTRACT BOND

PREVAILING WAGE RATES

STATE OF WASHINGTON PREVAILING WAGE RATES

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS CLARK COUNTY BUILDING PERMIT (PLACEHOLDER) BUILDING INSPECTION APPROVAL CARD (PLACEHOLDER) CLARK COUNTY RIGHT-OF-WAY PERMIT CLARK COUNTY GRADING AND DRAINAGE PERMIT

(PLACEHOLDER) STANDARD DETAILS

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - ii

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 01—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 15 00 Mitigating Community Impacts Supplement: Traffic Access for Phase 5B to SCTP 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures Supplements: Change Control Form Request for Information 01 29 00 Payment Procedures Supplement: District Reportable Expense Template 01 31 13 Project Coordination Supplement: Removal From Service (RFS) Request Form 01 31 15 Construction Sequencing and Constraints Supplement: Construction Constraints by Facility 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Supplement: Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal 01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms 01 43 33 Manufacturers’ Field Services Supplement: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation 01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control 01 45 33 Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Supplement: Inadvertent Discovery Plan (IDP) 01 56 50 Special Utility Field Explorations 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements Supplement: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance 01 64 00 Owner-Furnished Products 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data Supplements: Maintenance Summary Form Template: Operation and Maintenance Manual Cover

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - iii

Template: Operation and Maintenance Manual Spine Template: Operation and Maintenance Manual

Table of Contents 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing 01 91 14 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup Supplements: Unit Process Startup Form Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form

DIVISION 02—EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 Demolition Supplements: Regulated Building Materials Survey Facility 87 – Asbestos Material Locations 117th Street Pump Station Forcemain Street Odor Control

System Submittal Data

DIVISION 03—CONCRETE

03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces 03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories 03 21 00 Steel Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete Supplements: Concrete Mix Design, Class 4000F1S1W0C1 Concrete Mix Design, Class 3500F1S0W0C1 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 62 00 Grouting Supplement: 24-hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test Form and Grout Testing Procedures 03 63 00 Concrete Doweling 03 64 23 Epoxy Resin Injection Grouting

VOLUME II – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 04—MASONRY

04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 04 23 00 Glass Unit Masonry

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - iv

DIVISION 05—METALS

05 05 19 Post-Installed Anchors 05 05 23 Welding Supplement: Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 41 00 Structural Metal Stud Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 52 16 Aluminum Railings 05 53 00 Metal Gratings

DIVISION 06—WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 82 01 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Baffle Wall System

DIVISION 07—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 41 13 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 07 53 23 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 70 01 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 92 00 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08—OPENINGS

08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames 08 30 00 Specialty Doors 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers

DIVISION 09—FINISHES

09 90 00 Painting and Coating Supplements: Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) Paint Product Data Sheet (PPDS)

DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES

10 14 00 Signage Supplement: Sign Schedule

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - v

10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 80 00 Miscellaneous Specialties

DIVISIONS 11 THROUGH 21—NOT USED

DIVISION 22—PLUMBING

22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 10 Plumbing Piping and Accessories 22 10 01.01 Plumbing Piping Schedule Data Sheet 22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent (PVC-DWV) Pipe and Fittings Data Sheet 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23—HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 00 00 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Basic Requirements

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC 23 09 00 HVAC Instrumentation Control Performance Specifications 23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 23 20 00 HVAC Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ducts and Accessories 23 31 16.16 Thermoset Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Ducts

and Accessories 23 34 00 Odor Control Fans Supplement: Fan Schedule 23 34 01 HVAC Fans 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets

23 52 00 Boiler Exhaust Stack 23 74 00 Air Supply Units 23 81 00 Unitary HVAC Equipment

DIVISIONS 24 AND 25—NOT USED

DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL

26 05 02 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 04 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 26 05 05 Conductors 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes 26 05 70 Electrical Systems Analysis 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - vi

26 20 00 Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 19 Low-Voltage Motor Control 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 29 23 Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System 26 42 01 Pipe Bonding and Test Stations Supplement: Joint Bond Continuity Test Schematic 26 42 02 Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection System

DIVISION 27—NOT USED

DIVISION 28—ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 13 00 Security Systems

DIVISIONS 29 AND 30—NOT USED

VOLUME III – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 31—EARTHWORK

31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation 31 23 16 Excavation 31 23 19.01 Dewatering 31 23 23 Fill and Backfill 31 23 23.15 Trench Backfill 31 41 00 Shoring

DIVISION 32—EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 11 23 Aggregate Base Course 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 32 16 00 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses

DIVISION 33—UTILITIES

33 13 00 Disinfection of Water Utility Distribution Facilities


Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - vii

DIVISION 40—PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

40 05 15 Piping Support Systems 40 05 33 Pipe Heat Tracing 40 27 00 Process Piping—General 40 27 00.01 Cement-Mortar-Lined and Glass-Lined and Epoxy-

Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Data Sheet 40 27 00.03 Carbon Steel Pipe and Fittings—General Service Data Sheet 40 27 00.08 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings—General Service Data Sheet 40 27 00.10 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings Data Sheet 40 27 00.13 Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings Data Sheet 40 27 00.21 Profile Wall Polyethylene (PWPE) Data Sheet 40 27 01 Process Piping Specialties 40 27 02 Process Valves and Operators Supplements: Solenoid Actuated Valve Schedule Self-Regulated Valve Schedule 40 42 13 Process Piping Insulation Supplement: Service and Insulation Thickness Table 40 80 01 Process Piping Leakage Testing 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems Supplements: Loop Specifications Instrument List PLC Equipment List PLC Input/Output List Control Panel Schedule Loop Status Report Instrument Calibration Sheet I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet Performance Test Sheet 40 90 01 Supplemental Loop Specifications Supplements: PLC Equipment List PLC I/O List 40 91 00 Instrumentation and Control Components 40 99 90 Package Control Systems

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - viii

DIVISION 41—MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

41 22 23.21 Jib Cranes Supplement: Jib Crane Data Sheet

DIVISION 42—NOT USED

DIVISION 43—PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

43 11 46 Centrifugal Digester Gas Blower Skid 43 12 01 Compressed Air Systems Supplement: Facility 88 Air Compressor Induction Motor Data Sheet

DIVISION 44—POLLUTION AND WASTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT

44 31 00 Biotrickling Filter System 44 42 25.02 Prefabricated Aluminum Flat Cover 44 42 25.04 Prefabricated FRP Secondary Clarifier Launder Covers 44 44 13.01 Chemical Metering Pumps Supplement: Sodium Hypochlorite Feed Pump 1 Data Sheet

44 46 13.02 Screw Conveyor System Supplement: Cake Transfer Screw Induction Motor Data Sheet

44 47 28.26 Activated Carbon Odor Control Systems


VOLUME IV – DRAWINGS

VOLUME V – STANDARD DETAILS

VOLUME VI – SCHEDULE B DRAWINGS


PW\DEN003\708335 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY JANUARY 2020 04 22 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:

1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A82/A82M, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for

Concrete Reinforcement. b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. d. C90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry

Units. e. C140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete

Masonry Units and Related Units. f. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. g. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. h. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry

Purposes. i. C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. j. C404, Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. k. C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. l. C618 12 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or

Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. m. C744, Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium

Silicate Masonry Units. n. C979, Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. o. C989, Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-

Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. p. C1314, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Masonry Prisms. q. C1403, Standard Test Method for Rate of Water Absorption of

Masonry Mortars. r. E514/E514M, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and

Leakage through Masonry. 2. International Code Council (ICC):

a. International Building Code (IBC). b. ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) Reports.


CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PW\DEN003\708335 04 22 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

3. The Masonry Society (TMS): a. TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5; Building Code Requirements for

Masonry Structures and Companion Commentaries (MSJC Code and Commentary).

b. TMS 602/ACI530.1/ASCE6; Specification for Masonry Structures and Companion Commentaries (Masonry Standards Joint Committee Specifications and Commentary).

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:

1. Shop Drawings. 2. Data Sheets:

a. Horizontal joint reinforcement. b. Preformed control joint materials. c. Water repellent masonry sealer. d. Grout mix design. e. Mortar proportions. Prebagged mortar properties and data sheets. f. Grout sand gradation in accordance with ASTM C404.

3. Samples: a. Sample:

1) Two of each type of masonry unit to be used on Project from the proposed manufacturer.

2) Two of each, textured units for verification of specified color and texture.

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Method and Location of Placing Grout: High lift or low lift. 2. Mix design test results. 3. Certifications:

a. Units comply with ASTM C55 and ASTM C90. b. Grout test results conform to ASTM C1019. c. Grout aggregates conform to requirements of ASTM C33,

including nonreactivity. d. Mortar sand conform to requirements of ASTM C144.

4. Test results of Project samples from masonry unit manufacturer stating that units comply with ASTM C90. Documentation of material testing shall be one less than 1 year old.

5. Test results of proposed grout mix deign stating that units comply with ASTM C1019. Documentation of material testing shall be 1 year old or less.



6. Test reports stating aggregates for mortar meet requirements of ASTM C144.

7. Test reports or letter of certification stating aggregates for grout meet requirements of ASTM C404.

8. Letter from water repellent admixture manufacturer verifying masonry unit manufacturer’s proper use of product.

9. Method and materials for removal of efflorescence. 10. Field test results to qualify materials.

a. Grout tests in accordance with ASTM C1019.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Masonry Unit Manufacturer: Qualified by manufacturer of water repellent admixture to use product.

B. Preinstallation Conference:

1. Required Meeting Attendees: a. Masonry subcontractor, including masonry foreman. b. Ready-mix producer. c. Admixture representative. d. Testing and sampling personnel. e. Design Structural Engineer.

2. Schedule and conduct prior to start of masonry construction. 3. Notify Engineer of location and time. 4. Agenda shall include:

a. High lift and low lift procedures. b. Mortar, grout, unit, and reinforcing submittals. c. Types and locations of rebar splices. d. Joint tooling. e. Admixture types, dosage, performance, and redosing at Site. f. Mix designs and test of mix. g. Placement methods, techniques, equipment, consolidation, and

reconsolidation. h. Protection procedures for environmental conditions. i. Other specified requirements requiring coordination.

5. Submit conference minutes as specified in Section 01 31 19, Project Meetings.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Storage and Protection: Keep units and mortar/grout cementitious ingredients, including lime, dry.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY ASSEMBLAGE

A. Minimum 28-Day Specified Compressive Strength (f’m) of Masonry: 2,000 psi.

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) Requirements:

1. ASTM C90: Medium weight. 2. Net Area Compressive Strength: 2,000 psi minimum, in accordance

with TMS 602, Table 2. a. Water Repellent Admixture:

1) Structural concrete masonry units in weather exposed exterior wall shall be manufactured with integral liquid polymeric admixture to provide resistance to water penetration.

2) Manufacturers and Products: a) W.R. Grace & Co.; Dry-Block Block Admixture. b) BASF Construction Chemicals; Rheopel Plus.

3. Nominal Size: 16 inches long by 8 inches high by thickness shown on Drawings.

4. Color of Units: Natural.

B. Textured Concrete Masonry Units (TCMU-1):

1. Same type, weight and color as standard CMU units. 2. Surface Texture on Exterior Surfaces: Split-face on exposed exterior

face and ends at outside corners. 3. Surface Texture: Smooth on interior surfaces.

C. Textured Concrete Masonry Units (TCMU-2):

1. Same type, weight and color as standard CMU units. 2. Splitface Exposed Faces: Split-face on exposed exterior face and ends at

outside corners. 3. Rib Textured Exposed Faces: Four ribs on a 16-inch face; outside corner

units with ribs on face and end; ribs spaced, sized, and located so that they align vertically when laid in either running bond.



D. General:

1. Furnish or cut special shapes for corners, jambs, lintels, and other areas shown or required.

2. Special units shall match color and texture of standard units. 3. Where units are placed so end of unit is exposed, such as at a corner or

intersection, exposed end of that block shall have surface to match color and texture of sides of other units.

4. Furnish sound, dry, clean units free of cracks, prior to placing in structure.

5. Vertical Cells to be Grouted: Capable of alignment sufficient to maintain clear, unobstructed continuous vertical cell dimensions in accordance with TMS 602, Table 7.

6. Masonry unit size and shape shall allow for all placement patterns. Use vertical grout dams to prevent materials, such as grout or poured insulation, from escaping from cell being filled to adjacent cells where material is not intended to be placed.

2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement-Lime Mortar:

1. ASTM C270. 2. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II portland cement. 3. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S hydrated. 4. Aggregates:

a. Nonreactive in accordance with ASTM C33, Appendix X1. b. Mortar: ASTM C144, sand.

B. Water: Fresh, clean, and potable.

C. Water Repellent Admixture:

1. ASTM C1403. 2. Mortar for structural and textured concrete masonry units in weather

exposed exterior walls shall include an integral liquid polymeric admixture to provide resistance to water penetration.

3. Manufacturers and Products: a. W.R. Grace; DRY-BLOCK. b. Harris Specialty Chemicals. c. Axim Italcementi Group; Intrapel. d. BASF Chemical Co.; Rheopel Plus Mortar Admixture.



2.04 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II portland cement.

B. Fly Ash:

1. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618.

C. Slag Cement: In accordance with ASTM C989, Grade 100 or Grade 120.

D. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S hydrated.

E. Aggregates:

1. ASTM C404, fine and coarse. 2. Non-reactive in accordance with ASTM C33, Appendix X1.

F. Water: Fresh, clean, and potable.

2.05 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcement: Clean and free from loose rust, scale, and coatings that reduce bond.

B. Deformed Bars: As specified in Section 03 21 00, Steel Reinforcement.

C. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement:

1. Two parallel, ASTM A82/A82M, No. 9 wires, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M, weld connected to No. 9 perpendicular cross wire at 16 inches, maximum, center.

2. Furnish special manufactured corner and wall intersection pieces. 3. Manufacturer: Dayton Superior/Dur-O-Wal, Dayton, OH.

2.06 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINTS

A. Solid rubber cross-shape extrusions as manufactured by:

1. Dayton Superior/Dur-O-Wal, Dayton, OH; DA 2001 Control Joint Regular Rubber.

2. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY; #RS-Standard.



2.07 MORTAR MIXES

A. In accordance with ASTM C270, Type S and MSJC Specifications.

B. Mix Method:

1. Proportion Method: Proportion per Table 1 of ASTM C270.

C. Mixing:

1. Machine mix in approved mixers in accordance with ASTM C270. Time addition of approved admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Procedure used for adding it to mix shall provide good dispersion.

2. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for mortar color admixture. 3. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for water repellent admixture. 4. Review compatibility with other mortar admixture.

2.08 GROUT MIXES

A. Compressive Strength Property: Minimum 2,000 psi at 28 days. Grout strength shall not exceed three times the minimum specified strength.

B. Mix Design:

1. Proportions: a. Design mix to meet property/strength requirements. b. Where fly ash or slag is included in mix, fly ash or slag content

shall be a minimum of 15 percent and a maximum of 25 percent of weight of total cementitious materials.

2. Slump: 8-inch minimum, 11-inch maximum.

C. Mixing:

1. Do not use water reducers, air entrainment, plasticizing, high-range water reducers, or other non-specified admixtures in grout mixes.

2. Transit-mixed Grout: Meet requirements of ASTM C476. 3. For high lift grouting, add approved grout expansion admixture in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Fluid consistency suitable for placing without segregation with a slump

of 8 inches to 11 inches.



2.09 WATER REPELLENT MASONRY SEALER

A. Characteristics:

1. Water-based blend of silanes and siloxanes. 2. VOC compliant.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Water Absorption: 95 percent reduction in weight gain when tested in accordance with ASTM C140.

2. Water Repellency: 99 percent reduction in weight gain when tested in accordance with ASTM E514.

C. Manufacturers and Products:

1. W. R. Grace & Co.; Infiniseal DB Sealer. 2. BASF Construction Chemicals; Enviroseal PBT.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Meet requirements of 2015 IBC, Chapter 21 and 2013 The Masonry Society (TMS) 602/American Concrete Institute (ACI) 530.1/ASCE 6, Specification for Masonry Structures and Companion Commentaries (MSJC), Part 3, Execution, except as modified in this section.

B. Moisture Protection:

1. Keep units dry while stored on Site. 2. Do not wet units prior to laying.

C. Provide measures to prevent moisture from entering incomplete walls and open cells.

D. Cold Weather: Meet requirements of MSJC Specification Section “Cold Weather Construction.”

E. Hot Weather: Meet requirements of MSJC Specification Section “Hot Weather Construction.”

F. After construction during cold weather, maintain newly constructed masonry temperature above 32 degrees F for a minimum of 24 hours using MSJC or other approved cold weather methods.



G. After construction and during hot weather, fog spray newly constructed masonry in accordance with MSJC hot weather construction requirements.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Concrete Foundations: Meet tolerance requirements of ACI 117 prior to starting any masonry work.

B. Prepare surface contact area of foundation concrete for initial mortar placement by removing laitance, loose aggregate, and other materials, and anything that would prevent mortar from bonding to foundation.

C. Patch or grind out-of-tolerance foundation surfaces to receive mortar prior to starting masonry work.

D. Clean reinforcement dowels and projecting embeds by removing laitance, spillage, or items that will adversely affect grout bond.

E. Prevent surface damage to foundation concrete that will be exposed to view outside of contact area.

3.03 LAYING MASONRY UNITS

A. General:

1. Finish Tolerances (Measured on Interior Surfaces): Meet requirements of “Site Tolerance” requirements of Part 3, Execution, of the MSJC Specifications.

2. Place units with chipped edges or corners such that chipped area is not exposed to view.

B. Wall Units:

1. General: a. If necessary to move a unit after once set in-place, remove from

wall, clean, and set in fresh mortar. b. Toothing of masonry units is not permitted.

2. Running Bond: a. Unless otherwise shown, lay up walls in straight, level, and

uniform courses using a running bond pattern. b. Place units for continuous vertical cells and mortar joints to

prevent materials, such as grout and poured insulation, from escaping from cell being filled to adjacent cells where material is not intended to be placed.



c. Corners: Lay standard masonry bond for overlapping units and grout solid.

d. Intersecting Walls: Half unit appearance shall not extend and be visible on exterior side of intersecting wall. Provide hooked corner bars in bond beam units as shown on Drawings.

3. Special Shapes: a. Provide and place such special units as corner block, doorjamb

block, lintel block fillers, and similar blocks as may be required. b. Use required shapes and sizes to work to corners and openings,

maintaining proper bond throughout wall.

3.04 BUILT-IN ITEMS

A. Position door frames, windows, vents, louvers, and other items to be built in wall, and construct wall around them.

B. Install masonry anchors to secure items to wall.

C. Fill spaces around items with grout except use mortar at mortar joints.

D. Do not place electrical, instrumentation, or water conduits in a cell containing parallel reinforcement, unless approved in writing by Engineer. Additionally, pipes, sleeves, and conduits shall meet requirements of TMS 402/ ACI 530/ ASCE 5, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (MSJC Code) and MSJC specification construction requirements.

3.05 MORTAR JOINTS

A. General:

1. Meet masonry erection requirements of MSJC, Part 3, Execution, Article Laying Masonry Units, Paragraph B.

2. As units are laid, remove excess mortar from grout space of cells to be filled. Final grout space, including any remaining mortar projections, shall be as required by MSJC Table “Grout Space Requirements.”

3. Place mortar before initial setting of cement takes place. Retemper only as required for it to remain plastic. Retempering of colored mortar is not allowed.

4. Remove mortar containing water repellent admixture from face of masonry before it sets.

B. Exposed Joints:

1. Tool joints exposed to view after final construction, unless otherwise noted or shown.



2. Cut joints flush and as mortar takes its initial set; tool to provide a concave joint.

3. Perform tooling with tool that compacts mortar, pressing excess mortar out.

4. Perform tooling when mortar is partially set, but still sufficiently plastic to bond rather than dragging it out.

5. Rake out joints that are not tight at time of tooling, point, and then tool. 6. Rake and tool joints at split-face surfaces, interior and exterior.

C. Concealed Joints: Strike flush with no further treatment required.

3.06 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Preformed Control Joints:

1. Omit mortar from vertical joints. 2. Place in units fabricated to receive rubber control joint material as wall

is built. 3. After wall is grouted, cured, and cleaned, install backing rod and sealant

as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 4. Place and tool sealant to match depth of typical joint.

3.07 REINFORCING

A. Foundation Dowels:

1. Locate first foundation dowel at end of wall in center of first cell; typically 4 inches from end of wall.

2. Locate at each side of control joints and openings and below beam and joist seats, and then locate at maximum required spacing between these bars.

3. Size, number, and location of foundation dowels shall match all typical and additional vertical wall reinforcing, unless otherwise noted.

4. When foundation dowel does not line up with vertical core, do not slope more than 1 horizontal to 6 vertical to bring it into alignment.

B. Vertical Reinforcing:

1. Use deformed bars. 2. Hold in position near ends of bars by wire ties to dowels or by

reinforcing positioners. 3. For high lift grouting, hold in position at maximum intervals of 160-bar

diameters by reinforcing positioners. 4. Lap reinforcing bars as shown or approved. 5. Wire tie splices together.



6. Minimum Bar Clearance: 1/2-inch from masonry for coarse grout, from formed surfaces, and from parallel bars in same grout space.

C. Horizontal Reinforcing:

1. Use deformed bars. 2. Lay on webs of bond beam units and place as wall is built. Increase web

depth to ensure 1/2-inch cover over top of rebar. 3. Lap reinforcing bars where spliced and wire tie together. 4. Minimum Bar Clearance: 1/2 inch from masonry for coarse grout, from

formed surfaces, and from parallel bars in same grout space. 5. Terminate reinforcing bars 2 inches clear from control joints except

horizontal bars at roof and floor courses shall be continuous through joints.

D. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement:

1. Use where indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide in addition to typical, deformed horizontal reinforcing steel. 3. Space maximum 16 inches apart, vertically. 4. Lap ends 16 inches minimum. 5. Terminate reinforcing 2 inches clear from control joints except

reinforcement at roof and floor courses shall be continuous through joints.

6. Use manufactured corner and other wall intersection pieces.

3.08 MORTAR PRODUCTION

A. Mix bulk materials in accordance with MSJC Specification.

B. Mix prebagged materials with water to produce a workable consistency.

C. Remix or retemper to maintain workability. Discard mortar that has begun to stiffen or is not used within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing.

3.09 GROUT PLACEMENT

A. Do not mix, convey, or place with equipment constructed of aluminum.

B. Secure vertical and horizontal reinforcement, ties, bolts, anchors, and other required embedments in place; inspect and verify before placing grout.

C. Grout beams over openings in one continuous operation.



D. Maintain vertical alignment in accordance with ACI 530.1, Table 7:

1. Place grout within 1-1/2 hours of addition of water to mix. 2. Use reinforcing positioners to secure vertical reinforcement.

E. Grouting Requirements:

1. Partial grout all walls as shown. a. Slump: 8 inches to 11 inches. b. Do not start grouting until wall mortar has cured for 24 hours,

minimum. 2. Fully embed horizontal steel with grout in an uninterrupted pour. 3. Do not construct wall more than one course above top of grout pour

prior to placing grout. 4. Partial Grouting Requirements:

a. Fill cells containing reinforcing steel, anchor bolts, and other embedded items as shown with grout.

b. Construct cells to be filled to confine grout within cell. c. Cover tops of unfilled vertical cells under a bond beam with metal

lath to confine grout fill to bond beam section. d. Form horizontal construction joints between pours by stopping

grout pour 1-1/2 inches below a mortar joint, except at a bond beam; stop pour 1/2 inch below top of masonry unit.

F. Partial Grouting with Insulation Fill:

1. Where cells of masonry units are to receive masonry fill insulation in some cells and to receive grout in some cells, provide continuous mortar on block webs on each side of cells to be filled with grout to ensure insulation will not enter grout cells.

2. Where bond beams are required with masonry fill insulation and grout, limit pours to less than 6 feet in height.

G. Vibration:

1. Use internal “pencil” type, low energy vibrator to thoroughly consolidate grout and reduce amount of air voids. Do not use concrete vibrators.

2. After initial water loss and settlement has occurred, but before it has taken any set, reconsolidate grout.

3. Waiting period for reconsolidation will vary depending upon weather conditions and block absorption rates, but under “normal” weather conditions with average masonry units the waiting period should be between 30 minutes and 60 minutes.



H. Cleanouts:

1. Construct in accordance with MSJC specification. 2. Provide for grout pours heights over 5 feet 4 inches in accordance with

the 2015 IBC. 3. Provide of sufficient size to permit cleaning of cell, positioning of

reinforcing, and inspection at bottom of every vertical cell containing reinforcing and maximum of 32 inches on center.

4. Location: Concealed from view after final construction, unless otherwise approved by Engineer.

5. After wall has been inspected and approved and prior to grouting, cap cleanouts in a manner that will seal them from grout leakage and provide a flush finish.

3.10 WATER REPELLENT MASONRY SEALER

A. Remove efflorescence prior to applying water repellents. Dispose of waste generated.

B. Apply to exposed exterior concrete masonry walls.

C. Repoint loose, cracked, or disintegrating mortar at least 7 days prior to application. Ensure joint sealants and caulking are fully cured and wall surfaces are clean, dry, and free of chemical cleaners, efflorescence, dirt, oils, mortar smears, and other surface contaminants.

D. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for weather conditions during application.

E. Test a 5-foot by 5-foot wall area to ensure proper coverage, and desired surface appearance when sealer is fully dried.

F. Apply with spray, brush, or roller following manufacturer’s recommendations, at a coverage rate of 50 square feet to 150 square feet per gallon, as determined by testing. Use two-coat application where recommended by manufacturer.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner-Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.



B. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control: Inspection and testing as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control.

C. Masonry shall be tested by testing agency retained by Owner.

D. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of masonry prisms, mortar samples, and grout samples, as applicable, onsite for first 24 hours, and for additional time as may be required before transporting to test lab.

E. Masonry Testing:

1. Masonry strength shall be determined using unit strength method as shown.

2. Masonry test prisms, when required or desired, shall be constructed onsite with same materials and workmanship to be used for Project and in accordance with ASTM C1314. Method and frequency of prism testing shall be as shown on the Special Inspection and Testing Plan.

3. Unit Strength Method: a. Method and frequency for mortar, grout, and masonry unit

sampling and testing shall be as shown. b. Provide masonry units for test samples required.

F. Corrective Action:

1. If compressive strength tests made prior to construction of permanent structure fail to meet Specifications, adjustments shall be made to mix designs for mortar, or grout, or both, as needed to produce specified strength.

2. If strength tests performed on materials representative of in-place construction fail to meet Specifications, prisms or cores shall be cut from constructed walls in sufficient locations to adequately determine strength in accordance with MSJC.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of grouting, clean masonry surfaces of excess mortar, grout spillage, scum, stains, dirt, and other foreign substances using clean water and fiber brushes.

B. Clean walls not requiring painting or sealing so there are no visible stains.

3.13 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Do not allow grout and mortar stains to dry on face of exposed masonry.



B. Protect tops of walls at all times. Cover tops of walls with waterproof paper when rain or snow is imminent and when the Work is discontinued.

C. Adequately brace walls until walls and roof are completed.

D. Provide sufficient bracing to protect walls against damage from elements, including wind and snow.

E. Protect masonry against freezing for minimum 72 hours after being laid.

F. Protect masonry from damage until final acceptance of the Work. Damaged units will not be accepted.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 GLASS UNIT MASONRY JANUARY 2020 04 23 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 04 23 00 GLASS UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. b. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. c. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime For Masonry

Purposes. d. C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s technical data for aluminum framed glass block, cementitious materials, reinforcements, anchors, fasteners, waterproofing admixtures for mortar, and glass unit masonry accessories.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings clearly showing sections of glass block panels with all connections, joinery techniques, and profiles. Identify all materials, including alloys and fasteners. Locate and identify shop and field sealants on drawing and show adjacent structural elements.

3. Samples: Glass block for each form, pattern, and color.


A. Store unopened cartons of glass block in a clean, cool, dry area.

B. Protect glass block, aggregate, cementitious materials and metal accessories during storage and construction from damage, soiling, moisture, and deterioration.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Temperature Limitations: Do not install glass unit masonry when atmospheric temperature is 40 degrees F and below.


GLASS UNIT MASONRY PW\DEN003\708335 04 23 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence and coordinate completion of glass unit masonry so that sealants and joint fillers can be installed immediately after mortar has attained final set.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. Hollow Glass Block: a. Circle Redmont Corp. b. Seves Glass Block. c. Solaris Glass Blocks.

2.02 GLASS BLOCK

A. Hollow Glass Block: Nonloadbearing blocks made by fusing together two halves of clear, colorless pressed glass to produce a partial vacuum; with manufacturer’s standard coating factory applied on edge surfaces.

1. Translucent Patterns: Smooth outer faces, inner faces with light diffusive wavy design.

2. Edge Coating Color: Manufacturer’s standard white color. 3. Square Unit Sizes: 3-7/8 inches thick by 7-3/4 inches square.

2.03 PANELS

A. Panels: Factory prefabricated panels consisting of sealed glass blocks installed in structural aluminum grids. Glass block units shall be initially factory installed and insulated in respective cell openings of structural metal grids using manufacturer’s standard thermofil. Panels shall be weather sealed on their top surfaces with manufacturer’s standard sealant.

B. Maintain the visual design concept shown, including profile and alignment of components.

C. Factory assemble each panel in the manufacturing facility employing qualified personnel solely engaged in prefabricated panel production.

D. Fit joints accurately in exposed metal work, secure rigidly.



E. Fabricate and fasten metal work so that the work will not be distorted nor the fasteners over stressed from expansion and contraction.

F. Grind exposed welds and finish to blend with adjacent metal.

2.04 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.

1. Cement Color: Color pigmented, factory prepackaged standard product consisting of gray cement combined with color fast mineral pigments.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.

1. Joints 1/4 inch or less in thickness furnish aggregate graded for thin joints.

2. Joints of hollow glass block with solar reflective pattern, furnish aggregate free of iron compounds.

D. Water: Potable, free of substances capable of having a deleterious effect on mortar or glass unit masonry.

E. Water Repellent Admixture: Manufacturer’s standard dry mixture of stearic water repellent compounds, water reducing agents and fine aggregates intended to reduce capillarity in mortar.

2.05 MORTAR MIXES

A. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. Do not use calcium chloride.

B. Mortar for Glass Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, proportion specification, for Type S portland cement lime mortar.

1. Exterior panel mortar, include waterproofing admixture in mortar mix in accordance with directions of admixture manufacturer.

C. Mix mortar in a mechanical batch mixer to produce a stiff but workable consistency which is drier than mortar for ordinary unit masonry; do not retemper mortar after it has taken its initial set.


GLASS UNIT MASONRY PW\DEN003\708335 04 23 00 - 4 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine sills, jambs, and heads surrounding glass unit masonry panels to verify that they are complete and of correct size and location to receive glass unit masonry.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate and set panels into prepared openings and shall bear fully along all supported edges on structural framing supports. Top of panels shall finish flush with adjoining surfaces unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Where necessary, build up support ledges and beams as required with materials similar to support framing members, prior to placement of panels. Panels shall be set to proper pitch (minimum 1/4 pf) and cross falls to ensure proper drainage of surface water and avoid ponding. Fasten panels as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Allow 1/2-inch spacing between panels and adjacent surfaces and between adjoining panels to permit installation of closed cell foam backer rods and sealants. All joints that are exposed to the weather and to surface traffic shall be sealed with manufacturer’s recommended sealant.

C. Protect installed panels from damage during ensuing construction operations. Prior to date of substantial completion replace any cracked, broken or otherwise damaged glazing units.

3.03 PAINTING

A. All interior surfaces of the prefabricated metal grid that are exposed to view shall be finished after installation in accordance with the requirements with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. Care shall be taken so that the coating will not extend onto the glazing units. If spray application is used, mask all glazing.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove surplus mortar from the faces of the glass block at the time joints are struck or tooled. Remove mortar while it is still plastic using a clean, wet sponge or an ordinary household scrub brush having stiff fiber bristles. Do not use harsh cleaners, acids, abrasives, or alkaline materials while cleaning glass block surfaces.



B. Final mortar removal is accomplished with a clean, wet sponge or cloth. Rinse sponge or cloth frequently in clean water to remove abrasive particles. Allow any remaining film on the block to dry to a powder.

C. After sealants and caulking have been applied, remove excess caulking with commercial solvents such as xylene, toluene, mineral spirits, or naphtha and follow with normal wash and rinse. Ensure not to damage caulking by over generous application of strong solvents. Comply with solvent manufacturers’ directions on label for toxicity and flammability warnings.

D. Exercise special care when cleaning solar reflective glass block. It is possible to scratch the oxide coating. Fingerprints, grease stains, dirt, scum, sealant residue, scratches, and abrasion are more noticeable on solar reflective glass block than on nonreflective glass block.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS JANUARY 2020 05 05 19- 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 05 05 19 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. b. 355.2, Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in

Concrete. c. 355.4, Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in

Concrete. 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Stainless Steel Type 316. 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A123/A123M, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

b. A143, Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement.

c. A153/A153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

d. A193/A193M, Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service.

e. A194/A194M, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both.

f. A380, Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.

g. A385, Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip).

h. A563, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. i. A780, Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of

Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. j. A967, Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for

Stainless Steel Parts. k. E488, Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete

Elements. l. F436, Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. m. F468, Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and

Studs for General Use.


POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS PW\DEN003\708335 05 05 19- 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

n. F568M, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners.

o. F593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.

p. F594, Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. q. F1554, Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi

Yield Strength. 5. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

Uniform ES (IAPMO-UES): Evaluation Reports for Concrete and Masonry Anchors.

6. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES): a. Evaluation Reports for Concrete and Masonry Anchors. b. AC01, Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry

Elements. c. AC70, Acceptance Criteria for Fasteners Power-driven into

Concrete, Steel and Masonry Elements. d. AC106, Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw

Anchors) in Masonry Elements. e. AC193, Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete

Elements. f. AC308, Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors

in Concrete Elements. Evaluation Reports for Concrete and Masonry Anchors.

7. Specialty Steel Industry of North America (SSINA): a. Specifications for Stainless Steel. b. Design Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Stainless Steel. c. Stainless Steel Fabrication. d. Stainless Steel Fasteners.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Corrosive Area: Containment area or area exposed to delivery, storage, transfer, or use of chemicals.

B. Exterior Area: Location not protected from weather by a building or other enclosed structure to include buried roof structures.

C. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is not subject to liquid spills or wash down, and where wall or roof slab is not common to a water-holding or earth-retaining structure.



D. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or wash down, or where wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining structure.

E. Submerged: Location at or below top of wall of open water-holding structure, such as a basin or channel, or wall, ceiling, or floor surface inside a covered water-holding structure, or exterior belowgrade wall or roof surface of water-holding structure, open or covered.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Specific instructions for concrete anchor installation, including drilled hole size and depth, preparation, placement, procedures, and instructions for safe handling of anchoring systems.


1. Concrete and Masonry Anchors: a. Manufacturer’s product description and installation instructions. b. Current ICC-ES or IAPMO-UES Report for each type of post-

installed anchor to be used. c. Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification.

2. Passivation method for stainless steel members.


A. Qualifications:

1. Installers of adhesive anchors horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads shall be certified by an applicable certification program. Certification shall include written and performance tests in accordance with the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Installer Certification Program or equivalent.

2. Galvanized Coating Applicator: Company specializing in hot-dip galvanizing after fabrication and following procedures of Quality Assurance Manual of the American Galvanizers Association.


A. Package stainless steel items in a manner to provide protection from carbon impregnation.



B. Protect hot-dip galvanized finishes from damage as a result of metal banding and rough handling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated, meet the following requirements:

Item ASTM Reference

Stainless Steel:

Threaded Rods F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW

Nuts* F594, AISI Type 316, Condition CW

Carbon Steel:

Threaded Rods F1554, Grade 36 or F568M Class 5.8 A193/ A193M, Grade B7

Flat and Beveled Washers (Hardened)

F436

Nuts* A194/A194M, Grade 2H

Galvanized Steel:

All A153/A153M

*Nuts of other grades and styles having specified proof load stresses greater than specified grade and style are also suitable. Nuts must have specified proof load stresses equal to or greater than minimum tensile strength of specified threaded rod.

B. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, and zinc-plated steel material types as indicated in Fastener Schedule at end of this section.

2.02 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS

A. General:

1. AISI Type 316 stainless, hot-dip galvanized or zinc-plated steel, as shown in Fastener Schedule at end of this section.

2. Post-installed anchor systems used in concrete shall be approved by ICC Evaluation Services Report or equivalent for use in cracked concrete and for short-term and long-term loads including wind and earthquake.



3. Mechanical Anchors: Comply with the requirements of ICC-ES AC193 or ACI 355.2.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Comply with the requirements of ICC-ES AC308 or ACI 355.4.

B. Torque-Controlled Expansion Anchors (Wedge Anchors):

1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik-Bolt –TZ (KB-TZ) Anchors

(ESR-1917). b. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY; Power-Stud +SD1,

+SD2, +SD4, or +SD6 Anchors (ESR-2502 and ESR-2818). c. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Strong-Bolt 2

Anchors (ESR-1771 and ESR-3037).

C. Self-Tapping Concrete Screw Anchors:

1. Manufacturers and Products: a. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY; Wedge-Bolt+

(ESR-2526). b. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY; Vertigo+ Rod Hanger

Screw Anchor (ESR-2989). c. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY; Snake+ Flush Mount

Screw Anchor (ESR-2272). d. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HUS-EZ Screw Anchor (ESR-3027). e. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Titen HD Screw

Anchor (ESR-2713).

D. Adhesive Anchors:

1. Threaded Rod: a. Diameter as shown on Drawings. b. Length as required to provide minimum depth of embedment

indicated and thread projection required. c. Clean and free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material.

2. Adhesive: a. Two-component, insensitive to moisture, designed to be used in

adverse freeze/thaw environments. b. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for

intended use and anticipated environmental conditions. 3. Packaging and Storage:

a. Disposable, self-contained system capable of dispensing both components in proper mixing ratio and fitting into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun.



b. Store adhesive on pallets or shelving in a covered storage area. c. Package Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name,

batch number, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions.

d. Dispose of When: 1) Shelf life has expired. 2) Stored other than in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. 4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT Doweling Anchor System, HIT-RE 500 V3 (ESR-3814), or HIT-HY 200 (ESR-3187).

b. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; SET-3G Epoxy Adhesive Anchors (ESR-4057), or AT-XP Adhesive Anchors (IAPMO UES-263).

c. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster NY; Pure 110+ Epoxy adhesive anchor system (ESR-3298).

E. Adhesive Threaded Inserts:

1. Type 316 stainless steel, internally threaded inserts. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIS-RN Insert with

HIT-RE 500-V3 or HIT-HY 200 adhesive.

2.03 POST-INSTALLED MASONRY ANCHORS

A. General: AISI Type 316 stainless, hot-dip galvanized, or zinc-plated steel, as shown in Fastener Schedule at end of section.

B. Current ICC Evaluation Report indicating acceptance for anchors at structural applications in masonry.


1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik-Bolt-3 (KB-3) (ESR-1385), for grout-filled masonry, HIT-HY 270 (ESR-4143) for grout filled CMU, hollow CMU, or unreinforced masonry.

2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Strong-Bolt 2 (IAPMO ER 240) for grout filled CMU, Titen-HD (ESR-1056) for grout filled or hollow CMU, AT-XP (IAPMO ER-281) for grout filled CMU.

3. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster NY; Power-Stud+ SD1 (ESR-2966) for grout-filled masonry, Wedgebolt+ (ESR-1678) for grout-filled masonry.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS

A. Begin installation only after concrete or masonry to receive anchors has attained design strength.

B. Locate existing reinforcing with Ground Penetrating Radar or other method approved by Engineer prior to drilling. Coordinate with Engineer to adjust anchor locations where installation would result in hitting reinforcing.

C. Install in accordance with written manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Provide minimum embedment, edge distance, and spacing as indicated on Drawings.

E. Use only drill type and bit type and diameter recommended by anchor manufacturer.

F. Clean hole of debris and dust per manufacturer’s requirements.

G. When unidentified embedded steel, rebar, or other obstruction is encountered in drill path, slant drill to clear obstruction. If drill must be slanted more than indicated in manufacturer’s installation instructions to clear obstruction, notify Engineer for direction on how to proceed.

H. Adhesive Anchors:

1. Unless otherwise approved by Engineer and adhesive manufacturer: a. Do not install adhesive anchors when temperature of concrete or

masonry is below 40 degrees F or above 100 degrees F. b. Do not install prior to concrete attaining an age of 21 days. c. Remove any standing water from hole with oil-free compressed

air. Inside surface of hole shall be dry. d. Do not disturb anchor during recommended curing time. e. Do not exceed maximum torque as specified in manufacturer’s

instructions. 2. For hollow-unit masonry, install screen tube in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions.

I. Prestressed Concrete: Do not use drilled-in anchors in prestressed or post-tensioned concrete members without Engineer’s prior approval unless specifically shown on Drawings.



3.02 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner-Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

B. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control: Inspection and testing as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control.

3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Adhesive Anchors: Conduct Site training of installation personnel for proper installation, handling, and storage of adhesive anchor system. Notify Engineer of time and place for sessions.

3.04 FASTENER SCHEDULE

A. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, provide fasteners as follows:

Service Use and Location Product Remarks

1. Post-Installed Anchors for Metal Components to Cast-in-Place Concrete (such as, Ladders, Handrail Posts, Electrical Panels, Platforms, and Equipment)

Interior Dry Areas Anchor material type to match material being anchored (for example, stainless steel anchors to anchor stainless steel equipment, galvanized anchors to anchor painted or galvanized equipment).

Verify product acceptability and manufacturer’s requirements if anchor installation will occur in an overhead application.

Submerged, Exterior, Interior Wet, and Corrosive Areas

Stainless steel adhesive anchors

Verify product acceptability and manufacturer’s requirements if anchor installation will occur in an overhead application.

2. Anchors in Grout-Filled Concrete Masonry Units

Interior Dry Areas Anchor material type to match material being anchored.

Exterior, Interior Wet, and Corrosive Areas

Stainless steel anchors



Service Use and Location Product Remarks

3. Anchors in Hollow Concrete Masonry Units

Interior Dry Areas Anchor material type to match material being anchored.

Adhesive anchors shall be installed with screen tubes.

Exterior, Interior Wet, and Corrosive Areas

Stainless steel anchors Adhesive anchors shall be installed with screen tubes.

4. All Others

All service uses and locations

Stainless steel fasteners

B. Antiseizing Lubricant: Use on all stainless steel threads.

C. Do not use adhesive anchors to support fire-resistive construction or where ambient temperature will exceed 120 degrees F.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 WELDING JANUARY 2020 05 05 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 05 05 23 WELDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:

1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. BPVC SEC V, Nondestructive Examination. b. BPVC SEC IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

2. American Society of Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): SNT-TC-1A, Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing.

3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and

Nondestructive Examination. b. A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions. c. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. d. D1.8/D1.8M, Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement. e. D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. f. D1.3/1.3M, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. g. D1.4/D1.4M, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. h. D1.6/D1.6M, Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel. i. QC1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors.

4. ASTM International (ASTM): A370, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. CJP: Complete Joint Penetration.

B. CWI: Certified Welding Inspector.

1. Contractor’s Welding Inspector: Contractor’s CWI acts for, and on behalf of, the Contractor for all inspection and quality matters within the scope of the Contract Documents. Contractor is required to provide a welding inspector to oversee welding operations and be responsible for visual inspection and necessary correction of all deficiencies in materials and workmanship required to meet referenced welding codes. This type of Quality Control Inspection is not classified as Special Inspection.


WELDING PW\DEN003\708335 05 05 23 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2. Verification Inspector: CWI who acts on behalf of the Owner. This type of independent inspection and testing is the prerogative of the Owner, who may perform this function, or waive independent verification inspection if it is not required by the building official and building code.

C. MT: Magnetic Particle Testing.

D. NDE: Nondestructive Examination.

E. NDT: Nondestructive Testing.

F. PJP: Partial Joint Penetration.

G. PQR: Procedure Qualification Record.

H. PT: Liquid Penetrant Testing.

I. Special Inspection: Non-destructive examination exclusive of VT. Special inspection includes NDE such as MT, PT, UT, RT and Verification Inspection. Special Inspection personnel report to, and are retained by the Owner. See additional requirements in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

J. RT: Radiographic Testing.

K. UT: Ultrasonic Testing.

L. VT: Visual Inspection/Testing.

M. WPQ: Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification Record.

N. WPS: Welding Procedure Specification.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Shop and field WPSs and PQRs. b. NDT procedure specifications prepared in accordance with ASME

BPVC SEC V. c. Welding Data (Shop and Field): Submit welding data together

with Shop Drawings as a complete package. 1) Show on Shop Drawings, or on a weld map, complete

information regarding base metal specification designation, location, type, size, and extent of welds with reference



called out for WPS and NDE numbers in tails of combined welding and NDE symbols as indicated in AWS A2.4.

2) Clearly distinguish between shop and field welds. 3) Indicate, by welding symbols or sketches, details of welded

joints and preparation of base metal. Provide complete joint welding details showing bevels, groove angles, and root openings for welds.

4) Welding and NDE Symbols: In accordance with AWS A2.4. 5) Welding Terms and Definitions: In accordance with

AWS A3.0.


1. WPQs. 2. CWI credentials. 3. Testing agency personnel credentials. 4. CWI visual inspection (VT) reports. 5. Welding Documentation: Submit on forms in referenced welding codes.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. WPSs: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex M Forms) for shop or field welding; or ASME BPVC SEC IX (Forms QW-482 and QW-483) for shop welding only.

B. WPQs: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex M Forms); or ASME BPVC SEC IX (Form QW-484).

C. CWI: Certified in accordance with AWS QC1, and having prior experience with specified welding codes. Alternate welding inspector qualifications require prior approval by Engineer.

D. Testing Agency: Personnel performing tests shall be NDT Level II certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A.


A. Unless otherwise specified, Submittals required in this section shall be submitted and approved prior to commencement of welding operations.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor’s CWI shall be present whenever shop welding is performed. CWI shall perform inspection at suitable intervals, prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in AWS D1.1/D1.1M or referenced welding code and as follows:

1. Verifying conformance of specified job material and proper storage. 2. Monitoring conformance with approved WPS. 3. Monitoring conformance of WPQ. 4. Inspecting weld joint fit-up and performing in-process inspection. 5. Providing 100 percent visual inspection of welds. 6. Coordinating with nondestructive testing personnel and reviewing NDE

test results. 7. Maintaining records and preparing reports documenting that results of

CWI VT and subsequent NDE testing comply with the Work and referenced welding codes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Welding and Fabrication by Welding: Conform to governing welding codes referenced in attached Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table.

3.02 NONDESTRUCTIVE WELD TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Quality Control Inspection:

1. All Welds: 100 percent VT by Contractor’s CWI. 2. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Structural Pipe and Tubing: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 9.25. b. All Other Structural Steel: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.9,

Visual Inspection, Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. c. Stud Connections: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 7.8.1.



B. Nondestructive Testing Requirements:

1. NDT frequency shall be as specified below, as required by referenced welding codes, or as specified in the attached table. In case there is a conflict, the higher frequency level of NDT shall apply. a. Nontubular Connections:

1) CJP Butt Joint Groove Welds: 10 percent random RT. Use UT for CJP butt joint groove welds that cannot be readily radiographed.

2) All Other CJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random UT. 3) Fillet Welds and PJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random PT

or MT. b. Tubular Connections:

1) CJP Butt Joint Groove Welds made from One Side without Backing: 100 percent RT or UT in accordance with AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, Paragraph 9.26.2 requirements.

2) CJP Butt Joint Groove Welds made without Backing or Back-gouging: 10 percent random RT. Use UT for CJP butt joint groove welds that cannot be readily radiographed.

3) All Other CJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random UT. 4) Fillet Welds and PJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random PT

or MT. 2. NDT Procedures and Acceptance Criteria:

a. Nontubular Connections: 1) RT: Perform in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

Clause 6, Part E. Acceptance criteria per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.12.1.

2) UT: Perform in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Clause 6, Part F. Acceptance criteria per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.13.1.

3) PT and MT: a) Perform on fillet and PJP groove welds in accordance

with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.14.4 and Paragraph 6.14.5.

b) Acceptance criteria per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.9, Visual Inspection, Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections.

b. Tubular Connections: 1) RT: Comply with requirements for Nontubular Connections

and additional requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Clause 9, Paragraph 9.28 and Paragraph 9.29.

2) UT: Comply with requirements for Nontubular Connections and additional requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Clause 9, Paragraph 9.27.



3) PT and MT: a) Perform on fillet and PJP groove welds in accordance

with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.14.4 and Paragraph 6.14.5.

b) Acceptance criteria per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 9.25.


A. Contractor’s CWI shall be present whenever field welding is performed. CWI shall perform inspection, at suitable intervals, prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in AWS D1.1/D1.1M or referenced welding code and as follows:

1. Verify conformance of specified job material and proper storage. 2. Monitor conformance with approved WPS. 3. Monitor conformance of WPQ. 4. Inspect weld joint fit-up and perform in-process inspection. 5. Provide 100 percent visual inspection of all welds in accordance with

Subparagraph Quality Control Inspection. 6. Supervise nondestructive testing personnel and evaluating test results. 7. Maintain records and prepare report confirming results of inspection and

testing comply with the Work.

3.04 WELD DEFECT REPAIR

A. Repair and retest rejectable weld defects until sound weld metal has been deposited in accordance with appropriate welding codes.

3.05 SUPPLEMENT

A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this specification.

1. Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 WELDING JANUARY 2020 05 05 23 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

WELDING AND NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING

Specification Section

Governing Welding Codes or Standards

Submit WPS

Submit WPQ

Onsite CWI

Req’d

Submit Written NDT

Procedure Specifications NDT Requirements

03 21 00 Steel Reinforcement

AWS D1.4/D1.4M, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel

Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT and 100% MT of all rebar splices; also see Section 03 21 00

05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel

Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT and 10% UT or RT of all groove-and-butt joint welds; 10% MT of all fillet welds; also see Section 05 12 00

05 31 00 Steel Decking

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel or AWS D1.3/D1.3M, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

Yes Yes Yes No 100% VT; also see Section 05 31 00

05 41 00 Structural Metal Stud Framing

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel or AWS D1.3/1.3M, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

No No Yes No 100% VT; also see Section 05 41 00

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code–Steel or AWS D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum or AWS D1.6/D1.6M, Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel

Yes Yes Yes No 100% VT; also see Section 05 50 00

05 52 16 Aluminum Railings

AWS D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum

No No No No 100% VT; also see Section 05 52 16, Aluminum Railings

05 53 00 Metal Gratings

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel or AWS D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum

No No No No 100% VT; also see Section 05 53 00


PW\DEN003\708335 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING JANUARY 2020 05 12 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Galvanizers Association (AGA): Quality Assurance Manual. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

a. 201, Certification Program for Structural Steel Fabricators. b. 206, Certification Program for Structural Steel Erectors—

Standard for Structural Steel Erectors. c. 303, Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges. d. 325, Steel Construction Manual. e. 326, Detailing for Steel Construction. f. 341, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. g. 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. h. 420, Certification Standard for Shop Application of Complex

Protective Coating Systems. 3. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code—Steel. b. D1.8/D1.8M, Structural Welding Code—Seismic Supplement.

4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A6/A6M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for

Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. b. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. c. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and

Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. d. A123/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. e. A143/A143M, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against

Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement.

f. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

g. A384/A384M, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies.

h. A385/A385M, Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip).


STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PW\DEN003\708335 05 12 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

i. A500/A500M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

j. A563, Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts. k. A572/A572M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low

Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. l. A780/A780M, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and

Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. m. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. n. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically

Deposited on Iron and Steel. o. A1085/A1085M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded

Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS). p. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. q. F959, Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type

Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. r. F1136, Standard Specification for Zinc/Aluminum Corrosion

Protective Coatings for Fasteners. s. F3125, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts,

Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions.

5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): Specification for

Structural Joints using High-Strength Bolts.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Provide Shop Drawing details showing: a. Erection plans. b. Members, including piece numbers, sizes, grades, dimensions,

cambers, and connection details. c. Anchor bolt layouts. d. Hardened washer details. e. Connection material specifications. f. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts. g. Joint details for complete penetration welds. h. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between

shop and field welds and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.



2. Product specifications, including primer and other coatings. 3. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high strength bolted connections. 4. Weld access hole dimensions, surface profile, and finish requirements. 5. Nondestructive testing (NDT) where performed by the fabricator. 6. Welding requirements as specified in AISC 341 Appendix W,

Section W2.2 or AWS D1.8/D1.8M.


1. Name and address of manufacturer(s). 2. Mill Certificates of tests made in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M. 3. Manufacturers’ testing procedures and standards. 4. Preparation and installation or application instructions, as appropriate. 5. Proposed method to resolve misalignment between anchor bolts and bolt

holes in steel members. 6. High-Strength Bolts:

a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, that products meet specified chemical and mechanical requirements.

b. Manufacturer’s inspection test report results for production lot(s) furnished to include: 1) Tensile strength. 2) Yield strength. 3) Reduction of area. 4) Elongation and hardness.

c. Certified Mill Test Reports for Bolts and Nuts: 1) Name and address of manufacturer. 2) Bolts correctly marked. 3) Marked bolts and nuts used in required mill tests and

manufacturer’s inspection tests. 7. Direct Tension Indicators (DTIs): Manufacturer’s test report meeting

requirements of ASTM F959. 8. Twist-Off-Type Tension-Control (TC) Bolts: Manufacturer’s test report

meeting requirements of ASTM F3125, Grade F1852 or F2280. 9. Welding Procedures, Qualifications, and Inspection Reports: As

specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 10. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Certificate of compliance signed by galvanizer

with description of material processed and ASTM standard used for coating.

11. AISC Quality Certification: AISC certificate showing name and address of certified firm, effective date, and category of certification; or, for erectors, documentation of similar project experience to include project name, location, date of completion, and name and phone number of Owner’s contact person.



12. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) report.


A. Qualifications:

1. Welding qualifications as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Galvanized Coating Applicator: Company specializing in hot-dip

galvanizing after fabrication and following procedures of AGA’s Quality Assurance Manual.

B. Certifications:

1. Mill identification marks, heat number, size of section, and length in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M.

2. AISC Quality Certification for Fabricator: A fabricator who participates in the AISC Certification program and is designated an AISC certified plant, Category STD.


A. Delivery: Load structural members in such a manner that they will be transported and unloaded without damage to coatings and without being excessively stressed, deformed, or otherwise damaged.

B. Storage:

1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Store in a dry area and keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. a. Do not store materials in a manner that might cause distortion,

damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials as directed.

2. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer’s labels intact. a. Fasteners may be repackaged provided testing and inspecting

agency observes repackaging and sealing of containers. b. Clean and lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before

use. c. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations for

cleaning and lubricating fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.



C. Handle materials to avoid distortion or damage to members or supporting structures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Rolled Plates, Shapes except W-Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M or A572/ A572M, Grade 50, unless indicated otherwise.

B. W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.

D. Round Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B or Grade C.

E. Square and Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): ASTM A500/ A500M, Grade B or Grade C.

F. For hot-dip galvanized steel that is exposed to view and does not receive paint, limit combined phosphorus and silicon content to 0.04 percent. For steels that require a minimum of 0.15 percent silicon, such as plates over 1.5 inches thick for ASTM A36/A36M and ASTM A572/A572M steels, limit maximum silicon content to 0.21 percent and phosphorous content to 0.03 percent.

2.02 FASTENERS

A. Anchor Bolts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: As specified in Section 05 05 19, Post-Installed Anchors.

C. High-Strength Bolts:

1. ASTM F3125, Grade A325, Type 1, or Grade A490, bolt Type 1. 2. Bolt Length and Thread Length: As required for connection type shown,

with hardened washers as required.

D. Direct Tension Indicators (DTIs) or Load Indicator Washers:

1. ASTM F959, coating type to match bolt finish. 2. Type A325 or A490, to match bolt type.



3. Manufacturers and Products: a. TurnaSure LLC, Langhorne, PA; DTIs. b. Applied Bolting Technology Products, Ludlow, VT; DTIs, regular

or Squirter type.

E. Twist-Off-Type Tension-Control (TC) Bolts:

1. High-strength, ASTM F3125, Grade 1852, bolt Type 1, mechanically galvanized.

2. Manufacturers: a. LeJeune Bolt Company, Burnsville, MN. b. Nucor Fastener, Saint Joe, IN. c. Haydon Bolts, Philadelphia, PA. d. Vermont Fasteners Manufacturing, Swanton, VT.

F. Nuts: ASTM A563, type to match bolt type and finish.

G. Hardened Steel Flat and Beveled Washers: ASTM F436, type to match bolt finish.

2.03 ANCILLARY MATERIALS

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

B. Grout: As specified in Section 03 62 00, Grouting.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Fabricate as shown and in accordance with AISC 360 and AISC 303. 2. Columns: Full-length members without splices, unless shown otherwise

or approved by Engineer. 3. Mark and match mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete assembly, including bolting and welding of units, before start

of finishing operations. 5. Fabricate to agree with field measurements. 6. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 7. Fillet re-entrant cuts and corners to radius of not less than 1/2 inch. 8. Sheared and flame-cut edges shall be free from rough corners and

projections.



B. Connections:

1. Shop Connections: Weld or bolt as shown on Drawings. 2. Meet requirements of AISC 325 for bolted double-angle shear

connections, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Meet OSHA requirements for one independent bolt at beams framing in

to column web connections. 4. Provide oversized holes for anchor bolts in column baseplate in

accordance with AISC 325, unless indicated otherwise. 5. Double Angle Connections:

a. All bolts for double angle splices and connections shall be Pretensioned with Twist-Off-Type Tension-Control bolts.

b. Locate single bolt centered on angle leg at a minimum of two locations at 1/3 points along angle length between end connections. Provide minimum 3/8-inch by 4-inch square plate between angles centered on bolt.

C. Welded Construction:

1. As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Groove and Butt Joint Welds: Complete penetration, unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Interface with Other Work:

1. Holes: a. As necessary or as indicated for securing other Work to structural

steel framing, and for passage of other Work through steel framing members shall be approved by Engineer.

b. No flame-cut holes are permitted without prior approval of Engineer.

2. Weld threaded nuts to framing members, and other specialty items to receive other Work.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Shop Paint Primer:

1. Surface Preparation and painting as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

2. Do not shop prime the following surfaces, unless indicated otherwise: a. Within 2 inches of field-welded connections. b. Steel members to be completely encased in reinforced concrete or

coated with cementitious fireproofing.



c. Faying surfaces of slip critical bolted connections and bolted connections in Seismic Force Resisting Systems.

3. Apply shop primer to top flange surfaces of composite steel beams, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Galvanizing:

1. Fabricate steel to be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A143/ A143M, ASTM A384/A384M, and ASTM A385/A385M. Avoid fabrication techniques that could cause distortion or embrittlement of steel.

2. Remove welding slag, splatter, burrs, grease, oil, paint, lacquer, and other deleterious material prior to delivery for galvanizing.

3. Remove, by blast cleaning or other methods, surface contaminants and coatings not removable by normal chemical cleaning process in galvanizing operation.

4. Hot-dip galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.

5. Hot-dip galvanize Grade A325 bolts, nuts, washers, and hardware components in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Oversize holes to allow for zinc alloy growth. Shop-assemble bolts, nuts, and washers with special lubricant and test in accordance with ASTM A325 and ASTM A563.

6. Mechanically zinc coat Grade F1852 twist-of-type tension-control (TC) bolts, nuts, and washers in accordance with ASTM F3125 and ASTM B695, Class 50.

7. Galvanize components of bolted assemblies separately before assembly.


A. Welding:

1. Contractor’s Certified Welding Inspector (CWI): Inspect and test fabrication welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.

2. Visually inspect fabrication welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria.

3. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform the inspection and testing of fabrication welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.

4. Repair and retest defective welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.



B. Hot-Dip Galvanizing:

1. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to inspect and test hot-dip galvanized fabricated in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M and ASTM A153/A153M.

2. Visually inspect and test for thickness and adhesion of zinc coating for minimum of three test samples from each lot in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M and ASTM A153/A153M.

3. Reject and retest nonconforming articles in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M and ASTM A153/A153M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION

A. General:

1. Meet requirements of AISC 360 and AISC 303, with exceptions as specified.

2. Install Contractor-designed temporary construction bracing to provide necessary support until components are in place and construction is complete.

3. Provide additional field connection material as required by AISC 303. 4. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on Shop Drawings.

B. Field Assembly:

1. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly.

2. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations shown. 3. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or

structure before permanently fastening. 4. Level and plumb individual members of structure within tolerances

shown in AISC 303. 5. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean

operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be completed and in service.

6. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for minor discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

C. Setting Baseplates and Bearing Plates:

1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces.



2. Clean bottom surface of baseplates and bearing plates. 3. Set loose and attached baseplates and bearing plates for structural

members on wedges, shims, leveling nuts, or other adjustable devices. Use leveling plates where indicated.

4. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to placing grout. Weld plate washer to baseplate where indicated.

5. Grout Under Baseplate: As specified in Section 03 62 00, Grouting, prior to placing loads on structure.

D. Anchor Bolts:

1. Coordinate installation of anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to in-place work.

2. Provide templates and other devices for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations.

3. Projection of anchor bolts beyond face of concrete and threaded length shall be adequate to allow for full engagement of threads of hold-down nuts, adjustment of leveling nuts, washer thicknesses, and construction tolerances, unless indicated otherwise.

4. Placement Tolerances: a. As required by AISC 303, unless indicated otherwise. b. Embedded anchor bolts shall not vary from dimensions shown on

Drawings by more than the following: 1) Center-to-Center of Any Two Bolts Within an Anchor

Group: 1/8 inch. 2) Center-to-Center of Adjacent Anchor Bolt Groups: 1/4 inch. 3) Variation from Perpendicular to Theoretical Bearing

Surface: 1:50.

E. Connections:

1. High-Strength Bolted: a. Tighten in accordance with RCSC Specification for Structural

Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. b. Pretension all bolts unless noted otherwise on Drawings. c. Hardened Washers:

1) Provide at locations required by Washer Requirements section of RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts, to include pretensioned and slip critical connections using slotted or oversized holes or Grade A490 bolts.



2) Use beveled style and extra thickness where required by RCSC Specification.

3) Use square or rectangular beveled washers at inner flange surfaces of American Standard beams and channels.

4) Do not substitute DTIs for hardened flat washers required at slotted and oversize holes.

d. For snug-tightened connections (N, X), tighten to snug tight condition. Use hardened washer over slotted or oversize holes in outer plies.

2. Pretensioned Bolted: a. Use DTIs or twist-off-type tension-control (TC) bolts at slip

critical (SC) and pretensioned bearing-type connections. b. DTIs:

1) Position within bolted assembly in accordance with ASTM F959.

2) Install bolts, with DTIs plus hardened washers as required, in holes of assembly and tighten until plies are in firm contact and fasteners are uniformly snug tight.

c. Final tightening bolts begin at most rigid part of bolted connection and progress toward free edges until final twist-off-type tension-control (TC) bolts or until DTIs have been compressed to an average gap equal to or less than shown in ASTM F959, Table 2.

3. Welded: a. As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. b. Groove and Butt Joint Welds: Complete penetration, unless

otherwise indicated.

3.02 MISFITS

A. At Bolted Connections:

1. Immediately notify Engineer for approval of one of the following methods of correction: a. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts and use oversized

bolts. b. Plug weld misaligned holes and redrill holes to admit standard

size bolts. c. Drill additional holes in connection, conforming to AISC for bolt

spacing and end and edge distances, and add additional bolts. d. Reject member containing misfit, incorrect sized, or misaligned

holes and fabricate new member to ensure proper fit. 2. Do not enlarge incorrectly sized or misaligned holes in members by

burning or by use of drift pins.



B. At Anchor Bolts:

1. Resolve misalignments between anchor bolts and bolt holes in steel members in accordance with approved Shop Drawing.

2. Do not flame cut to enlarge holes without prior approval of Engineer.

C. Gas Cutting:

1. Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing.

2. Secondary members not under stress and concealed in finished structure may be corrected by gas cutting torches, if approved by Engineer.

3. Finish flame-cut sections equivalent to sheared and punched appearance.

3.03 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Clean shop primer from field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas immediately after erection.

B. Remove and grind smooth tack welds, fit-up-lugs, and weld runoff tabs.

C. Remove weld back-up bars and grind smooth where indicated on Drawings.

D. Apply touchup paint primer by brush or spray of same thickness and material as that used in shop application and as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

E. Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating Repair:

1. Conform to ASTM A780/A780M. 2. For minor repairs at abraded areas, use sprayed zinc conforming to

ASTM A780/A780M. 3. For flame cut or welded areas, use zinc-based solder, or zinc sticks,

conforming to ASTM A780/A780M. 4. Use magnetic gauge to determine thickness is equal to or greater than

base galvanized coating.

3.04 FIELD FINISH

A. Field finish in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.




A. Owner-Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

B. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control: Inspect and test as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control.

C. High-Strength Bolted Connections:

1. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform the following inspection and testing in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts: a. Marking identification and conformance to ASTM standards. b. Alignment of bolt holes. c. Placement, type, and thickness of hardened washers. d. Tightening of bolts.

2. Snug-Tightened Connections (N, X): Snug tight condition with plies of joint in firm contact.

3. Pretensioned Bearing and Slip Critical (SC) Connections: a. Conduct preinstallation test. b. Monitor installation and tightening of DTIs or TC bolts. c. Monitor condition of faying surfaces for slip critical connections.

4. Preinstallation Test: a. Conduct test in accordance with Specification for Structural Joints

Using Grade A325 or Grade A490 bolts prior to using bolt tension measuring device.

b. Select representative sample of not less than three bolts of each diameter, length, and grade.

c. Include DTIs and flat hardened washers as required to match actual connection assembly.

5. Nondestructive Testing (NDT): Inspect bolted connections and perform corrections as required to meet code acceptance criteria per RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using Grade A325 or Grade A490 Bolts.

6. Defective Connections: Correct and reinspect defective and improperly tightened high-strength bolted connections. Retest pretensioned bolts as necessary to demonstrate compliance of completed work.



D. Welding:

1. Contractor’s Certified Welding Inspector (CWI): Inspect and test field welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.

2. Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria.

3. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform inspection and testing of field welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.

4. Repair and retest defective welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.

E. Special inspection will be provided by Owner as indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION

SALMON CREEK TREATMENTPLANT IMPROVEMENTS

PW\DEN003\708335 STEEL DECKINGJANUARY 2020 05 31 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 05 31 00STEEL DECKING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Specifications for the Designof Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.3, Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel.

3. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A611, Standard Specification for Structural Steel (SS), Sheet,

Carbon, Cold-Rolled.b. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by theHot-Dip Process.

c. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and UncoatedAreas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

d. A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for SteelSheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

4. Steel Deck Institute (SDI):a. Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof

Decks.b. Diaphragm Design Manual.

5. Factory Mutual (FM):a. Factory Mutual Approval Guide.b. FM Research Corporation (FMRC): Approval Requirements for

Steel Roof Deck Construction.6. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES):

Evaluation Reports for Deck Fasteners.7. UL: Fire Resistance Directory.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Plan view layout of decking showing type and section properties of deckpanels, reinforcing channels, pans, special jointing, and accessories.

2. Location of openings, deck laps, and deck attachment details.


STEEL DECKING PW\DEN003\70833505 31 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020

©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS


1. Decking manufacturer’s installation requirements.2. Welding Procedures, Qualifications, and Inspection Report: As specified

in Section 05 05 23, Welding.3. Operation manuals for mechanical fastener installation tools.4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.


A. General: For metal decking section properties, meet requirements ofAISI Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

B. FM Requirements:

1. Steel Roof Deck: Listed in Factory Mutual “Approval Guide” for Class 1fire rating and Class 1-90 wind uplift rating.

2. Mechanical Fasteners: Packing containers shall show name ofmanufacturer and product and FMRC approval mark.

C. Qualifications for Field Welding: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage duringdelivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store deck bundles on platforms or pallets, with one end elevated to providedrainage.

C. Protect bundles against condensation with a ventilated waterproof covering.

D. Stack bundles so there is no danger of tipping, sliding, rolling, shifting ormaterial damage.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL DECKING

A. Provide metal deck as shown in the following schedule:

STEEL DECK SCHEDULE

TypeDepth

(in)

PanelWidth

(in)

DesignThickness

(gauge)

Min.Yield

StrengthFy (ksi)

Min. (+)S (in3/ft)

Min. I(in4/ft)

MinimumDiaphragm

ShearCapacity(lbs/ft) Finish

Roof Deck 1-1/2 36 18 33 0.322 0.302 600 Galv,G-90

B. Materials and Finishes:

1. Galvanized Deck:a. Sheet steel for galvanized deck and accessories shall conform to

ASTM A653 Structural Quality Grade 33 or higher, as shown inSteel Deck Schedule.

b. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A924 with coating classof G90 as defined in ASTM A653 and as shown in Steel DeckSchedule.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Vulcraft Division of Nucor Co., Brigham City, UT.2. BHP Steel Building Products, USA, Inc., West Sacramento, CA.3. Verco Manufacturing, Inc., Phoenix, AZ.4. United Steel Deck, Inc., Summit, NJ.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide stops, column closures, end closures, cover plates, girder fillers, ridgeand valley plates, finish strips, reinforcing channels, and other accessories asrequired for complete installation.

B. Accessories shall be minimum 22-gauge, except edge forms shall be sized asrequired by the deck manufacturer, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.




2.03 MECHANICAL FASTENERS

A. Self-Drilling Screws:

1. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws with hexagonal washer head andcorrosion-resistant finish.

2. Manufacturers and Products:a. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL; ICH Traxx Self-Drilling Fasteners with

Climaseal Coating and Autotraxx Standup Installation Tool.b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik-Pro HWH Self-Drilling Screws with

Kwik-Cote Treatment and Kwik-Tapper Screwdriver.

B. Powder Driven Fasteners:

1. Knurled shank, minimum 1/2-inch diameter steel washer, corrosion-resistant coating.

2. Pin diameter and length to suit deck type and flange thickness of steelsupport member.

3. Manufacturers and Products:a. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL; Buildex BX14 pins with yellow

dichromate galvanizing and BX900 Installation Tool.b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; ENP-series fasteners with electroplated zinc

coating and DX-750 Installation Tool.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance withrequirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affectingperformance of steel deck.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of support framing members.

B. Install at right angles to supporting members in a three span minimum lay-up,unless shown otherwise, and in accordance with Specification andmanufacturer’s installation recommendation.

C. Bearing: 1-1/2 inches, minimum.

D. Endlaps: Minimum of 2 inches and located over supports.



E. Do not stretch sidelaps.

F. Closure Plates:

1. Install closure and cover plate accessories as recommended by the metaldeck manufacturer, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

2. Floor Deck and Form Deck Closures:a. Fasten column closures, cell closures, and zee closures to deck to

provide tight fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides ofdecking.

b. Fasten cell closures at changes of direction of deck units unlessotherwise indicated.

G. Holes and Openings:

1. Cut and fit around roof openings and other work projecting through oradjacent to decking.

2. Locate holes and openings as shown to clear structural framing andbracing members.

3. Reinforcement around openings:a. Roof Deck: For hole sizes of at least 6 inches across, but not more

than 12 inches across in roof deck, reinforce with 0.0474-inchdesign thickness steel plate, painted or galvanized to match deckcoating. Extend plate at least 12 inches beyond opening in alldirections and attach to top of roof deck with No. 10 self-drillingscrews at 6-inch spacing and at all corners. For openings largerthan 12 inches across, reinforce roof deck with framing as shownon Drawings.

H. Protect deck areas from heavy concentrated loads or wheel traffic withplanking or other approved means.

I. Completed Deck: Free from buckles and irregularities, and in accordance withFM and UL requirements.




3.03 DECK ATTACHMENT

A. Deck fastening shall be as required to meet minimum diaphragm shear capacityas indicated in Steel Deck Schedule and at a minimum as indicated inAttachment Schedule below:

STEEL DECK ATTACHMENT SCHEDULE

At PerpendicularSupports At Parallel Supports At Sidelaps

TypeDepth(in.) Type

No. PerSheet Type

Spacing(in.) Type Spacing

Roof Deck 1-1/2 Powerdrivenfasteners

7 Powerdrivenfasteners

12 #10 Self-drillingscrews ormanufacturersstandard to meetminimumdiaphragm shear

24” max and asrequired to meetminimumdiaphragm shear

B. Mechanical Fasteners:

1. Self-Drilling Screws:a. Install screws in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions and with special installation tool. Do not over-torque.b. Remove and redrive screws at sidelaps where upper sheet is not

drawn tightly against lower sheet.2. Powder Driven Fasteners:

a. Install fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s writteninstructions and with special installation tool.

b. Minimum Sidelap Edge Distance: 3/8 inch.c. Minimum End/End Lap Distance: 1 inch.d. Head Projection: As specified by manufacturer for correct

penetration into flange of steel support member.

3.04 TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Immediately following erection, remove unused deck edge trimmings, screws,fasteners, welding washers, butt ends of welding rods, and debris fromcompleted installation.

B. Clean field welds, bolted connections, rust spots, and abraded areas.

C. Repair damaged painted surfaces as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting andCoating.

D. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces with zinc-rich spray paint in accordancewith ASTM A780; color to match galvanized deck.



E. Use magnetic gauge to determine that thickness of repair is equal to or greaterthan base painted or galvanized coating.


A. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform followinginspections.

1. Mechanical Fasteners: Visually inspect, in accordance withmanufacturer’s instructions, for each type of fastener.

B. Repair or replace defective fasteners.

C. Special inspection will be provided by Owner where indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 STRUCTURAL METALJANUARY 2020 STUD FRAMING©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 05 41 00 - 1

SECTION 05 41 00STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):a. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members.b. Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.c. Design Guide for Cold-Formed Steel Trusses.d. Fasteners for Residential Steel Framing.

2. American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS):a. C1.1, Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding.b. C1.3, Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding Coated

Low Carbon Steels.c. D1.3, Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel.

3. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A370, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical

Testing of Steel Products.b. A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and

Seamless Carbon Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.c. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated


d. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and UncoatedAreas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

e. C954, Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for theApplication of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases toSteel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) inThickness.

f. C955, Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse andAxial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging forScrew Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal PlasterBases.

4. Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (CCFSS): Technical Bulletin,Vol. 2, No. 1, February 1993, Screw Connections.

5. International Code Council (ICC): Evaluation Reports for Cold-FormedSteel Framing and Fasteners.


STRUCTURAL METAL PW\DEN003\708335STUD FRAMING JANUARY 202005 41 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Plan and elevation views of all metal framing systems, including locationand framing of all openings.

2. Material specifications, member sizes, and properties.3. Details of track, web stiffeners, stud bracing, blocking, bridging, and

other members as required to provide a complete installation.4. Details of connections including welding, mechanical fasteners, and

accessory items.5. Installation and erection instructions, including sequence of operations

and requirements for temporary bracing and bridging.


1. Manufacturer’s installation requirements.2. Welding Procedures, Qualifications, and Inspection Report: As specified

in Section 05 05 23, Welding.3. Operation manuals for mechanical fastener installation tools.


A. General: For member section properties, meet requirements of AISI,Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

B. Qualifications for Welding: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.


A. Deliver to Site in bundles marked with name of manufacturer, section type,thickness, grade of material, and length.

B. Store bundles on wood blocking, flat and off ground, to keep clean and toprevent any damage or permanent distortion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide size and type of members as indicated on Drawings.

B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G-60 galvanized coating.

C. Cold-Formed Members and Accessories: ASTM C955.



D. Dimensions and Properties: Calculate section properties in accordance withAISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.

2.02 STUDS AND JOISTS

A. Material:

1. ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33, or High-StrengthLow-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Type A or B, Grade 50.

2. Section: Type, size, and thickness as indicated on Drawings.3. Flanges: Stiffened with return lip.4. Webs:

a. Studs: Punched.b. Joists: Unpunched, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

B. Accessories:

1. Track: Size as required to fit over studs, same thickness as stud material,unpunched.

2. Blocking, Bridging, and Fire Stops: Same depth as studs or joists,0.0566-inch minimum design thickness, unpunched.

3. Bracing Straps, Angle Bracing, Clip Angles: Size and thickness asindicated on Drawings.

4. Mounting Plates: 0.0566-inch minimum design thickness by 8 inches by18 inches.

5. Accessories shall be from same manufacturer as studs and joists.


1. AMS, Los Angeles, CA; Angeles Metal Systems.2. Clark Steel, Middleton, OH; Steel Framing Systems.3. Dale Industries; Dearborn, MI; Dale/Incor Steel Framing.4. Dietrich Industries, Pittsburgh, PA; Lightgauge Metal Framing Products.5. Knorr Steel Framing Systems, Salem, OR; Light Gauge Steel Framing.6. Marino/Ware, South Plainfield, NJ; Stud-Rite Lightweight Steel Framing

Systems.7. Unimast Incorporated, Schiller Park, IL; Steel Framing Systems.

2.03 MECHANICAL FASTENERS


1. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws with hexagonal washer head andcorrosion-resistant finish.



2. Manufacturers and Products:a. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL; ICH Traxx Self-Drilling Fasteners with

Climaseal Coating and Autotraxx Standup Installation Tool.b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik-Pro HWH Self-Drilling Screws with

Kwik-Cote Treatment and Kwik-Tapper Screwdriver.

B. Powder-Driven Fasteners:

1. Knurled shank, minimum 1/2-inch diameter steel washer, corrosion-resistant coating.

2. Pin diameter and length to suit deck type and flange thickness of steelsupport member.

3. Manufacturers and Products:a. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL; Buildex BX14 pins with yellow

dichromate galvanizing and BX900 Installation Tool.b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; ENP-series fasteners with electroplated zinc

coating and DX-750 Installation Tool.

2.04 CONCRETE ANCHORS

A. Drilled anchors, size and type as shown on Drawings and as specified inSection 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

2.05 PREFABRICATION

A. Structural wall framing panels may be prefabricated prior to erection.

B. Prefabricated assemblies shall be not more than 1/8 inch out of square withinlength of assembly and shall be braced against racking. Use jig templates forlayout and fabrication.

C. Protect prefabricated panels from damage during handling.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all prefabricated assemblies and repair any damage.

B. Examine bearing support surfaces for compliance with requirements forinstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metalframing systems.

C. Provide smooth level bearing surfaces for bottom track of load-bearing walls.



D. Clean all member and bearing surfaces that will be in contact after assembly.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install framing systems as indicated on Drawings, complete and inaccordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Provide temporary bracing for support of all construction loads untilframing system is installed complete with sheathing or decking.

3. Install framing in true line, plumb, level, and in proper alignment.4. Cut ends of framing members with saw or shear to bear uniformly

against abutting members. Flame cutting is not permitted.5. All structural framing members shall be full-length without splices, unless

indicated otherwise.6. Fasten members together in accordance with AISI, Cold-Formed Steel

Design Manual, Part IV, Connections. Wire tying is not permitted.

B. Stud Bearing Walls:

1. Secure bottom track to floor slab with concrete anchors as indicated onDrawings.

2. Seat studs squarely and firmly within track before securing withfasteners. Gap between end of stud and track shall be less than 1/16 inch.

3. Install studs with spacing as shown and not more than 2 inches fromabutting walls.

4. Provide double studs at jambs of openings wider than stud spacing.5. Provide triple studs at corners and at jambs of openings wider than

48 inches, unless indicated otherwise.6. Track shall be continuous. Center splices between studs and splice with

stud section full length between studs.7. Frame wall penetrations for pipes and ducts larger than stud spacing to

avoid cutting structural members.8. Fire stop stud walls and partitions with unpunched blocking full width of

stud at midpoint or where required for nailers, in conformance withapplicable building code.

9. Provide blocking for support of mechanical items.10. Do not remove the web knockouts within 10 inches of either end of

load-bearing studs.11. Provide bracing straps with gusset plates and anchor holddown

assemblies where indicated on Drawings.



12. Tolerances:a. Stud Plumbness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.b. Stud Spacing: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.

C. Joists:

1. Position joists directly over bearing studs and attach to track.2. Joists shall be one-piece within a single span. For multiple spans, lap

joists and splice as shown on Drawings.3. Immediately install bridging and solid blocking to support joists.

Maximum spacing of bridging shall be 5 feet.4. Install web stiffeners where indicated.5. Web Penetrations: Drilled holes for other trades shall be limited to the

middle 1/3 of the joist depth within the middle 1/3 of the span, unlessindicated otherwise. Minimum spacing between drilled holes shall be1-1/2 times the joist depth. Notching of joist flanges and flame cutting ofholes are not permitted.

6. Tolerances:a. Joist Spacing: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.b. Joist Levelness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

3.03 FASTENERS


1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and withspecial installation tool.

2. Screw type, diameter, and length shall be in accordance with AISI,Fasteners for Residential Steel Framing, minimum two screws perconnection unless indicated otherwise.

3. Use clamp to hold members together. Drive screw from lighter toheavier gauge, to allow plies to be pulled together without strippingmetal. Do not over torque. A minimum of three exposed threads shallextend through steel.

4. Minimum screw spacing, end distance, and edge distance shall be3 diameters.

B. Powder-Driven Fasteners:

1. Use only for connecting cold-formed steel to structural steel members,unless indicated otherwise.

2. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and withspecial installation tool.



C. Welded Connections:

1. Welding shall not be used for material thinner than 0.0451 inch.2. Weld framing members and accessories in accordance with AWS D1.3.3. Resistance welding for prefabricated framing shall be in accordance with

AWS C1.1 and AWS C1.3.4. Repair galvanized surfaces damaged by welding with zinc-rich spray

paint in accordance with ASTM A780.

D. Concrete Anchors: Install in accordance with Section 05 50 00, MetalFabrications.


A. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform followinginspections:

1. Welded Connections: Visually inspect in accordance with AWS D1.3,Section 7, and as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.

2. Mechanical Fasteners: Visually inspect, in accordance withmanufacturer’s instructions, for each type of fastener.

B. Repair or replace defective welds and fasteners.

C. Special inspection will be provided by Owner where indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 METAL FABRICATIONSJANUARY 2020 05 50 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 05 50 00METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): The Aluminum Design Manual.2. American Galvanizers Association (AGA):

a. Inspection of Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Products.b. Quality Assurance Manual.

3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Stainless Steel Types.4. American Ladder Institute (ALI): A14.3, Ladders - Fixed - Safety

Requirements.5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).6. American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE): A10.11, Safety

Requirements for Personnel and Debris Nets.7. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel.b. D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.c. D1.6/D1.6M, Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.

8. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.b. A48/A48M, Specification for Gray Iron Castings.c. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and

Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.d. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy,

Cold-Finished.e. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.f. A143/A143M, Standard for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement

of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedurefor Detecting Embrittlement.

g. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware.

h. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel andStainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High PressureService and Other Special Purpose Applications.

i. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy SteelNuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, orBoth.


METAL FABRICATIONS PW\DEN003\70833505 50 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


j. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium andChromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip forPressure Vessels and for General Applications.

k. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.l. A283/A283M, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate

Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates.m. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,

60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.n. A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation

of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.o. A384/A384M, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against

Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of SteelAssemblies.

p. A385/A385M, Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality ZincCoatings (Hot-Dip).

q. A489, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes.r. A500/A500M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded

and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds andShapes.

s. A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded andSeamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.

t. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.u. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-

Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process.

v. A780/A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged andUncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

w. A786/A786M, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon,Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel FloorPlates.

x. A793, Standard Specification for Rolled Floor Plate, StainlessSteel.

y. A967, Standard Specification for Chemical PassivationTreatments for Stainless Steel Parts.

z. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.aa. A1085, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon

Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS).bb. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate.cc. B308/B308M, Standard Specification for Aluminum-

Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles.dd. B429/B429M, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy

Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube.



ee. B632/B632M, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy RolledTread Plate.

ff. C881/C881M, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-BaseBonding Systems for Concrete.

gg. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials -Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

hh. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.ii. F468, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap

Screws, and Studs for General Use.jj. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap

Screws, and Studs.kk. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.ll. F844, Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),

Unhardened for General Use.mm. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and

105-ksi Yield Strength.nn. F3125, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts,

Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and MetricDimensions.

9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):a. 29 CFR 1910.27, Fixed Ladders.b. 29 CFR 1926.105, Safety Nets.c. 29 CFR 1926.502, Fall Protection Systems Criteria and Practices.

10. Specialty Steel Industry of North America (SSINA):a. Specifications for Stainless Steel.b. Design Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Stainless Steel.c. Stainless Steel Fabrication.d. Stainless Steel Fasteners.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Anchor Bolt: Cast-in-place anchor; concrete or masonry.

B. Corrosive Area: Containment area or area exposed to delivery, storage,transfer, or use of chemicals. Corrosive area includes areas exposed tocorrosive atmosphere such as hydrogen sulfide from wastewater.

C. Exterior Area: Location not protected from weather by building or otherenclosed structure.

D. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is notsubject to liquid spills or washdown, nor where wall or roof slab is common toa water-holding or earth-retaining structure.




E. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is slopedto floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or washdown, or wherewall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retainingstructure.

F. Submerged: Location at or below top of wall of open water-holding structure,such as basin or channel, or wall, ceiling or floor surface inside a coveredwater-holding structure, or exterior belowgrade wall or roof surface of water-holding structure, open or covered.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Metal fabrications, including welding and fastenerinformation.


1. Pre-engineered Ladders: Letter of certification that ladder meets OSHA29 CFR 1910.27 requirements.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Certificate of compliance signed by galvanizer,with description of material processed and ASTM standard used forcoating.


A. Qualifications:

1. Galvanized Coating Applicator: Company specializing in hot-dipgalvanizing after fabrication and following procedures of QualityAssurance Manual of the American Galvanizers Association.


A. Insofar as practical, factory assemble specified items. Package assemblies,which have to be shipped unassembled to protect materials from damage andtag to facilitate identification and field assembly.

B. Package stainless steel items to provide protection from carbon impregnation.

C. Protect painted coatings and hot-dip galvanized finishes from damage as aresult of metal banding and rough handling. Use padded slings and straps.

D. Store fabricated items in dry area, not in direct contact with ground.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. For hot-dip galvanized steel that is exposed to view and does not receivepaint, limit the combined phosphorus and silicon content to 0.04 percent. Forsteels that require a minimum of 0.15 percent silicon (such as plates over1.5 inches thick for ASTM A36/A36M steel), limit maximum silicon contentto 0.21 percent and phosphorous content to 0.03 percent.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, meet the following requirements:

Item ASTM Reference

Steel Wide Flange Shapes A992/992M

Other Steel Shapes and Plates A36/A36M or A572/A572M,Grade 50 or A992/A992M for othersteel shapes

Steel Pipe A53, Grade B

Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) A500/A500M, Grade B or C

Aluminum:

Aluminum Plates B209, Alloy 6061-T6

Aluminum Structural Shapes B308/B308M, Alloy 6061-T6

Stainless Steel:

Bars and Angles A276, AISI Type 316 (316L forwelded connections)

Shapes A276, AISI Type 304 (304L forwelded connections)

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip A240/A240M, AISI Type 316(316L for welded connections)

Bolts, Threaded Rods, AnchorBolts, and Anchor Studs

F593, AISI Type 316, Group 2,Condition SH

Nuts F594, AISI Type 316, ConditionCW




Item ASTM Reference

Steel Bolts and Nuts:

Carbon Steel A307 bolts, with A563 nuts

High-Strength F3125, Grade A325, Type 1 bolts,with A563 nuts

Anchor Bolts and Rods F1554, Grade 36, with weldabilitysupplement S1.

Eyebolts A489

Threaded Rods A36/A36M

Flat Washers (Unhardened) F844

Flat and Beveled Washers(Hardened)

F436

Thrust Ties for Steel Pipe:

Threaded Rods A193/A193M, Grade B7

Nuts A194/A194M, Grade 2H

Plate A283/A283M, Grade D

Welded Anchor Studs A108, Grades C-1010 throughC-1020

Aluminum Bolts and Nuts F468, Alloy 2024-T4

Cast Iron A48/A48M, Class 35

C. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, zinc-plated steel, and aluminum material types as indicated in Fastener Schedule atend of this section.

2.02 ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES

A. Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts:

1. Headed type, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.2. Material type and protective coating as shown in Fastener Schedule at

end of this section.



B. Anchor Bolt Sleeves:

1. Plastic:a. Single unit construction with corrugated sleeve.b. Top of sleeve shall be self-threading to provide adjustment of

threaded anchor bolt projection.c. Material: High-density polyethylene.

2. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A36/A36M.

2.03 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS

A. See Section 05 05 19, Post-Installed Anchors.

2.04 STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS

A. Headed anchor studs (HAS), or threaded anchor studs (TAS), or stud shearconnectors, as indicated on Drawings.

1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A108, Standard Quality Grades 1010through 1020, inclusive either semikilled or killed aluminum or silicondioxidation, unless indicated otherwise.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW, whereindicated.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Nelson Stud Welding, FabriSteel Co., Elyria, OH.2. Stud Welding Associates, Inc., Elyria, OH.

2.05 PIPE SLEEVES

A. As specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties.

2.06 STEEL LINTELS AND SHELF ANGLES

A. ASTM A36/A36M, hot-dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance withASTM A123/A123M.

2.07 FLOOR PLATE

A. Material:

1. Galvanized Steel: Carbon steel, ASTM A786/A786M, commercialgrade, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance withASTM A123/ A123M.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A793, AISI Type 304.




3. Aluminum: ASTM B632/B632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

B. Minimum Thickness:

1. Steel: 1/4 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.2. Aluminum: 3/8 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

C. Surface: Raised-lug pattern or diamond tread, unless shown otherwise onDrawings.

2.08 SIDEWALK DOORS

A. Load Capacity: 300 psf with maximum deflection of 1/150th of span. ProvideH-20 wheel loading capacity where indicated on Drawings.

B. Component Fabrication:

1. Access Door Leaf(s): 1/4-inch aluminum diamond pattern plate. Providestainless steel safety chain and attachments for end of double-leaf doorassembly when open.

2. Channel Frame: 1/4-inch-thick extruded aluminum trough frame withcontinuous anchor flange around perimeter. Weld 1-1/2-inch diameterdrain coupling, and drain pipe, to frame trough at front right corner,unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

3. Safety Grate: Aluminum grating with 300 psf live load capacity, 5-inchby 5-inch grate openings, permanent hinging system that locks grate in90-degree position, and opening arm with vinyl grip handle and lockingdevice.

C. Door Hardware:

1. Hinges: Heavy-duty brass or stainless steel with stainless steel pinsthrough-bolted to cover plate with tamper-proof stainless steel boltsflush with top of cover and to outside leg of channel frame withstainless steel bolts and locknuts.

2. Lifting Mechanism: Stainless steel compression lift springs enclosed intelescoping vertical housing or stainless steel torsion lift springs.

3. Hold-Open Arm:a. Locks automatically in OPEN position.b. Disengages with slight pull on vinyl grip with one hand.c. Door can be easily closed with one hand by pulling forward and

down on vinyl grip.



4. Snap Lock:a. Stainless steel snap lock mounted on bottom of door leaf with

removable topside key wrench and inside fixed lever handle.b. Threaded plug for flush outside surface with key wrench removed.

D. Aluminum: Mill finished with protective coating applied to surfaces to be incontact with concrete, as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

E. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Bilco Co., New Haven, CT; J Series.2. Nystrom Products Co., Minneapolis, MN; FG Series.3. U.S.F. Fabrication, Hialeah, FL; T Series.4. ITT Flygt Corporation, Trumbull, CT; FDRN Series.5. Thompson Fabricating Co., Birmingham, AL; TE Series.6. Halliday Products, Orlando, FL; WS Series.

2.09 HATCH SAFETY NET

A. General:

1. Conforms to ASSE A10.11 and OSHA CFR Part 1926.105.2. Size to fit hatch opening where indicated.

B. Components and Accessories:

1. Rails and Slide Rings: Aluminum 6061-T6 extruded rails andaluminum-alloy 713.0 slide rings.

2. Corner Hooks and Eyebolts: AISI Type 316 stainless steel.3. Netting: Polyester, 5-inch by 5-inch net openings; 5,000 pounds

minimum breaking strength.4. Bolts, Nuts, and Concrete Anchors: AISI Type 316 stainless steel.

C. Manufacturer and Product: Safe Approach, Inc., Auburn, ME; Hatch Net 121.

2.10 LADDERS

A. Fabricate ladders with rails, rungs, landings, and cages to meet applicablerequirements of OSHA, CFR Part 1910.27, and ALI A14.3.

1. Design ladder for concentrated load of 200 pounds imposed by userconcentrated at points that will cause maximum stress in structuralmember being considered.

2. Include weight of ladder and attached appurtenances together with liveload in design of rails and fastenings.




3. Self-closing gates at landings.

B. Aluminum Pre-engineered Pipe Ladder:

1. Rungs:a. Aluminum extrusions of Alloy 6063-T6.b. Nonslip grip surface, 1-inch wide flat top, and semicircular

bottom with mill finish.2. Side Rails: ASTM B429/B429M, Alloy 6063-T6, 1-1/2 inches,

Schedule 40 pipe with anodized finish, AA M32-C22-A41.3. Ladder Attachments and Cage Assembly Fasteners: Stainless steel.4. Welded, pop riveted, or glued construction is not acceptable.5. Fabricate to longest length as practical but not to exceed 24 feet.6. Furnish support attachments to side rails at 6 feet maximum spacing.7. Manufacturer: Thompson Fabricating Co., Inc., Tarrant, AL.

C. Ladder Safety Post:

1. Telescoping tubular, spring balanced and automatically locking in raisedposition, with release lever for unlocking.

2. Post: Hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.3. Hardware: Stainless steel, AISI Type 316.4. Furnish dissimilar metal protective coatings at connections.5. Manufacturer and Product: Bilco Co., New Haven, CT; “Ladder Up” to

fit ladder rungs.

2.11 SAFETY CLIMB DEVICE

A. General:

1. Conforms to ALI A14.3 and OSHA CFR Part 1910.27.2. Belt and harness shall withstand minimum drop test of 250 pounds in

6-foot free fall.3. Fall Prevention System Material: Stainless steel, AISI Type 316.

B. Components and Accessories:

1. Main Components: Sleeve or trolley, safety harness, and carrier orclimbing rail.

2. Ladder rung clamps with stainless steel, AISI Type 316, mountingbrackets and hardware.

3. Removable extension kit with tiedown rod or trolley gate, mandrel, andcarrier rail for ladders under manholes and hatches.




1. Miller by Honeywell, Franklin, PA; Miller Saf-T-Climb.2. TS Products, Cambridge, Ontario, Canada; TS Safety Rail System.

2.12 ACCESSORIES

A. Antiseizing Lubricant for Stainless Steel Threaded Connections:

1. Suitable for potable water supply.2. Resists washout.3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Bostik, Middleton, MA; Neverseez.b. Saf-T-Eze Div., STL Corp., Lombard, IL; Anti-Seize.

B. Neoprene Gasket:

1. ASTM D1056, 2C1, soft, closed-cell neoprene gasket material, suitablefor exposure to sewage and sewage gases, unless otherwise shown onDrawings.

2. Thickness: Minimum 1/4 inch.3. Furnish without skin coat.4. Manufacturer and Product: Monmouth Rubber and Plastics Corporation,

Long Branch, NJ; Durafoam DK1111LD.

2.13 FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, sharp, and to well-defined lines.2. Furnish necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so work can be assembled

in neat, substantial manner.3. Conceal fastenings where practical; where exposed, flush countersink.4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching

hardware or other materials.5. Grind cut edges smooth and straight. Round sharp edges to small

uniform radius. Grind burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects smooth.6. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Site.

B. Materials:

1. Use steel shapes, unless otherwise noted.2. Steel to be hot-dip galvanized. Limit silicon content to less than

0.04 percent or to between 0.15 percent and 0.25 percent.




3. Fabricate aluminum in accordance with AA Specifications forAluminum Structures–Allowable Stress Design.

C. Welding:

1. Weld connections and grind exposed welds smooth. When required tobe watertight, make welds continuous.

2. Welded fabrications shall be free from twisting or distortion caused byimproper welding techniques.

3. Steel: Meet fabrication requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 5.4. Aluminum: Meet requirements of AWS D1.2/D1.2M.5. Stainless Steel: Meet requirements of AWS D1.6/D1.6M.6. Welded Anchor Studs: Prepare surface to be welded and weld with stud

welding gun in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 7, andmanufacturer’s instructions.

7. Complete welding before applying finish.

D. Painting:

1. Shop prime with rust-inhibitive primer as specified in Section 09 90 00,Painting and Coating, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be indirect contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, asspecified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, unless indicatedotherwise.

3. Do not apply protective coating to galvanized steel anchor bolts orgalvanized steel welded anchor studs, unless indicated otherwise.

E. Galvanizing:

1. Fabricate steel to be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A143/A143M, ASTM A384/A384M, and ASTM A385/A385M. Avoidfabrication techniques that could cause distortion or embrittlement ofthe steel.

2. Provide venting and drain holes for tubular members and fabricatedassemblies in accordance with ASTM A385/A385M.

3. Remove welding slag, splatter, burrs, grease, oil, paint, lacquer, andother deleterious material prior to delivery for galvanizing.

4. Remove by blast cleaning or other methods surface contaminants andcoatings not removable by normal chemical cleaning process in thegalvanizing operation.

5. Hot-dip galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies afterfabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.



6. Hot-dip galvanize bolts, nuts, washers, and hardware components inaccordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Oversize holes to allow for zincalloy growth. Shop assemble bolts and nuts.

7. Galvanized steel sheets in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M.8. Galvanize components of bolted assemblies separately before assembly.

Galvanizing of tapped holes is not required.

F. Electrolytic Protection: Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminumfabricated items to be in direct contact with concrete, grout, masonry, ordissimilar metals, as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating,unless indicated otherwise.

G. Watertight Seal: Where required or shown, furnish neoprene gasket of a typethat is satisfactory for use in contact with sewage. Cover full bearing surfaces.

H. Fitting: Where movement of fabrications is required or shown, cut, fit, andalign items for smooth operation. Make corners square and opposite sidesparallel.

I. Accessories: Furnish as required for a complete installation. Fasten bywelding or with stainless steel bolts or screws.


A. Visually inspect all fabrication welds and correct deficiencies.

1. Steel: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual InspectionAcceptance Criteria.

2. Aluminum: AWS D1.2/D1.2M.3. Stainless Steel: AWS D1.6/D1.6M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL FABRICATIONS

A. General:

1. Install metal fabrications plumb and level, accurately fitted, free fromdistortion or defects.

2. Install rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance.3. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.4. Obtain Engineer approval prior to field cutting steel members or making

adjustments not scheduled.




B. Aluminum:

1. Do not remove mill markings from concealed surfaces.2. Remove inked or painted identification marks on exposed surfaces not

otherwise coated after installed material has been inspected andapproved.

3. Fabrication, mechanical connections, and welded construction shall bein accordance with the AA Aluminum Design Manual.

C. Steel Lintels and Shelf Angles: Provide as required for support of masonryand other construction not attached to structural steel framing, unlessotherwise shown on Drawings.

3.02 CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Locate and hold anchor bolts in place with templates at time concrete isplaced.

B. Use anchor bolt sleeves for location adjustment and provide two nuts and onewasher per bolt of same material as bolt.

C. Minimum Bolt Size: 1/2-inch diameter by 12 inches long, unless otherwiseshown.

3.03 ACCESS COVERS

A. Install access covers, including sidewalk doors, in accordance withmanufacturer’s instructions.

B. Accurately position prior to placing concrete, such that covers are flush withfloor surface.

C. Protect from damage resulting from concrete placement. Thoroughly cleanexposed surfaces of concrete spillage to obtain a clean, uniform appearance.

D. Route drain pipe to exterior face of concrete or as shown on Drawings.

E. Position cover so that hinge is on side opposite ladder.

3.04 SAFETY CLIMB DEVICE SYSTEM

A. Provide for each ladder where unbroken height between levels exceeds20 feet, or at lesser height where indicated on Drawings.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.



C. Furnish additional accessories required to complete system for each ladder.

D. Furnish one harness for each ladder equipped with safety climb device.

E. Furnish pivot section at platforms, landings, and roofs.

F. When installed to required height, fall prevention system shall be rigid and anintegral part of the structure.

3.05 ELECTROLYTIC PROTECTION

A. Aluminum and Galvanized Steel:

1. Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be indirect contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, asspecified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, unless indicatedotherwise.

2. Do not apply protective coating to galvanized steel anchor bolts orgalvanized steel welded anchor studs, unless indicated otherwise.

3. Allow coating to dry before installation of the material.4. Protect coated surfaces during installation.5. Should coating become marred, prepare and touch up in accordance

with paint manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. During handling and installation, take necessary precautions to preventcarbon impregnation of stainless steel members.

2. After installation, visually inspect stainless steel surfaces for evidenceof iron rust, oil, paint, and other forms of contamination.

3. Remove contamination using cleaning and passivation methods inaccordance with requirements of ASTM A380 and ASTM A967.

4. Brushes used to remove foreign substances shall utilize only stainlesssteel or nonmetallic bristles.

5. After treatment, visually inspect surfaces for compliance.

3.06 PAINTING

A. Painted Galvanized Surfaces: Prepare as specified in Section 09 90 00,Painting and Coating.




B. Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating:

1. Conform to ASTM A780/A780M.2. For minor repairs at abraded areas, use sprayed zinc conforming to

ASTM A780/A780M.3. For flame cut or welded areas, use zinc-based solder, or zinc sticks,

conforming to ASTM A780/A780M.4. Use magnetic gauge to determine thickness is equal to or greater than

base galvanized coating.

C. Field Painting of Shop Primed Surfaces: Prepare surfaces and field finish inaccordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Owner-Furnished Quality Assurance:

1. In accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in theStatement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings.

2. Contractor responsibilities and related information on specialinspection, observation, and testing are included in Section 01 45 33,Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

B. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control:

1. Inspection and testing required in Section 01 45 16.13, ContractorQuality Control.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance per Section 01 61 00,Common Product Requirements, for test results, or calculations, ordrawings that ensure material and equipment design and design criteriameet requirements of Section 01 61 00, Common ProductRequirements, and Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.



3.08 FASTENER SCHEDULE

A. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, provide fasteners as follows:

Service Use andLocation Product Remarks

1. Anchor Bolts Cast Into Concrete for Structural Steel, Metal Fabricationsand Castings

Interior Dry Areas Hot-dip galvanizedsteel headed anchorbolts, unless indicatedotherwise

Exterior and InteriorWet Areas

Stainless steel headedanchor bolts

Submerged andCorrosive Areas

Stainless steel headedanchor bolts withfusion bonded coating

See Section 09 90 00,Painting and Coating

2. Anchor Bolts Cast Into Concrete for Equipment Bases

Interior Dry Areas Hot-dip galvanizedsteel headed anchorbolts, unless otherwisespecified withequipment

Submerged, Exterior,Interior Wet, andCorrosive Areas

Stainless steel headedanchor bolts withfusion bonded coating,unless otherwisespecified withequipment

See Section 09 90 00,Painting and Coating

3. Post-Installed Anchors: See Section 05 05 19, Post-Installed Anchors




Service Use andLocation Product Remarks

4. Anchors Cast in Grout-Filled Concrete Masonry Units

Dry Areas Hot-dip galvanizedsteel headed anchorbolts or zinc-platedsteel sleeve anchors

Exterior and InteriorWet Areas

Hot-dip galvanizedsteel headed anchorbolts, zinc-plated orstainless steel sleeveanchors

5. Connections for Structural Steel Framing

Exterior and InteriorWet and Dry Areas

High-strength steelbolted connections

Use hot-dippedgalvanized high-strength boltedconnections forgalvanized steelframing members.

6. Connections for Steel Fabrications and Wood Components


Hot-dip galvanizedcarbon steel boltedconnections

7. Connections of Aluminum Components

Submerged, Exteriorand Interior Wet andDry Areas

Stainless steel boltedconnections, unlessotherwise specifiedwith equipment

8. All Others


Stainless steel fasteners

B. Antiseizing Lubricant: Use on stainless steel threads.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 ALUMINUM RAILINGSJANUARY 2020 05 52 16 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 05 52 16ALUMINUM RAILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Aluminum Association, Incorporated (AA): DAF45, DesignationSystem for Aluminum Finishes.

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318, Building Code Requirementsfor Structural Concrete.

3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).4. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel andStainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High PressureService and Other Special Purpose Applications.

b. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy SteelNuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, orBoth.

c. E894, Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent MetalRailing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

d. E935, Standard Test Methods for Performance of PermanentMetal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

e. E985, Standard Specification for Permanent Metal RailingSystems and Rails for Buildings.

5. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code (IBC).6. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910, Code of

Federal Regulations.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. ICC Evaluation Services Report: ICC report on evaluation of manufacturedconcrete anchor systems.

B. Railings: This term includes guardrail systems, handrail systems, platformrailing systems, ramp-rail systems, and stair-rail systems. Railings may becomprised of a framework of vertical, horizontal, or inclined members,grillwork or panels, accessories, or combination thereof.

C. Special Inspection: As defined by the ICC IBC.


ALUMINUM RAILINGS PW\DEN003\70833505 52 16 - 2 JANUARY 2020


D. Toeboards: Vertical barrier at floor level usually erected on railings alongexposed edges of floor or wall openings, platforms, or ramps to preventmiscellaneous items from falling through.

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance of Railing Systems: Design, test, fabricate, and installrailings to withstand the following structural loads without exceedingallowable design working stress or allowable deflection. Apply each load toproduce maximum stress and deflection in railing system components.

1. Top Rail:a. Capable of withstanding the following load cases applied:

1) Concentrated load of 200 pounds applied at any point and inany direction in accordance with ICC IBC and OSHA.

2) Uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied in anydirection in accordance with ICC IBC.

3) Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrentlywith uniform loads in accordance with ICC IBC.

2. Calculated lateral deflection at top of posts shall not exceed 1 inch.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Project-specific scaled plans and elevations of railings and detail

drawings. Include railing profiles, sizes, connections, anchorage,size and type of fasteners, and accessories.

b. Manufacturer’s literature and catalog data of railing andcomponents.

c. Design Data:1) Calculations or test data using specified design performance

loads and including the following:a) Bending stress in, and deflection of, posts in

accordance with ASTM E985 as modified herein.b) Design of post base connection.c) Documentation that concrete anchors have been

designed in accordance with one of the following:(1) ACI 318, Appendix D.(2) ICC Evaluation Services Report for selected

anchor.



2. Samples:a. Rail sections, 6 inches long showing each type of proposed

connection, proposed finish, and workmanship.b. Each fitting including wall brackets, castings, toeboard, and rail

expansion joints.


1. Manufacturer’s assembly and installation instructions.2. Special Inspection: Manufacturer’s instructions for Special Inspection of

post-installed anchors.3. Test Reports:

a. Test data may supplement load calculations providing data coverscomplete railing system, including anchorage:1) Test data for railing and components showing load and

deflection as a result of load, in enough detail to proverailing is strong enough and satisfies national, state, localstandards, regulations, code requirements, and OSHA 29CFR 1910, using design loads specified. Include test datafor the following:a) Railing and post connections.b) Railing wall connections.c) Railing expansion joint connections.d) Railing system gate assembly, including latch, gate

stop, and hinges. Both gate latch and stop to supportrequired loads applied independent of each other.

2) Testing of anchorages shall be in accordance withASTM E894 and ASTM E935 using applied loads inaccordance with ICC IBC.

3) Deflection Criteria:a) In accordance with ASTM E985 and design loads

specified, except as follows:(1) Maximum calculated lateral deflection at top of

posts shall not exceed 1 inch.4) Aluminum Rail Piping: Test data showing yield strength of

pipe as delivered equals or exceeds specified values.4. Manufacturer’s written recommendations describing procedures for

maintaining railings including cleaning materials, application methods,and precautions to be taken in use of cleaning materials.





A. Qualifications: Calculations required for design data shall be stamped by aregistered civil or structural engineer licensed in state where Project will beconstructed.


A. Package and wrap railings to prevent scratching and denting during shipment,storage, and installation. Maintain protective wrapping to the extent possibleuntil railing is completely installed.

B. Delivery:

1. Shop assemble into practical modules of lengths not exceeding 24 feetfor shipment.

2. Deliver toeboards loose for field assembly.3. Deliver clear anodized railing pipe and posts with protective plastic

wrap.


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from thefollowing maximum range in ambient temperature in design, fabrication, andinstallation of railings to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, over stressingof components, connections and other detrimental effects. Base designcalculation on actual surface temperature of material as a result of both solarheat gain and night time sky heat loss. Temperature change is differencebetween high or low temperature and installation temperature.

1. Temperature Change Range: 70 degrees F, ambient; 100 degrees F,material surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ALUMINUM RAILINGS

A. General:

1. Furnish pre-engineered and prefabricated railing systems as shown onDrawings.

2. Railing systems using pop rivets or glued railing construction are notpermitted.

3. Sand cast accessories and components are not permitted.4. Fasteners shall be AISI Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.



B. Rails, Posts, and Formed Elbows:

1. Extruded Alloy 6105-T5, 6061-T6, or equivalent.2. Tensile Strength: 38,000 psi, minimum.3. Yield Strength: 35,000 psi, minimum.4. Wall Thickness: 0.145 inch, minimum.5. Posts and railings shall be nominal 1-1/2-inch diameter (1.90-inch

outside diameter).

C. Accessories:

1. Fittings and Accessories:a. Extruded, machined bar stock, permanent mold castings, or die

castings of sufficient strength to meet load requirements.b. Gauge metal components are not acceptable for load-resisting

components.c. Fittings shall match color of pipe in railings.

2. Miscellaneous Extruded Aluminum Parts: Alloys 6063-T6, 6061-T6, or6105-T5 aluminum, or equivalent, and of adequate strength for all loads.

3. Castings for Railings:a. Cast Al-mag with sufficient strength to meet load and test

requirements.b. Anodizable grade finish with excellent resistance to corrosion

when subjected to exposure of sodium chloride solutionintermittent spray and immersion.

4. Post Anchorages:a. Refer to standard details for types of post anchorages and

minimum requirements.b. Bolts at anchorages shall be minimum 1/2-inch diameter.

5. Wall Brackets: Adjustable wall fitting, with provision for minimumthree 3/8-inch diameter AISI Type 316 stainless steel bolts or concreteanchors.

6. Rail Terminals (including Wall Returns): Aluminum wall fitting withprovision for three 3/8-inch Type 304 fasteners.

7. Railing System Gate:a. Extruded aluminum rail components.b. Hardware Manufacturers and Products:

1) Julius Blum & Co., Inc., Carlstadt, NJ; No. 782/3 gatehinges with springs, and No. 784 gate latch and stop.

2) CraneVeyor Corp., South El Monte, CA; No. C4370b gatehinges with spring, No. C4369 gate latch, and No. C4368gate stop.

3) Moultrie Manufacturing Co., Moultrie, GA; PartNo. W60006.




8. Railing Picket Panels and Clamps:a. 1/2-inch Schedule 40 aluminum pipe (picket).b. Extruded aluminum 1-1/2-inch by 7/8-inch by 1/8-inch channel.c. Furnish neoprene plug for each end of picket.d. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

9. Toeboards:a. Molded or extruded Alloy 6063-T6 or 6061-T6 aluminum.b. Provide slotted holes for expansion and contraction where

required.10. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

D. Metal Supports Embedded in Concrete: In accordance with Section 05 50 00,Metal Fabrications.

E. Finishes:

1. Pipe and Post: In accordance with AA DAF45, designationAA-M32-C22-A41.

2. Cast Fittings and Toeboards: In accordance with AA DAF45,designation AA-M10-C22-A41.

2.02 ANCHOR BOLTS, FASTENERS, AND CONCRETE ANCHORS

A. Locknuts, Washers, and Screws:

1. Elastic Locknuts, Steel Flat Washers, Round Head Machine Screws(RHMS): AISI Type 316 stainless steel.

2. Flat Washers: Molded nylon.

B. Bolts and Nuts for Bolting Railing to Metal Beams: ASTM A193/A193M andASTM A194/A194M, Type 316 stainless steel.

C. Concrete Anchors:

1. Stainless steel, AISI Type 316.2. Post-installed anchors in accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal

Fabrications, unless otherwise specified herein.3. Bolt Diameter: 1/2-inch, minimum.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly:

1. Post Spacing: Maximum 6-foot horizontal spacing.



2. Railing Posts Bolted to Metal or Concrete:a. In lieu of field cutting, provide approved fitting with sufficient

post overlap, containing provisions for vertical adjustment.b. Field fit-up is required.

3. Free of burrs, nicks, and sharp edges when fabrication is complete.4. Welding is not permitted.

B. Shop/Factory Finishing:

1. Use same alloy for uniform appearance throughout fabrication forrailings.

2. Railing and Post Fittings: Match fittings with color of pipe in railing.

C. Shop Assembly:

1. Shop assemble rails, posts, and formed elbows with a close tolerance fortight fit.

2. Fit dowels tightly inside posts.

D. Repair of Defective Work: Remove stains and replace defective Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Field fabrication of aluminum railing systems is not permitted.

B. Where required, provide railing posts longer than needed and field cut to exactdimensions required in order to satisfy vertical variations on actual structure.

C. Install railing with base that provides plus or minus 1/4-inch verticaladjustment inside base fitting. If adjustment is required in field and exceedsplus or minus 1/4-inch, reduce post length not to exceed beyond bottom oflowest set-screw or bolt in base fitting.

D. Modification to supporting structure is not permitted where railing is to beattached.

E. Mount railings only on completed walls. Do not support railings temporarilyby means not satisfying structural performance requirements.

F. Protection from Entrapped Water:

1. Make provisions in exterior and interior installations subject to highhumidity to drain water from railing system.




2. For posts mounted in concrete, bends, and elbows occurring at lowpoints, drill weep holes of 1/4-inch diameter at lowest possibleelevations, one hole per post or rail. Drill hole in plane of rail.

3.02 RAILING INSTALLATION

A. Assembly and Installation: Perform in accordance with manufacturer’s writtenrecommendations for installation.

B. Expansion Joints:

1. Maximum intervals of 54 feet on center and at structural joints.2. Slip joint with internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond each side of

joint. Provide 1/2-inch slip joint gap to allow for expansion.3. Fasten to one side using 3/8-inch diameter set-screw. Place set-screw at

bottom of pipe.4. Locate joints within 12 inches of posts. Locate expansion joints in rails

that span expansion joints in structural walls and floors supporting theposts.

C. Posts and Rails:

1. Surface Mounted Posts:a. Bolt post baseplate connectors firmly in place.b. Shims, wedges, grout, and similar devices for railing post

alignment not permitted.2. Set posts plumb and aligned to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet.3. Set rails horizontal or parallel to slope of steps to within 1/8 inch in

12 feet.4. Install posts and rails in same plane.5. Remove projections or irregularities and provide a smooth surface for

sliding hands continuously along top rail.6. Use offset rail for use on stairs and platforms if post is attached to web

of stringers or structural platform supports.7. Support 1-1/2-inch rails directly above stairway stringers with offset

fittings.

D. Wall Brackets: Support wall rails on brackets spaced maximum 5 feet oncenters as measured on the horizontal projection.

E. Toeboard:

1. Provide at railings, except where 4-inch or higher concrete curbs areinstalled, at gates, or at stairways unless shown otherwise.



2. Accurately measure in field for correct length; after railing postinstallation cut and secure to posts.

3. Dimension between bottom of toeboard and walking surface not toexceed 1/4 inch.

4. Install plumb and aligned to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet.

F. Railing System Gate: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installationinstructions.

3.03 FIELD FINISHING

A. Corrosion Protection: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosioncaused from direct contact with concrete and dissimilar metals by coatingmetal surfaces as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Post-installed anchors supporting railing systems require special inspection.

B. Owner-Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with ICC IBC Chapter 17requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan onDrawings. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included inSection 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

C. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control: Inspection and testing as required inSection 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Wash railing system thoroughly using clean water and soap. Rinse with cleanwater.

B. Do not use acid solution, steel wool, or other harsh abrasive.

C. If stain remains after washing, restore in accordance with railingmanufacturer’s recommendations or replace stained railings.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 METAL GRATINGSJANUARY 2020 05 53 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 05 53 00METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

2. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.b. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked

Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.c. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,

Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-HighStrength.

d. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-AlloyExtruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):a. MBG 531, Metal Bar Grating Manual.b. MBG 532, Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Grating: Show dimensions, weight, size, and location of

connections to adjacent grating, supports, and other Work.b. Grating Anchorage: Show details of anchorage to supports to

prevent displacement from traffic impact.c. Product data for grating, grating clips, anchors, accessories, and

other manufactured products specified herein.d. Manufacturer’s specifications, including coatings, surface

treatment, and finishes.


1. Special handling and storage requirements.2. Installation instructions.


METAL GRATINGS PW\DEN003\70833505 53 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020



A. Insofar as is practical, factory assemble items.

B. Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies that are, due to necessity, shippedunassembled.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be productsof:

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO), Birmingham, AL.2. HARSCO Industrial IKG, Houston, TX.3. Ohio Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH.

2.02 GRATING MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper as designated below.

1. Bearing Bars and Banding: ASTM B221 alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6.2. Swaged Crossbar Rods: ASTM B221 alloy 6061 or 6063, or

ASTM B210 alloy 3003.3. Finish: Mill.

B. Carbon Steel:

1. Bearing Bars, Banding, and Rectangular Cross Bars: ASTM A1011/A1011M commercial steel Type II for hot rolled carbon steel sheet andstrip, or ASTM A36/A36M.

2. Cross Bars made from Wire Rods: Not permitted.3. Finish: Galvanized after fabrication.

2.03 METAL BAR GRATING

A. General Requirements:

1. Maximum Service Load:a. Light Duty (Type A): 100 psf uniformly distributed load.b. Medium Duty (Type B): 500 psf uniformly distributed load.

2. Maximum Deflection: Span/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.



3. Bearing Bar Spacing:a. Light Duty: 1-3/16 inch maximum, center-to-center.b. Medium Duty: 15/16 inch maximum, center-to-center.

4. Cross Bar Spacing: 4 inches maximum, center-to-center. For aluminumI-bar grating with depths greater than 2 inches, provide cross bars at2 inches maximum, center-to-center.

5. Bearing Bars, Cross Bars and Banding: Minimum thickness as specifiedin NAAMM MBG 531 or as shown on Drawings.

B. Grating Materials:

1. Aluminum, pressure-locked I-bar grating fabricated by swaging crossbarsbetween extruded I-shaped bearing bars.

2. Galvanized steel welded, rectangular bar grating fabricated by electro-forging cross bars to bearing bars.

C. Surface:

1. Aluminum: Striated.2. Steel: Plain.

D. Stair Treads:

1. Material and Type: Same as grating material and grating type asfurnished for connecting walkway or work surface.

2. Nosings: Integral ribbing and serrated edge on one long axis of tread, ornonslip abrasive on each tread along one long edge.

3. Carrier Plate or Angle: Furnish at each end for connection to stairstringers.

2.04 HEAVY-DUTY METAL BAR GRATING (TYPE C)

A. General Requirements:

1. Maximum Service Load: AASHTO H-20.2. Maximum Deflection: Span/240.3. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-7/8 inch maximum center-to-center.4. Cross Bar Spacing: 4 inches maximum center-to-center.5. Bearing Bars, Cross Bars and Banding: Minimum thickness as specified

in NAAMM MBG 532 or as shown on Drawings.6. Grating Type: Galvanized steel, heavy-duty, rectangular bar grating

fabricated by welding crossbars between rectangular bearing bars.




2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Embedded Frames: As indicated on Drawings and as specified inSection 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

B. Grating Clamps:

1. Use at flanged beam and bolted angle frame supports.2. Removable from above grating walkway surface.3. Provide hat bracket, recessed bolt, and bottom clamp of same material as

grating.4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Direct Metals Company, LLC, Kennesaw, GA; Grating Clamp.b. Grating Fasteners, Inc., Harvey, LA; G-Clip.

C. Anchor Stud and Saddle Clip:

1. Use at embedded angle frame supports with stud anchor and nutrecessed below top of grating surface.

2. Removable from above grating walkway surface.3. Provide Type 316 stainless steel welded threaded stud anchor, nut,

washer, and saddle clip.4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Welded Stud Anchor:1) Nelson Stud Welding, Inc., Elyria, OH.2) Stud Welding Associates, Inc., Elyria, OH.

b. Saddle Clip:1) Direct Metals Company, LLC, Kennesaw, GA; Saddle Clip.2) Grating Fasteners, Inc., Harvey, LA; Saddle Clip.3) Struct-Fast, Inc., Baltimore, MD; Gratefast.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. General:

1. In accordance with NAAMM MBG 531 or NAAMM MBG 532.2. Do not weld aluminum grating.3. Conceal fastenings where practical.4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware

or other materials.5. Cutouts:

a. Fabricate in grating sections for penetrations indicated.b. Arrange to permit grating removal without disturbing items

penetrating grating.



c. Edge band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearingbars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars.

6. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.7. Field measure areas to receive grating. Verify dimensions of new

fabricated supports, and fabricate to dimension required for specifiedclearances.

8. Section Length: Sufficient to prevent section from falling through clearopening when oriented in the span direction and one end is touchingeither the concrete or the vertical leg of grating support.

9. Minimum Bearing: 1 inch for grating depth up to 2-1/4 inches and2 inches for grating depth greater than 2-1/4 inches.

10. Banding and Toe Plates: Same material as grating and welded to bearingbars in accordance with requirements of NAAMM MBG 531 andNAAMM MBG 532.

B. Metal Bar Grating: A single grating section shall be not less than 1.5 feet orgreater than 3 feet in width, or weigh more than 150 pounds.

C. Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating: Minimum width of grating sections shall be2 feet regardless of length and weight.

D. Supports:

1. Same material as grating, except that supports which are to be embeddedin concrete shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless part of an extrudedaluminum system.

2. Coordinate dimensions and fabrication with grating to be supported.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Electrolytic Protection:

1. Protect aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals, orembedded or in contact with masonry, grout, or concrete as specified inSection 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

2. Allow paint to dry before installation of material.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Until grating sections are securely fastened in place, area shall be appropriatelybarricaded or flagged to alert people working in the area of potential fallhazard.




B. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations.

C. Install supports such that grating sections have a solid bearing on both ends,and that grating sections will not rock or wobble under design loads.

D. Install grating supports plumb and level as applicable.

E. Install sections of welded frames with anchors to straight plane without offsets.

F. Field locate and install fasteners to fit grating layout.

G. Anchor grating securely to supports using minimum of four fastener clips andbolts per grating section.

H. Each grating or plank section shall be easily removable and replaceable.

I. Completed installation shall be rigid and neat in appearance.

J. Protect painted and galvanized surfaces during installation.

K. Repair damaged coatings as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting andCoating.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 ROUGH CARPENTRYJANUARY 2020 06 10 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 06 10 00ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Lumber Standards Committee’s Board of Review (ALSC).2. American Wood Council (AWC): 2, National Design Specification for

Wood Construction.3. American Wood Preservers’ Association (AWPA):

a. M4, Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated WoodProducts.

b. U1, User Specification for Treated Wood.4. APA - The Engineered Wood Association (APA):

a. Form B445, APA Quality Assurance Policies for Structural-UsePanels Qualified to PRP-108.

b. PRP-108, Performance Standards and Qualification Policy forStructural-Use Panels (Form E445).

5. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware.b. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and

Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.c. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.d. F1667, Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes,

and Staples.6. International Code Council (ICC):

a. ESR-1539, Power-Driven Staples and Nails.b. International Building Code (IBC).

7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 255, Standard Method ofTest of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

8. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): 1003, Grading Rules.9. UL: 723, Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.10. U.S. Department of Commerce—Voluntary Product Standard (DOC):

a. PS 1, Structural Plywood.b. PS 2, Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use

Panels.


ROUGH CARPENTRY PW\DEN003\70833506 10 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


c. PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard.11. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): G5, Western Lumber

Grading Rules.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data:a. Indicate component materials and dimensions, and include

construction and application details for the following:1) Underlayment.2) Sheathing.3) Metal framing anchors.4) Construction adhesives.5) Construction panel thickness where not shown.


1. ICC Evaluation Service Reports, including the following as a minimum:a. Connections and Fasteners.b. Wood Treatment.c. Nails.d. Wood Framing.

2. Wood treatment manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing,installation, and finishing of treated material.

3. Material Certificates: Showing species and grade selected for dimensionlumber for each use.a. Material certificates for dimensional lumber in compliance with

allowable unit stresses. Show species and grade selected for eachuse as well as design values approved by the ALSC’s Board ofReview.

b. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, includecertification by treatment plant stating type of preservative solutionand pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained,and compliance with applicable standards.

c. For waterborne-treated products include statement that moisturecontent of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated priorto shipment to Site.

4. Material test reports from testing laboratory showing and interpretingtest results in accordance with test methods UL 723, NFPA 255, andASTM E84, relative to fire-retardant treated wood products.




A. Upon delivery to Site, immediately place materials in area protected fromweather. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp areas.

B. Protect sheet materials from breaking corners and damaging surfaces whileunloading.

C. Store materials a minimum of 6 inches above ground on framework orblocking and cover with waterproof covering, providing for adequate aircirculation and ventilation. Store sheet materials flat, not on edge.

D. For lumber treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between eachbundle to provide air circulation.

E. Store materials for which maximum moisture content is specified in areaswhere humidity can be controlled.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Lumber Standards:

1. In accordance with DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules and woodspecies certified by ALSC.

2. Design values for wood members equal to those published in supplementto AWC 2.

3. Stamp or brand each unexposed piece of lumber with grade, species, andmoisture content at time of mill surfacing.

4. Furnish exposed lumber pieces with grade stamps applied to ends orback of each piece. If completely exposed, and permitted by localbuilding jurisdiction, omit grade stamps entirely.

B. Lumber sizes shown on Drawings are nominal, unless shown otherwise.Provide actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20 for use.

C. Dressed lumber S4S, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

D. Moisture content of lumber not to exceed 19 percent, unless otherwisespecified and marked “DRY.”




2.02 LUMBER

A. Framing Lumber:

1. Douglas Fir-Larch, No. 1 or better unless indicated otherwise below:

Usage Minimum Grade

Blocking and nailers Douglas Fir-Larch No. 2, Hemlock,Southern Pine Stud grade, nondense

2.03 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS

A. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative-treated wood, inaccordance with AWPA U1 and AWPA M4, mark and grade each treated itemin accordance with SPIB 1003 or WWPA G5.

1. Kiln-dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.2. Treat wood in contact with roofing or flashing.3. Treat wood in contact with masonry or concrete.4. Treat wood less than 18 inches above grade.

B. Aboveground Materials:

1. Pressure treat items with waterborne preservatives to a minimumretention of 0.25 per cubic foot.

2. Interior Use: After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to maximummoisture content of 19 percent and 15 percent respectively.

3. Treat the following items:a. Wood nailers, blocking, and similar members in connection with

roofing, flashing, and waterproofing.b. Wood blocking and similar concealed members in contact with

masonry or concrete.c. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.

C. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cutafter treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect eachpiece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defectivepieces.



2.04 HARDWARE

A. Fasteners and connectors in contact with preservative-treated or fire-retardant-treated wood shall be hot-dipped zinc-coated galvanized steel or stainless steelin accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Conform to ASTM F1667.

C. Nails:

1. Conform to ASTM F1667.2. Steel common nails or alternatives listed in rough carpentry section of

General Structural Notes found on Drawings.3. Use hot-dipped zinc-coated nails wherever exposed.

D. Power Driven Fasteners: Conform to ICC ESR-1539.

E. Bolts and Screws: Conform to ASTM A307, galvanized where exposed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exactgrades and dimensions.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Lay out, cut, fit, and install rough carpentry items. Anchor sufficiently toensure rigidity and permanence.

B. Install items accurate to dimension, true to line, level, and square unless shownotherwise on Drawings. Provide for installation and support of other Work.

C. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentryconstruction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry withminimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.

D. Countersink nailheads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

E. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporarybracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe conditionuntil completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.




F. Field treat field cuts and holes in pressure-treated lumber with preservative inaccordance with AWPA M4.

G. Holes: 1/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter, except provide holes forcast-in-place anchor bolts 3/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter.

1. Enlarge tight holes requiring forcible driving of bolts by reaming.

H. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install where shown on Drawings and as needed tofacilitate installation of finishing materials, fixtures, accessories, specialty items,hardware and trim.

3.04 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS

A. Provide preservative-treated wood for blocking and nailers built into exteriormasonry walls, wood in contact with concrete or masonry and in conjunctionwith roofing.

B. Apply two brush coats of same preservative used in original treatment tosawed or cut surfaces of treated lumber.


A. Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17requirements, is provided in Statement of Special Inspections Plan inSupplement located at end of Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection,Observation, and Testing. Contractor responsibilities and related informationare included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

B. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control: Inspect and test as required inSection 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTICJANUARY 2020 BAFFLE WALL SYSTEM©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 06 82 01 - 1

SECTION 06 82 01FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC BAFFLE WALL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK OF THIS SECTION

A. This section covers the work necessary to provide the fiberglass reinforcedplastic (FRP) baffle wall system including, but not limited to, the FRP bafflewall panels, FRP columns, FRP beams, FRP angles, and fasteners andconnections.

B. The FRP baffle wall system shall be installed in Aeration Basins in a municipalwastewater treatment plant as shown on Drawings. The concrete aerationbasins include diffusers and other process equipment that will remain.Coordination of FRP baffle wall system to avoid conflict with these elements isrequired. See Drawings.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Related sections include the following:

1. Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.2. Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.3. Section 05 05 19, Post-Installed Anchors.4. Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

1.03 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM):a. C177, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux

Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means ofthe Guarded Hot-Plate Apparatus.

b. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.c. D635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent

and Time of Burning Plastics in a Horizontal Position.d. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.e. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid

Plastics.


FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PW\DEN003\708335BAFFLE WALL SYSTEM JANUARY 202006 82 01 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

f. D696, Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear ThermalExpansion of Plastics Between Minus 30 Degrees C and30 Degrees C.

g. D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties ofUnreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical InsulatingMaterials.

h. D792, Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity(Relative Density) by Plastics Displacement.

i. D2344, Standard Test Method for Apparent Interlaminar ShearStrength of Parallel Fiber Composites by Short-Beam Method.

j. D2583, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of RigidPlastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.

k. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials.

2. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): 29 CFR 19.10, Code ofFederal Regulations.

3. UL: 94, UL Standard for Safety Test for Flammability of PlasticMaterials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.

1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Design for a water differential of 12 inches (considered as uniform load overthe entire wall).

B. Deflection Limits and Factors of Safety:

1. Baffle Panels: L/D greater than 120 (not to exceed panel depth); Factorof Safety equals 2.0.

2. Panel Support Members: L/D greater than 180, Factor of Safetyequals 2.5.

3. Support Member Connections: Factor of Safety of 3.0 or greater.

C. Top of Baffle Wall:

1. Incorporate an adjustable weir plate.2. Weir plate shall allow for field vertical adjustment over life of panel

system through use of slotted bolt holes.3. Vertical Adjustment: Plus or minus 2 inches. Top of wall elevation

shown on Drawings shall be top of weir plate in centered position.



1.05 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Product Data: Catalog information and catalog cuts showing

materials, design tasks, and showing load, span, and deflection;include manufacturer’s specifications.

b. Drawings including layouts; connection and framing details;fastener types and spacing. Sealed by and Engineer Registered inthe State of Washington.

c. Specific details of manways and closure at pipe penetration.d. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cutsheets as required by

Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.


1. System calculations and anchorage and bracing calculations as requiredby Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

2. Material certifications.3. Manufacturer’s handling and storage requirements.4. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.5. Operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data, for the FRP Baffle Wall System.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Designer: Calculations required for Manufacturer’s design shall be stamped bya registered engineer, licensed in the State of Washington.

B. Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years’ experience in manufacturing of productsmeeting these specifications.


A. Preparation for Shipment:

1. Insofar as is practical, factory assemble items provided hereunder.2. Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies that are of necessity

shipped unassembled in a manner that will protect materials fromdamage, and facilitate identification and final assembly in field.



B. Storage and Handling:

1. At the time of delivery, all materials shall be inspected for shippingdamage. The freight company and the Manufacturer shall be notifiedimmediately of any damage or quantity shortages.

2. The Subcontractor shall protect FRP materials from cuts, scratches,gouges, abrasions, and impacts. When lifting crated FRP materials,spreader bars shall be used (not wire slings unless materials are fullyprotected). FRP components shall not be dragged across one anotherunless separated by a non-scratching spacer in designated areas byJacobs.


A. Subcontractor shall be responsible for verifying all field dimensions fordevelopment and approval of manufacturer’s drawings.

B. Baffle system components (excluding any associated concrete items) shall beprovided by a single manufacturer to ensure coordination and compatibility ofparts.

C. Manufacturer of baffle wall system shall have full responsibility for productsand design. Split responsibility of materials or design is not acceptable.

D. Performance Testing:

1. Materials shall comply with Federal and Local laws or ordinances,applicable codes, standards, regulations, and/or regulatory agencyrequirements including:a. ASTM D256, Standard Test Method for Izod Impact (Notched).b. ASTM D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of

Materials.c. ASTM D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of

Plastics.d. ASTM D790, Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of

Plastics.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. The standard for design, characteristics, and performance shall be based onmaterials and components provided by:

1. Enduro Systems, Inc., Houston, TX.2. NEFCO, Inc., Palm Beach Gardens, FL.3. No “or-equals” or substitutions allowed.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. FRP structural materials shall exhibit these minimum properties:

1. Tensile Strength: 40,000 psi ASTM D638.2. Flexural Strength: 45,000 psi ASTM D790.3. Flexural Modulus: 1,600,000 psi ASTM D790.4. Izod Impact (Notched): 25 ASTM D256.5. Water Absorption: 25 percent maximum ASTM D570.

B. FRP Baffle Panels:

1. FRP baffle panels shall be a ribbed profile in minimum 2.75-inch depth by24-inch height coverage (full panel dimension).

2. FRP baffle panels shall be a minimum of 1/4-inch (0.25-inch) thick.3. FRP baffle panels shall have (top) horizontal ribs that slope downward

not less than 10 degrees to minimize sediment build-up.4. FRP perforated baffle panels (as required and detailed on Drawings) shall

have factory drilled 2.5-inch diameter holes for 5 percent void area(maximum).

5. FRP baffle panels shall comply with the structural requirements in DesignCriteria.

6. FRP material shall include glass fiber reinforcements 40 percent(minimum) of the material weight embedded within UV StabilizedPolyester Resin. Color shall be standard gray.

7. FRP material shall have a surfacing veil on both sides.8. Factory cut edges and drilled holes shall be sealed with ANSI/NSF

approved material.

C. FRP Structural Framing and Angles:

1. FRP framing shall comply with the structural requirements in DesignCriteria. FRP columns may be knee or top braced.



2. FRP angles shall be a minimum of 3/8-inch (0.375 inch) thickness and90 degrees.

3. FRP material shall include glass fiber reinforcements 50 percent(minimum) of the material weight embedded within UV StabilizedPolyester Resin. Color shall be standard gray.

4. FRP material shall have a surfacing veil on both sides.5. Factory cut edges and drilled holes shall be sealed with ANSI/NSF

approved material.

D. Other Structural Components (if Indicated on Drawings):

1. Column base plates or angles shall be Type 304 stainless steel or FRP.2. Fasteners, Anchorage, and Other Structural Hardware: Type 316

stainless steel.3. All submerged anchors shall be adhesive concrete anchors per

Section 05 05 19, Post-Installed Anchors.

E. Doors/Manways: Hinged doors/manways, locations and size as shown onDrawings, shall be factory fabricated by the FRP baffle system manufacturer.Hinges shall be suitable for submersible application and constructed ofType 304 stainless steel or FRP. Manways shall remain in the closed positionby latching mechanism.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install plumb or level, rigid and neat, as applicable.

C. Furnish fasteners and anchorages for complete installation.

D. Seal field cut holes, edges, and abrasions with catalyzed resin compatible withoriginal resin.

E. Panels shall be fabricated of a width and length to allow for installation.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 THERMAL INSULATIONJANUARY 2020 07 21 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 07 21 00THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): E84, Standard Test Method for SurfaceBurning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Manufacturer’s product literature identifying products proposed

for use.b. Drawings or letter indicating proposed locations of holes for

injection of foam-in-place insulation in exposed walls.


A. On packaging clearly identify manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicablestandard, and R-value.

B. Store materials off ground and keep them dry. Protect against weather,condensation, and damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MASONRY FILL INSULATION

A. Foam-in-Place Insulation:

1. R-Value at 1 Inch Thickness: 4.6, minimum.2. Foam Density: 0.72 pounds per cubic foot.3. Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E84:

a. Flame Spread: 25, maximum.b. Smoke Developed: 200, maximum.

4. Water Vapor Transmission: 17 perms, maximum.


THERMAL INSULATION PW\DEN003\70833507 21 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


5. Manufacturers and Products:a. cfiFoam, Inc.; Core Foam Masonry Foam Insulation.b. C.P. Chemical Co., Inc.; Tripolymer PRMIU or 105.c. “Or-equal.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FOAM-IN-PLACE INSULATION

A. Foam-in-Place Insulation:

1. Inject foam into ungrouted cells of concrete masonry units throughholes drilled in mortar joints at interior face of wall in accordance withmanufacturer’s instructions. Locate holes in inconspicuous locations, asapproved by Engineer.

2. Upon completion, clean excess foam from face of masonry inaccordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Fill and patch holes with mortar in accordance with Section 04 22 00,Concrete Unit Masonry.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELSJANUARY 2020 07 41 13 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 07 41 13METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated


b. A792/A792M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

c. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-AlloySheet and Plate.

d. C1311, Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.e. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt

Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.f. D523, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.g. D1970, Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer

Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep RoofingUnderlayment for Ice Dam Protection.

h. D2178, Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used inRoofing and Waterproofing.

i. E283, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of AirLeakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and DoorsUnder Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

j. E331, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of ExteriorWindows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform StaticAir Pressure Difference.

k. E903, Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance,and Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres.

l. E1646, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of ExteriorMetal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air PressureDifference.

m. E1680, Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage throughExterior Metal Roof Panel Systems.

2. FM (Factory Mutual) Global (FMG):a. Approval Guide.b. 4471, Approval Standard for Class 1 Panel Roofs.


METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS PW\DEN003\70833507 41 13 - 2 JANUARY 2020


3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association(SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

4. UL: 580, Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Drawings showing thickness and dimensions of partsand accessories, fastening and anchoring methods, details, and locationsof seams, joints, and other provisions for thermal movement. Distinguishbetween factory-assembled and field-assembled work. Include drawingsat not less than 1/4-inch to 1-foot scale and details at not less than 3-inchto 1-foot scale.

2. Samples:a. Sheet Metal Roofing: 12-inch square Samples of specified metal

for color verification. Custom color may be required.b. Insulated Metal Roof and Wall Panels: 12-inch square Samples of

specified metal for each type of panel for color verification.Custom color may be required.

c. Samples will be reviewed for color and texture only.


1. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.2. A letter from roofing manufacturer stating roofer is approved by

manufacturer to apply the roof.3. Preinstallation Conference meeting minutes.4. Special guarantee.


A. Applicator’s Qualifications: Approved and trained by materials manufacturer.

B. Roofing Preinstallation Conference:

1. Before starting metal roof installation, conduct a conference withEngineer, roofing applicator, roofing system materials manufacturer,Subcontractors likely to be on roof, and installers whose work affectsmetal roof installation.

2. Items to be reviewed and discussed include, but are not limited to, thefollowing items:a. Examine roof deck or substrate conditions for compliance with

requirements for flatness and tolerance of structural members.



b. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck or purlins andrafters during roofing installation.

c. Review flashing details, roof drainage, roof insulation, roofpenetrations, and other construction and conditions that mightaffect metal roof panel installation.

d. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance,certificates, and testing and inspecting as applicable.

e. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof panelsduring and after installation.


A. Delivery: Deliver components and metal roof and wall panels so as not to bedamaged or deformed. Package for protection during transportation andhandling.

B. Storage and Handling:

1. Protect against damage and discoloration.2. Handle panels with nonmarring slings.3. Do not bend panels.4. Store panels aboveground on pallets or platforms, with one end elevated

for drainage.5. Protect strippable protective covering from exposure to sunlight except

as necessary for metal roof and wall installation.6. Stack panels to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide

ventilation.7. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent

surfaces.8. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean

cloth, and separate sheets for air-drying.9. During storage prevent contact with materials that may cause

discoloration or staining.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal roof installation with flashing and trim as specified inSection 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

B. Coordinate work with construction of decks, walls, and other adjoining work.




1.06 SPECIAL GUARANTEE

A. Provide manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named asbeneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall providefor correction or, at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement ofroofing panels, flashing, finish, and accessories found defective during a periodof 20 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations forcorrection or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specifiedthe General Conditions.

B. Conditions:

1. Roofing Panels: No rupture, structural failure, or perforation.2. Finish (for all panels): No cracking, blistering, flaking, chipping,

checking, chalking, peeling, or fading.3. Components: Watertight and weathertight with normal usage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CANOPY ROOF PANELS

A. Material: Prefinished Galvalume/Zincalume, ASTM A792 Aluminum-ZincAlloy coating designation Grade 40, ASTM A792/A792M coated steel,24-gauge.

B. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

C. Finish:

1. Polyvinylidene Fluoride: Kynar 500, two coats minimum.

D. Color: Color as scheduled on Drawings.

E. Standing Seam, Seamed Joint:

1. Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribssymmetrically space between vertical ribs designed for independent fieldinstallation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealedclips located under one side of panel and engaging opposite edge ofadjacent panels and mechanically seaming panels together.

2. Panel Coverage: Minimum 16 inches, maximum18 inches.3. Panel Height: 2 inches.4. Sealant: Factory applied.



5. Manufacturers and Products: Basis of Design.a. Centria; SDP200.b. Kingspan; SLR Series.c. AEP Span, SpanSeam.d. “Or-equal.”

2.02 INSULATED PANELS

A. Insulated Metal Roof Panels:

1. Materials and Configuration: Factory-assembled insulated preformedmetal panels with manufacturer’s standard concealed fasteners, tongueand groove interlock and standing seam system.a. Core: Insulating polyisocyanurate foam bonded to face sheets.b. Thickness: As required for thermal value specified.c. Thermal Value: Minimum R-Value of 10.d. Width: 42-inch maximum.e. Interior and Exterior Skin: 24-gauge, embossed sheet metal panels

with minor ribs between 2-inch high standing seams meetingASTM A792/A792M, Grade 50, minimum.

f. Exterior Finish: Factory-applied, 70 percent fluoropolymercoating, dry film thickness of 1.0 mil including primer, in customcolor as scheduled on Drawings.

g. Interior Finish:1) Factory applied polyester, DFT 1.0 mil minimum.2) Color: White.

2. Insulated Roof Panel System:a. Panels shall be one piece from eave to ridge, with concealed

anchor clips and fasteners to purlins to allow for thermalmovement over 120-degree ambient temperature range.

b. Tested and certified to meet UL 580, Class 90 wind uplift rating.c. Manufacturers and Products: Basis of Design.

1) Centria; Versapanel Roof.2) Kingspan; KingSeam.3) Metal Span, CFR Roof Panel.4) “Or-equal.”

B. Insulated Metal Wall Panels:

1. Materials and Configuration:a. Factory-assembled insulated preformed metal panels with

manufacturer’s standard concealed fasteners, and gasketed seamsystem of double tongue and groove interlocking joint.




b. Core: Insulating polyisocyanurate foam bonded to face sheets.c. Thickness: As required for thermal value specified.d. Thermal Value: Minimum R-Value of 10.e. Width: 42-inch maximum.f. Interior and Exterior Skin: 24-gauge exterior and 26-gauge

interior, Shadowline embossed, sheet metal panels meetingASTM A792/ A792M, Grade 50, minimum.

g. Exterior Finish: Factory-applied, 70 percent fluoropolymercoating, dry film thickness of 1.0 mil including primer, in customcolor as scheduled.

h. Interior Finish:1) Factory applied polyester, DFT 1.0 mil minimum.2) Color: White.

i. Manufacturers and Products: Basis of Design.1) Centria, VersaWall.2) Kingspan; KS Series, Shadowline.3) Metal Span, Thermalsafe.4) “Or-equal.”

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Self-Adhering Underlayment:

1. Ice and water shield, cold applied, self-adhering, polyethylene-facedsheet, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film reinforcing topsurface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive with release-paperbacking, 40-mil minimum thickness meeting ASTM D1970.

2. Manufacturers and Products:a. Grace Construction Products; Grace Ice & Water Shield.b. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing; CCW WIP 300HT Water

and Ice Protection.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal by means ofplastic caps or factory-applied coating.

1. Fasteners: Self-drilling or self-tapping Type 410 stainless steel or zinc-alloy steel hex washer head with EPDM or PVC washer.

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Self-drilling screws with hex washerhead or blind fastener rivets of high-strength aluminum or stainless steel.



C. Holddown Clips: System manufacturer’s ASTM A792/A792M standard shapesteel.

D. Closures: Manufacturer’s standard neoprene blocks shaped to fit roof metalprofile.

E. Sealant:

1. Joint Sealant: Type 5 as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.2. Butyl Sealant: Butyl-rubber based, solvent-release sealant per

ASTM C1311.

F. Isolation Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal roof, wall and canopy roof panels, and accessories atfactory to the greatest extent possible.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and any intermediate stiffening ribsfor full panel length.

C. Panel Length: Roof and canopy roof panels shall be full length from eave toridge, unless otherwise indicated or limited by shipping limitations.

D. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof and canopy roof panel joints withfactory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal andprevent metal-to-metal contact.

E. Form and fabricate sheets, cleats, edge treatments, integral flashings, and othercomponents of specified metal roofing panels to profiles, patterns, anddrainage arrangement shown, and as required for permanent leakproofconstruction, and as recommended by SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet MetalManual.”

F. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of Work.

G. Conceal fasteners and methods of expansion where possible. Do not useexposed fasteners on faces of accessories where exposed to view.

H. Finishes:

1. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying astrippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.




2. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable ifthey are within one-half the range of approved sample. Noticeablevariations within same piece are not acceptable. Variations in othercomponent appearances are acceptable if within range of approvedsamples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with alignment tolerancesrequired by metal roof panel manufacturer.

B. Prior to beginning installation, examine rough-in location for items penetratingmetal roof panels and coordinate with seam locations.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Deck: Firm, dry, free of foreign materials, and smooth. Report immediately toEngineer cracks, breaks, holes, or other unusual irregularities in surface.

B. Layout Pattern:

1. Lay out to place seams equidistant from corners and aligned with seamson other side of hip or ridge.

2. Coordinate Work of this section with flashing, trim, and otherconstruction to provide a permanently leakproof, secure, andnoncorroding installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Apply roofing only in dry weather and where weather conditions permit.2. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and

warranty requirements.3. Comply with recommendations of the SMACNA “Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual.”4. Install metal roofing system consisting of nonstructural sheet metal

panels held to substrate with concealed fasteners.5. Conceal expansion joint provisions wherever possible in exposed Work;

locate so as to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fastenersand anchors as required for a tight installation.



6. Closures and Trim:a. Provide eaves, rakes, and other exposed trim and flashing for a

weather-tight roofing system.b. Provide metal closures at peaks and rake edges.c. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves,

rakes, and at perimeter of openings. Fasten with self-tappingscrews.

7. Dissimilar Metals:a. Separate from each other where electrolysis might occur.b. Separate metal panels where contact with corrosive substrates may

occur.c. Separation is satisfactorily accomplished by coating metals with

isolation paint.d. Comply with various metals producers’ recommendations for other

forms of protection against contamination from corrosive materialsor agents.

8. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run overand off the material.

9. Cutting and Fitting: Neat, square, and true. Saw cut panels, deburr, anduse touchup paint immediately as recommended by roofing panelmanufacturer. Torch cutting is prohibited.

B. Insulated Metal Roof, Insulated Metal Wall, and Canopy Roof Panels:

1. Install as recommended by metal panel manufacturer’s installationinstructions and recommendations.

2. Begin at eaves. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allowridge end free movement for thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Install clips in panel side joints at location, spacing, and with fasteners asrecommended by manufacturer for type of substrate and wind loadingspecified.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning:

1. At the end of each day sweep metal clean of foreign materials, especiallymetal particles and scrap.

2. Peel off strippable film.3. Where needed, clean metals in conformance with metals industry

recommendations or use Basic H organic metal cleaner, ShakleeProducts, Hayward, CA.




B. Protection:

1. Protect material from exposure to chlorides, hydrochloric-based andmuriatic acids. If contaminated, wash affected areas immediately with5 percent soda and water solution and rinse with clear water.

2. Avoid walking on roof after completion.

C. Final Cleanup:

1. Remove debris, metal clips, nails, and other materials that could preventadequate drainage or produce corrosion products through electrolysis.

2. Repair and touch up damage.3. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated

beyond successful repair.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-JANUARY 2020 MONOMER ROOFING©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 07 53 23 - 1

SECTION 07 53 23ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM):a. C1289, Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular

Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.b. D41, Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,

Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.c. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt

Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.d. D312, Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing.e. D4637, Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in

Single-Ply Roof Membrane.f. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.g. E108, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

2. FM (Factory Mutual) Global (FM):a. DS 1-28, Wind Loads.b. DS 1-29, Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roofing

Components.c. FM 1-33, Safeguarding Torch-Applied Roof Installations.d. FM 1-49, Perimeter Flashing.e. FM 1-52, Field Uplift Tests.f. 4450, Approval Standard for Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs.

3. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code (IBC).4. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Waterproofing

Manual.5. Single Ply Roofing Institute (SPRI): ES-1, Wind Design Standard for

Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems.6. UL:

a. 790, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.b. 1256, Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions.


ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE- PW\DEN003\708335MONOMER ROOFING JANUARY 202007 53 23 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Layout of tapered insulation.2. Layout and details of fully adhered system, including perimeter

conditions, roof curb and drain demonstrating conformance to projectdesign details.

3. List of materials proposed for use including roofing materials,accessories, insulation, and fasteners.

4. Manufacturer’s specifications selected for use, including a description ofthe complete system from the deck up.

5. Documentation that anchoring system meets uplift requirements.6. Provide Samples of specified metal coping in manufacturer’s standard

colors for verification of color selection.


1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance withSection 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.3. A letter or other documentation from roofing materials manufacturer

stating that installer has been trained and approved to apply the roof.4. Sample copy of guarantee to be provided.5. Record of Preroofing Conference.6. Inspection reports for inspections conducted by membrane

manufacturer’s representative, including written instructions orrecommendations as conditions to special guarantee.

7. Operation and Maintenance Data:a. As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance

Data.b. Include sketches where applicable; recommendations for periodic

inspections, care, and maintenance; identify common causes ofdamage with instructions for temporary patching until permanentrepair can be made.

8. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation per Section 01 43 33,Manufacturers’ Field Services, (or alternately, test results orcalculations) that assure item’s and its anchorage’s design criteria meetsrequirements of Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loadsprovided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.



1.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Roof Assembly Classification:

1. FM Class 1 Construction.2. Meet requirements of FM DS 1-28 for roof design based on 85 mph

wind speed, surface roughness exposure ‘C’, importance factor of 1 anda safety factor of 2.

B. Low Slope Membrane Roof Edge Securement:

1. Conform to SPRI ES-1 for wind speeds determined from applicableedition of ICC IBC code.

2. Meet requirements of FM DS 1-49 for Class 1-75 wind rated design.


A. Installer:

1. Trained and approved by roof membrane manufacturer.2. Experience: 3 years, minimum, in the installation of the specific roofing

and flashing system specified.

B. Materials, including insulation used in roofing system, shall be furnished by orapproved by manufacturer whose roofing system is selected for use.

C. Preroofing Conference:

1. Attendees: Conduct Preroofing Conference with Engineer, roofinginstaller, roofing manufacturer, installers of related Work, and otherentities concerned with roofing performance including (where applicable)Owner’s insurer, test agencies, governing authorities, and Owner.

2. Agenda: Follow outline in NRCA’s Waterproofing Manual; includingacceptability of deck, roofing system materials, manufacturer’sspecifications selected, flashing details, roof guarantee, and protection offurnished roofing system.

3. Record discussions and agreements; furnish copy to each participant andentity invited.

D. Membrane manufacturer’s inspection as required to meet conditions ofguarantee.




A. Deliver materials in their original, unopened containers, clearly labeled withmanufacturer’s name, brand name, and such identifying numbers as areappropriate.

B. Storage:

1. Store materials at temperatures between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F.Should they be exposed to lower temperatures, restore to 60 degrees Fprior to use.

2. Store rigid roof insulation materials on clean, raised platform.3. Do not store uncured flashing membrane on roof or at temperatures

exceeding 75 degrees F.

C. Protect materials against wetting, moisture absorption, and construction traffic.


A. Weather: Do not install roofing during precipitation or when it is probable.

B. Temperature:

1. Install roofing when ambient temperature is 50 degrees F or above.2. When temperature is below 50 degrees F, install only with approval of,

and under supervision of, membrane manufacturer.


A. Product: Furnish manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Ownernamed as beneficiary, in writing as special guarantee. Special guarantee shallprovide for correction or removal and replacement of roofing membrane,flashing, insulation, and accessories found defective during a period of 20 yearsafter date of Substantial Completion, with no dollar limit. Duties andobligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shallbe as specified in General Conditions.

B. Coverage and Conditions:

1. Costs for repairs required to maintain roofing system, flashing, copings,and roof penetrations in watertight condition.

2. Natural deterioration of roofing system as a result of ordinary wear andtear by elements.

3. Defects as a result of faulty materials or workmanship during application.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carlisle SynTec, Inc.; Sure-Seal Systems.

B. Firestone Building Products; RubberGard EPDM.

C. Johns Manville; EPDM Single Ply.

2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM

A. Complete system including:

1. Rigid roof insulation and tapered insulation.2. Membrane.3. Flashings.4. Coping.5. Fasteners and accessory materials.

B. Meeting these specifications and approval and warranty of membranemanufacturer to provide a fully adhered EPDM system.

2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. Membrane: ASTM D4637, Type I, nonreinforced minimum 0.060-inch-thickEthylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) compounded elastomer.

B. Membrane Sheet Size: Maximum largest sheet possible, determined by Projectconditions.

C. Color: Black. Color coated black membrane is not acceptable.

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Furnish bonding adhesive, splicing primer and cement, vulcanizing tape,pourable sealant, lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, night seal, and prefabricatedpipe seals approved by membrane manufacturer.

B. Flashings: EPDM, 0.090 inch thick.

C. Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type III.

D. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.



E. Treated Wood Nailers: Preservative treated wood as specified inSection 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry.

2.05 RIGID ROOF INSULATION

A. Average Aged R-Value for Total Thickness of Rigid Roof Insulation:Minimum R equals 38.

B. Insulation Board:

1. Use the following materials:a. Polyisocyanurate Foam Board:

1) ASTM C1289, Type II, with Factory Mutual Class Iapproval, minimum size: 2 feet by 4 feet, as manufacturedby:a) Carlise; Polyisocyanurate HP-H.b) Firestone Building Products; ISO 95+.c) Johns Manville; E’NRG’Y 3.

b. Tapered Board System:1) Factory precut or field-tapered insulation board, minimum

1 inch thick with top surface cut to a uniform, continuousslope of 1/4 inch per foot.

2) Fabricate miters and edges to match abutting blocks.3) Maximum aged thermal conductance value “C” at the

average thickness of the insulation shall be0.05 Btu/hr/sq ft/degree F, or as shown.

4) Manufacturers and Products:a) Carlise; Polyisocyanurate HP-H.b) Firestone; ISO 95+ Tapered.c) Johns Manville; Tapered E’NRG’Y 3.

2.06 ROOF WALKWAYS

A. Nonskid black molded rubber walk pads, 30 inches by 30 inches by 3/8-inchnominal.

B. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Carlisle SynTec; EPDM Walkway Pads.2. Firestone; RubberGard Quickseam Walkway Pads.3. Johns Manville; UltraGard EPDM Walkway Pads.



2.07 COPING SYSTEM

A. Snap-on system, stucco embossed pattern aluminum, 0.050-inch minimumthickness.

B. Include ancillary items, such as mitered and welded corners, and end caps,where shown and as required for complete system.

C. Configuration: Tapered with face sizes as shown on Drawings.

D. Finish: Factory finished with full strength fluoropolymer coating (Kynarpolyvinylidene fluoride resin) in color as indicated in Exterior Finish Scheduleon Drawings.


1. Johns Manville; Presto Lock Coping System.2. Firestone Building Products Co.; Coping.3. Carlisle SynTec; Secure Edge 300 Parapet Wall Coping.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Verify deck is firm, dry, clean, free of sharp edges, burrs, loose and foreignmaterials, oil, and grease.

B. Report immediately to Engineer cracks, breaks, holes, or other unusualirregularities in the surface.

C. Nailers:

1. Install wooden nailer where required to fasten metal coping.2. Firmly anchor nailers to resist a force of 75 pounds per linear foot in all

directions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install a complete UL listed Class A system of compatible materials that willcreate a monolithic watertight single-ply roof membrane.

B. In accordance with membrane manufacturer’s instructions for installation ofcomplete, warrantable roof system.



C. In accordance with membrane manufacturer’s standard details for flashing andtermination conditions.

D. Flashing: Install perimeter, drains and other detail flashing as shown onDrawings and required by Manufacturer.

E. Roof Walkways: Adhere to membrane with bonding adhesive in walkwaypattern as shown on Drawings.

F. Meet FM Loss Prevention Data 1-28 requirements for I-90 wind uplift rating.

3.03 PREFABRICATED METAL COPING

A. In accordance with applicable recommendations of FM DS 1-49 andmanufacturer’s installation recommendations.

3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install thickness necessary for R-value R equals 38 in two or more layers.

B. Provide sumps around roof drains.

C. Fasten insulation so that it will meet uplift requirements of FM Global.

D. Position boards of first layer so end joints are staggered and edges parallel todeck span are supported by roof deck.

E. Install additional layers with joints staggered or offset from those below.

F. On Metal Roof Deck:

1. Mechanically fasten 100 percent with a FM Global approved fastener inpattern and quantity recommended by insulation or mechanical fastenermanufacturer to meet FM Global requirements.

2. Provide a minimum of one fastener per 2 square feet of insulation board,unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.

G. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membranebefore end of day or start of inclement weather.




A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site in accordance withSection 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for installation assistance,inspection and certification of proper installation, and training of Owner’spersonnel for maintaining specified system.

B. Provide Engineer with copies of inspection reports.

3.06 CLEANUP

A. Remove spots and smears of adhesive, sealant, asphalt, or other materialresulting from the Work in this section from flashing, gravel stops, and othersurfaces not intended to be coated with such material.

B. During removal of spots and smears, ensure no damage will be done to thesurfaces.

C. Use solvents, if necessary, to satisfactorily clean the materials.


A. Limit traffic of personnel and equipment on completed roof to that deemedessential for completion of Project.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIMJANUARY 2020 07 62 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 07 62 00SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware.b. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-


c. A924/A924M Standard Specification for General Requirementsfor Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

d. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.e. C1311, Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.f. D1187/D1187M, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base

Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal.2. FM Global (FM): Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, Perimeter Flashing.3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association

(SMACNA): 1793, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim shall withstand wind loads, structuralmovement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather withoutfailing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Wind Zone 1: For velocity pressures of 2-foot-pounds to 30-foot-pounds persquare foot, 60-foot-pounds per square foot perimeter uplift force,90-foot-pounds per square foot corner uplift force, and 30-foot-pounds persquare foot outward force.


SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PW\DEN003\70833507 62 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


C. Thermal Movements:

1. Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermalmovements resulting from the following maximum change (range) inambient and surface temperatures for preventing buckling, opening ofjoints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of jointsealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient;

180 degrees F, material surfaces.2. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of

sheet metal and trim thermal movements.

D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that does not allowwater infiltration to building interior.


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA 1793.Conform to dimensions and profiles shown, unless more stringentrequirements are indicated.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Show joints, types and location of fasteners, and special shapes.b. Catalog data for stock manufactured items.

2. Samples: Color Samples for items to be factory finished.

1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Inspect for damage, dampness, and wet storage stains upon delivery to Site.

B. Remove and replace damaged or permanently stained materials that cannot berestored to like-new condition.

C. Carefully handle to avoid damage to surfaces, edges, and ends.

D. Do not open packages until ready for use.

E. Store materials in dry, weathertight, ventilated areas until immediately beforeinstallation.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL

A. Prefinished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A924/A924M, Grade A orASTM A653/ A653M, G90 zinc coating; 24-gauge (0.02-inch) core steel, shopprefinished with fluoropolymer coating (Kynar polyvinylidene fluoride resin)coating; color as scheduled on Drawings.


A. Isolation Paint: ASTM D1187/D1187M, asphalt.

B. Isolation Tape: Butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced, or 20-mil-thickminimum polyester.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; oftype, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metalflashing and trim and remain watertight.

D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubbersealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansionjoints with limited movement.

E. Fasteners:

1. Galvanized Steelwork: Steel, galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M orstainless steel fasteners.

2. Nails: Roofing nailhead, 10-gauge spiral or ring shank, lengths asrequired to penetrate wood at least 3/4 inch or as required in ArticlePerformance Requirements.

2.03 FABRICATION OF TRIM

A. Field measure prior to fabrication.

B. Fabricate sheet metal trim in thickness or weight needed to comply withperformance requirements, but not less than that specified for each applicationand metal.

C. Fabricate sheet metal trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and toolmarks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back toform hems.

D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tinedges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.


SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PW\DEN003\70833507 62 00 - 4 JANUARY 2020


E. Reinforcements and Supports: Provide same material as flashing, unless othermaterial is shown. Steel, where shown or required, shall be galvanized orstainless.

F. Rigid Joints and Seams: Make mechanically strong.

G. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal toaccommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNArecommendations.

H. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions inthe Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hookedflanges, not less than 1-inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed withinjoints.

I. Fabricate sheet metal in 10-foot maximum lengths, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Provide watertight closures at exposed ends of counterflashing.

K. Fabricate corners in one-piece with legs extending 30 inches each way to fieldjoint. Lap, rivet, or solder corner seams watertight. Apply sealant if necessary.

L. Neutralize soldering flux.

M. Solvent clean sheet metal. Surfaces to be in contact with roofing or otherwiseconcealed shall be coated with isolation paint.

N. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.

O. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessorybeing anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA 1793 and FM LossPrevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thicknessof metal being secured.

2.04 FABRICATION OF SCUPPER

A. Form scupper to shape and size indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof curbs are solidly set.



B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, andsecure.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Trim:

1. General:a. Install sheet metal trim to comply with performance requirements

and SMACNA 1793.b. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line,

and level as indicated.c. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently

watertight.2. Use only stainless steel fasteners to connect isolated dissimilar metals.3. Joints: 10-foot maximum spacing and 2-1/2 feet from corners, butted

with 3/16-inch space centered over matching 8-inch long backing platewith sealing tape in laps.

4. Joints, Fastening, Reinforcements, and Supports: Sized and located asrequired to preclude distortion or displacement as a result of thermalexpansion and contraction.

B. Scupper: Install scupper as indicated on Drawings.

3.03 FINISH

A. Exposed Surfaces of Sheet Metalwork: Free of dents, scratches, abrasions, orother visible defects, and clean and ready for painting where applicable.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniformoxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metaltrim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces,including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, andpieces of trim. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal trim that have been damaged or that have deterioratedbeyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 ROOF SPECIALTIESJANUARY 2020 AND ACCESSORIES©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 07 70 01 - 1

SECTION 07 70 01ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing materials, details,flashing, anchorage, and relation to adjacent structure.

2. Catalog cuts of each item specified item.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FLEXIBLE BASE PIPE SEALS

A. Prefabricated one-piece aluminum flanged base with stepped, graduated EPDMcap and adjustable stainless steel clamps. Aluminum base shall be capable ofbending to match profile of sheet metal roofing panels.


1. Pate Co.; Dektite.2. Portals Plus, Inc.; Deck-Mate.

2.02 ROOF HATCHES

A. Material: Aluminum, 11-gauge with factory-insulated curb and cover.

B. Factory assembled units consisting of:

1. Curb: Double-wall with 1-inch insulation, fully welded corner joints,integral flashing and mounting flanges.

2. Cover: Double-wall with 1-inch insulation, fully welded corner joints,and internally reinforced for 40 psf live load.

3. Furnish EPDM rubber gasketing and corrosion resistant hardwareincluding pintle hinges, hold-open devices, interior padlock hasps, andboth interior and exterior handles.

4. Hatch Rail System: Attached to the capflashing of the roof hatch andshall not penetrate any roofing material. Provided with self-closing gate.a. Posts and Rails: Round pultruded reinforced fire retardant yellow

fiberglass treated with a UV inhibitor.


ROOF SPECIALTIES PW\DEN003\708335AND ACCESSORIES JANUARY 202007 70 01 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

b. UV and corrosion resistant construction.

C. Curb Height: 8 inches minimum clearance above roofing membrane.

D. Performance Characteristics: Miami-Dade Product approved, meeting largeand small missile impact requirements.


1. Size: 3 feet by 2.5 feet.a. Bilco; S-50.b. Babcock-Davis; B-RHA Series.c. JL Industries; RHA-1.


A. Isolation Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

B. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete or dissimilar metals asspecified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

C. Isolation Tape: Butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced, or 20-mil thickminimum polyester.

D. Fasteners: Stainless steel of type required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine surfaces and structures to receive the Work of this section.

B. Take measurements at Site and fabricate work to suit. No changes shall bemade in supporting structure to accommodate this Work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install roof specialties and accessories as detailed in approved shopdrawings and in conformance with manufacturer’s instructions,recommendations, and standards.

2. Use appropriate flexible base pipe seal where pipe, conduit, or cable,etc., penetrate roofing membrane.


PW\DEN003\708335 ROOF SPECIALTIESJANUARY 2020 AND ACCESSORIES©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 07 70 01 - 3

3. Factory Finished Units: Place color variations in pieces so no extremesare next to each other.

4. Make Work weathertight and free of expansion and contraction noise.5. Maintain separation between aluminum surfaces and concrete or

dissimilar metals as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

B. Roof Hatches: Install to operate freely and not rattle when closed or open.

1. Provide fasteners necessary for installing hatch rail system on hatch.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 JOINT SEALANTSJANUARY 2020 07 92 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 07 92 00JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM):a. C661, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of

Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer.b. C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.c. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.d. C1193, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Surface preparation instructions. Indicate where eachproduct is proposed to be used.

2. Samples: Material proposed for use showing color range available.


1. Installation instructions.2. Documentation showing applicator qualifications.3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.4. Special guarantee.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years’ experience installing sealants inprojects of similar scope.


A. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 degrees F and 80 degrees F (4 degrees Cand 27 degrees C) when sealant is applied. Consult manufacturer when sealantcannot be applied within these temperature ranges.


JOINT SEALANTS PW\DEN003\70833507 92 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020



A. Product: Furnish manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Ownernamed as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shallprovide for correction or, at the option of the Owner, removal and replacementof Work specified in this section found defective during a period of 5 yearsafter the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correctionor removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in theGeneral Conditions.

B. Conditions: No adhesive or cohesive failure of sealant.

C. Sealed Joints: Watertight and weathertight with normal usage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Characteristics:

1. Uniform, homogeneous.2. Free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed.3. Nonstaining, nonbleeding.4. Hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum, measured by ASTM C661

method.5. Immersible may be substituted for nonimmersible.

B. Color: Unless specifically noted, match color of the principal material adjoiningarea of application.

C. Type 1—Silicone, Nonsag, Nonimmersible:

1. Silicone base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S,Grade NS, Class 25.

2. Capable of withstanding movement up to 50 percent of joint width.3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Dow Corning Corp.; No. 790.b. General Electric; Silpruf.c. BASF; Sonneborn, Omniseal-50.

D. Type 5—One-part Polyurethane, Immersible:

1. Polyurethane base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS or P, Class 25.



2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water.3. Manufacturers and Products for Nonsag:

a. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex-1a.b. Tremco; Vulkem 116.

4. Manufacturers and Products for Self-leveling:a. BASF; MasterSeal, SL-1.b. Tremco; Vulkem 45.c. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex 1c SL.

E. Type 6—One-part Polyurethane, Nonimmersible:

1. Polyurethane base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.

2. Manufacturers and Products:a. Pecora Corp.; Dynatrol 1 XL.b. Tremco; Dymonic.c. BASF; Sonneborn, NP-I.

F. Type 7—Multipart Polysulfide, Immersible:

1. Polysulfide base, two-component, chemical curing; ASTM C920,Type M, Grade P or NS, Class 25.

2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water.3. For use abovegrade and belowgrade.4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. W. R. Meadows; Deck-O-Seal Gun Grade, two-part.b. BASF; Sonolastic, two-part Polysulfde.

G. Type 8—One-part Polysulfide, Nonsag, Nonimmersible:

1. Polysulfide base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 12 1/2.

2. Capable of withstanding movement up to 20 percent of joint width.3. Manufacturer and Product: W. R. Meadows; Deck-O-Seal, one-part.

H. Type 12—One-part Polycarbonate, Immersible:

1. Polycarbonate base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.

2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water.3. Manufacturer and Product: Pro-Seal Products, Inc.; Pro-Seal 34.




I. Type 13—Tape Sealant:

1. Compressible polyurethane foam impregnated with polybutylene orpolymer-modified asphalt.

2. Color: Black.3. Size: 3/4 inch wide by length required by expanded thickness

recommended by manufacturer for particular application.4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd.; AST—High Acrylic.b. Dayton Superior; Polytite Standard.c. PARR Technologies; PARR Sealant EP-7212-T.

2.02 BACKUP MATERIAL

A. Nongassing, extruded, closed-cell round polyurethane foam or polyethylenefoam rod, compatible with sealant used, and as recommended by sealantmanufacturer.

B. Size: As shown or as recommended by sealant material manufacturer. Providefor joints greater than 3/16 inch wide.


1. BASF; Sonneborn, Sonolastic Closed-cell Backing Rod.2. Tremco; Closed-cell Backing Rod.3. Pecora Corporation; Green Rod.


A. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by sealantmanufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, recommended by sealantmanufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Primer: Nonstaining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suitapplication.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Use of more than one material for the same joint is not allowed unlessapproved by sealant manufacturer.



B. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193.

C. Horizontal and Sloping Joints up to 1 Percent Maximum Slope: Use self-leveling (Grade P) joint sealant.

D. Steeper Sloped Joints, Vertical Joints, and Overhead Joints: Use nonsag(Grade NS) joint sealant.

E. Use joint sealant as required for the applicable application and as follows:

Joint Size Sealant Type

Less than 1" 1, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 12

Less than 2" 1 or 7

Over 2" Follow manufacturer’s recommendation

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Verify that joint dimensions, and physical and environmental conditions, areacceptable to receive sealant.

B. Surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, sound, and free of dust, loose mortar,oil, and other foreign materials.

1. Mask adjacent surfaces where necessary to maintain neat edge.2. Starting of work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.3. Apply primer to dry surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

C. Verify joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depthratios.

E. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for mixing multi-component products.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to performintended function.

1. Install backup material as recommended by sealant manufacturer.2. Where possible, provide full length sections without splices; minimize

number of splices.




3. Tape sealant may be used as joint filler if approved by sealantmanufacturer.

B. Use bond breaker where recommended by sealant manufacturer.

C. Seal joints around window, door and louver frames, control joints, andelsewhere as indicated.

D. Joint Sealant Materials: Follow manufacturer’s recommendation andinstructions, filling joint completely from back to top, without voids.

E. Joints: Tool slightly concave after sealant is installed.

1. When tooling white or light color sealant, use a water wet tool.2. Finish joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and

sags.

F. Tape Sealant: Compress to 50 percent of expanded thickness and install inaccordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces next to the sealed joints of smears or other soiling resultant ofsealing application.

B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from joint sealing or cleaning activities.

3.05 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. This schedule lists the sealant types acceptable for each joint location. Use asfew different sealant types as possible to meet the requirements of Project.

Joint Locations Sealant Type(s)

Expansion/Contraction and Control Joints at:

Concrete Walls (except water-holding andbelowgrade portions of structures)

1, 5, 6, 12

Concrete Floor Slabs (except for water-holdingStructures)

5

Concrete Walls and Slabs immersed in waterand/or below grade

7

Slabs Subject to Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic 5



Joint Locations Sealant Type(s)

Masonry Walls 1, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13

Material Joints at:

Metal Door and Louver Frames (Exterior) 1, 5, 6, 8, 12

Metal Door and Louver Frames (Interior) 1, 5, 6, 8

Wall Penetrations (Exterior) 1, 5, 6, 8, 12

Wall Penetrations (Interior) 1, 5, 6, 8

Floor Penetrations 5, 6, 7

Roof Penetrations 5

Sheet Metal Flashings 5, 13

Sheet Metal Roofing and Siding 5, 13

Other Joints:

Threshold Sealant Bed 5

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 METAL DOORS AND FRAMESJANUARY 2020 08 11 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 08 11 00METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):a. A250.6, Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement -

Application).b. A250.8, Recommended Specification for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames.c. A250.11, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.

2. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-


b. A1008/A1008M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, SolutionHardened, and Bake Hardenable.

3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): A156.115,Hardware Preparations in Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Applicable information for each type of door and frame, including:a. Frame conditions and complete anchorage details, supplemented

by suitable schedules covering doors and frames.b. Glass opening sizes and locations in doors.c. Relate to door numbers used on Drawings.


A. Properly identify each item with number used on Drawings.

B. Store doors upright, in protected dry area, at least 1 inch off ground or floorand at least 1/4 inch between individual pieces.


METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PW\DEN003\70833508 11 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall beproducts of:

1. Curries Manufacturing.2. The Ceco Corp.3. Monarch Steelcraft, Ltd.4. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Basic Metal Material: ASTM A1008/A1008M; sheet steel, cold-rolled,stretcher level.

B. Hollow Metal Frames:

1. Products of hollow metal door manufacturer.2. ANSI 250.8, except as modified herein.3. Frames for Doors: 14-gauge, welded type, of cross-section shown.4. Prepare floor and wall anchors, reinforcement, and cutouts for hardware

to meet requirements of BHMA A156.115 and ANSI A250.6.5. Finished size, shape, and profile of frame members as shown.6. Concealed fasteners or welding are preferred to through-the-face

fasteners.7. Identification: Stamp opening number, as shown on Drawings, on center

hinge reinforcement of each frame.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: ANSI A250.8, except as modified herein.BHMA A156.115 and ANSI A250.6 to receive hardware specified in Doorand Hardware Schedule on Drawings.

1. Exterior:a. Flush Panel Doors: 16-gauge, Level 3, Model 2.b. Flush end closure at top of doors.c. R-Value: 7.

D. Glazing:

1. Doors: Furnish with formed flush-type glazing strips with butt cornerjoints to permit selection of secure side in field.

2. Glazing Arrangements: Accommodate glass of type and thicknessindicated and as specified in Section 08 80 00, Glazing.


PW\DEN003\708335 METAL DOORS AND FRAMESJANUARY 2020 08 11 00 - 3©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard anchors, fasteners, and other ancillary items.

2.04 FACTORY FINISHING REQUIREMENTS

A. One shop coat of baked-on rust-inhibiting prime coating compatible withfinish coating as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Frames:

1. Follow ANSI A250.11 and manufacturer’s instructions.a. Maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level, and maintain

jambs plumb and square.b. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.c. Wherever possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames

are set perfectly square and plumb and anchors are securelyattached.

B. Doors:

1. Hollow Metal Doors: ANSI A250.8.2. Hardware: In accordance with manufacturer’s templates and

instructions.a. Adjust operable parts for correct function.b. Remove hardware, with exception of prime coated items, tag, box,

and reinstall after finish paint work is completed.

3.02 FIELD PAINTING

A. Where prime coat has been damaged, sand smooth and touch up with sameprimer as applied at shop.

1. Remove rust before painting.2. Touch Up: Not obvious.3. Perform immediately after door and frame installation.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors and frames against damage from other constructionwork.


METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PW\DEN003\70833508 11 00 - 4 JANUARY 2020


3.04 SCHEDULES

A. For tabulation of door and frame characteristics, such as size, type, detail, andfinish hardware requirements, see Door and Hardware Schedule on Drawings.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 SPECIALTY DOORSJANUARY 2020 08 30 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 08 30 00SPECIALTY DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. The Aluminum Association, Incorporated (AA): Designation System forAluminum Finishes.

2. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.b. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated


c. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials.

d. E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance ofExterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by UniformStatic Air Pressure Difference.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA): 250,Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National ElectricalCode.

5. UL: Building Materials Directory.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Shop Drawings showing construction and installation details.b. Identify each door with same reference as used on Drawings.c. Anchorage and bracing drawings and/or catalog information, as

required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loadsprovided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

2. Samples:a. Manufacturer’s standard finishes and colors.b. Physical samples of actual factory finish on specified metal for

color verification.


SPECIALTY DOORS PW\DEN003\70833508 30 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


B. Informational Submittals: Anchorage and bracing calculations as required bySection 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided inSection 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. Submit with ActionSubmittal for the same item.


A. Qualifications: Experienced, factory authorized installer.


A. Deliver doors with separators and wrapping to protect units from damageduring and after installation.

B. Store doors in protected dry area following manufacturer’s requirements.

C. Handle doors according to manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Protect exposed finish surfaces of prefinished items with wrapping.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 OVERHEAD COILING (ROLLUP) DOORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.2. Overhead Door Corp.3. The Cookson Co.

B. Design Requirement:

1. Complete assembly, each component and anchorage to building towithstand a wind load of 30 pounds per square foot.

2. Cycle Life: Design doors of standard construction for normal use of upto 20 cycles per day maximum, and an overall maximum of50,000 operating cycles for the life of the door.

3. Insulated Door Slat Material Requirements: Flame Spread Index of 0 anda Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per ASTM E84.

C. Insulated Curtain: Interlocking insulated flat slats of 20-gauge (U.S. Standard)minimum steel with minimum R-value of 8 and backing to match face slatthermally separated from face slat.

D. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.


PW\DEN003\708335 SPECIALTY DOORSJANUARY 2020 08 30 00 - 3©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

E. Slide Guides: ASTM A36/A36M steel, shapes as appropriate for conditions.

F. Brackets, Gears, and Barrel: Manufacturer’s standard items.

G. Operation: Chain operated.

H. Locking: Manufacturer’s standard slide bolt locking mechanism.

I. Finish:

1. Steel Curtain Slats, Guides, Hood, and Brackets: Hot-dip galvanize withG90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A653, phosphate treat forpaint adhesion, and factory finish using a baked-on polyester powdercoating. Coating hardness rated at H or better in accordance withASTM D3363; minimum 2.5 mils cured film thickness. Custom color asindicated in Color List on Drawings.

2. Other Steel Surfaces including Guides and Brackets: One coat ofcorrosion-inhibiting prime paint compatible with finish paint specified inSection 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

J. Special Features:

1. Bottom Bar:a. Provide galvanized steel bottom bar with flexible weatherstripping

astragal on exterior doors.b. Finish to match curtain slats.

2. End Locks and Wind Locks:a. Ends of each slat shall have end locks of material compatible with

curtain.b. Provide wind locks at ends of every other slat minimum on exterior

doors.3. Weather Seals:

a. Provide rubber, neoprene, or vinyl water seal at hood to preventairflow around coil on exterior doors.

b. Provide weather seal sealing strip on guide to close space betweenguide and curtain on exterior doors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install special doors in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendationsand printed instructions.


SPECIALTY DOORS PW\DEN003\70833508 30 00 - 4 JANUARY 2020


B. Adjust doors for smooth, satisfactory operation.

3.02 PRIME COAT TOUCHUP

A. Damaged Prime Coat:

1. Remove rust.2. Sand smooth.3. Use same primer as shop.4. Touch up so it is not obvious.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors against damage from other construction work.

3.04 SCHEDULE

A. For tabulation of door and frame characteristics, such as size, type, detail, andfinish hardware requirements, see Door and Hardware Schedule on Drawings.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 DOOR HARDWAREJANUARY 2020 08 71 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 08 71 00DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Builders Hardware Manufacturer’s Association (BHMA):a. A156.1, Butts and Hinges.b. A156.2, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.c. A156.3, Exit Devices.d. A156.4, Door Controls - Closers.e. A156.13, Mortise Locks & Latches.f. A156.16, Auxiliary Hardware.g. A156.18, Materials and Finishes.

2. International Code Council (ICC): A117.1, Accessible and UsableBuildings and Facilities.

3. UL: Fire Protection Equipment List.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Product Data: Manufacturer’s literature for each item of finish

hardware required herein, clearly marked.b. Finish Hardware Schedule: Furnish complete and detailed

schedule, show product items, numbers, and finishes for hardwarefor each separate opening.

c. Special Tools: Provide listing and description of usage.


1. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,Operation and Maintenance Data.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance withSection 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.


DOOR HARDWARE PW\DEN003\70833508 71 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020



A. Qualifications of Supplier: Recognized supplier of architectural finishhardware, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware invicinity of Project for not less than 5 years, and who is, or who employs,architectural hardware consultant.


A. Before delivery, clearly identify and tag each item of hardware with respect tospecified description and location of installation.

B. Provide secure storage for finish hardware until installation is made.

1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Special Tools: Two sets for installation and maintenance of hardware.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide end products of one manufacturer for each product in order to achievestandardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement.

B. Finishes: BHMA A156.18.

2.02 FASTENERS

A. Stainless steel.

2.03 BUTT HINGES

A. BHMA A156.1.

B. Quantity per Door Leaf (Minimum):

Door Height Hinges

Up to 5'-0" 1 pair

5'-1" to 7'-7" 1-1/2 pair

7'-8" to 10'-0" 2 pairs

10'-1" to 12'-6" 2-1/2 pairs



C. Hinge Height (Minimum):

Door Width Hinge Height

Up to 3'-0" 4-1/2"

3'-1" to 4'-0" 5"

Over 4'-0" 6"

D. Width: Minimum for clearance of trim and 180-degree swing.

E. Exterior Hinges: Nonremoveable pin.

F. Joint Tolerance: 0.012 inch maximum, gauged in CLOSED position.

G. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630.

H. Types and Manufacturers:

No. Type Description PBB BHMA

H1 Regular weight, twoball-races, full mortise,stainless steel

4B51 5x5(No “Or-Equal”)

A5112

2.04 LOCKS AND LATCH SETS

A. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1.

1. Materials: Stainless steel.2. Trim: Wrought or forged lever handles and roses.3. Core Cylinders: Interchangeable, removable; minimum of six pins.4. Bolt Throw: 5/8 inch minimum.5. Lever Backset: 2-3/4 inches.6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Schlage; 03.b. No “or-equal.”

B. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630.

C. Types and Manufacturers:

No. Type Description Schlage BHMA

L1 Mortise entrance lockwith lever handle

L9456P-03(No “Or-Equal”)

F12, F13




D. Keying:

1. Lock Cylinders: Operate by master key system that allows for futureexpansion.

2. Keylocks: Key new locks into existing Schlage master key system asdirected by Owner.

3. Keys: Two per lock; tag with schedule information.4. Master Keys: Four; send by registered mail to Owner.5. Furnish lock manufacturer’s removable core maximum security keying

system. Confirm compatibility with existing keying.6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Schlage; 30-138.b. No “or-equal.”

2.05 CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM

A. Removable construction core system for locks.

B. See Article Manufacturer’s Services under Part 3, Execution.

2.06 CLOSERS

A. BHMA A156.4.

B. Size closers in accordance with manufacturer’s standards. Mount regular armclosers on pull side of doors. Mount parallel arm closers on push side of doors.On pair of doors provide closer on active leaf only, unless noted otherwise.

C. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard painted or powder coated finish with specialrust inhibiting (SRI) pretreatment in color selected by Engineer frommanufacturer’s standard color range.

D. Types and Manufacturers:

No. Type/Description LCN BHMA

C6 Parallel arm withintegral stop andhold-open

4110H Cush-N-StopSeries

(No “Or-Equal”)

C02061



2.07 KICKPLATES

A. Solid metal, not plated. Bevel four edges.

B. Width of door leaf less than 1-1/2 inches at single leaf and less than 1 inch atpairs.

C. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630.


1. Rockwood as follows:a. K1: 10 inches high by 0.125 inch thick.

2.08 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: One-piece full width of opening; extend beyond jamb whereindicated.

B. Provide with stainless steel machine screws in threaded expansion anchors atconcrete.

C. Finish: Mill finish aluminum, unless indicated otherwise.


No. Type Description Pemko

T1 Thermal barrier saddle (smooth,6 inches)

253-3AFG(No “Or-Equal”)

2.09 WEATHERSTRIP

A. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Seal Types and Manufacturers:

No. Type Description Pemko

W1 Rubber or vinyl bulb at jambs and head,and at meeting stiles of pairs

S88D(No “Or-Equal”)

Door shoe 222AV(No “Or-Equal”)

Rain drip 346C(No “Or-Equal”)




2.10 SILENCERS

A. Ives, Glynn-Johnson.

B. At metal frame of each hinged door that does not have seals scheduled.

C. Three at single leaves.

2.11 TEMPLATES

A. Fabricate to template hardware applied to metal doors and frames.

B. Ensure that required templates are furnished to various manufacturers forfabrication purposes.

C. Templates: Make available not more than 10 days after receipt of approvedHardware Schedule.

2.12 EXIT DOORS

A. Exit Doors: Always openable from inside by simple turn of lever handlewithout use of key or any special knowledge or effort.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. In accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Make Work neat and secure, develop full strength of components, and provideproper function.

C. Prevent marring, scratching, or otherwise damaging adjacent finishes duringhardware installation.

D. Latchbolts:

1. Install to engage in strikes automatically, whether activated by closers ormanually.

2. In no case shall additional manual pressure be required to engagelatchbolt in strike.

E. Wall Mounted Hardware: Install over solid structural backing.



F. Thresholds:

1. Cope ends neatly to profile of jamb.2. Set in sealant and seal ends to jambs.

G. Hardware: Adjust for easy, noise-free operation.

H. Replace damaged hardware items.

3.02 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

A. Standard Door Hardware Locations: As recommended and published by Doorand Hardware Institute, except as noted or detailed otherwise.

B. Door Silencers: Install 3 inches from top and bottom of jamb and 1 inch abovestrike at single doors.


A. Deliver permanent lock cores to Site.

B. Remove temporary construction cores and insert permanent cores.

C. Inspect each lock set to ensure permanent cores are operating satisfactorily.

D. Deliver to Owner change and control keys for permanent system.

E. Return temporary construction cores to manufacturer.

F. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at Site asdesignated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel timeexcluded:

1. 1/2 person-day for installation assistance, inspection, and Manufacturer’sCertificate of Proper Installation.

2. 1/2 person-day for functional and performance testing.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Cover and protect exposed surfaces of hardware during installation and untilSubstantial Completion.

B. Fit, dismantle, and reinstall finish hardware as required for finish painting work.




C. Protect and prevent staining of hardware during construction in accordancewith manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Remove protective measures and permanent lock cylinders installed prior tofinal cleaning.

3.05 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Door and Hardware Schedule on Drawings is guide to functional requirementsof each opening.

B. Provide finish hardware as scheduled. Sizes omitted shall be as recommendedby manufacturer.

3.06 HARDWARE SET

HDW-1: Item Type

1-1/2 Pair butts H1

1 Lock L1

1 Closer C6

1 Metal kickplate K1

1 Threshold T1

1 Set weatherstrip W1

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 GLAZINGJANUARY 2020 08 80 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 08 80 00GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section:

1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 800,Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants.

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z97.1, Safety GlazingMaterials Used in Buildings—Safety Performance Specifications andMethods of Test.

3. ASTM International (ASTM):a. C864, Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression

Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.b. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.c. C1036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass.d. C1172, Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat

Glass.e. E774, Standard Specifications for the Classification of the

Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.4. Glass Association of North America (GANA):

a. Glazing Manual.b. Sealant Manual.

5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):a. 80, Safety Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.b. 252, Safety Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.c. 257, Safety Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block

Assemblies.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Complete schedule of glass and glazing material to be used for

each purpose.b. Catalog cuts of glazing materials with inclusion of glass edge

cutting procedures.


GLAZING PW\DEN003\70833508 80 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


2. Samples:a. Two of each different type of glass at least 12 inches by 12 inches

properly labeled.b. Two of each different type of glazing materials.


1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for each type of glazing, inaccordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

2. Details and methods of glazing for each type of glazing condition;include manufacturer’s recommendations for setting, sealing materials,and installing each type of glazing.

3. Documentation of glazer’s previous experience and manufacturer’sapproval.


A. Factory Label Glass: Nonlabeled glass will be rejected.

B. Single Source Fabrication Responsibility: Fabrication processes, includingLow-E and reflective coatings, insulating, laminating, and tempering, shall befabricated by a single fabricator.


A. Storage:

1. Support cases on both sides when stored vertically.2. After unpacking, place interleaving protection between lites.3. Keep glass and interleaving dry by storing inside where temperatures are

above dewpoint, or if outside storage is necessary, cover the glassinterleaving with opaque tarpaulins or plastic and inspect periodically.Wet interleaving can stain glass.

4. Avoid exposing stored glass to direct sunlight.

B. Handling:

1. Stack individual lites on edge and lean them against sturdy uprights at aslope of 5 degrees to 7 degrees from vertical.

2. Cushion bottom edges with soft, firm pads free of dirt, grit, glass chips,or other foreign material.

3. Do not rotate or cartwheel insulating glass units over their corners. Useturning device such as a rolling block if units must be rotated.




A. Provide manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named asbeneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall providefor correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement ofWork specified in this Section found defective during a period of 5 years afterthe date of Substantial Completion. Guarantee to cover deterioration due tonormal conditions of use and not due to handling installing and cleaningpractices performed contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products of the following manufacturers, that meet these Specifications, maybe used on this Project:

1. AFG Industries, Inc.2. Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford Glass Co.3. PPG Industries, Inc.4. Guardian Industries, Corp.5. Viracon, Inc.6. Cardinal LG.7. Dow Corning.8. General Electric Silicones.9. Pecora Corporation.10. Tremco.

2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Glazing Quality q3,1/4-inch, (6 mm) minimum thickness.

B. Laminated Safety Glass (S.G.): ASTM C1172, 7 mm minimum total thickness,consisting of two lights of float glass, bonded to minimum 0.030-inch clearpolyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer, meeting 16 CFR 1201, Class 1(transparent), as applicable, and ANSI Z97.1 and testing of 16 CFR 1201 forCategory II materials.

C. Tempered Glass:

1. ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Quality Q3, Kind FT fullytempered, Condition A uncoated, float glass with horizontal tempering.




2. Furnish tempered glass where heat strengthened glass cannot meetspecified performance requirements.

D. Tinted Insulating Glass (IG-T): Insulating glass units with 1/2-inch argon filledspace, specified Tempered Glass outboard and laminated safety glass inboard,with Low E coating on No. 3 surface, with maximum U-value of 0.55 andmaximum shading coefficient of 0.40, meeting ASTM E774, Class C,warranted by manufacturer against failure of edge sealing for minimum10 years from date of manufacture.


A. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864 Option neoprene, 70 Shore A durometerhardness, chemically compatible with sealant used.

B. Glazing Tape: Preformed, semisolid, polymeric-based material of proper sizeand compressibility. Use only where glazing rabbet is designed for tape andtape is recommended by glass or sealant manufacturer.

C. Glazing Sealant: One-component nonsag silicone elastomeric sealantASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use G, or AAMA 800.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Do not perform glazing work in damp, foggy, or rainy weather, or whentemperatures are not within range recommended by GANA “Glazing Manual.”

B. Surfaces: Smooth, even, sound, dry, and clean.

C. Measure size of frames to receive glass and compute actual glass size allowingfor edge clearances.

D. Use insulated glass (IG-T) at all doors, unless scheduled otherwise.

E. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected.



3.02 GLAZING INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Follow recommendations of glass manufacturer GANA “SealantManual,” GANA “Glazing Manual,” and the following:a. Positioning Glass:

1) Set glass with equal bearing on entire width of pane.2) Position sheets of glass with setting blocks of hardness,

chemically compatible with sealants used, and sizesrecommended by glass and sealant manufacturers.

3) Set tong marks of tempered glass at bottom of installedsheet.

4) Orient pattern and draw of glass pieces in same direction.5) Place glass waves parallel or horizontal to floor.6) Set glass with one translucent surface, with smooth surface,

on weather side.b. Glass shall not move or rattle.

3.03 HOSE TEST

A. Use 3/4-inch minimum hose without nozzle. With full stream, flood glazingfrom bottom to top.

B. Correct any leaks disclosed by hose test by reglazing and retesting untileliminated.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Leave glass and glazing in undamaged condition and ready for final cleaning.

B. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass.

C. Remove labels from glass surface at time of final cleaning.

D. Wash and polish both faces of glass.

3.05 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK

A. Protection:

1. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of stainingglass.

2. Install tape across lights secured to frames or structure.




3. No tape or marking allowed on glass.

B. Replacements and Repairs: Prior to Substantial Completion, replace broken,defective, or scratched glass and repair damaged compounds.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 LOUVERSJANUARY 2020 08 90 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 08 90 00LOUVERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 500-L, LaboratoryMethods of Testing Louvers for Rating.

2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 2605,Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and TestProcedures, for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on AluminumExtrusions and Panels.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): D1187, Standard Specification forAsphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal.


A. Installed Louvers: Capable of resisting wind load of 30 pounds per square foot.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Large scale details of louvers, anchorage, andrelationship to adjoining construction.a. Manufacturer’s Literature: Descriptive and performance data of

louvers, including standard drawings and louver-free area.2. Samples:

a. Manufacturer’s standard finishes and colors.b. Physical samples of actual factory finish on specified metal for

color verification.


1. Factory test data.2. Certificates of AMCA ratings.3. Installation instructions.4. Parts list, if applicable.5. Maintenance procedures.6. Special Guarantee.


LOUVERS PW\DEN003\70833508 90 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020



A. Manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named asbeneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall providefor correction, or at option of Owner, removal and replacement of specialfluorocarbon finish found defective during a period of 20 years after date ofSubstantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal andreplacement of defective Work as specified in General Conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Nonacoustical louver sizes are based on 50 percent free area and 800 fpmmaximum velocity through free area.

B. Water Penetration Rate: No greater than 0.02 ounce per square foot.

C. Louvers: Rated and tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L.

2.02 FIXED DRAINABLE LOUVER (TYPE DB)

A. Frame: Extruded aluminum channel, 0.081 inch thick, 4 inches deep, interiorduct collar, concealed mullions.

B. Blades: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.081 inch thick, 35-degree to34-degree pitch angles, with integral front drain gutter, spaced 3 inches to4 inches on center.

C. Pressure Loss: AMCA certified rating of no greater than 0.10-inch WC.

D. Sizes: As scheduled on Drawings.

E. Screen: Inside mounted, painted aluminum, 1/2 inch mesh.

F. Finish: Kynar 500 fluorocarbon coating in custom color as scheduled.

G. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Construction Specialties; Model A4097.2. Ruskin; Model ELF375DX.


PW\DEN003\708335 LOUVERSJANUARY 2020 08 90 00 - 3©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Fasteners: Stainless steel.

B. Flashings: Match louver frame.

C. Isolation Tape: Tremco 440, 3M EC1202, or Presstite 579.6.

D. Isolation Paint: ASTM D1187, bituminous coating.


A. Factory Performance Tests:

1. Airflow versus pressure loss.2. Rain penetration data.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Check openings to ensure dimensions conform to Drawings.

B. Ensure openings are free of irregularities that would interfere with installation.

C. Do not install louvers until defects have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install louvers as shown on reviewed Shop Drawings. Coordinate with heatingor ventilation ductwork to be connected.

B. Follow procedures in manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions.

3.03 CLEANING

A. After erection, protect exposed portions from damage by machines, paint, lime,acid, cement, or other harmful compounds.

B. Remove protective materials and clean with plain water, water with soap, orhousehold detergents.


LOUVERS PW\DEN003\70833508 90 00 - 4 JANUARY 2020


3.04 LOUVER SCHEDULE

A. A tabulation of louver characteristics for each opening numbered on Drawings.Provide items as scheduled in Louver Schedule on Drawings.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PAINTING AND COATING JANUARY 2020 09 90 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): C209, Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.

2. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 3. NACE International (NACE): SP0188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing

of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. 4. NSF International (NSF): 61, Drinking Water System Components -

Health Effects. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 6. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): Specification for

Structural Joints using High-Strength Bolts. 7. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

a. PA 2, Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness Requirements.

b. PA 10, Guide to Safety and Health Requirements for Industrial Painting Projects.

c. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. d. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. e. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. f. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning. g. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. h. SP 7, Joint Surface Preparation Standard Brush-Off Blast

Cleaning. i. SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning. j. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. k. SP 13, Surface Preparation of Concrete. l. SP 16, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated

Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals. m. Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble

Salts on Steel and Other Nonporous Substrates.


PAINTING AND COATING PW\DEN003\708335 09 90 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Terms used in this section:

1. Coverage: Total minimum dry film thickness in mils or square feet per gallon.

2. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 3. HCl: Hydrochloric Acid. 4. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness, mils. 5. MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness per Coat, mils. 6. Mil: Thousandth of an inch. 7. PPDS: Paint Product Data Sheet. 8. PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet. 9. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. 10. SFPG: Square Feet per Gallon. 11. SFPGPC: Square Feet per Gallon per Coat. 12. SP: Surface Preparation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Data Sheets:

1) For each product, furnish a Paint Product Data Sheet (PPDS), the manufacturer’s technical data sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable). The PPDS form is appended to the end of this section.

2) For each paint system, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS). The PSDS form is appended to the end of this section.

3) Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with specification.

4) Furnish copies of paint system submittals to the coating applicator.

5) Indiscriminate submittal of only manufacturer’s literature is not acceptable.

2. Samples: a. Reference Panel:

1) Surface Preparation: a) Prior to start of surface preparation, furnish a 4-inch

by 4-inch steel panel for each grade of sandblast specified herein, prepared to specified requirements.



b) Provide panel representative of the steel used; prevent deterioration of surface quality.

c) Panel to be reference source for inspection upon approval by Engineer.

2) Paint: a) Unless otherwise specified, before painting work is

started, prepare minimum 8-inch by 10-inch sample with type of paint and application specified on similar substrate to which paint is to be applied.

b) Furnish additional samples as required until colors, finishes, and textures are approved.

c) Approved samples to be the quality standard for final finishes.


1. Applicator’s Qualification: List of references substantiating experience. 2. Coating manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services. 3. Factory Applied Coatings: Manufacturer’s certification stating factory

applied coating system meets or exceeds requirements specified. 4. Manufacturer’s written verification that submitted material is suitable

for the intended use. 5. Coating for Faying Surfaces: Manufacturer’s test results that show the

proposed coating meets the slip resistance requirements of the AISC Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts.

6. If the manufacturer of finish coating differs from that of shop primer, provide finish coating manufacturer’s written confirmation that materials are compatible.

7. Manufacturer’s written instructions and special details for applying each type of paint.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds.

2. Perform surface preparation and painting in accordance with recommendations of the following: a. Paint manufacturer’s instructions. b. SSPC PA 10. c. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction.




A. Shipping:

1. Where precoated items are to be shipped to the Site, protect coating from damage. Batten coated items to prevent abrasion.

2. Protect shop painted surfaces during shipment and handling by suitable provisions including padding, blocking, and use of canvas or nylon slings.

B. Storage:

1. Store products in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain temperatures within the range recommended by paint manufacturer.

2. Primed surfaces shall not be exposed to weather for more than 2 months before being topcoated, or less time if recommended by coating manufacturer.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Do not apply paint in temperatures or moisture conditions outside of manufacturer’s recommended maximum or minimum allowable.

2. Do not perform final abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient air.

B. Status of Existing Coatings:

1. For this project, minimal coating rehabilitation is required. Coating systems will be typically applied over new equipment, not existing. However, where new installed piping flanges up against existing piping, the coating system shall be tied into the existing coating system by overcoating the adjacent pipe or equipment up to the first flange (or connection) past the mating connection. The coating shall be the finish coat of the specified system, typically polyurethane.

2. The following information on existing coatings or substrate conditions is provided for information only, and is generally believed to be accurate, but is not guaranteed. Perform tests as required to verify applicability of this information to the Work. a. The condition of the existing coating and type of coating inside

the solids hopper is unknown. Contractor shall verify condition of coating prior to bidding work or provide bid based off on SSPC VIS 2 Standard. Coating and lining will likely be damaged



from cutting and welding fabrication to accommodate for the new roof design.

b. The existing coating on existing piping and equipment is in moderate condition with typical wear and tear from more than 10 years of service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Components and materials in contact with water for human consumption: comply with the requirements of the safe drinking water act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the authority having jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372.

1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Nationally recognized manufacturers of paints and protective coatings who are regularly engaged in the production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions.

B. Minimum of 5 years’ verifiable experience in manufacture of specified product.

C. Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying most of the products specified herein:

1. Sherwin-Williams. 2. Tnemec. 3. PPG. 4. International. 5. Carboline.

2.03 ABRASIVE MATERIALS

A. Select abrasive type and size to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer’s recommendations for specific primer and coating system to be applied.



2.04 PAINT MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Manufacturer’s highest quality products suitable for intended service. 2. Compatibility: Only compatible materials from a single manufacturer

shall be used in the Work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats.

3. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by coating manufacturer.

B. Products:

Product Definition

Alkyd (Semigloss) Semigloss alkyd.

Alkyd Enamel Optimum quality, gloss or semigloss finish as required, medium long oil.

Block Filler Primer-sealer designed for rough masonry surfaces, 100% acrylic emulsion.

Coal-Tar Epoxy Amine, polyamide, or phenolic epoxy type 70% volume solids minimum, suitable for immersion service.

Elastomeric Polyurethane

100% solids, plural component, spray applied, high build, elastomeric polyurethane coating, suitable for the intended service.

Epoxy Primer—Ferrous Metal

Anticorrosive, converted epoxy primer containing rust-inhibitive pigments.

Fusion Bonded Coating

100% solids, thermosetting, fusion bonded, dry powder epoxy, suitable for the intended service.

High Build Epoxy Polyamidoamine epoxy, minimum 69% volume solids, capability of 4 to 8 MDFT per coat.

Chemical Resistant Epoxy

Chemical resistant epoxy, 80% volume solids minimum, suitable for immersion service and corrosive gases in a wastewater environment, capable of more than 8 mils DFT per coat. Manufacturer shall show test results from testing per ASTM G210.



Product Definition

Latex Primer Sealer Waterborne vinyl acrylic primer/sealer for interior gypsum board and plaster. Capable of providing uniform seal and suitable for use with specified finish coats.

NSF Epoxy Polyamidoamine epoxy, approved for potable water contact and conforming to NSF 61.

Organic Zinc Rich Primer

Epoxy or moisture cured urethane with 85-percent zinc content in the dry film, meeting the requirements of RCSC Specification for Structural Joints using High Strength Bolts, Class A or Class B, as required.

Polyurethane Enamel Two-component, aliphatic or acrylic based polyurethane; high gloss finish.

Rust-Inhibitive Primer

Single-package steel primers with anticorrosive pigment loading.

TFE Lube or Grease Lube

Tetrafluoroethylene, liquid coating, or open gear grease as supplied by McMaster-Carr Supply Corporation, Elmhurst, IL.

Water Base Epoxy Two-component, polyamide epoxy emulsion, finish as required.

2.05 COLORS

A. Provide as selected by Owner.

B. Formulate with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials, which might be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at Site.

C. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Any authorized manufacturer may supply matches.

2.06 SHOP FINISHES

A. Shop Blast Cleaning: Reference paragraph Shop Coating Requirements in this Section.

B. Surface Preparation: Provide Engineer minimum 7 days’ advance notice to start of shop surface preparation work and coating application work.



C. Shop Coating Requirements:

1. When required by equipment Specifications, such equipment shall be primed and finish coated in shop by manufacturer and touched up in field with identical material after installation.

2. Where manufacturer’s standard coating is not suitable for intended service condition, Engineer may approve use of a tie-coat to be used between manufacturer’s standard coating and specified field finish. In such cases, tie-coat shall be surface tolerant epoxy as recommended by manufacturer of specified field finish coat. Coordinate details of equipment manufacturer’s standard coating with field coating manufacturer.

D. Pipe:

1. Ductile Iron Pipe: a. Use SSPC standards as a guide for desired prepared surface.

Follow recommendations of pipe and coating manufacturers for means and methods to achieve SSPC-equivalent surface.

b. The surface preparation and application of the primer and finish coats shall be performed by pipe manufacturer for buried service. For exposed service, the surface preparation and application of the primer shall be performed by pipe manufacturer and finish coats shall be applied in the field.

c. For high performance (epoxy) coatings, follow additional recommendations of pipe and coating manufacturers.

d. Prior to blast cleaning, grind smooth surface imperfections including, but not limited to, delaminating metal or oxide layers.

2.07 MIXING

A. Multiple-Component Coatings:

1. Prepare using each component as packaged by paint manufacturer. 2. No partial batches will be permitted. 3. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond

their pot life. 4. Furnish small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other

small areas. 5. Mix only components specified and furnished by paint manufacturer. 6. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or

otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating.



B. Colors: Formulate paints with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials that might be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at Site.

2.08 SHOP FINISHES

A. Shop Blast Cleaning: Reference Paragraph Shop Coating Requirements.

B. Surface Preparation: Provide Engineer minimum 7 days’ advance notice to start of shop surface preparation work and coating application work.

C. Shop Coating Requirements:

1. When required by equipment specifications, such equipment shall be primed and finish coated in shop by manufacturer and touched up in field with identical material after installation.

2. Where manufacturer’s standard coating is not suitable for intended service condition, Engineer may approve use of a tie-coat to be used between manufacturer’s standard coating and specified field finish. In such cases, tie-coat shall be surface tolerant epoxy as recommended by manufacturer of specified field finish coat. Coordinate details of equipment manufacturer’s standard coating with field coating manufacturer.

D. Pipe:

1. Ductile Iron Pipe: a. Provide ductile iron pipe to be painted without asphalt coating. b. Grind smooth surface imperfections, including delaminating metal

and annealing oxide that is not tightly adhered. c. Remove oil, grease, and other surface contaminants in accordance

with NAPF 500-03-01, Solvent Cleaning. d. Abrasive blast clean in accordance with the following:

1) Ductile Iron Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04. 2) Cast Ductile Iron Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05.

e. Exposed surfaces of metal at small coating defects may be prepared by Hand Tool Cleaning NAPF 500-03-02 or Power Tool Cleaning NAPF 500-03-03. Small coating defects are defined as a defect that exposes 2 square inches or less of bare metal.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Surface Preparation Inspection:

1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and printed directions and recommendations of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. In event of conflict, more stringent shall apply.

2. Notify Engineer minimum 7 days’ prior to start of surface preparation work or coating application work.

3. Perform work only in presence of Engineer, unless Engineer grants prior approval to perform work in Engineer’s absence.

B. Schedule inspection of cleaned surfaces and all coats prior to succeeding coat in advance with Engineer.

C. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed system. Consult coatings manufacturer’s written instructions for these requirements. Do not immerse coating until completion of curing cycle.

D. Perform painting in accordance with recommendations of the following:

1. Paint manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Factory Finished Items:

1. Schedule inspection with Engineer before repairing damaged factory-finished items delivered to Site.

2. Repair abraded or otherwise damaged areas on factory-finished items as recommended by coating manufacturer. Carefully blend repaired areas into original finish. If required to match colors, provide full finish coat in field.

B. Surface Preparation Verification: Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and printed directions and recommendations of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. The more stringent requirements shall apply.



3.03 PROTECTION OF ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED

A. Protect all surfaces adjacent to, or downwind of Work area from overspray. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages resulting from overspray.

B. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not specified elsewhere to be painted.

C. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces.

D. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process.

E. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering.

F. Protect surfaces adjacent to or downwind of Work area from overspray.

3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Field Abrasive Blasting:

1. Perform blasting for items and equipment where specified and as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed or coated.

2. Refer to coating systems for degree of abrasive blasting required. 3. Where the specified degree of surface preparation differs from

manufacturer’s recommendations, the more stringent shall apply.

B. Surface Contamination Testing:

1. A surface contamination analysis test shall be performed every 500 square feet (or at least three measurements inside the solids hopper) by means of a Chlor Test CSN Salts or approved equivalent.

2. Surface with chloride levels exceeding 3 µg/square centimeter for submerged surfaces and 5 µg/square centimeter for exposed surfaces shall be treated with a liquid soluble salt remover equivalent to CHLOR*RID (CHLOR*RID International, Chandler, AZ).

3. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations and procedures for the use of this product to remove the surface contamination.



C. Metal Surface Preparation:

1. Where indicated, meet requirements of SSPC Specifications summarized below: a. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, soil,

drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent.

b. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, using nonpower hand tools.

c. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, using power-assisted hand tools.

d. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by blast cleaning.

e. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more than 33 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings.

f. SP 7, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible rust, oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coatings. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on surface.

g. SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more than 5 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings.

h. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: Removal of visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide, corrosion products, and other foreign matter using power-assisted hand tools capable of producing suitable surface profile. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in lower portion of pits if original surface is pitted.

i. SP 16, Brush Blasting of Non-Ferrous Metals: A brush-off blast cleaned non-ferrous metal surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, metal oxides (corrosion products), and other foreign matter. Intact,



tightly adherent coating is permitted to remain. A coating is considered tightly adherent if it cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife. Bare metal substrates shall have a minimum profile of 19 micrometers (0.75 mil).

2. The words “solvent cleaning,” “hand tool cleaning,” “wire brushing,” and “blast cleaning,” or similar words of equal intent in these Specifications or in paint manufacturer’s specification refer to the applicable SSPC Specification.

3. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning, wet or vacu-blast methods may be required. Coating manufacturers’ recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat application shall apply.

4. Ductile Iron Pipe Supplied with Asphaltic Varnish Finish: Remove asphaltic varnish finish prior to performing specified surface preparation.

5. Hand tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning. 6. Round or chamfer sharp edges and grind smooth burrs, jagged edges,

and surface defects. 7. Welds and Adjacent Areas:

a. Prepare such that there is: 1) No undercutting or reverse ridges on weld bead. 2) No weld spatter on or adjacent to weld or any area to be

painted. 3) No sharp peaks or ridges along weld bead.

b. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent surface of weld bead.

8. Preblast Cleaning Requirements: a. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface

contaminants prior to blast cleaning. b. Cleaning Methods: Steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water

with appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing.

c. Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent clean with suitable solvent and clean cloth.

9. Blast Cleaning Requirements: a. Type of Equipment and Speed of Travel: Design to obtain

specified degree of cleanliness. Minimum surface preparation is as specified herein and takes precedence over coating manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Select type and size of abrasive to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer’s recommendations for particular primer to be used.

c. Use only dry blast cleaning methods. d. Do not reuse abrasive, except for designed recyclable systems.



e. Meet applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and environmental control regulations for blast cleaning, confined space entry (if required), and disposition of spent aggregate and debris.

10. Post-Blast Cleaning and Other Cleaning Requirements: a. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles from cleaning

operations by dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other method prior to painting. Vacuum clean enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem and wipe with a tack cloth.

b. Paint surfaces the same day they are blasted. Reblast surfaces that have started to rust before they are painted.

D. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Surface Preparation:

1. Remove soil, cement spatter, and other surface dirt with appropriate hand or power tools.

2. Brush blast in accordance with SSPC SP 16. 3. Obtain and follow coating manufacturer’s recommendations for

additional preparation that may be required.

E. Concrete Surface Preparation:

1. Do not begin until 30 days after concrete has been placed. 2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 13. 3. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or

other foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods.

4. Brush-off blast clean to remove loose concrete and laitance, and provide a tooth for binding. Upon approval by Engineer, surface may be cleaned by acid etching method. Approval is subject to producing desired profile equivalent to No. 80 grit flint sandpaper. Acid etching of vertical or overhead surfaces shall not be allowed.

5. Secure coating manufacturer’s recommendations for additional preparation, if required, for excessive bug holes exposed after blasting.

6. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to painting.

F. Plastic and FRP Surface Preparation:

1. Hand sand plastic surfaces to be coated with medium grit sandpaper to provide tooth for coating system.



2. Large areas may be power sanded or brush-off blasted, provided sufficient controls are employed so surface is roughened without removing excess material.

G. Masonry Surface Preparation:

1. Complete and cure masonry construction for 14 days or more before starting surface preparation work.

2. Remove oil, grease, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent washing, or other suitable cleaning methods.

3. Clean masonry surfaces of mortar and grout spillage and other surface deposits using one of the following: a. Nonmetallic fiber brushes and commercial muriatic acid followed

by rinsing with clean water. b. Brush-off blasting. c. Water blasting.

4. Do not damage masonry mortar joints or adjacent surfaces. 5. Leave surfaces clean and, unless otherwise required for proper adhesion,

dry prior to painting. 6. Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Uniform texture and free of surface

imperfections that would impair intended finished appearance. 7. Masonry Surfaces to be Clear Coated: Free of discolorations and

uniform in texture after cleaning.

H. Existing Painted Surfaces to be Repainted Surface Preparation:

1. Detergent wash and freshwater rinse. 2. Clean loose, abraded, or damaged coatings to substrate by hand or

power tool, SP 2 or SP 3. 3. Feather surrounding intact coating. 4. Apply one spot coat of specified primer to bare areas, overlapping

prepared existing coating. 5. Apply one full finish coat of specified primer to entire surface. 6. If an aged, plural-component material is to be topcoated, contact coating

manufacturer for additional surface preparation requirements. 7. Application of Cosmetic Coat:

a. It is assumed that existing coatings have oxidized sufficiently to prevent lifting or peeling when overcoated with paints specified.

b. Check compatibility by application to a small area prior to starting painting.

c. If lifting or other problems occur, request disposition from Engineer.



8. Perform blasting as required to restore damaged surfaces. Materials, equipment, procedures shall meet requirements of SSPC.

3.05 SURFACE CLEANING

A. Brush-off Blast Cleaning:

1. Equipment, procedure, and degree of cleaning shall meet requirements of SSPC SP 7.

2. Abrasive: Either wet or dry blasting sand, grit, or nutshell. 3. Select various surface preparation parameters, such as size and hardness

of abrasive, nozzle size, air pressure, and nozzle distance from surface such that surface is cleaned without pitting, chipping, or other damage.

4. Verify parameter selection by blast cleaning a trial area that will not be exposed to view.

5. Engineer will review acceptable trial blast cleaned area and use area as a representative sample of surface preparation.

6. Repair or replace surface damaged by blast cleaning.

B. Acid Etching:

1. After precleaning, spread the following solution by brush or plastic sprinkling can: a. One part commercial muriatic acid reduced by two parts water by

volume. Adding acid to water in these proportions gives an approximate 10 percent solution of HCl.

2. Application: a. Rate: Approximately 2 gallons per 100 square feet. b. Work acid solution into surface by hard-bristled brushes or

brooms until complete wetting and coverage is obtained. c. Acid will react vigorously for a few minutes, during which time

brushing shall be continued. d. After bubbling subsides (10 minutes), hose down remaining slurry

with high pressure clean water. e. Rinse immediately to avoid formation on the surface of salts that

are difficult to remove. f. Thoroughly rinse to remove any residual acid surface condition

that may impair adhesion. 3. Ensure surface is completely dry before application of coating. 4. Apply acid etching to obtain a “grit sandpaper” surface profile. If not,

repeat treatment.



C. Solvent Cleaning:

1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and any other surface contaminants by using solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods that involve a solvent or cleaning action.

2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 1.

3.06 APPLICATION

A. General:

1. The intention of these Specifications is for existing and new, interior and exterior masonry, concrete, metal, and submerged metal surfaces to be painted, whether specifically mentioned or not, except as specified otherwise. Do not paint exterior concrete surfaces, unless specifically indicated.

2. Exposed pipe and equipment that requires primer, intermediate (if applicable) and finish coats shall have primer (and intermediate) coat shop or factory applied. Finish coat shall be performed in the field for a uniform finish. Unless otherwise specified or approved, pipe appurtenances and equipment, such as valves, fittings, pumps, etc., shall receive the same finish coat as specified for the pipe.

3. Extent of Coating (Immersion): Coatings shall be applied to internal vessel and pipe surfaces, nozzle bores, flange gasket sealing surfaces, carbon steel internals, and stainless steel internals, unless otherwise specified.

4. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed system. Consult coatings manufacturer’s written instructions for these requirements. Do not immerse coating until completion of curing cycle.

5. Apply coatings in accordance with these Specifications and paint manufacturers’ printed recommendations and special details. The more stringent requirements shall apply. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint.

6. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat.

7. Fusion Bonded Coatings Method Application: Electrostatic, fluidized bed, or flocking.

8. Coat units or surfaces to be bolted together or joined closely to structures or to one another prior to assembly or installation.

9. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: Use only solvent type paints and coatings.

10. On pipelines, terminate coatings along pipe runs to 1 inch inside pipe penetrations.



11. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use. 12. Where more than one coat is applied within a given system, alternate

colors to provide a visual reference showing required number of coats have been applied.

B. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloys:

1. Concealed galvanized, copper, and nonferrous metal alloy surfaces (behind building panels or walls) do not require painting, unless specifically indicated herein.

2. Prepare surface and apply primer in accordance with System No. 10 specification.

3. Apply intermediate and finish coats of the coating system appropriate for the exposure.

C. Porous Surfaces, such as Concrete and Masonry:

1. Filler/Surfacer: Use coating manufacturer’s recommended product to fill air holes, bug holes, and other surface voids or defects.

2. Prime Coat: May be thinned to provide maximum penetration and adhesion. a. Type and Amount of Thinning: Determined by paint manufacturer

and dependent on surface density and type of coating. 3. Surface Specified to Receive Water Base Coating: Damp, but free of

running water, just prior to application of coating.

D. Film Thickness and Coverage:

1. Number of Coats: a. Minimum required without regard to coating thickness. b. Additional coats may be required to obtain minimum required

paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences in manufacturers’ products, and atmospheric conditions.

2. Application Thickness: a. Do not exceed coating manufacturer’s recommendations. b. Measure using a wet film thickness gauge to ensure proper

coating thickness during application. 3. Film Thickness Measurements and Electrical Inspection of Coated

Surfaces: a. Perform with properly calibrated instruments. b. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with specification. c. Coats are subject to inspection by Engineer and coating

manufacturer’s representative.



4. Visually inspect concrete, masonry, nonferrous metal, plastic, and wood surfaces to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained.

5. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other similar areas, where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present, and ensure proper millage in these areas.

6. Apply additional coats as required to achieve complete hiding of underlying coats. Hiding shall be so complete that additional coats would not increase the hiding.

E. Coating Tie-in on Existing Equipment and Piping:

1. Finish coat color for new equipment/piping shall match existing color. 2. Existing equipment/piping to be tied-in shall be prepared as specified

herein or in accordance with coating manufacturer’s recommendations, whichever is more stringent.

3. Apply the same finish coat to the existing equipment, as used for the new connecting equipment/piping. The finish coat shall extend to the first flanged connection beyond the tie-in point.

3.07 PROTECTIVE COATINGS SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the following application schedule. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from Engineer before starting work in question.

B. As shown in Architectural Schedules on Drawings. Additional requirements are included in the Piping Schedule.

C. System No. 2 Submerged Metal—Wastewater, Influent, Effluent, Sludge or Solids Handling:

Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover

SP 5 White Metal Blast Cleaning

Prime in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

Coal-Tar Epoxy -OR- High Build Epoxy

2 coats at 8 mils, 16 MDFT

1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Metal surfaces new and existing below a plane 1 foot above

maximum liquid surface, metal surfaces above maximum liquid



surface that are a part of immersed equipment, concrete embedded surfaces of metallic items, such as wall pipes, pipes, pipe sleeves, access manholes, gate guides and thimbles, and structural steel.

b. Digester Maintenance and Modifications: 1) Piping and Pipe Supports Inside Digester: Terminate

coating onto concrete surfaces or concrete supports by extending coating onto the concrete at least 3 inches beyond mating surfaces.

c. For potable water immersion service, use the same epoxy system with NSF 61 compliant resin.

D. System No. 3 Wastewater Service – Corrosive Gases (H2S) or Corrosive Water:


SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning

Prime in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

SP 16, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals

Chemical Resistant Epoxy

2 coats at 12 mils per coat, 24 MDFT

1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Solids Hopper:

1) Interior surfaces of solids hopper damaged by fabrication efforts for new roof.

2) Coat at least 1-foot elevation beyond damaged coatings from new roof fabrication.

3) Abrade at least 2 inches of adjacent existing coating and provide overlap of new coating onto existing coating.

4) Where new stainless steel roof mates up to existing tank wall, coat the stainless steel cover around the perimeter of the roof. The coating shall extend at least 2 feet from the mated surfaces onto the stainless steel cover.

b. Digester Maintenance and Modifications: 1) Coat the interior and exterior surfaces of the stainless steel

digester boxes (three) as shown in 73-S-01 and 73-S-01 from Project D3212500. Extend coating onto the face-of-flange.



E. System No. 4 Exposed Metal—Highly Corrosive:


SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning


1 coat, 2.5 MDFT

High Build Epoxy 1 coat, 4 MDFT

Polyurethane Enamel 1 coat, 3 MDFT

1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Exposed ferrous metal surfaces, new and existing located inside or

outside of structures in Corrosive, Wet, or Outdoor areas as defined in the Area Classification and Materials Selection table on Drawings and unless otherwise specified on Pipe Schedule.

F. System No. 5 Exposed Metal—Mildly Corrosive:




1 coat, 2.5 MDFT

Polyurethane Enamel 1 coat, 3 MDFT

1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Exposed metal surfaces, new and existing located inside or

outside of structures and exposed to weather or in a highly humid atmosphere, such as pipe galleries and similar areas, and the following specific surfaces: 1) As indicated on Architectural Schedules on Drawings. 2) Exposed ductile iron pipe. 3) As indicated in the Area Classification and Material

Selection table specified as Indoor or Dry. 4) All exposed bare ferrous metal which has not otherwise

been specified. 5) Equipment with factory coating system that does not meet

or exceed the performance requirements of this system. 6) Screw Conveyor Existing Supports and Stair Stringers

Adjacent to the Screw Conveyor: a) Bolted Connection: Prior to mounting new Screw

Conveyor, coat existing carbon steel supports where stainless steel surfaces will mate against the carbon steel supports. Coating on existing carbon steel supports shall extend down to the stringers of the



adjacent stairs. Extend the coating system over the flanged connection up onto the stainless steel conveyor support at least 3 inches. Mask the stainless steel to provide a clean straight edge.

b) Welded Connection: After Screw Conveyor has been welded, coat the existing carbon steel support down to the stringers of the adjacent stairs. Extend the coating system over the welded connection up onto the stainless steel conveyor support at least 3 inches. Mask the stainless steel to provide a clean straight edge.

c) Channel stringers and beams supporting the existing stairs adjacent to the Screw Conveyor shall be recoated. Also recoat the existing cantilevered HSS support beams above the hopper roof, if these will be reused by the Screw Conveyor manufacturer to support the conveyor trough and cake chute.

d) Platform and Stringer Supports on Top of Roof: Where new stainless steel plates are welded to the top of the roof for the existing platform, coat the new welded connection 6 inches up from the baseplate onto the existing carbon steel angle and coat the entire stainless steel baseplate. Mask area for clean straight lines.

7) Touch Up Coating on Existing Carbon Steel Components and Structures: a) Touch up existing coating at defects on existing

carbon steel platform angle supports and stringers on top of the digester roof.

b) For touch up repairs, surface preparation shall be in accordance with SSPC SP-11.

c) Finish coating shall match existing coating with color and gloss. If existing coating is epoxy, than use epoxy as a finish coat in lieu of polyurethane.



G. System No. 6 Exposed Metal—Atmospheric:


SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning

Rust-Inhibitive Primer 1 coat, 2 MDFT

Alkyd Enamel 2 coats, 4 MDFT

1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Exposed metal surfaces, located inside or outside of structures or

exposed to weather, including: 1) As indicated on Architectural Schedules on Drawings. 2) Instrumentation and control systems exposed enclosures for

process. b. Apply surface preparation and primer to surfaces prior to

installation. Finish coats need only be applied to surfaces exposed after completion of construction.

H. System No. 7 Concrete Encased Metal:


SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning

Coal-Tar Epoxy

-OR-

High Build Epoxy

2 coats, 16 MDFT

1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Use on concrete encased ferrous metals, including wall pipes, pipe

sleeves, access manholes, gate guides, and thimbles. b. Inside core drilled holes in concrete for pipe penetrations.

I. System No. 8 Buried Metal—General:



Coal-Tar Epoxy

-OR-

High Build Epoxy

2 coats, 16 MDFT

1. For steel pipe and fittings, follow AWWA C209 and AWWA C214.



2. Use on the following items or areas: a. Buried ductile iron pipe and fittings. Thickness variances for pipe

end connection tolerances shall be submitted to Engineer for approval. If ductile iron pipe cannot be coated by pipe manufacturer, coating shall be applied in the field or at a coating shop/facility.

b. Option to coat fittings and other buried pipe appurtenances with fusion bonded epoxy as specified herein.

c. Buried fittings or connections which have bare fasteners, bolts, nuts, studs, all-thread. Contractor has the option to use petrolatum wax tape or bituminous paint, and shall submit products and installation information for Engineer approval.

J. System No. 10: Copper and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Conditioning:


In accordance with Paragraph Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Surface Preparation

Epoxy Primer—Other As recommended by coating manufacturer. Remaining coats as required for exposure

1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Stainless steel embeds or dissimilar metal connections at Clarifier

Channels, Primary Influent Channels, Secondary Clarifier Launderer Covers and PE/RAS Mixing Box that make direct contact with aluminum covers.

b. Mating surfaces for dissimilar metal connections. c. After application of System No. 10, apply finish coats as required

for exposure. d. Exposed copper pipe in Corrosive areas as designated in Area

Classification and Material Selection Table (noninsulated). Other areas where copper pipe is used does not require a coating. Tape coat may be applied in lieu of epoxy for copper pipe. 1) Tape Coat:

a) Tape shall be 20-mil PVC pipe wrap, nonprinted, waterproof, UV resistant, nonconductive, and shall be IAPMO or UPC listed.

b) 50 percent overlap. c) Manufacturer and Product: PASCO; Pipe Protection

Tape System.



K. System No. 11 Faying Surfaces of Slip Critical Bolted Connections:



Organic Zinc Rich Primer

1 coat, 3 MDFT

1. Use on faying surfaces of slip critical joints as specified and as shown on Drawings.

2. Provide primer in accordance with RCSC Specification for Structural Joints using High-Strength Bolts.

L. System No. 27 Aluminum and Dissimilar Metal Insulation:


Solvent Clean (SP 1) Prime in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

Bituminous Paint

-OR-

High Build Epoxy

1 coat, 10 MDFT

1. Use on aluminum surfaces embedded or in contact with concrete.

M. System No. 29 Fusion Bonded Coating:



Fusion Bonded Coating 100% Solids Epoxy

1 or 2 coats, 7 MDFT

1. For steel pipe and fittings, meet all requirements of AWWA C213. 2. Use on the following items:

a. Buried ductile iron fittings (or option to use System No. 8).



N. System No. 29A Fusion Bonded, Steel Dowel Coating:



Fusion Bonded Coating 100% Solids Epoxy

1 or 2 coats, 7 MDFT

TFE Lube, Shop Applied; Grease Lube Alternative, Field Applied Just Prior to Installation

TFE Lube or Grease Lube

1 coat, as required

1. Use on steel expansion joint dowels as specified in Section 03 15 00, Concrete Joints and Accessories.

2. Use fusion bonded epoxy on cast-in-place anchors. Coat only the portion of the anchor that is embedded into the concrete.

3.08 ARCHITECTURAL PAINT SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. As shown in Architectural Schedules on Drawings.

B. System No. 106 Galvanized Metal:


In accordance with Paragraph Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Surface Preparation

Manufacturer’s Recommended Primer

1 coat, as recommended by manufacturer

Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss)

2 coats, 4 MDFT

1. Use on the following items or areas: a. As indicated on Architectural Schedules on Drawings.



C. System No. 117 Concrete Masonry, Gloss Epoxy:


In accordance with Paragraph Masonry Surface Preparation

Block Filler 1 coat, 75 SFPG

Water Base Epoxy (Gloss)

2 coats, 300 SFPGPC

1. Use on the following items or areas: a. As indicated on Architectural Schedules on Drawings.

3.09 COLORS

A. Provide as in Architectural Schedules on Drawings, designated herein and shown in Piping Schedule.

B. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Selected manufacturer may supply matches.

C. Equipment Colors:

1. Equipment includes the machinery or vessel itself plus the structural supports and fasteners and attached electrical conduits.

2. Paint equipment and piping one color as selected. 3. Paint nonsubmerged portions of equipment the same color as the piping

it serves, except as itemized below: a. Dangerous Parts of Equipment and Machinery: OSHA Orange. b. Fire Protection Equipment and Apparatus: OSHA Red. c. Radiation Hazards: OSHA Purple. d. Physical hazards in normal operating area and energy lockout

devices including, but not limited to, electrical disconnects for equipment and equipment isolation valves in air and liquid lines under pressure: OSHA Yellow.

D. Pipe Identification Painting:

1. Color code nonsubmerged metal piping, except electrical conduit. Paint fittings and valves the same color as pipe, except equipment isolation valves.

2. Pipe Color Coding: As shown in table below or to match existing coating system colors which equipment/piping is being tied into.



3. Pipe Supports: If specified to be painted, paint light gray, as approved by Owner.

4. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe, polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe located inside of buildings and enclosed structures will not require painting, except as noted or scheduled.

E. Pipe System Color Code:

1. Match the existing color for each flowstream as follows:

Pipe System Color

Acid Resistant Drain Grey

Air, High Pressure Green

Belt Press Feed Brown

Chlorine Solution Yellow

Non-Potable Water (W2) Jade Green

Odorous Air Uncoated

Plant Effluent Water (W3) Purple

Potable Water (W1) Blue

Polymer Solution Purple

Process Drain Brown

Scum, Primary Brown

Scum, Secondary Brown

Sludge, Digested Brown

Sludge, Return Activated (RAS) Brown


A. Testing Equipment:

1. Provide calibrated electronic type dry film thickness gauge to test coating thickness specified in mils.

2. Provide low-voltage wet sponge electrical holiday detector to test completed coating systems, 20 mils dry film thickness or less, except zinc primer, high-build elastomeric coatings, and galvanizing, for



pinholes, holidays, and discontinuities, as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, San Gabriel, CA, Model M-1.

3. Provide high-voltage spark tester to test completed coating systems in excess of 20 mils dry film thickness. Unit as recommended by coating manufacturer.

B. Testing:

1. Thickness and Continuity Testing: a. Measure coating thickness specified in mils with a magnetic type,

dry film thickness gauge, in accordance with SSPC PA 2. Check each coat for correct millage. Do not make measurement before a minimum of 8 hours after application of coating.

b. Holiday detect coatings 20 mils thick or less, except zinc primer and galvanizing, with low voltage wet sponge electrical holiday detector in accordance with NACE SP0188.

c. Holiday detect coatings in excess of 20 mils dry with high voltage spark tester as recommended by coating manufacturer and in accordance with NACE SP0188.

d. After repaired and recoated areas have dried sufficiently, retest each repaired area. Final tests may also be conducted by Engineer.

C. Inspection: Leave staging and lighting in place until Engineer has inspected surface or coating. Replace staging removed prior to approval by Engineer. Provide additional staging and lighting as requested by Engineer.

D. Unsatisfactory Application:

1. If item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean surface and topcoat with specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage. Obtain specific surface preparation information from coating manufacturer.

2. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections is cause for rejection.

3. Repair defects in accordance with written recommendations of coating manufacturer.

E. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays:

1. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, and feather edges. Follow with primer and finish coat. Depending on extent of repair and appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required.



2. Remove rust and contaminants from metal surface. Provide surface cleanliness and profile in accordance with surface preparation requirements for specified paint system.

3. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint manufacturer.

4. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage-repair coats in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color-matched appearance.


A. In accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, coating manufacturer’s representative shall be present at Site as follows:

1. On first day of application of any coating system. 2. A minimum of two additional Site inspection visits, each for a minimum

of 4 hours, in order to provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

3. As required to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer’s product.

4. To verify full cure of coating prior to coated surfaces being placed into immersion service.

3.12 CLEANUP

A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or destroy at end of each day.

B. Upon completion of the Work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from Site or destroy in a legal manner.

C. Remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and leave entire job clean.

3.13 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this specification:

1. Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS). 2. Paint Product Data Sheet (PPDS).

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PAINTING AND COATING JANUARY 2020 09 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET (PSDS)

Complete this PSDS for each coating system, include all components of the system (surface preparation, primer, intermediate coats, and finish coats). Include all components of a given coating system on a single PSDS.

Paint System Number (from Spec.):

Paint System Title (from Spec.):

Coating Supplier:

Representative:

Surface Preparation:

Paint Material (Generic)

Product Name/Number (Proprietary) Min. Coats, Coverage


PW\DEN003\708335 PAINTING AND COATING JANUARY 2020 09 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

PAINT PRODUCT DATA SHEET (PPDS)

Complete and attach manufacturer’s Technical Data Sheet to this PPDS for each product submitted. Provide manufacturer’s recommendations for the following parameters at temperature (F)/relative humidity:

Temperature/RH 50/50 70/30 90/25

Induction Time

Pot Life

Shelf Life

Drying Time

Curing Time

Min. Recoat Time

Max. Recoat Time

Provide manufacturer’s recommendations for the following:

Mixing Ratio:

Maximum Permissible Thinning:

Ambient Temperature Limitations: min.: max.:

Surface Temperature Limitations: min.: max.:

Surface Profile Requirements: min.: max.:

Attach additional sheets detailing manufacturer’s recommended storage requirements and holiday testing procedures.


PW\DEN003\708335 SIGNAGEJANUARY 2020 10 14 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 10 14 00SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): A13.1, Schemefor the Identification of Piping Systems.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): A53/A53M, Standard Specification forPipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.

3. International Code Council (ICC): International Fire Code (IFC):Chapter 57, Hazardous Materials-General Provisions.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):a. 704, Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of

Materials for Emergency Response.b. HAZ-01, Fire Protection Guide to Hazardous Materials.

5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Drawings showing layouts, actual letter sizes and styles, and

Project-specific mounting details.b. Manufacturer’s literature showing letter sizes and styles, sign

materials, and standard mounting details.

B. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SIGN TYPES

A. Plastic Sign (Type A):

1. Exterior: Laminated plastic subsurface image type, 3/16 inch thick withhigh-gloss finish.

2. Interior: Plastic, 1/8 inch thick with nondirectional matte finish andraised letters.

3. Rounded corners.


SIGNAGE PW\DEN003\70833510 14 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


B. Fiberglass Sign (Type C):

1. Material: Three-ply laminated fiberglass, minimum 1/8 inch thick, withcontrasting color core message layer between two clear weather-resistant surface layers.

2. Manufacturers:a. Best Sign Systems.b. Brady Signmark.

C. Traffic Sign (Type D):

1. Painted aluminum reflectorized signs, standard design meetingrequirements of U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal HighwayAdministration, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streetsand Highways.

2. Materials and Fabrication: Division 9-28 of the State of WashingtonStandard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction.

D. Painted Sign (Type F):

1. Stenciled.2. Paint System and Surface Preparation: As specified in Section 09 90 00,

Painting and Coating, as appropriate for material and sign location.

E. Hazardous Material Sign (Type H):

1. Conform to NFPA 704 and NFPA HAZ-01.2. Material: Fiberglass 1/8 inch thick.3. Background, Letters, and Numbers: Die-cut vinyl with pressure

sensitive adhesive.4. Manufacturers:

a. Brady Signmark.b. Emed Co., Inc.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Pipe Labels:

1. Snap-on, reversible type with lettering and directional arrows, sized foroutside diameter of pipe and insulation.

2. Provided with ties or straps for pipes of 6 inches and over diameter.3. Designed to firmly grip pipe so labels remain fixed in vertical pipe runs.4. Material: Heavy-duty vinyl or polyester, suitable for exterior use, long

lasting, and resistance to moisture, grease, and oils.5. Letters and Arrows: Black on OSHA safety yellow background.



6. Color Field and Letter Height: Meet ASME A13.1.7. Message: Piping system name as indicated on Piping Schedule.8. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Brady Signmark; B-915 BradySnap-On and Strap-On PipeMarkers.

b. Seton Identification Products; Ultra-mark Pipe Markers.

B. Equipment Labels:

1. Applies to equipment with assigned tag numbers, where specified.2. Letters: Black bold face, 3/4 inch minimum high.3. Background: OSHA safety yellow.4. Materials: Aluminum or stainless steel with a baked-on finish suitable

for use on wet, oily, exposed, abrasive, and corrosive areas.5. Furnish 1-inch margin with holes at each end of label, for mounting. On

fiberglass labels, furnish grommets at each hole.6. Size:

a. 2 inches minimum and 3 inches maximum high, by 14 inchesminimum and 18 inches maximum long.

b. Furnish same size base dimensions for all labels.7. Message: Equipment names and tag numbers as used in sections where

equipment is specified.8. Manufacturers:

a. Brady Signmark.b. Seton Identification Products.


A. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws or bolts of appropriate sizes.

B. Pipe Posts: 2-1/2-inch galvanized steel pipe meeting ASTM A53/A53M,Type S, Grade B.

C. Chain: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 16 single jack chain or No. 2 double loopcoil chain.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION—GENERAL

A. In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Mount securely, plumb, and level.


SIGNAGE PW\DEN003\70833510 14 00 - 4 JANUARY 2020


3.02 SIGNS

A. General:

1. Fasten to walls or posts, or hang as scheduled.2. Anchor in place for easy removal and reinstallation with ordinary hand

tools.

B. Information, Exit, and Safety Signs:

1. Install facing traffic. Locate for high visibility with minimum restrictionof working area around walkways and equipment.

2. Install as scheduled.

C. Traffic Signs: Mount each sign on scheduled support using two 1/4-inchstainless steel bolts through sign and post. Install facing traffic at locationsand in manner shown in U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal HighwayAdministration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets andHighways.

D. Hazardous Material Sign:

1. Install where required by NFPA No. 704 and IFC, Chapter 57.2. Install at entrances to spaces where hazardous materials are stored,

dispensed, used, or handled, and on sides of stationary tanks.3. Specific Materials:

SIGN SCHEDULE—HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SIGNS

Mark Material

HealthHazard(Blue)

FlammabilityHazard(Red)

InstabilityHazard(Yellow)

SpecialHazard(White) Location

MountingMethod

Heightto Top

-- Motor Oil 10-30W 0 1 0 Wall Bolts 5’-6”

-- Motor Oil 15-40W 0 1 0 Wall Bolts 5’-6”

-- Degreaser 3 0 0 Wall Bolts 5’-6”

-- LubricantMultipurpose

2 1 0 Wall Bolts 5’-6”

-- Gasoline 2 3 0 Wall Bolts 5’-6”

-- Diesel Fuel 0 2 0 Wall Bolts 5’-6”

-- Paint Latex 2 0 0 Wall Bolts 5’-6”



SIGN SCHEDULE—HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SIGNS

Mark Material

HealthHazard(Blue)

FlammabilityHazard(Red)

InstabilityHazard(Yellow)

SpecialHazard(White) Location

MountingMethod

Heightto Top

-- Paint Epoxy 2 3 1 Wall Bolts 5’-6”

-- Paint Thinner 2 3 0 Wall Bolts 5’-6”

3.03 IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Pipe Labels:

1. Locate at connections to equipment, valves, or branching fittings at wallboundaries.

2. At intervals along piping not greater than 18 feet on center with at leastone label applied to each exposed horizontal and vertical run of pipe.

3. At exposed piping not normally in view, such as above suspendedceilings and in closets and cabinets.

4. Supplementary Labels: Provide to Owner those listed on PipingSchedule that do not receive arrows.

5. Apply to pipe after painting in vicinity is complete, or as approved byEngineer.

6. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Equipment Labels:

1. Locate and install on equipment or concrete equipment base.2. Anchor to equipment or base for easy removal and replacement with

ordinary hand tools.

3.04 SUPPLEMENT

A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of thisspecification.

1. Sign Schedule: Tabulation of characteristics and mounting informationfor warning, informational signs on Project. Provide items as scheduled.Meet requirements of Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 SIGNAGEJANUARY 2020 10 14 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SIGN SCHEDULE

Sign

Lettering

Other RequirementsSign

Type2Detail

Reference3

Size

Color

Mounting

Width Height Location MethodHeightto Top Height Style Color Message Faces

C 1014-002 20" 14" White Wall Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black CAUTIONEquipment StartsAutomatically

1 Locate at all equipment thatmay start automatically(included but not limited topumps)

C 1014-001 20” 14” White Wall Bolts 5’-6” 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER

No Smoking

1 Provide at locationsdirected by Engineer

C 1014-001 20" 14" White Wall Bolts 3'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGERNonpotable WaterNot for Drinking

1 Provide at interior hosevalves

F N/A As required White Tank Side Painted 5'-0" 3" min. Block Red *DANGERCOMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS

1 *Put message on one line

C 1014-001 10" 7" White Door Screws 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGERCONFINED SPACEAUTHORIZEDEMPLOYEES ONLY

1 Provide at entry points toconfined spaces as directedby Engineer

A 1014-008 20" 14" White Wall Screws 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black NOTICEAuthorized Personnel Only


C 1014-003 20" 14" Orange Wall Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black WARNINGEye Protection Required inthis Area


H 1014-006 10” min 10” min * Wall Screws 5’-6” 4” Block Black * 1 *See format detail andArticle Signs: provide at alllocations where hazardousmaterials are stored andused


SIGNAGE PW\DEN003\70833510 14 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JANUARY 2020


SIGN SCHEDULE

Sign

Lettering

Other RequirementsSign

Type2Detail

Reference3

Size

Color

Mounting

Width Height Location MethodHeightto Top Height Style Color Message Faces

D 1014-101 18” 18” Black Front ofGate

Bolts 3’-6” N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 Provide at Entrance Gate

D N/A 8” 3” Yellow Back ofGate

Bolts 3’-6” N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 Provide at Entrance Gate

1Numbers refer to a particular sign type with a particular message.2Letters refer to Sign Types specified in this section.3Numbers refer to Design Details that show sign layout.4Verify requirements for this sign with Regulations in state where Project is located.


PW\DEN003\708335 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIESJANUARY 2020 10 44 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 10 44 00FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 10, Standard for PortableFire Extinguishers.

2. UL: Fire Protection Equipment Directory.


A. Conform to NFPA 10.

B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by UL for purpose specified andindicated.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Fire Extinguishers: Manufacturer’s product data for each item,

including sizes, ratings, UL listings, or other certifications, andmounting information.

b. Product Data: Extinguisher operational features, color and finish,and anchorage details.


1. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Special criteria.2. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified

requirements.3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit test, refill or recharge

schedules and recertification requirements.


A. Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements: Environmental conditionsaffecting products onsite.


FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PW\DEN003\70833510 44 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


B. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures are capable offreezing extinguisher ingredients.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. JL Industries.2. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.3. Nystrom Products Co.4. “Or-equal.”

B. General:

1. Conform to NFPA 10 for fire extinguishers.2. UL listed, charged and ready for service.

C. Multipurpose Hand Extinguisher (F. Ext-1):

1. Tri-class dry chemical extinguishing agent.2. Pressurized, red enameled steel shell cylinder.3. Activated by top squeeze handle.4. Agent propelled through hose or opening at top of unit.5. For use on A, B, and C class fires.6. Minimum UL Rating: 4A-60B:C, 10-pound capacity.

2.02 FIRST-AID CABINETS AND SUPPLIES (FAC)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Afassco, Inc.2. Johnson & Johnson.3. Zee Medical Products Co., Inc.

B. Cases:

1. Enameled metal or break-resistant plastic.2. Carrying handles.3. Made to hang on wall.

C. Supplies: Quantities to serve 10 people.


PW\DEN003\708335 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIESJANUARY 2020 10 44 00 - 3©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Extinguisher Brackets: Furnish heavy-duty brackets with clip-together strapfor wall mounting formed steel, chromed finish.

B. Fasteners: Furnish necessary screws, bolts, brackets, and other fastenings ofsuitable type and size to secure items of fire and safety equipment in position.

1. Metal expansion shields for machine screws at concrete and masonry.2. Interior: Rust-resistant.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Provide at locations shown or as directed by Engineer.

B. Mount hangers securely in position, following manufacturer’srecommendations.

C. Top of Extinguisher: No more than 54 inches above floor.

D. Install wall brackets, maximum 48 inches from finished floor to top ofextinguisher handle.

3.02 FIRST-AID CABINETS AND SUPPLIES (FAC)

A. Provide at locations where shown on Drawings or where directed by Engineer.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIESJANUARY 2020 10 80 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 10 80 00MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Metal shelving.2. Expandable metal shelving.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A591, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-

Coated, for Light Coating Weight (Mass) Applications.b. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.2. Rack Manufacturer Institute (RMI): Specification for the Design,

Testing, and Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage Racks.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturers’ product data for proposed items. Clearly identify eachitem. Include installation instructions including floor attachment bracketsand connectors.

2. Manufacturers’ color charts for color selection.3. Samples: Physical samples of actual factory finish on specified metal for

color verification.

B. Informational Submittals: Manufacturers’ installation instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL SHELVING (M-1)

A. Materials: Cold-rolled steel sheet, component thicknesses in manufacturer’sstandard gauges; hot-rolled steel for structural components.


MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PW\DEN003\70833510 80 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


B. Composition: Open type steel shelving with reinforced sheet metal shelves anddividers.

C. Finish and Color: Baked enamel, in color as selected by Owner frommanufacturer’s standard colors.

D. Size: Unit 4-feet wide by 1-1/2-feet deep and 6-feet high with eight shelvesplaced with 12-inch-high openings.

E. Accessories: Clips and attachment fittings for shelf assembly, adjustment, andpost anchorage to floor.

F. Post Anchorage: Provide manufacturer’s standard floor attachment bracket ateach post with a minimum of one 1/2-inch wedge anchor installed in concretewith minimum 3 inches embedment depth. See Section 05 05 19, Post-InstalledAnchors, for products and installation details.


1. Lyon Workspace Products, Montgomery, IL; 8000 Series.2. Equipto, Addison, TX; V-Grip Series.3. No “or-equals” or substitutions allowed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTIES

A. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations and printed instructions. Consult withEngineer in order that minor adjustments in locations can be decided ifnecessary.

1. Install materials plumb or level as applicable and attach securely toadjacent materials with suitable fasteners.

2. Prevent scratching or damaging adjacent materials during installation.

B. Metal Shelving:

1. Assemble shelving units following manufacturer’s instructions.2. Securely fasten units together and anchor to prevent overturning during

seismic event. Arrange storage racks in locations as shown on Drawings.3. Touch up scratches or defaced finish after assembly as directed by

Engineer.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATIONJANUARY 2020 22 07 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 22 07 00PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air-ConditioningEngineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 90.1, Energy-Efficient Design of NewBuildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

2. ASTM International (ASTM):a. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate.b. C533, Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe

Thermal Insulation.c. C534, Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric

Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.d. C547, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 255, Standard Method ofTest of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Product description, include list of materials, thickness foreach service scheduled, and locations.


1. Proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness,and compressive strength.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.


A. Provide standard, cataloged products, new and commercially available,suitable for service requiring high performance and reliability with lowmaintenance, and free from all defects.

B. Provide materials by firms engaged in the manufacture of insulation productsof the types and characteristics specified herein, whose products have been inuse for not less than 5 years.


PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PW\DEN003\70833522 07 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


C. UL Listing or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testinglaboratory is required to indicate fire hazard ratings for materials proposed foruse do not exceed those specified.


A. Manufacturer’s Stamp or Label:

1. Deliver insulation, jackets, cements, adhesives and coatings with amanufacturer’s stamp or label attached, giving name of manufacturer,brand, and description of material.

2. Insulation Packages and Containers: Mark “asbestos-free.”

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Insulation Exterior: Cleanable, grease-resistant, nonflaking, and nonpeeling.

B. Conform to referenced publications and specified temperature ranges anddensities in pounds per cubic foot.

C. Insulation for Fittings, Flanges, and Valves: Premolded, precut, or job-fabricated insulation of same thickness and conductivity as used on adjacentpiping.

D. Fire Resistance:

1. Provide noncombustible insulation, adhesives, vapor barrier materialsand other accessories, except as specified herein.

2. Use no fugitive or corrosive treatments to impart flame resistance.3. Flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration as a result of effects

of moisture or high humidity are not acceptable.4. Fire Hazard Rating for Materials including Facings, Mastics, and

Adhesives: Not to exceed 25 for flame spread without evidence ofcontinued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke, developed as pertests conducted in accordance with NFPA 255 methods.

5. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating:a. Nylon anchors.b. Treated wood inserts.

6. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating when installed in outsidelocations, buried, or encased in concrete:a. Polyurethane insulation.b. PVC casing.c. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic casing.



2.02 PIPE INSULATION

A. Type P1—Fiberglass (ASTM C547, Type 1 (Minus 20 Degrees F to500 Degrees F):

1. Fiberglass, UL-rated, preformed, sectional rigid, minimum 4 pounds percubic foot (pcf) density, K factor 0.23 maximum at 75 degrees F mean,with factory-applied all-service jacket (ASJ) composed of reinforcedkraft paper and aluminum foil laminate. Provide jacket with self-sealinglap to facilitate closing longitudinal and end joints.

2. Manufacturers and Products:a. CertainTeed; Preformed Pipe Insulation.b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok HP-T.c. Owens/Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.d. Knauf Pipe Insulation; Crown Pipe Insulation.

2.03 INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS

A. Type F1—PVC:

1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing, white, for straight run piping andfitting locations, temperatures to 150 degrees F.

2. Manufacturers and Products:a. Johns Manville; Zeston.b. Ceel-Co; 550.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer’s writteninstructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Apply insulation over clean, finish painted, and dry surfaces.

C. Install insulation after piping system has been pressure tested and leakscorrected.

D. Use insulating cements, lagging adhesives, and weatherproof masticsrecommended by insulation manufacturer.

E. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate eachcontinuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cutpiece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces of scraps abutting each other.




F. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit oversurfaces to be covered.

G. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect toprevent puncture or other damage. Seal open ends of insulation with mastic.Sectionally seal butt ends of chilled water and condensate drain pipinginsulation at fittings with white vapor barrier coating.

H. Cover valves, flanges, fittings, and similar items in each piping system withequivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoiningpipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job-fabricated units. Finish coldpipe fittings with white vapor barrier coating and hot piping with white vinylacrylic mastic, both reinforced with glass cloth.

I. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, andsimilar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

J. Install protective metal shields and foamglass inserts where pipe hangers bearon outside of insulation.

K. Insulation on piping that is to be heat traced shall be installed after installationof heat tape.

L. Insulate valve bodies, flanges, and pipe couplings.

M. Insulate and vapor seal hangers, supports, anchors, and other pipingappurtenances that are secured directly to cold surfaces.

N. Do not insulate flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints.

O. Do not allow insulation to cover nameplates or code inspection stamps.

P. Install removable insulation sections on devices that require access formaintenance of equipment or removal, such as unions and strainer end plates.

Q. Connection to Existing Piping: Cut back existing insulation to remove portiondamaged by piping revisions. Install new insulation.

R. Cold Surfaces: Provide continuous vapor seal on insulation on cold surfaceswhere vapor barrier jackets are used.

S. Placement:

1. Slip insulation on pipe or tubing before assembly, when practical, toavoid longitudinal seams.

2. Insulate valves and fittings with sleeved or cut pieces of same material.



3. Seal and tape joints.

T. Insulation at Hangers and Supports: Install under piping, centered at eachhanger or support.

U. Roof Drains: Insulate vertical drops from roof drain to horizontal pipe,exposed and concealed horizontal piping, and 2 feet down on vertical risersfrom horizontal pipe.

V. Roof and Overflow Drain Sumps: Insulate underside.

W. Vapor Barrier:

1. Provide continuous vapor barrier at joints between rigid insulation andpipe insulation.

2. Install vapor barrier jackets with pipe hangers and supports outsidejacket.

3. Do not use staples and screws to secure vapor sealed systemcomponents.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS

A. Use a continuous friction type joint to hold jacket in-place, providing positiveweatherproof seal over entire length of jacket.

B. Secure circumferential joints with preformed snap straps containingweatherproof sealant.

C. On exterior piping, apply coating over insulation and vapor barrier to preventdamage when aluminum fitting covers are installed.

D. Do not use screws or rivets to fasten the fitting covers.

E. Install removable prefabricated aluminum covers on exterior flanges andunions.

F. Caulk and seal exterior joints to make watertight.

3.03 INSULATION APPLICATIONS

A. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Sump:

1. Type P1, fiberglass.2. 1-inch thickness.




B. Pipe Hangers: Type P1, Fiberglass: UL-rated, preformed rigid pipe insulationinserts of thickness equal to adjoining insulation, 10 inches in length, withfactory-applied, vinyl-coated and embossed vapor barrier jacket with self-sealing lap.

3.04 INSULATION FINISH APPLICATIONS

A. Piping Insulation (Exposed to View, Indoors): Type F1, PVC.

B. Apply coating of insulating cement where needed to obtain smooth andcontinuous appearance.


A. Test factory-applied materials assembled. Field-applied materials may betested individually.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PLUMBING PIPINGJANUARY 2020 AND ACCESSORIES©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 22 10 01 - 1

SECTION 22 10 01PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Gas Association (AGA):a. B109.1, Diaphragm Type Gas Displacement Meters (under

500 Cubic Feet Per Hour Capacity).b. B109.2, Diaphragm Type Gas Displacement Meters (500 Cubic

Feet Per Hour Capacity and Over).2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).3. American Public Works Association (APWA): Uniform Color Code.4. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE):

a. 1010, Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters.b. 1050, Performance Requirements for Stack Air Admittance

Valves for Sanitary Drainage Systems.c. 1070, Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting

Devices.5. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C104/A21.4, Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-IronPipe and Fittings for Water.

b. C110/A21.10, Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.c. C111/A21.11, Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron

Pressure Pipe and Fittings.d. C115/A21.15, Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with

Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges.e. C151/A21.51, Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.f. C203, Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water

Pipelines, Enamel and Tape, Hot-Applied.g. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In.

Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm).h. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.i. C651, Disinfecting Water Mains.

6. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A47/A47M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron

Castings.b. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and

Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.c. A74, Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.


PLUMBING PIPING PW\DEN003\708335AND ACCESSORIES JANUARY 202022 10 01 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

d. A105/A105M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgingsfor Piping Applications.

e. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.

f. A179/A179M, Standard Specification for Seamless Cold-DrawnLow-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes.

g. A181/A181M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings,for General-Purpose Piping.

h. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel andStainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High PressureService and Other Special Purpose Applications.

i. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy SteelNuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, orBoth.

j. A197/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron.k. A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of

Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and HighTemperature Service.

l. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60,000 psi Tensile Strength.

m. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, forPressure-Containing Parts.

n. A518/A518M, Standard Specification for Corrosion-ResistantHigh-Silicon Iron Castings.

o. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.p. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.q. A861, Standard Specification for High-Silicon Iron Pipe and

Fittings.r. A888, Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent PipingApplications.

s. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.t. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.u. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce

Metal Castings.v. B75/B75M, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.w. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.x. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,

Bar, and Shapes.y. B127, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy

(UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip.z. B139/B139M, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod,

Bar, and Shapes.



aa. B164, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar,and Wire.

bb. B194, Standard Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Plate,Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar.

cc. B306, Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).dd. C564, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron

Soil Pipe and Fittings.ee. C1277, Standard Specification for Shielded Couplings Joining

Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.ff. C1460, Standard Specification for Shielded Transition Couplings

for use with Dissimilar DWV Pipe and Fittings Above Ground.gg. C1540, Standard Specification for Heavy Duty Shielded

Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.hh. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)Compounds.

ii. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.

jj. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products inAutomotive Applications.

kk. D2239, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe(SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.

ll. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

mm. D2513, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) GasPressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings.

nn. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements forPoly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.

oo. D2683, Standard Specification for Socket-Type PolyethyleneFittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe andTubing.

pp. D2855, Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Jointswith Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

qq. D3035, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe(DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter.

rr. D3261, Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene(PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe andTubing.

ss. D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe andFittings Materials.

tt. E438, Standard Specification for Glasses in LaboratoryApparatus.



uu. F656, Standard Specification for Primers for Use in SolventCement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe andFittings.

vv. F714, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe(SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter.

ww. F1412, Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings forCorrosive Waste Drainage Systems.

xx. F1924, Standard Specification for Plastic Mechanical Fittings forUse on Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene GasDistribution Pipe and Tubing.

yy. F1973, Standard Specification for Factory Assembled AnodelessRisers and Transition Fittings in Polyethylene (PE) andPolyamide 11 (PA11) and Polyamide 12 (PA12) Fuel GasDistribution Systems.

7. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI):a. 301, Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and

Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent PipingApplications.

b. 310, Specification for Couplings for Use in Connection withHubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and StromDrain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.

8. NSF International (NSF):a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health

Effects.b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead

Content.9. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): WH 201, Water Hammer

Arresters Standard.


A. Where pipe diameter, thickness, pressure class, pressure rating, or thrustrestraint is not shown or specified, design piping system in accordance withthe following:

1. Sanitary Building Drainage and Vent Systems: Uniform Plumbing Codewith local and state amendments.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data sheets.



2. Shop Drawings: Show Contractor recommended changes in location offixtures or equipment.

3. Isometric riser diagrams.


1. Changes in location of equipment or piping that affect connecting oradjacent work, before proceeding with the work.

2. Complete list of products proposed for installation.3. Test records produced during testing.4. For Polyethylene (PE) Pipe:

a. Certificates of qualification for persons to be fusing PE pipe.b. Experience and training record of persons to be fusing PE pipe.c. Testing Plan:

1) Submit at least 15 days prior to testing; include following asa minimum:a) Testing dates.b) Piping systems and section(s) to be tested.c) Method of isolation.d) Method of conveying water from source to system

being tested.d. Certifications of Calibration: Approved testing laboratory

certificate if pressure gauge for hydrostatic test has beenpreviously used. If pressure gauge is new, no certificate isrequired.

e. Test report documentation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption:Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and otherapplicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification bymanufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by theAuthority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with themaximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 andNSF/ANSI 372.

1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceablecertification is prohibited.

2.02 PIPING

A. Piping Schedule: Refer to Article Supplements.



B. Piping Material: Refer to Piping Data Sheet(s).

2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Refer to Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems.

2.04 INSULATION

A. As specified in Section 22 07 00, Plumbing Piping Insulation.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Sleeves:

1. Manufacturers and Products:a. J. R. Smith; Figure 1720.b. Josam; No. 26400.

B. Flashing Sleeves for Roof Penetrations:

1. Built-Up Bituminous Roofing: Fabricate of lead as specified inSection 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

2. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Pipe seals as specified inSection 07 70 01, Roof Specialties and Accessories.

C. Joint Solder: 95-5 wire solder, ASTM B32, Grade 95 TA. Lead free, NSFcertified. Do not use cored solder.

D. Pipe Joint Sealer: Compound insoluble in water or Teflon tape; approved byNFS for use in potable water.

E. Rubber Gaskets: ASTM C564.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install plumbing systems to meet applicable plumbing code.

B. Field Obstructions:

1. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of piping. Provide offsetsaround obstructions.

2. Do not modify structural components, unless approved by Engineer.



C. Sleeves:

1. Pipe sizes shown are nominal sizes, unless shown or specifiedotherwise.

2. Provide piping passing through walls, floors, or ceilings with standard-weight pipe sleeves.

3. Provide pipes passing through finished walls with chrome-platedcanopy flanges.

4. Dry pack sleeves in existing work in-place and provide finishedappearance.

5. Pack holes left by removal of existing piping with grout and finish tomatch adjacent surface.

D. Provide unions in piping systems at connections to equipment.

E. Provide shielded transition couplings, insulating dielectric unions and flangesbetween ferrous and nonferrous piping and where otherwise required forelectrically insulated connection.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Rigid PVC or CPVC:

1. Cut, make up, and install in accordance with pipe manufacturer’srecommendations.

2. Ream, clean, and remove burrs from cut ends before joining pipe.3. Lay in trench by snaking pipe from one side to other.4. Offset: As recommended by manufacturer for maximum temperature

variation between time of solvent welding and final use.5. Do not lay pipe when temperature is below 40 degrees F or above

90 degrees F when exposed to direct sunlight.6. Shield ends to be joined from direct sunlight prior to and during laying

operation.7. Use strap wrenches only for tightening threaded plastic joints. Do not

over tighten fittings.

B. Miscellaneous Piping Specialties: Install in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations.

3.03 SANITARY AND WASTE DRAINS AND VENTS PIPING

A. Installation:

1. Set piping above floor slab true and plumb.2. Set exposed risers as close to walls as possible.



3. Slope drain lines at minimum 2 percent slope, unless otherwise noted.Vent lines shall be installed level or sloped, with no low spots.

4. Where vent stacks pass through roof slab, fit with flashing sleevesecured to roof.

5. Extend vents minimum 1 foot above roof.6. Provide cleanouts where shown and where required by code.

3.04 INSULATION

A. As specified in Section 22 07 00, Plumbing Piping Insulation.

3.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. In accordance with Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems.

B. Install pre-engineered support equipment in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations.

C. Hanger Rod Sizing and Spacing for:

1. Steel Pipe:

Pipe Size

Max. HangerSpacing

(feet)Min. Rod Size

(inches)

1 inch and smaller 6 1/4

1-1/4 through 2-1/2 inches 8 1/4

3 and 4 inches 10 3/8

6 inches 12 3/8

8 inches 12 1/2

2. Plastic Pipe:a. Rod Size: Same as for steel pipe.b. Spacing: As recommended by manufacturer and required by

applicable plumbing code for flow and temperature in pipe.c. No metal portion of hanger shall contact pipe directly.

D. Attach Support Rods For Horizontal Piping:

1. To steel beams with I-clamps.2. To concrete with inserts or with flanges fastened with flush shells.



3. To wood with thickness of 2-1/2 inches or more with bolts or angleclips.

E. Trapeze Hangers:

1. Trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of individual hangers wherehorizontal piping is arranged with two or more parallel lines.

2. Attach lines to horizontal with U-bolts or one-hole clamps.

F. Vertical Piping:

1. Support by channel type support system and pipe clamps on 10-footmaximum centers.

2. Copper and Plastic Piping: Isolate from channels and pipe clamps withpipe isolators.

G. Insulated Piping: Furnish galvanized protection shield and oversized hangersunder insulated piping.

3.06 INTERIM CLEANING

A. As specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General.

B. Prevent accumulation of weld rod, weld spatter, pipe cuttings and filings,gravel, cleaning rags, and other foreign material within piping duringfabrication and assembly.

C. Examine piping to assure removal of foreign objects prior to assembly.

D. Conventional commercial cleaning methods of cleaning are acceptable ifmethod and cleaning material does not corrode, deform, swell, or otherwisealter physical properties of material being cleaned.

3.07 TESTING

A. As specified in Section 40 80 01, Process Piping Leakage Testing.

3.08 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. As specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General.




A. Protective Covers:

1. Provide over floor and shower drains during construction, to preventdamage to drain strainers and keep foreign material from enteringdrainage system.

2. Cover roof drains and emergency overflow drains during roofingprocess so roofing material and gravel do not enter drain piping.

3. Remove at time of Substantial Completion.

3.10 FIELD FINISHING

A. In accordance with Section 40 27 00, Processing Piping—General.

3.11 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General, and Piping Schedule.

3.12 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are part of thisspecification.

1. Plumbing Piping Schedule.2. Plumbing Piping Data Sheets.

SectionNumber Title

22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent (PVC-DWV)Pipe and Fittings

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PLUMBING PIPING SCHEDULEJANUARY 2020 22 10 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 22 10 01.01PLUMBING PIPING SCHEDULE

Legend ServiceSize(s)(in.) Exposure

PipingMaterial

SpecificationSection

OperatingPressure

(psig)TestType

TestPressure

(psig)

PipeColors

andLabels Notes

RD Roof Drains All EXP/BUR PVC-DWV 22 10 01.02 NA H 5 NA 4

Notes:

1. Refer to Section 23 23 00, Refrigerant Piping, for testing requirements.

2. Finish all FS piping exposed to view, color to be OSHA red, in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, Paint System No. 5.

3. Heat trace as specified in Section 40 05 33, Pipe Heat Tracing.

4. Insulate as specified in Section 22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation.

Legend

Exposure Pressure Test Material

BUR Buried H Hydrostatic ACR Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration

EXP Exposed I In Service CISP Cast Iron Soil Pipe

SUB Submerged P Pneumatic CLDI Cement-Lined Ductile Iron

ENC Concrete Encased NA Not Applicable CMP Corrugated Metal Pipe

COP Copper

CPVC Chlorinated PVC

DI Ductile Iron

DWV Drain Waste and Vent


PLUMBING PIPING SCHEDULE PW\DEN003\70833522 10 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JANUARY 2020


Legend

Exposure Pressure Test Material

FRPX Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic

GLDI Glass-Lined Ductile Iron

GSP Galvanized Steel Pipe

HDPE High Density Polyethylene

MDPE Medium Density Polyethylene

PP Polypropylene Pipe

PSTL PVDF-Lined Steel

PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

PVDF Polyvinylidene Fluoride

RCP Reinforced Concrete Pipe

RSTL Rubber-Lined Steel

SST Stainless Steel

STL Steel

VC Vitrified Clay Pipe

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE DRAINJANUARY 2020 WASTE AND VENT (PVC-DWV)©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS PIPE AND FITTINGS

22 10 01.02 DATA SHEET - 1

SECTION 22 10 01.02POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

DRAIN WASTE AND VENT (PVC-DWV)PIPE AND FITTINGS

Item Size Description

Pipe and Fittings All PVC-DWV Schedule 40 nonpressure application,Class 12454B conforming to ASTM D2665 andANSI/NSF Standard 14 system.

Joints All Solvent cemented conforming to ASTM D2855except where connection to equipment may requirefuture removal.

Solvent Cement All As recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturerconforming to ASTM D2564.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PLUMBING FIXTURESJANUARY 2020 22 40 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 22 40 00PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).2. American Gas Association (AGA).3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).4. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE): 1010, Performance

Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters.5. ASTM International (ASTM): D4101, Standard Specification for

Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials.6. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).7. NSF International (NSF):

a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - HealthEffects.

b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - LeadContent.

8. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI):a. Code Guide 302 and Glossary of Industry Terms.b. WH-201, Water Hammer Arrester Standard.

9. UL.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Catalog information and rough-in dimensions for plumbingfixtures, products, and specialties.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and local and staterequirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption:Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other


PLUMBING FIXTURES PW\DEN003\70833522 40 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification bymanufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by theAuthority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with themaximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 andNSF/ANSI 372.

1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceablecertification is prohibited.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Drainage Products:

1. General:a. Smith.b. Wade.c. Zurn.

2.03 GENERAL

A. Fixture Trim: Provide plumbing fixture trim where applicable on fixtures.

B. Plumbing Fixtures: Indicated by fixture number as shown on Drawings.

C. Drainage Products: Indicated by fixture number as shown on Drawings.

D. Plumbing Specialties: Indicated by fixture number as shown on Drawings.

E. Exposed fixture connections and piping shall be polished chrome-plated.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Drainage Products:

1. CO-2, Cleanout:a. Material: Taper thread, bronze plug, scoriated nickel bronze top.b. Manufacturer and Product: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.; Model 4023.

2. RD-2, Roof Drain (Small Roof Areas):a. Materials: Cast-iron body with combined flashing clamp and gravel

stop, and cast-iron dome.b. Options: Extension collar, sump receiver, underdeck clamp.c. Manufacturer and Product: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.;

Model 1330Y-E-R-C.


PW\DEN003\708335 PLUMBING FIXTURESJANUARY 2020 22 40 00 - 3©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

3. OD-2, Overflow Drain (Small Roof Areas):a. Materials: Cast-iron body with combined flashing clamp and gravel

stop, and cast-iron dome.b. Options: Extension collar, sump receiver, underdeck clamp, and

2-inch-high water dam.c. Manufacturer and Product: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.;

Model 1330Y-E-R-C-WD.4. ON-1, Overflow Nozzle:

a. Material: Cast bronze body and flange.b. Manufacturer and Product: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.; Model 1770.

5. HD-1, Hub Drain:a. Coated cast-iron reducing hub adapter with standard cast-iron hub.b. Hub: Two pipe sizes larger than outlet.

B. Sealant: In accordance with Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of fixtures. Changes inlocations of fixtures, advisable in opinion of Contractor, shall be submitted toEngineer for review before proceeding with the Work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Unless noted otherwise and as a minimum, fixtures shall be supported asindicated in PDI Code Guide 302.

B. Drainage Products:

1. Floor Drains: Set top flush with floor. Provide membrane clamps whererequired.

2. Cleanouts: Install where shown or required for purposes intended. Setcover flush with finished floor.

3. Hub Drains: Set top of hub 2 inches above finished floor.

C. Caulk penetrations of exterior walls with weatherproof sealant in accordancewith Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.

D. Adjust water flows in domestic water systems for reasonable water flows ateach plumbing fixture, terminal device, and recirculation loop. Flush valvefixtures shall be adjusted for proper flush cycle time and water quantity.


PLUMBING FIXTURES PW\DEN003\70833522 40 00 - 4 JANUARY 2020



A. Perform visual inspection for physical damage, blocked access, cleanliness, andmissing items.

END OF SECTION

SALMON CREEK TREATMENT

PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 8, 2020 HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS

BROWN AND CALDWELL 23 00 00 - 1

SECTION 23 00 00

HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. SCOPE: This Section specifies the general requirements for all of the HVAC

materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services included in

Division 23 and elsewhere wherever specifically mentioned in the

Specifications.

1. Piping, pipe supports, valves, and accessories which are not an integral

part of the equipment or are not specified herein are covered in other

sections.

2. Ductwork and Accessories shall be per Section 23 31 13.

B. DEFINITIONS: Terminology used in this specification conforms to the

following definitions:

1. Authorities Having Jurisdiction: Indicates reviewing authorities,

including local building official, local fire marshal, Owner, and other

reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain system

acceptance.

2. ACH: Air changes per hour.

3. SCFM: Standard cubic feet per minute.

4. ACFM: Actual cubic feet per minute

5. Ft^2: Square foot.

6. TAB: Testing and Balancing.

C. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: See Section: 01 11 00

D. FASTENERS: unless indicated otherwise.

1. Bolts - ASTM A193, grade B8M Class 1 or ASTM A320 B8M Class 1

2. Nuts – ASTM A194, grade 8M

3. Washer – 316 SS

E. GOVERNING STANDARDS:

1. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by this

section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable municipal

codes and ordinances, laws, and regulations. In case of a conflict


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

HVAC BASIC REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 8, 2020

23 00 00 - 2 BROWN AND CALDWELL

between this section and any state law or local ordinance the more

stringent requirements shall govern.

2. All work shall comply with UL safety requirements.

F. Suitable connections shall be provided for each fixture, piece of equipment,

and appurtenance.

G. Coordinate with other trades (e.g., Plumbing, Fire Protection, Structural) for

routing of equipment and connection points

H. POWER SUPPLY:

1. Power supply to equipment with motors shall be as indicated on the

drawings. Power supply for controls shall be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single

phase unless otherwise required for a properly operating system.

I. METAL THICKNESS:

1. Metal thickness and gages specified herein are minimum requirements.

Gages refer to US Standard gage.

1.02 COORDINATION

A. Supplier shall verify that each component of the HVAC system is compatible

with all other parts of the system; that all piping, fixtures, and appurtenances

are appropriate; and that all devices necessary for a properly functioning

system have been provided.

B. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, they

shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the component

parts of the system need not be the products of one manufacturer.

C. Each manufacturer shall have a local service center, or with written consent of

Engineer, shall be able to provide service from other locations within

24 hours. The service center shall be equipped and staffed to service the

system and shall maintain a local parts supply.

D. Information on equipment manufacturers' representatives shall be included

with the submittals.

E. The equipment as shown on the plans and specified herein, is based on the

equipment furnished by one manufacturer. An equipment which is offered as a

substitute to the specific requirements of these Specifications and which

differs in detail and arrangement from that shown may require changes in

design and construction. All costs which result from such changes in design

and construction are to be borne entirely and unconditionally by the

Contractor and/or the manufacturer; said costs to include but not be limited to


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



structural, piping, mechanical and electrical changes and all engineering costs

incurred as a result of the substitution, in the revision of Plans and

Specifications, review of design changes by others, preparation of change

orders, and any other costs directly resulting from said substitution.


A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Comply with the rules and regulations

of Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the work specified herein, including

all adopted state and local building codes including plumbing, mechanical,

fire, building, and electrical.

B. WELDING QUALIFICATIONS

1. All welding procedures and welding operators shall be qualified by an

independent testing laboratory in accordance with the applicable

provisions of AWS or ASME Standard Qualification Procedures.

2. All procedure and operator qualifications shall be in written form and

subject to Engineer review.

3. Accurate records of operator and procedure qualifications shall be

maintained by Supplier and made available to Engineer upon request.

4. The mechanical system installer shall be licensed as stipulated by the

authority having jurisdiction.

C. MANUFACTURERS EXPERIENCE: Unless the equipment manufacturer is

specifically named in this Section, the manufacturer shall have furnished

equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful

operation for not less than the past 5 years.

D. Reference Standards:

1. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the

documents in effect on the effective date of the Agreement. They are

part of this Section insofar as specified and modified herein. In the event

of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed

documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

2. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing

organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement

documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there

are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before

it was discontinued.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



Reference Title

AABC Associated Air Balance Council, National Standards for Total

System Balance

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act

AHRI Air-Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering

ASTM ASTM International

AWWA American Water Works Association

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

CSA CSA International

ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

FDA Food & Drug Administration

FM Factory Mutual Global

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

HI Hydraulic Institute Standards

ISO International Organization for Standardization

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau, Procedural Standards for

Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NSF National Sanitation Foundation

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association,

Inc.

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

WA BFC Washington State Building and Fire Code

WA CC Washington Construction Code

WA EC Washington Energy Code


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



Reference Title

WA FPC Washington Fire Prevention Code

WA FGC Washington Fuel Gas Code

WA MC Washington Mechanical Code

UL 1995 Heating and Cooling Equipment

E. Unit Responsibility:

1. The Supplier shall furnish and install equipment assemblies made up of

two or more components to be provided as a working unit by the unit

responsibility manufacturer, where specified. The unit responsibility

manufacturer shall coordinate selection, coordinate design, and shall

provide all mechanical equipment assembly components such that all

equipment components furnished under the specification for the

equipment assembly, and all equipment components specified elsewhere

but referenced in the equipment assembly specification, is compatible

and operates reliably and properly to achieve the specified performance.

Unless otherwise specified, the unit responsibility manufacturer shall be

the manufacturer of the driven component equipment in the equipment

assembly. The unit responsibility manufacturer is designated in the

individual equipment specifications found elsewhere in this project

manual. Agents, representatives or other entities that are not a direct

division of the driven equipment manufacturing corporation shall not be

accepted as a substitute for the driven equipment manufacturer in

meeting this requirement. The requirement for unit responsibility shall

in no way relieve the Supplier of his responsibility to the Owner’s

Representative and Owner for performance of all systems in the

contracted scope of supply.

2. The Supplier shall ensure that all equipment assemblies provided for the

project are products for which unit responsibility has been accepted by

the unit responsibility manufacturer(s), where specified. Unit

responsibility for related components in a mechanical equipment

assembly does not require or obligate the unit responsibility

manufacturer to warranty the workmanship or quality of component

products not manufactured by them. Where an individual specification

requires the Supplier to furnish a certificate from a unit responsibility

manufacturer, such certificate shall conform to the content, form and

style of Form 43 05 11-C, included at the end of this Section, shall be

signed by an officer of the unit responsibility manufacturer's corporation

and shall be notarized. No other submittal material will be processed

until a Certificate of Unit Responsibility has been received and has been

found to be satisfactory. Failure to provide acceptable proof that the unit

responsibility requirement has been satisfied will result in withholding


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



approval of progress payments for the subject equipment even though

the equipment may have been installed in the work.

3. Complete assembly and installation drawings, and wiring and schematic

diagrams, together with detailed specifications and data covering

materials, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the

equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01

33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Device tag numbers indicated on the

Drawings shall be referenced on the wiring and schematic diagrams

where applicable.

F. Manufacturer’s Instructions:

1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions.

2. If in conflict with Construction Documents, obtain clarification.

3. Notify the Owner’s Representative in writing before starting work.

G. DRAWINGS:

1. The Drawings shall be taken as diagrammatic.

2. Size of duct and pipes and general method of running them are shown,

but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting nor every structural

difficulty that may be encountered.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 33

00.

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included,

and all referenced and applicable sections, with each paragraph check-

marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate

requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ()

shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations

from the specifications are indicated and therefore requested by the

Manufacturer, underline each deviation and denote by a number in the

margin to the right of the identified paragraph. Provide a detailed,

written justification for each deviation. The Owner Representatives shall

be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested

deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will

signify compliance with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of

the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for

requested deviations with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for

rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration

B. ACTION SUBMITTAL ITEMS FOR THIS SECTION:


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



1. A copy specification section, with addendum updates included and each

paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked

to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements.

2. If the specification includes the submittal item, revise the text of the

submittal item to conform to the phrasing listed in the specifications.

3. Manufacturer’s data including materials of construction, construction

details of equipment, wiring diagrams, weight of equipment, mounting,

seismic bracing, and support.

4. Drawings showing general dimensions and confirming the size of

equipment, fixtures, motors and drives, and piping connections. (Shop

drawings)

5. Performance curves for pumps developed for the specific application.

Performance curves shall show speed, capacity, pressure, and power for

specified conditions.

6. Shop and field painting systems. Include manufacturer’s descriptive

technical catalog literature and specifications.

7. Shop Drawings including the physical characteristics of all systems,

equipment, and piping layout plans, and control wiring diagrams.

8. Operation and Maintenance Information: Section 01 78 23.

9. Samples, where required by the specification section.

10. Rigid Equipment Mount Installation Checklist (Form 46 05 29-A),

including at the end of this Section.

11. See Division 22 specifications sections for additional requirements.

C. Informational Submittal for this Section:

1. Structural Design and Anchorage: Section 01 88 15.

D. Operations and Maintenance Data and Manuals:

1. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied as

required in the Submittals section and Equipment Operating and

Maintenance

2. Manual Information section: Operation and maintenance manuals shall

be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section and Equipment

Operating and Maintenance Manual Information section.

3. Operation and maintenance manuals are required for electronic trap

priming panels, water closets, urinals, faucets and flush valves,

emergency fixtures, wash fountains, electric water coolers, food waste

disposers, water heaters, circulating pumps, hose reels, expansion tanks,

automatic water softener units, water storage tanks, neutralization tanks,

oil interceptors, and flammable waste interceptors.

E. DRAWINGS AND DATA:


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



1. The data and specifications for each unit shall include, but shall not be

limited to, the following:

a. Equipment (all types):

1) Name of manufacturer.

2) Type and model.

3) Construction materials, thickness, and finishes.

4) Manufacturer's performance data.

5) Overall dimensions and required clearances.

6) Net weight and load distribution.

7) Wiring diagrams.

b. Ductwork

1) Duct fabrication drawings indicating dimensions of

individual shop and field fabricated sections, top and/or

bottom duct elevations, joint locations, and dimensions of

duct from walls or column rows.

2) Pressure and seal classifications.

3) Reinforcement types and spacing.

4) Joint and seam types.

5) Hanger and support types, spacing, and attachment methods.

6) Access panel and door construction, sizes, and locations.

7) Duct sealant, adhesive, gasket, and tape information.

8) Product data for adhesives and sealants shall include VOC

content.

9) Coatings.

10) Ductwork materials and thicknesses.

11) Coils

12) Product data demonstrating compliance with ASHRAE 90.1

13) Ductwork leakage test report.

c. Temperature controls:

1) Published descriptive data on each item of equipment and

accessories, indicating all specific characteristics and

options and identified with the designation used herein and

on the Drawings.

2) Schematic control diagrams giving specific data on all

settings, ranges, actions, adjustments, and normal positions.

Although schematic, these diagrams shall, as closely as

possible, represent the actual system with all significant

equipment and devices identified and located relative to

each other. These diagrams shall also show detailed


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



multiline wiring with all terminals accurately identified. The

wiring diagrams shall show the internal connections of the

temperature control panels and all field wiring to equipment

remote from the control panels, including wiring to Owner-

furnished equipment. The wiring diagrams shall be

complete, showing all connections necessary to place the

temperature control systems in operation. Wiring diagrams

shall be detailed to the degree necessary for field

construction and shall include all related wiring.

3) Sequence of operation for each system corresponding to the

control schematics.

4) Detailed panel construction drawings, including description

of all materials and finishes, complete internal wiring and

piping schematics, panel face layout, and complete data on

all mounted components.

5) Space thermostat schedule indicating the types of covers

and means of adjustment for each space.

6) Conduit and wire types.

7) Where specified, information on equipment manufacturers’

representatives.

d. Seismic Design Requirements:

1) Confirmation of compliance with the requirements of the

Special Provisions section.

e. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals:

1) Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be

supplied as required in Section 01 78 23 and Section 01 33

00. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted

in accordance with Section 01 33 00. The operation and

maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions

or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when

delivered.


A. For the main process building, the HVAC system ventilation rates shall be

designed per the WA Mechanical code, ASHRAE 901, ASHRAE 55,

ASHRAE 62.1 and ACGIH industrial ventilation recommendations.

Additional overhead fans may be required to avoid air stratification.

B. All air moving equipment fans shall be sized such that the correct SFCM is

the output ACFM at the hottest, most humid condition with enough

horsepower for the coldest inlet temperature. All controls shall have a


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



temperature reset based on the outside temperature adjusting for the proper

SCFM or ACH.

C. COORDINATION

1. Contractor shall verify that each component of the system is compatible

with all other parts of the system; that all piping, ductwork, materials,

fans, and motor sizes are appropriate; and that all devices necessary for

a properly functioning system have been provided.

2. Where individual equipment paragraphs specify the requirement for

local service, each manufacturer shall have a local service center, or

with written consent of Owner’s Representative, shall be able to provide

service from other locations within 24 hours. The service center shall be

equipped and staffed to service the system and shall maintain a local

parts supply. Information on equipment manufacturers' representatives

shall be included with the submittals.

3. Where several manufacturers' names have been listed in this section as

possible suppliers, only the products of the first manufacturer listed

have been checked for size, functions, and features.

4. The independent TAB agency shall be contracted prior to construction

to do a “balanceability report” to verify the system as designed can be

tested and balanced, and to identify changes that can make the system

easier to test and verify at the end of construction and in the future. The

TAB agency shall perform periodic site walk throughs to identify items

prior to testing. These include, but are not limited to finding located or

missing dampers and valves, variable air volume (VAV) box sizing,

piping issues, duct sealing, and issues with building pressures.

5. Prior to official cleaning, testing, adjusting, and balancing, the

mechanical contractor shall pre-test each section prior to any air balance

agency testing, inspector witnessing, mechanical engineer witnessing,

duct insulation installation, duct shafts are closed up, or any other

structural construction that will have an impact is continued. Return air

ducts and exhaust may be tested with positive pressure.

6. Equipment bearings shall be lubricated in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.

7. Mechanical contractor is responsible for coordinating with the project

air balance agency.

8. For additional TAB coordination requirements consult Division 23 and

the following Specifications:

a. Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC: Specification 23 05

93.

b. Commissioning of HVAC: Specification 23 08 00.

c. Sheetmetal Ductwork and Accessories: Section 23 31 13.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



d. Other ductwork as required

9. Air systems shall be complete and operating, with dampers, filters,

ductwork, air outlet and inlet devices, duct-mounted equipment, and

control components.

D. GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS:

1. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and

materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this

specification differ from those in the Special Provisions section, the

requirements specified herein shall take precedence.

2. Unless otherwise noted, all equipment handling air shall meet the duct

seal and leakage classes per 23 31 13. Manufacturer shall provide test

data confirming cabinet construction can meet the requirement

E. SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: Seismic design requirements for

products specified herein shall be as indicated by structural.

F. INSULATION REQUIREMENTS: See Section 23 07 00.

1. Equipment and products shall meet the minimum performance

requirements identified in the Division 23 Specifications.

G. DESIGN CRITERIA:

1. Design of HVAC equipment shall be based on the atmospheric

conditions at the project site. Temperature, humidity, prevailing wind

speed and direction, elevation, corrosive or contaminated environments,

and human comfort shall be considered, as applicable.

H. DIMENSIONAL RESTRICTIONS:

1. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers. At least 3 feet of

clear access space shall be provided on all sides of the unit

I. TYPE, PERFORMANCE, CHARACTERISTICS, ARRANGEMENT,

ACCESSORIES: As noted in the Division 23 specification sections.

J. ELECTRIC MOTOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

1. Designed for continuous operation in 40°C environment.

2. For temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG-1 limits for

insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

3. Type specified, scheduled, or noted for respective units.

K. Provide ductwork and equipment supports, hangers, guides, and anchors as

specified herein.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



L. When standard hangers, supports, and accessories are not adequate the

Contractor shall employ a registered Structural Engineer to prepare design

calculations for all such supports, hangers, and accessories for seismic

restraint needed for the ductwork and equipment installation. Calculations and

shop drawings shall be signed by the above-named engineer and submitted to

the Owner’s Representative.

M. SPECIAL FEATURES FOR HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS:

1. Provide for particular units when noted or scheduled on Drawings, spark

proof fan wheels and explosion proof motors.

1.06 APPURTENANCES

A. Furnish and install all necessary guides, inserts, anchors and assembly bolts,

washers and nuts, hangers, supports, gaskets, couplings, and flanges; and all

other appurtenant items shown on the Drawings, specified, or required for the

proper installation and operation of the piping; devices included in or on the

piping equipment; and piping accessories.


A. Shipping, handling, and storage shall be in accordance with the Delivery,

Storage, and Handling section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. All equipment shall be designed and selected to meet the specified conditions.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS AND FABRICATION

A. Provide like items from one manufacturer, including but not limited to: fans,

air handlers, air conditioning units, heat pump units, heaters, vibration

isolation devices, etc.

B. Unless the equipment manufacturer is specifically named in this section, the

manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified

which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years.

C. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors: Section 05 05 19

1. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. Anchor bolts, expansion anchors,

nuts, and washers shall be designed for lateral forces for both pullout

and shear in accordance with the provisions of Section 05 05 19. Unless

otherwise stated in the individual equipment specifications, anchor bolt,


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



washer and nut materials shall conform to the requirements above with

the provisions of Section 05 05 19 unless otherwise indicated on the

Drawings.

2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed in the respective product

description paragraphs.

2.04 COATINGS

A. Surface Preparation:

1. All fabricated surfaces from ferrous metal, except motors and speed

reducers, shall be shop cleaned by sandblasting or equivalent, in strict

conformance with the paint manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be removed before shop

primer is applied.

B. Coatings shall be electrostatically coated (e-coat) and uniformly applied. The

electro-coat process shall ensure complete encapsulation of all conductive

surfaces with uniform dry film thickness. After e-coat cure, equipment shall

receive a spray-applied, polyurethane black topcoat to prevent UV

degradation of epoxy e-coat film. Immediately after completion of the test, the

specimen must show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of

adhesion and no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the

scratch mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized

sheet steel is used must be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to

ASTM D520, Type I.

C. Submit product data on the type coating selected, the coating thickness, the

application process used to meet the requirements below and verification of

conformance with the salt spray test requirement

1. Surface finish damaged during installation shall be repaired to the

satisfaction of Engineer.

D. Coils/HX exposed to ambient

1. No material bridging is allowed, including enhanced and micro-channel

fin designs

2. Submit the estimated heat transfer loss of the coil. Coating must be

applied at either the coil or coating manufacturer's factory. Coating

process must ensure complete coil encapsulation


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



E-Coating Requirements

Coating Quality Test Procedure Coating Performance

(Nominal plus)

Dry Film Thickness ASTM D7091 1 mil

Water Immersion ASTM D870 1000 hrs

Cross Hatch Adhesion ASTM B3359 4B-5B Rating

Salt Spray ASTM B117

ASTM B117-G85

6000 hrs

2000 hrs

Heat Transfer Reduction

(Coils Only)

AHRI 410 <1%

Humidity ASTM D1735 1000

Operating pH Range N/A 3-12

Temperature -40 F to 300 F (Coils Only)

See 01 11 80

Weathering (topcoat) ASTM 4587 2200

2.05 MATERIALS

A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified.

B. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest

products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL,

ETL, or CSA approved, or have adequate approval or be acceptable the

Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

C. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one

manufacturer.

D. Gas piping shall be A53 Grade B seamless or A106 Grade B

2.06 COLOR

A. Equipment shall have the manufacturer's standard color unless otherwise

indicated in the schedules or specifications

B. Equipment may use the manufacturer's finish if it meets the criteria above or

otherwise indicated in the schedules or individual specifications.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



2.07 ELECTRICAL

A. Electrical controls and disconnects shall be furnished and installed under the

Electrical section, except where specified herein.

B. All electrical controls shall have enclosures suitable for the environment and

NEMA rating as indicated on the electrical Drawings.

C. See section 23 09 00 for controls and control panel requirements.

2.08 PIPING ACCESSORIES

A. GENERAL: Final pressure gauge and thermometer ranges shall be between

1.1 and 1.3 times the system operating conditions. Shut off if testing pressure

exceeds the gauge range during testing

2.09 ACCESS PANELS/DOORS

A. GENERAL: Provide flush mounting access panels as required for service of

instrumentation, valves, drains, and test connections and other Item requiring

maintenance or inspection. Where access panels are located in fire-rated

assemblies of building, rate access panels accordingly. Ceiling access panels

to be minimum 24-inch x 24-inch or required and approved size. Wall access

panels to be minimum 12-inch x 12-inch or required and approved size.

Babcock-Davis Series BN (non-rated), BI series (rated) or equal. All

panels/doors shall incorporate doors/access panels with air seals suitable to

provide airtight seal shall be provided between door and frame. The door

swing shall be such as to open against system pressures.

2.10 AIR FILTRATION

A. GENERAL: Air filters in air handlers shall be 2-inch thick, MERV 8, pleated,

disposable filters unless noted otherwise.

2.11 ROOF CURBS: FOR ROOF MOUNTED FANS AND AIR CONDITIONER

UNITS

A. Each unit shall be provided with a prefabricated mounting curb.

B. AHRI Guideline B except as modified below.

1. 1997 version Table 1.

a. Up to 24-inch-width shall be 16 inches above roof surface.

b. 49- to 60-inch-width shall be 30 inches.

c. See details in guide.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



C. Comply with local code requirements for minimum curb height, but in no case

shall curb height be less than 16 inches, as measured from top of bar joist to

top of curb, nor shall curb height be less than 8 inches as measured from top

of roof membrane to top of curb. Roof curb to be manufactured of prime

galvanized steel construction, 14 gauge as required, meeting

ASTM A653/653M, with fully welded corners and with seams joined by

continuous water and air tight welds. Roof curb shall be internally reinforced

with angles 48" on center and factory installed wood nailer. Top of all roof

curbs shall be level, with pitch built into curb when deck slopes. 2 inch by

4 inch (nominal dimension) pressure treated continuous wood nailers

mechanically fastened with corrosion resistant fasteners at 12 inches on center

to exterior face of curb. Shop prime welded connections with zinc-rich paint

complying with SSPC-Paint 20. Label curbs with "INTAKE" designating to

align with the intake of the equipment. Fans shall be labeled “FRONT” to

designate where the equipment nameplate coincides. Frame duct openings

with 18 gauge curb sections level with perimeter curb sections, minimum

height 18 inches.

D. The outer shell of the curb shall be formed with an integral cant strip and

mounting flange. The bottom of the curb shall have a baseplate which

encloses the lower edge of the roof insulation. A damper holding tray shall be

provided. Provide curb for flat, pitched or ridged roof as required.

E. Coating per requirements below.

F. Insulate interior of the curb with 2 inches of 1.5-lb/cu ft neoprene-coated

fiberglass insulation.

G. Provide seismic restraints to secure the unit to the curb in accordance with

Section 01 73 24.

2.12 CONDENSATE DRAINS

A. Contractor to confirm that pad elevation is tall enough to meet the following

minimum criteria with the equipment point of connection. Immediately

contact the engineer if not.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



B. Draw through unit

C. Blow Through unit


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. EQUIPMENT MOUNTING:

1. Procedures: Install equipment for the Equipment Mounting Systems

specified in Division 23 and on drawings.

2. Install equipment requiring access (i.e., drain pans, drains, control

operators, valves, motors, cleanouts, and water heaters) so that they may

be serviced, reset, replaced, or recalibrated. Do not install equipment in

obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles, or crawlspaces which would

impede or block intended usage.

3. Install equipment and fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's

installation instructions

a. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

b. Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-

in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly.

c. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with

Construction Documents, request clarification from the Engineer

prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper

installation methods, sequencing, and coordination with other

trades and disciplines

4. Furnish and install all fixtures with traps and vents unless otherwise

specified on the Drawings.

5. Furnish and install all supports, bracing and blocking required for the

proper installation of the work specified.

6. Furnish and install miscellaneous supports/metal required for

installation of equipment, piping, and vents

B. See the individual Division 23 specifications sections for additional

requirements for specific equipment.

C. In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be

installed in plenums. Immediately notify the Owner’s Representative of

discrepancy.

D. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other

equipment for simultaneous operation, utilize equipment wiring diagrams to

coordinate with electrical systems so that proper wiring of equipment involved

is affected.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



3.02 COATINGS

A. Per this specification.

3.03 CLEANING

A. PRE-STARTUP REQUIREMENTS: Section 01 91 14. If not in the bid set,

use the following as a minimum

1. Prior to testing, thoroughly clean the inside of each completed piping

system of all dirt, loose scale, sand, and other foreign material.

2. Cleaning shall be by sweeping, flushing with water or blowing with

compressed air, as appropriate for the size and type of pipe.

3. Flushing shall achieve a velocity of at least 3 feet per second.

4. The contractor shall install temporary strainers, temporarily disconnect

equipment, or take other appropriate measures to protect equipment

while cleaning piping.

B. POST STARTUP Requirements:

1. At the completion of the testing, all equipment, pipes, ductwork, valves,

and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, debris, metal cuttings, and

sludge. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to parts of the

building, its finish, or furnishings shall be repaired by Contractor at no

additional cost to Owner.

2. Upon completion of the duct system cleaning, the duct system shall be

visually inspected for cleanliness to verify no visible contaminants are

present to the satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

3. If the visual inspection is inconclusive, then additional tests in

accordance with the National Air Duct Cleaners Association shall be

performed. Any ducts that are considered not to be clean by the Owner’s

Representative shall be re-cleaned and re-tested. Any damaged materials

or surfaces shall be repaired or replaced.

4. A report shall be provided indicating the successful cleaning of the

ductwork, method used to determine the cleanliness, and results of any

tests is required.

3.04 STARTUP REQUIREMENTS

A. System equipment shall be subject to preliminary field tests as indicated in

Equipment Startup and Checkout section

3.05 FIELD TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

A. Test all HVAC systems and arrange for inspection by the Authorities Having

Jurisdiction.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



B. GENERAL:

1. Furnish all equipment, material, personnel, and supplies to perform the

tests and make all taps and other necessary temporary connections.

2. Field performance tests shall be conducted for each system to

demonstrate each is functioning as specified and to the satisfaction of

Owner’s Representative.

3. All tests shall be conducted in a manner acceptable to Owner’s

Representative and shall be repeated as many times as necessary to

secure Owner’s Representative acceptance of each system.

4. If inspection or tests indicate defects, the defective item or material shall

be replaced, and the inspection and tests shall be repeated.

5. All repairs to piping shall be made with new materials.

6. Caulking of threaded joints or holes will not be acceptable.

C. Perform leakage tests on all pipe installed in this project or on any alterations

or extensions of existing. Furnish all equipment, material, personnel, and

supplies to perform the tests and make all taps and other necessary temporary

connections. Leakage tests shall be performed on all piping at a time agreed

upon and in the presence of the Owner. All visible leaks shall be repaired,

regardless of the test results.

D. The test pressure, allowable leakage, and test medium shall be as specified for

the piping systems. Test pressure shall be measured at the highest point on the

line, except that pressure at lowest point shall not exceed pipe manufacturer’s

rated test pressure, unless specifically noted otherwise.

E. All visible leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the test results.

F. Perform following operations and checks before units are operated for any

purpose:

1. Verify shipping blocking and bracing have been removed.

2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and

connections for ductwork, electrical, etc. are complete. Verify proper

thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters and

disconnects.

3. Perform specified cleaning and adjusting. Disconnect fan drives from

motors, verify proper motor rotation, and verify fan wheel free rotation

and smooth operation of bearings. Reconnect fan drive systems, align

belts, and install belt guards.

4. Lubricate bearings and other moving parts with factory-recommended

lubricants.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



5. Verify manual and automatic volume control dampers are positioned

properly and that fire and smoke dampers in related ductwork are in

full-open position.

6. Disable automatic temperature control operators, where applicable.

G. Start-up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions,

and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and

demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

1. Do not place equipment in sustained operation prior to initial balancing

of systems.

2. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance

with requirements specified. Document tests and include in Operation

and Maintenance Manuals.

H. The equipment and controls of this Section shall be completely tested,

adjusted, and placed in operating condition.

I. Retest equipment and controls, as necessary, during the progress of the work.

No work shall be covered until it is properly tested and made tight.

J. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment with new.

Refurbished is not acceptable.

K. When about to turn the apparatus over to the Owner, put all parts of the

apparatus in perfect working order and thoroughly clean out all parts of the

equipment.

L. Clean exterior and interior surfaces of each unit. Vacuum clean fan wheel and

surfaces exposed to the air handled by the unit.

Check damper operation and linkages. Adjust for proper damper operation.

M. Air filters which are subject to a pressure loss exceeding the dirty filter values

shall be removed and replaced. The spare air filters furnished with equipment

shall not be used as the replacement filters. Dirty filter values shall be as

follows:

Filter Type Dirty Filter Conditions

1 inch pleated 1.0 inch water column

2 inch pleated 1.0 inch water column

N. Perform ductwork pressure test prior to air balancing per 23 30 13.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



O. All heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems installed under this

Section shall be carefully adjusted by a qualified Air Balancing Contractor to

deliver and exhaust air quantities as specified or described herein while

maintaining the spaces served at the design temperature and design air

pressure differentials. A final balancing report shall be produced and

submitted to the Owner showing the airflow SCFMs, fan statics, and motor

amperages.

3.06 TESTING, TRAINING, AND COMMISSIONING

A. In accordance with Sections 01 45 33 and01 91 14

B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and systems testing,

demonstrate to the Owner’s Representative that equipment furnished and

installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in

manner required.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services:

1. Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner’s

Representative, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or

deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative

that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with

requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work.

2. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site

observations.

D. TABB Procedures and Requirements: See Section 23 05 93.

3.07 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof curbs to be mounted level on roof in accordance to NRCA manuals and

details. Secure to structure per engineered/sealed seismic installation details.

B. Seal openings between curb, roof opening, ducts, electrical conduits, piping,

and building interior.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



43 05 11-C. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY CERTIFICATION FORM

SCTP HVAC SYSTEMS REPLACEMENT (BUILDINGS 70 AND 72)

CERTIFICATE OF UNIT RESPONSIBILITY

FOR SPECIFICATION SECTION _______________

__________________________________________________

_UNIT:__________________________

In accordance with Section 23 00 00-1.03E Unit Responsibility of the contract documents, the undersigned manufacturer of driven equipment (“manufacturer”) accepts unit responsibility for all components of equipment furnished to the Project under specification Section______ , and for related equipment manufactured under sections___ ____, ______, and ______ .

We have reviewed the requirements for Division 23 and all sections referencing this (these) section(s), including but not limited to drivers, supports for driving and driven equipment and all other specified appurtenances to be furnished to the Project by manufacturer. And, we have further reviewed, and modified as necessary, the requirements for associated variable speed drives and motor control centers. We hereby certify that all specified components are compatible and comprise a functional unit suitable for the specified performance and design requirements whether or not the equipment was furnished by us. We will make no claim nor establish any condition that problems in operation for the product provided under this specification Section ______ are due to incompatibility of any components covered by this Certificate of Unit Responsibility. Nor will we condition or void any warranty for the performance of the product of this specification Section ______ due to incompatibility of any components covered under this Certificate of Unit Responsibility.

Our signature on this Certificate of Unit Responsibility does not obligate us to take responsibility for, nor to warrant the workmanship, quality, or performance of related equipment provided by others under specification sections ______, ______, and ______. Our obligation to warranty all equipment provided by us shall remain unaffected.

Notary Public Name of Corporation

Commission expiration date Address

Seal: By:

Duly Authorized Official

Legal Title of Official

Date


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



43 05 13-A. RIGID EQUIPMENT MOUNT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

CRWWD, SCTP HVAC SYSTEMS REPLACEMENT (BUILDING 70 AND 72)

Equipment Tag No.: Date:

Grout Product Name and Type:

Grouting System Manufacturer:

Grouting Application Contractor:

General Contractor:

Step 1: Verify Equipment Anchor Installation Conformance to Equipment Pad Details

Name: Contractor Rep. Date

Name: Construction Manager Date

Name: Millwright Date

Step 2: Completion of Cleaning and Concrete Substrate Preparation Prior to Grouting



Name: Grouting Contractor Rep. Date

Name: Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Rep.

Date

Step 3: Equipment Leveling



Name: Millwright Date

Step 4: Installation of Protection of Adjacent Surfaces or Structures NOT TO BE GROUTED





Date

Step 5: Preparation and Construction of Forms and Epoxy Grout Filling Standpipes





Date

Step 6: Completion of Ambient Condition Control in Structure or Building Area and Acceptance of Ambient Conditions as They Apply to Application and Curing Requirements for the Grouting System





Date

Step 7: Epoxy Grout Installation




Name: Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Date


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



Rep.

Step 8: Completion of Full and Proper Cure of Epoxy Grout





Date

Step 9: Completion of Localized Repair of Grout Voids





Date

Step 10: Final Acceptance of Grouting System Installation Including Final Clean-Up of the Work Site Complying with All Specification Requirements and the GSM's Quality Requirements





Date

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING JANUARY 2020 FOR HVAC AND ODOR CONTROL ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

FOR HVAC AND ODOR CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. (AMCA): 203, Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems.

2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): HVAC Applications Handbook.

3. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards for Field Management and Instrumentation Total System Balance.

4. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): a. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of

Environmental Systems. b. Procedural Standards for Measuring Sound and Vibration.

5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA): HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Manual.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational Submittals:

1. Documentation of experience record of testing authority. 2. Documentation of current AABC or NEBB certifications for those

technicians in responsible charge of the work under this Contract. 3. Submit detailed test and balance procedures, including test conditions

for systems to be tested, prior to beginning the Work. 4. Written verification of calibration of testing and balancing equipment. 5. Balancing Log Report following completion of system adjustments

including test results, adjustments, and rebalancing procedures.


A. Air Balancing and Test Agency Qualifications:

1. Certification by AABC of NEBB for testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC systems.

2. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority.


TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PW\DEN003\708335 FOR HVAC AND ODOR CONTROL 2020 23 05 93 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

3. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of HVAC equipment being tested.

4. Have a proven record of at least five similar projects. 5. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing,

adjusting and balancing of HVAC equipment and systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide materials, tools, test equipment, computers and instrumentation required to complete the work included.

B. Test Hole Plugs: Plug test holes in ducts with plugs made for that purpose and replace any insulation removed to specified conditions.

C. Drives for Belt-driven Fans:

1. Furnish cast iron or flanged steel sheaves. 2. Sheaves and belt combination shall be capable of providing 150 percent

of motor horsepower.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Adjust and balance air in accordance with standard procedures and recognized practices of the AABC or SMACNA.

B. Adjust and balance the following systems:

1. Preliminary and Primary Treatment Odor Control System. 2. Solids Odor Control System. 3. Storage Addition Exhaust Fan System.

3.02 ODOR CONTROL EXHAUST

A. Preliminary and Primary Treatment Odor Control (Facility 22):

1. Balance air flow to design conditions from each source by adjustment of balancing dampers as shown on Drawings. a. Exhaust flow rate of 12,600 cfm from Preliminary Treatment

Facility. b. Exhaust 1,000 cfm from each of four primary clarifiers. c. Exhaust 300 cfm from both ends of the primary influent channel.



d. Exhaust 2,000 cfm from the 117th Street Force Main OA duct. e. Exhaust 150 cfm from the PE/RAS Mixing Box Facility.

2. Adjust fan speed if required to achieve total exhaust flow rate of 19,350 cfm.

B. Solids Odor Control (Facility 75):

1. Balance air flow to design conditions from each of the following sources by adjustment of balancing dampers as shown on Drawings. a. Exhaust 660 cfm from TWAS wet well. b. Exhaust 300 cfm from Filtrate wet well. c. Exhaust 150 cfm from screw conveyer (total). d. Exhaust 200 cfm from storage hopper.

2. Balance air flow for the BFP room exhaust to meet the following conditions: a. Exhaust 14,000 cfm from the BFP hood with damper 75FV1001

open and damper 75FV1002 closed. b. Exhaust 14,000 cfm from the other BFP hood with damper

75FV1002 open and damper 75FV1001 closed. c. Exhaust 14,000 cfm split evenly between both BFP hoods with

damper 75FV1001 open and damper 75FV1002 open. d. Exhaust 7,000 cfm split between both BFP hoods with damper

75FV1001 open and damper 75FV1002 open. 3. Adjust fan speed if required to achieve total exhaust flow rate of

15,310 cfm. 4. Determine the required pressure setpoint for speed control of the odor

control fan. a. Pressure setpoint as measured by 75PIT0101 shall be determined

under normal operating condition (14,000 cfm with one BFP damper open and exhaust flows from other sources as described in Paragraph B.1 above)

b. Provide pressure setpoint for PLC input. 5. Determine damper positions for the different operating modes to enable

PLC inputs for the mode table as follows:

Mode

Damper 75FV1001

position, %

Damper 75FV1002

position, %

Supply Air flow rate, cfm

Exhaust air, cfm

1 100 0 14,000 14,000

2 0 100 14,000 14,000

3 50 50 14,000 14,000



Mode

Damper 75FV1001

position, %

Damper 75FV1002

position, %

Supply Air flow rate, cfm

Exhaust air, cfm

4 25 25 7,000 7,000

a) Damper positions in table are approximate.

b) Actual damper position to be determined during testing.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING AIR SIDE

A. Preparation:

1. Prior to beginning the Work, perform the following activities: a. Review shop drawings and installed system for adequate and

accessible balancing devices and test points. b. Recommend to Engineer dampers that need to be added or

replaced in order to obtain proper air control. c. Verify proper startup procedures have been completed on the

system. d. Verify controls installation is complete and system is in stable

operation under automatic control. e. Verify test instruments have been calibrated to a recognized

standard and are within manufacturer’s recommended calibration interval before beginning the Work.

B. General:

1. When adjustments are made to a portion of a fan system, reread other portions of that same system to determine effects imposed by adjustments. Readjust as necessary.

2. Lock and mark final positions of balancing dampers with permanent felt pen.

C. Equipment Data:

1. Collect the following data and included in final report: a. Type of unit. b. Equipment identification number. c. Equipment nameplate data (including manufacturer, model, size,

type, and serial number). d. Motor data (frame, hp, volts, FLA rpm, and service factor). e. Sheave manufacturer, size, and bore. f. Belt size and number.



g. Sheave centerline distance and adjustment limits. h. Starter and motor overload protection data. i. Include changes made during course of system balancing.

D. Fan Systems:

1. Measure fan system performance in accordance with AMCA 203. 2. In each system at least one airpath from fan to final branch duct

termination shall have dampers fully open. Achieve final air quantities by adjusting fan speed.

3. Adjust Fan Air Volumes: a. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives for required equipment air

volumes, with allowable variation of plus 10 percent minus 0 percent.

b. After final adjustments, do not operate motor above nameplate amperage on any phase.

c. After final adjustments, do not operate fan above maximum rated speed.

d. Perform airflow test readings under simulated or actual conditions of full cooling, full heating, minimum outside air, full outside air and exhaust, and full return air.

e. Provide and make drive and belt changes on motors or fans as required to adjust equipment to specified conditions. Drives shall be able to deliver 150 percent of motor horsepower. Provide written notice to air handling unit manufacturer and Engineer if drive or belt changes were made.

4. Adjust outside air dampers, return air dampers, relief air dampers, exhaust air dampers, and motorized louvers for maximum and minimum air requirements.

5. Read and record static pressures at unit inlet and discharge, each filter set, coils, dampers, plenums, and mixing dual-duct or adjustable-volume boxes, on every supply, return, and exhaust fan for each test condition.

6. Read and record motor amperage on all phases for each test condition.

E. Air Outlets and Inlets:

1. In each system at least one air path from fan to final branch duct termination shall have dampers fully open.

2. Adjust air volumes on supply diffusers and grilles, and on return and exhaust grilles, to the quantity shown, with allowable variation of plus or minus 10 percent.

3. Adjust diffusers and grilles for proper deflection, throw, and coverage. Eliminate drafts and noise where possible.



4. After final adjustments are made secure dampers to prevent movement and mark final positions with permanent felt pen.

F. Building Static Pressure:

1. Measure building static pressure relative to outside in perimeter entrances during normal system conditions that would yield widest range in internal building pressure.

2. For multi-story buildings, test pressure conditions at ground, intermediate, and upper levels.


A. General: Perform functional tests as required by Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

B. Performance Testing:

1. Vibration Testing: a. Test Procedures:

1) Identify maximum vibration velocity limits as specified for each piece of equipment to be tested. a) Vibration readings as measured as actual rotational

speed shall not exceed the following values: (1) Flexibly Mounted: 0.35 inch per second peak

velocity. (2) Rigidly Mounted: 0.25 inch per second peak

velocity. 2) Take measurements at each bearing housing using

calibrated electronic analyzer. 3) Measure velocity in direction parallel to rotating shaft, and

in two directions perpendicular to shaft and to each other. Align measurement directions where possible to the horizontal and vertical planes.

4) Record log shall include equipment symbol or tag, location, identification, specified vibration velocity limits, and maximum measured velocity in each direction.

5) Notify Engineer if amplitude exceeds upper limit specified. 2. Fan System Performance Curve: Document the fan operating speed and

static pressure at each fan inlet and discharge at the design condition and at three different operating conditions to provide the data required for calculation of the fan air flow rate as required by Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, supplement Loop Specifications.



C. Balancing Log Report Requirements:

1. Include narrative description for each system explaining TAB methodology and assumptions used. Clearly identify test conditions for tests performed. Include control setpoint.

2. Log and record operational information from every test for each system, as necessary to accomplish services described.

3. Include equipment data for units tested. 4. Include reduced set of HVAC Drawings or system schematic diagrams

with each element uniquely identified and indexed to balance log. 5. Indicate recorded site values, and velocity and mass correction factors

used to provide equivalent standard air quantities. 6. Include separate section in log, if necessary, describing operating

difficulties in air or water systems that could not be eliminated by specified procedures. Identify these problems by system and location within building; include outline or summary of condition and its effect on building, and describe corrective actions attempted and recommended.

D. Quality Control Verification:

1. After adjustments have been completed and balance logs submitted, balancing and testing agency shall be available to demonstrate the following: a. Air balancing procedures, vibration tests, and verification of test

results. b. Results of these spot tests shall agree with balance logs within

plus or minus 10 percent. Where this accuracy cannot be verified, rebalance portions of system as requested by Engineer.

c. At completion of rebalance procedures, perform another spot test if required to verify results.

END OF SECTION


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 8, 2020 HVAC INSULATION


SECTION 23 07 00

HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION5

A. WORK INCLUDED: Provision of materials, installation and testing of:

1. Type A, Flexible Fiberglass Blanket

2. Type B, Duct Liner

3. Type C, Rigid Fiberglass Board

4. Type 1, Fiberglass Pipe Insulation

5. Type 2, Flexible Elastomeric Insulation

6. Jacketing

7. Accessories

8. Duct Insulation Accessories

9. Duct Insulation Compounds

10. Outdoor Ducting Cover


A. As required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. IN ADDITION, MEET THE FOLLOWING:

1. Piping and duct insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by

weight PBDE in all insulating materials across the board.


A. REFERENCE STANDARDS

1. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the

following documents. They are part of this Section insofar as specified

and modified herein. In the event of conflict between the requirements

of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of

the Sections shall prevail.


documents in effect on the effective date of the Agreement. If

referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing

organization, references to those documents shall mean the

replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that

organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version

of the document before it was discontinued.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

HVAC INSULATION JANUARY 8, 2020


Reference Title

ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow

Meter Apparatus

ASTM C534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible

Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and

Tubular Form

ASTM C553 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket

Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial

Applications

ASTM C612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and

Board Thermal Insulation

ASTM C1071 Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining

Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)

ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials

NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and

Ventilation Systems.

NFPA 90B Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning

Systems

NFPA 255 Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning

Characteristics of. Building Materials

UL R5583-400-8.15 Pipe Insulation Testing Requirements

UL 181 Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air

Connectors

UL 723 Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics

of Building Materials

B. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01 General

Requirements.

C. In addition, meet the following:

1. Installer to have minimum 5 years of experience in the business of

installing insulation.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00 and

Division 01 General Requirements.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



1.05 FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION

A. Maximum fire hazard classification of the composite insulation construction

as installed to be not more than a flame spread of 25, fuel contributed of 50

and smoke developed of 50 as tested by current edition of ASTM E84 (NFPA

255) method.

B. Test pipe insulation in accordance with the requirements of current edition of

UL "Pipe and Equipment Coverings R5583 400 8.15."

C. Test duct insulation in accordance with current edition of ASTM E84, UL

723, NFPA 255, NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS (IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER)

A. TYPE A, FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS BLANKET:

1. Certainteed

2. Johns Manville

3. Knauf

4. Owens-Corning

5. PPG

6. Or approved equivalent.

B. TYPE B, DUCT LINER

1. Certainteed

2. Johns Manville

3. Knauf

4. Owens-Corning

5. PPG


C. TYPE C, RIGID FIBERGLASS BOARD:

1. Certainteed

2. Johns Manville

3. Knauf

4. Owens-Corning

5. PPG



PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



D. TYPE 1, FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION:

1. Certainteed

2. Johns Manville

3. Knauf

4. Owens-Corning

5. PPG


E. TYPE 2, FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION:

1. Armacell LLC Armaflex.


2.02 TYPE A, FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS BLANKET

A. ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2; flexible blanket.

B. 'K' VALUE: 0.27 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75 degrees F installed, maximum

service temperature: 250 degrees F.

C. DENSITY: 0.75 lb./cu.ft.

D. VAPOR BARRIER JACKET: FSK aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass

yarn and laminated to fire resistant Kraft, secured with UL listed pressure

sensitive tape or outward clinched expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic

as needed.

2.03 TYPE B, DUCT LINER

A. ASTM C1071; flexible blanket.

B. 'K' VALUE: ASTM C518, 0.25 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75 degrees F, maximum

service temperature: 250 degrees F.

C. NOISE REDUCTION COEFFICIENT: 0.65 or higher based on "Type A

mounting."

D. MAXIMUM VELOCITY ON MAT OR COATED AIR SIDE: 5,000 FPM.

E. ADHESIVE: UL listed waterproof type.

F. FASTENERS: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically

fastened.

G. EROSION-RESISTANT SURFACES: UL 181.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



H. ASTM G21 and ASTM G22 Microbial Growth Resistance.

2.04 TYPE C, RIGID FIBERGLASS BOARD

A. ASTM C612; rigid board.

B. 'K' VALUE: 0.23 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75 degrees F.

C. DENSITY: 3.0 lb./cu.ft.

D. VAPOR RETARDANT JACKET: AP, bleached Kraft paper bonded to

aluminum foil, reinforced with fiberglass yarn; or FSK aluminum foil

reinforced with fiberglass yarn and laminated to fire resistant Kraft, secured

with UL listed pressure sensitive tape or outward clinched expanded staples

and vapor barrier mastic as needed.

2.05 TYPE 1, FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION

A. GLASS FIBER: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1. THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY VALUE: 0.27 BTU-inch

(hour/sf/degrees F) at 75 degrees F.

2. MAXIMUM SERVICE TEMPERATURE: 850 degrees F.

3. VAPOR RETARDER JACKET: White Kraft paper reinforced with

glass fiber and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self-sealing

longitudinal laps and butt strips or vapor barrier mastic.

2.06 TYPE 2, FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. ELASTOMERIC FOAM: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded

or sheet.

1. THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY VALUE: 0.25 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75

degrees F.

2. Maximum Service Temperature of 220 degrees F.

3. MAXIMUM FLAME SPREAD: 25.

4. MAXIMUM SMOKE DEVELOPED: 50 (1-inch thick and below).

5. CONNECTION: Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed.

6. UV PROTECTION: UV outdoor protective coating per manufacturers

requirements.

B. GLUE: Contact adhesive specifically manufactured for cementing flexible

elastomeric foam. Armacell LLC Armaflex Low VOC adhesive, Halstead, or

approved equivalent.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



C. PAINT: Nonhardening high elasticity type, specifically manufactured as

protective covering of flexible elastomeric foam insulation for prevention of

degradation due to exposure to sunlight and weather. Armacell LLC

Armaflex, Halstead, or approved equivalent.

2.07 JACKETING

A. CANVAS JACKET: UL listed fabric, 6 ounce/sq. yd., plain weave cotton

treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.

B. PVC preformed molded insulation covers. Zeston or approved equivalent.

C. ALUMINUM JACKET: 0.016-inch-thick sheet, (smooth/embossed) finish,

with longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps, die-shaped fitting covers with

factory attached protective liner.

D. STAINLESS STEEL JACKET: Type 316 stainless steel, 0.010-inch, smooth

finish.

2.08 ACCESSORIES

A. EQUIPMENT INSULATION JACKETING: Presized glass cloth, not less

than 7.8 ounces/sq.yd., except as otherwise indicated. Coat with gypsum

based cement.

B. EQUIPMENT INSULATION COMPOUNDS: Provide adhesives, cement,

sealers, mastics, and protective finishes as recommended by insulation

manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. GENERAL: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner angles,

anchors, stud pins and metal covers as recommended by insulation

manufacturer for applications indicated. Accessories, i.e., adhesives, mastics,

cements, and tape to have the same flame and smoke component ratings as the

insulation materials with which they are used. Shipping cartons to bear a label

indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed those listed above.

Provide permanent treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke

safety. Provide nonwater soluble treatments. Provide UV protection

recommended by manufacturer for outdoor installation.

2.09 DUCT INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as

recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



2.10 DUCT INSULATION COMPOUNDS

A. Cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes, and similar

accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications

indicated.

2.11 OUTDOOR DUCTING COVER

A. ALUMINUM JACKET: 0.016-inch-thick sheet, smooth/embossed finish,

with longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps.

B. Non-water vapor retarder, non-burning, weatherproof coating for use over

insulation where "breathing" is required.

C. UV resistant polyvinyl chloride covering with joints secured and sealed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: SECTION 23 00 00

3.02 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply insulation until pressure testing of the ducts and piping has been

completed. Do not apply to pipe with heat tracing until system has been

tested. Do not apply insulation until the duct has been inspected.

B. Examine areas and conditions under which duct insulation will be installed.

Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to be insulated.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. INSULATION: Continuous through walls, floors, partitions except where

noted otherwise.

B. PIPING AND EQUIPMENT:

1. Install insulation over clean, dry surfaces with adjoining sections

firmly butted together and covering surfaces. Fill voids and holes. Seal

raw edges. Install insulation in a manner such that insulation may be

split, removed, and reinstalled with vapor barrier tape on strainer caps

and unions. Do not install insulation until piping has been leak tested

and has passed such tests. Do not insulate manholes, equipment


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



manufacturer's nameplates, handholes, and ASME stamps. Provide

beveled edge at such insulation interruptions. Repair voids or tears.

C. DUCTWORK:

1. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's

recommendations to completely cover duct.

2. Butt insulation joints firmly together and install jackets and tapes

smoothly and securely.

3. Apply duct insulation continuously through sleeves and prepared

openings, except as otherwise specified. Apply vapor barrier materials

to form complete unbroken vapor seal over insulation.

4. Coat staples and seals with vapor barrier coating.

5. Cover breaks in jacket materials with patches of same material as

vapor barrier. Extend patches not less than 2-inches beyond break or

penetration on all directions and secure with adhesive and staples. Seal

staples and joints with vapor barrier coating.

6. Fill jacket penetrations. i.e., hangers, thermometers and damper

operating rods, and other voids in insulation with vapor barrier

coating. Seal penetration with vapor barrier coating. Insulate Hangers

and Supports for cold duct in un-conditioned spaces to extent to

prevent condensation on surfaces.

7. Seal and flash insulation terminations and pin punctures with

reinforced vapor barrier coating.

8. Continue insulation at fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers up to and

including those portions of damper frame visible at outside of the rated

fire barrier. Insulating terminations at fire dampers in accordance with

this Section.

9. Do not conceal duct access doors with insulation. Install insulation

terminations at access door in accordance with this Section.

10. DUCT LINERS: Mat finish surface on air stream side. Secure

insulation to cleaned sheet metal duct with continuous (minimum 90)

percent coat of adhesive. For widths over 20-inches, additionally

secure liner with mechanical fasteners 15-inches on center or per

manufacturer requirements. Accurately cut liner and thoroughly coat

ends with adhesive. Butt joints tightly. Top and bottom sections of

insulation overlap sides. Factory/field coat exposed edges. Metal

nosing for exposed lending edges and when velocity exceeds 3500

FPM or manufacturer rating on exposed edges. Keep duct liner clean

and free from dust. At completion of project, vacuum duct liner if it is

dirty or dusty. Cut studs off near washers. Do not use small pieces. If

insulation is installed without horizontal, longitudinal, and end joints

butted together, installation will be rejected and work removed and

replaced with work that conforms to this Specification.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



11. DUCT WRAP: Cover air ducts per insulation table except ducts

internally lined where internal duct lining is adequate to achieve

adequate insulating values to meet local Energy Codes (indicate on

shop drawings, locations where duct wrap is planned to be omitted and

indicate internal duct lining insulating values to confirm they will meet

the Energy Code.) Wrap tightly with circumferential joints butted and

longitudinal joints overlapped minimum of 2-inches. Adhere insulation

with 4-inch strips of insulating bending adhesive at 8-inches on center.

On ducts over 24-inches wide, additionally secure insulation with

suitable mechanical fasteners at 18-inches on center. Circumferential

and longitudinal joints stapled with flare staples 6-inches on center and

covered with 3-inch wide, foil reinforced tape.

3.05 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Installed insulation during construction. Replace damaged insulation which

cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage

and moisture saturated units.

3.06 FIBERGLASS INSULATION

A. Lap seal insulation with waterproof adhesive. Do not use staples or other

methods of attachment which would penetrate the vapor barrier. Apply fitting

covers with seated tacks and vapor barrier tape.

B. Apply insulation to pipe and seal with self-sealing lap. Use self-sealing butt

strips to seal butt joints. Insulate fittings, valves, and unions with single or

multiple layers of insulation and cover to match pipe or use performed PVC

molded insulation covers.

3.07 LABELING AND MARKING

A. Provide labels, arrows and color on piping and ductwork. Attach labels and

flow direction arrows to the jacketing.

3.08 PIPING SURFACES TO BE INSULATED

A. Per Energy Conservation Code, ASHRAE 90.1, or per this table whichever is

more stringent. NOTE, these values may not be enough for condensation

control. The designer to submit calculations that energy as well as

condensation were accounted for.:


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



Item to be Insulated

System

Insulation

Type Pipe Size

Insulation

Thickness

Heating and Heat

Recovery

(141F to 200F)

1 <=1-inch

>1-inch and <=1-1/2-

inch

>2-inch and <=4-inch


>8-inch

1-1/2-inch

1-1/2-inch

2-inch

2-inch

2-inch

Refrigerant Suction

Piping

(40F to 60F)

2 >1-inch and <=1-1/2-

inch

>1-1/2-inch and <=4-

inch


>8-inch

1/2-inch

1-inch

1-inch

1-inch

Refrigerant Suction

Piping

(<=40F)

2 >1-inch and <=1-1/2-

inch

>1-1/2-inch and <=4-

inch


>8-inch

1-inch

1-inch

1-inch

1.5-inch

Heating Water

Storage Tanks/

Vessels, Heat

Exchanger

1 All 2-inch

3.09 DUCTWORK SURFACES TO BE INSULATED

A. Per Energy Conservation Code, ASHRAE 90.1/IEEC2015, or per this table

whichever is more stringent. NOTE, these values may not be enough for

condensation control. The designer to submit calculations that energy as well

as condensation were accounted for:


System

Insulation

Type

Duct

Size

Insulation

Min.

Thickness

Supply ductwork where duct is not

specified to be lined.

A All 1-1/2-

inch

Return Ductwork B All 1-inch


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




System

Insulation

Type

Duct

Size

Insulation

Min.

Thickness

Supply ductwork (exposed to weather, in

crawl space and in unheated attics)

A All 3-inch

Return ductwork (exposed to weather, in

crawl space and in unheated attics)

A All 3-inch

Duct Silencers C All 1-1/2-

inch

Outside Air Ducts A All 3-inch

HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-

insulated

B, C All 1-1/2-

inch

Exhaust ducts within 10-feet of exterior A All 3-inch

Exposed insulation in mechanical rooms or

areas subject to damage

C All 1-1/2-

inch

3.10 INSULATED PIPE EXPOSED TO WEATHER OR DAMAGE

A. Where piping is exposed to weather or damage, cover insulation with

aluminum jacket. Seal watertight jacket per manufacturer's recommendations.

Install with exposed lap pointing down.

3.11 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC PLASTIC PIPE INSULATION

A. Slip insulation on pipe prior to connection. Butt joints sealed with

manufacturer's adhesive. Insulate fitting with miter-cut pieces. Cover

insulation exposed to weather and undergrade with two coats of finish as

recommended by manufacturer.

3.12 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC TUBING

A. FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC TUBING:

1. Slip insulation over piping or if piping is already installed, it should be

slit and snapped over piping. Joints and butt ends must be adhered

with 520 adhesive.

3.13 OUTDOOR DUCT EXPOSED TO WEATHER

A. Install jacket with brakes/slope to prevent standing water on duct.

B. Weatherproof seal at joints and seams. Minimum 2-inch overlap.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



C. Label jacket every 6-feet and within 2-feet of building penetrations and

equipment connections: 'Do not stand or place equipment on duct".

3.14 CALCIUM SILICATE PIPE INSULATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Seal canvas jacket tight

to insulation at lap joints. Continuous insulation over pipe, fittings and

supports or hangers. No holidays or gaps permitted.

3.15 INSULATION SHIELDS

A. Provide full size diameter hangers and shields (18-gauge minimum) for cold

piping. Hot water piping hangers may penetrate insulation to contact pipe

directly. Provide 18-inch long, non-compressible insulation section at

insulation shields for lines 2-inches and larger for steam and chilled water

piping.

3.16 STORAGE TANKS

A. Finish with canvas jacket and adhesive. Overlap joints minimum of 4-inches.

Apply two coats latex paint; color selected by Owner.

3.17 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Protect installed insulation during construction. Replace damaged insulation

which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier

damage and moisture saturated units.

END OF SECTION


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 8, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC


SECTION 23 08 00

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Provision of materials, installation and testing of HVAC systems

2. Definitions, warranties, test equipment requirements, and mechanical

commissioning requirements.

3. This section applies to HVAC commissioning for schedule B

activities.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. CxA: Commissioning Agent



B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Current edition of ASHRAE Guideline 0, The Commissioning

Process.

2. Washington State Energy Code Section C408: System

Commissioning.

1.04 WARRANTY (IN ADDITION TO 23 00 00)

A. PROVIDE:

1. Commissioning, inspecting, and testing will not modify terms or time

periods of mechanical equipment, systems, and controls warranties

including related equipment and systems, and adjacent work.

2. HVAC Control system warranty period for work covered by this

section starts from date of Commissioning Agent acceptance.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Reference Division 01 for requirements pertaining to coordination during the

commissioning process.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC JANUARY 8, 2020


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Provide standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial

checkout and functional performance testing for the equipment being tested.

For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 23 will ultimately be

responsible for standard testing equipment for the HVAC system and controls

system in Division 23, except for the equipment specific to and used by TAB

in their commissioning responsibilities. Provide a sufficient quantity of two-

way radios by each subcontractor.

B. Include special equipment, tools, and instruments (specific to a piece of

equipment and only available from vendor) required for testing in the base bid

price to the Owner and leave on site, except for stand-alone data logging

equipment that may be used by the CxA.

C. Manufacturer of equipment to provide proprietary test equipment and

software required for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not.

Manufacturer provides the test equipment, demonstrates its use, and assists in

the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and

software) becomes the property of the Owner upon completion of the

commissioning process.

D. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be

provided by the CxA, and will not become the property of the Owner.

E. Use only testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or

measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the

specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements

apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers have a certified

calibration within the past year to accuracy of 0.5 degrees F and a resolution

of plus or minus 0.1 degrees F. Pressure sensors have an accuracy of plus or

minus 2.0 percent of the value range being measured (not full range of meter)

and have been calibrated within the last year.

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.02 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-

Functional Checklists for commissioned components, equipment, and systems

B. RED-LINED DRAWINGS:


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



1. Verify equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and components

are shown correctly on red-lined drawings.

2. Preliminary red-lined drawings must be made available to the

Commissioning Team for use prior to the start of Functional

Performance Testing.

3. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into

the final as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined

drawings.

4. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create

the as-built drawings.

C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:

1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of

each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process

for commissioned equipment and systems.

2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to

project requirements.

3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature

once corrections have been made by the Contractor.

D. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING:

1. Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the

specifications.

2. A complete training plan and schedule must be submitted by the

contractor to the CxA four weeks prior to any training.

3. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the

CxA one week prior the training session.

4. Notify the CxA at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled tests so that

testing may be observed by the CxA and Owner. Provide a copy of the

test record to the CxA, Owner.

5. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specific

equipment.

6. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for

starting and stopping, trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining

equipment.

7. Review data in O&M Manuals.

E. SYSTEMS MANUAL REQUIREMENTS:

1. The Systems Manual is intended to be a usable information resource

containing the information related to the systems, assemblies, and

Commissioning Process in one place with indexes and cross

references.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



2. Include final approved versions of the following information for the

Systems Manual:

a. Facility Description

b. Basis-of-Design

c. A list of contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, architects, and

engineers involved in the project along with their contact

information

d. Overview of each commissioned system including operational

schedules and sequence of operations.

e. General maintenance recommendations and procedures.

f. Recommendations for recalibration frequency of sensors and

actuators

g. Recommended best practices for keeping the system running

efficiently.

h. Blank Functional Performance Tests so the Owner can re-

commission the facility at a later date.

3. Organize and arrange information by building system, such as fire

alarm, chilled water, heating hot water, etc.

4. Provide Information in an electronic version to the extent possible.

Legible, scanned images are acceptable for non-electronic

documentation to facilitate this deliverable.

3.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Mechanical, Controls and TAB Contractors. The commissioning

responsibilities applicable to each of the mechanical, controls and TAB

contractors of Division 23 are as follows (references apply to commissioned

equipment only):

B. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.

C. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings.

D. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meetings.

E. Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component

maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.

F. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning

documentation.

G. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and

training in each purchase order or sub-contract written.

H. Prepare preliminary schedule for Mechanical system orientations and

inspections, operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions,


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up,

testing and balancing and task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary

schedule to commissioning team members.

I. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period.

J. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the related portions of

the prefunctional checklists for commissioned equipment.

K. Assist the CxA in verification and functional performance tests.

L. Gather operation and maintenance literature on equipment, and assemble in

binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxA (45) days after

submittal acceptance.

M. Coordinate with the CxA to provide (48) hour advance notice so that the

witnessing of equipment and system start-up and testing can begin.

N. Notify the CxA a minimum of (2) weeks in advance of the time for start of the

testing and balancing work. Attend the initial testing and balancing meeting

for review of the official testing and balancing procedures.

O. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the

training sessions.

P. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA Authority that the

following work has been completed in accordance with the Contract

Documents, and that the equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as

required.

1. HVAC&R equipment including fans, air handling units, ductwork,

dampers, terminals, and other equipment furnished under this

Division.

2. Fire stopping in the fire rated construction, including fire and smoke

damper installation, caulking, gasketing and sealing of smoke barriers.

3. Fire detection and smoke detection devices furnished under other

divisions of the specification.

Q. Equipment supplier to document the performance of his equipment.

R. TEST, ADJUST AND BALANCE CONTRACTOR

1. Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting scheduled by the

Commissioning Authority.

2. Participate in verification of the testing and balancing report, which

will consist of repeating measurements contained in the testing and

balancing reports. Assist in diagnostic purposes when directed.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



S. Provide training of the Owner's operating staff using expert qualified

personnel, as specified.

T. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS

1. Provide requested submittal data, including detailed start-up

procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep

warranties in force.

2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors.

3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence

of operation and testing procedures.

U. Reference Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for

additional contractor responsibilities.

3.04 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Reference Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for

Owner's Responsibilities.

3.05 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES


Design Professional's Responsibilities.

3.06 RESPONSIBILITIES


CxA's Responsibilities.

3.07 TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and

equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating

according to the Contract Documents.

B. Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R instrumentation and control

systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according

to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Certify in writing that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been

completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been

submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Place systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested

(e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position,

unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on

checklists.

F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-

safety systems during each mode of operation.

G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to

record test data as directed by the CxA.

3.08 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING VERIFICATION

A. Prior to performance of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work, provide

copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.

B. Notify the CxA at least ten (10) days in advance of testing and balancing

Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.

C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing

of HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA.

1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing subcontractor ten (10) days

in advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data

points to be verified.

2. Testing and balancing subcontractor to use the same instruments (by

model and serial number) that were used when original data were

collected.

3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than

10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items to result

in rejection of final testing, adjusting, and balancing report. For sound

pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB to result in rejection of final

testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.

4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed

portions can be performed.

3.09 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test

at the direction of the CxA.

B. Scope of HVAC&R testing to include entire HVAC&R installation, from

central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution

systems to each conditioned space. Testing to include measuring capacities

and effectiveness of operational and control functions.

C. Test operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to

abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building

automation system controllers and sensors.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



D. The CxA along with the HVAC&R contractor, testing and balancing

Subcontractor, and HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor to

prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R

systems, subsystems, and equipment.

E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it

is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions,

calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set

simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated

conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal

operating conditions.

G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is

not practical.

H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator

when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the

HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After

deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate

initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.10 HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING

PROCEDURES

A. Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are

specified in individual Division 23 sections. Provide submittals, test data,

inspector record, and certifications to the CxA.

B. HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans

and testing requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections

"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for

HVAC Controls." Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.

C. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment: Test

requirements are specified in Division 23 piping Sections. HVAC&R

Contractor to prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing

plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to

the CxA. Plan to include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to

be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



Markers keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical

location of each designated pipe test section. Provide drawings keyed

to pipe zones or sectors formatted to allow each section of piping to be

physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system

cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.

2. Description of equipment for flushing operations.

3. Minimum flushing water velocity.

4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that pipe sections have

been cleaned, flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.

D. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM TESTING: Provide technicians,

instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of chillers, cooling

towers, refrigerant compressors and condensers, heat pumps, and other

refrigeration systems. The CxA to determine the sequence of testing and

testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.

E. HVAC&R DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM TESTING: Provide technicians,

instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air, steam, and

hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems,

including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment.

F. VIBRATION AND SOUND TESTS: Provide technicians, instrumentation,

tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic

controls.

G. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and

thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of components,

systems, and sub-systems. Evaluate the following equipment and systems:

1. HVAC Equipment and Systems (installed as part of this project)

2. Building Automation System

3. VFDs

3.11 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE

DUE TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT

A. Reference Division 01 for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-

conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect.

3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals to conform to Contract Documents

requirements as stated in Division 23.

B. Provide an updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of

operation in the final controls O&M manual submittal.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



3.13 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

A. Mechanical contractor's training responsibilities:

1. Provide the CxA with a training plan two weeks before the planned

training.

2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation

and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and

maintenance of each piece of HVAC equipment including, but not

limited to, HVAC equipment (ex. pumps, heat exchangers, chillers,

heat rejection equipment, air conditioning units, air handling units,

fans, terminal units, controls, and water treatment systems, etc.)

3. Training starts with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training

on each piece of equipment to illustrate the various modes of

operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power

failure, etc.

4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in

accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of

operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the

demonstration repeated.

5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative provides the

instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the

start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor

or manufacturer's representative. Practical building operating expertise

and an in-depth knowledge of modes of operation of the specific piece

of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to

execute the training.

6. Controls contractor to attend sessions other than the controls training,

as requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it

relates to the equipment being discussed.

7. The training sessions follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the

operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible

the use of the O&M manuals for reference.

8. TRAINING INCLUDES:

a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance

instruction material included in the O&M manuals.

b. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and

proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special

tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. Training to

include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down,

seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures.

c. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.

d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees.

e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



f. Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the

location of plans and manuals in the facility.

g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or

operation.

9. Schedule training after functional testing is complete, unless approved

otherwise by the Owner.

B. CONTROLS CONTRACTOR'S TRAINING RESPONSIBILITIES:

1. Provide the CxA and AE with a training plan four weeks before the

planned training.

2. Provide designated Owner personnel training on the control system in

this facility. The intent is to clearly and completely instruct the Owner

on the capabilities of the control system.

3. TRAINING MANUALS. The standard operating manual for the

system and any special training manuals will be provided for each

trainee, with three extra copies left for the O&M manuals. In addition,

copies of the system technical manual will be demonstrated during

training and three copies submitted with the O&M manuals. Manuals

include detailed description of the subject matter for each session.

Manuals to cover control sequences and have a definitions section that

fully describes relevant words used in the manuals and in software

displays. Manuals will be approved by the CxA and AE. Deliver

copies of audiovisuals to the Owner.

4. The trainings will be tailored to the needs and skill-level of the

trainees.

5. The trainers will be knowledgeable on the system and its use in

buildings. For the on-site sessions, the most qualified trainer(s) will be

used. Owner to approve the instructor prior to scheduling the training.

6. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in

accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of

operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the

demonstration repeated.

7. Attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested, to

discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the

equipment being discussed.

8. THREE TRAINING SESSIONS, AS FOLLOWS:

a. TRAINING I. CONTROL SYSTEM. The first training consists of

8 hours of actual training. This training may be held on-site or in

the supplier's facility. If held off-site, the training may occur prior

to final completion of the system installation. Upon completion,

each student, using appropriate documentation, should be able to

perform elementary operations and describe general hardware

architecture and functionality of the system.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



b. TRAINING II. BUILDING SYSTEMS. The second session held

on-site for a period of 8 hours of actual hands-on training after the

completion of system commissioning. The session includes

instruction on:

1) Specific hardware configuration of installed systems in

this building and specific instruction for operating the

installed system, including HVAC systems, lighting

controls and any interface with security and

communication systems.

2) Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power

outage and restart routines, changing set points and alarms

and other typical changed parameters, overrides, freeze

protection, manual operation of equipment, optional

control strategies that can be considered, energy savings

strategies and set points that if changed will adversely

affect energy consumption, energy accounting, procedures

for obtaining vendor assistance, etc.

3) Trending and monitoring features (values, change of state,

totalization, etc.), including setting up, executing,

downloading, viewing both tabular and graphically and

printing trends. Trainees will actually set up trends in the

presence of the trainer.

4) Completely discuss every screen, allowing time for

questions.

5) Use of keypad or plug-in laptop computer at the zone

level.

6) Use of remote access to the system via phone lines or

networks.

7) Setting up and changing an air terminal unit controller.

8) Graphics generation

9) Point database entry and modifications

10) Understanding DDC field panel operating programming

(when applicable)

c. TRAINING III. The third training will be conducted on-site

6 months after occupancy and consist of 8 hours of training. The

session will be structured to address specific topics that trainees

need to discuss and to answer questions concerning operation of

the system.

END OF SECTION


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 8, 2020 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS


SECTION 23 09 00

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE

SPECIFICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. WORK INCLUDED: Design (including detailed sequence of operations),

materials, installation and testing of:

1. Communications

2. Application Specific Controllers

3. Input/Output Interface

4. Power Supplies and Line Filtering

5. Control Panels

6. Auxiliary Control Devices

7. Wiring and Raceways

B. This is a performance specification and Contractor is responsible for design

tasks and engineering.

C. This standard applies to Schedule B work only.

D. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY: Assign unit responsibility, as specified in Section

23 00 00, for Building HVAC Systems.

1. The HVAC Contractor has unit responsibility, as defined in Section 23

00 00, for the design, equipment selection, installation, controls, and

proper operation of building ventilation, building heating, and building

cooling systems for the Process Control Laboratory as specified in

Division 23.

2. Unit responsibility extends to the preparation of detailed mechanical,

electrical, instrumentation drawings for submittal to the Owner for

review; design of control systems (hardware and software) to achieve

the operational performance requirements specified herein;

development and installation of communication systems that are

needed for components to function together; integration of all system

components, electrical and instrumentation devices, and mechanical

equipment; and start-up, troubleshooting, adjusting and placing into

proper operation all elements of the Building HVAC Systems and

Building Automation Systems.

3. Provide a completed and signed certificate of unit responsibility

(Section 23 00 00).


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS JANUARY 8, 2020




1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE (IN ADDITION TO 23 00 00)

A. REFERENCE STANDARDS:





this Section shall prevail.

2. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00 and

Division 01, General Requirements.








a. Current edition of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135

b. Current edition of UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard

for Energy Management Equipment, Canada, and the US.

c. Current edition of FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A.


A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General

Requirements.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by in Section 23 00 00

and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and

electronic/electric actuation valves and dampers.

B. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, building

conduit diagrams and sequence of control from the project design data. Any

architecture diagrams on design drawings have been included as schematics


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




only and are not meant to portray quantity of devices or power/data

requirements.

C. Design, provide, and install equipment cabinets, panels, data communication

network infrastructure (including cables, conduits, outlets, connections, etc.)

needed, and associated hardware.

D. Provide complete manufacturer's specifications for items that are supplied.

Include vendor name and model number of every item supplied.

E. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as

described in these specifications.

F. Provide as-built documentation, operator's terminal software, diagrams, and

other associated project operational documentation (such as technical

manuals) on approved media, the sum total of which accurately represents the

final system.

G. Provide 120V power, low voltage power, transformers, etc. for control panels,

transformer panels, and BAS devices. Install per Division 26 specifications.

Power for devices within this specification section is solely the responsibility

of the HVAC Controls Contractor.

H. Conduit and raceway systems. Install per Division 26 specifications.

I. All devices, components, controllers, and software to be manufacturer's most

current version at the time of installation.

1.07 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. REPORTING ACCURACY. System reports values with minimum end-to-end

accuracy listed in Reporting Accuracy Table below.

Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Space Temperature ±1 degree F

Ducted Air ±1 degree F

Outside Air ±2 degree F

Dew Point ±3 degree F

Water Temperature ±1 degree F

Delta-T ±0.25 degree F

Relative Humidity ±5 percent RH

Water Flow ±2 percent of full scale


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




B. CONTROL STABILITY AND ACCURACY: Control loops maintain

measured variable at setpoint within tolerances listed in Control Stability and

Accuracy Table below.

Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium

Air Pressure +0.2 in wg 0-6 inc. wg

+0.01 in wg -0.1 to 0.1 in wg

Airflow +10 percent of full scale

Space Temperature +2.00 degree F

Duct Temperature +3.00 degree F

Humidity +5 percent RH

Fluid Pressure +1.5 PSI 1-150 PSI

+1.0 in wg 0-50 in wg differential

1.08 SPECIAL WARRANTY

A. In accordance with Section 01 78 36, provide the following Special

Warranties:

1. 2 years of on-call service for software issues and control problems.

2. 2 years technical support by telephone and email.

3. All products and system controls warranted for proper operation for 2

years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CANDIDATE CONTROL MANUFACTURERS/INSTALLERS & PRODUCTS

A. Siemens

B. Johnson Controls

C. Alerton

D. Delta Controls

E. Schneider Electric/TAC-IA

F. Honeywell

G. Equipment-manufacturer-provided controls (meeting all requirements of this

section)

H. Or approved equal.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




2.02 COMMUNICATIONS

A. Each controller to have communication port for connection to the Operator

interface.

1. Internetwork operator interface and value passing to be transparent to

internetwork architecture.

2. Operator interface connected to controller to allow operator to

interface with each internetwork controller as if directly connected.

Controller information such as data, status, reports, system software,

and custom programs to be viewable and editable from each

internetwork controller.

B. Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies

across multiple controllers to be readable by each controller on internetwork.

2.03 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

A. Application specific controllers (ASCs) are microprocessor-based DDC

controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to

control a specific piece of equipment. Controllers to be fully programmable

using graphical programming blocks.

1. ASC controllers communicate with other devices on internetwork.

2. Each ASC capable of stand-alone operation without being connected

to network.

3. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control target system.

4. Application controllers to include universal inputs with minimum

10-bit resolution that accept thermistors, 0-10VDC, 0-5 VDC,

4-20 mA and dry contact signals. Any input on a controller may be

either analog or digital with at least 1 input that accepts pulses.

Controller to also include support and modifiable programming for

interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display. Controller to

include binary and analog outputs on board. Provide analog outputs

switch selectable as either 0-10VDC or 0-20mA. Software to include

scaling features for analog outputs. Application controller to include

24VDC voltage supply for use as power supply to external sensors.

5. Program sequences stored on board application controller in

EEPROM. No batteries needed to retain logic program. Program

sequences executed by controller 10 times per second and capable of

multiple PI and PID loops for control of multiple devices. Calculations

completed using floating-point math and system to support display of

information in floating-point nomenclature at operator's terminal.

Programming of application controller completely modifiable in the

field over installed BAS LANs or remotely via modem interface.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




Operator to program logic sequences by graphically moving function

blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen.

6. Application controller to include support for room sensor. Display on

room sensor programmable at application controller and include an

operating mode and a field service mode. Provide button functions and

display data programmable to show specific controller data in each

mode based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of

operation for specific display requirements at intelligent room sensor.

B. SCHEDULING: Provide 7-day programmable capability to schedule each

object or group of objects in system. Coordinate schedule with Owner and

program accordingly. Each schedule should consist of:

1. Weekly schedule for occupancy

2. Holiday schedule

3. Operator accessible scheduling changes

4. 2 hour override

C. ALARMS: Each unit shall have the ability to send and receive alarm signals

per 23 09 93.

1. Alarm signals from unit shall cause visible indication for operator

elsewhere in system.

2. Alarms shall be logged on controller. The last ten alarms shall be

logged at a minimum. Logging should include start time of alarm, end

time of alarm, and if alarm was reset.

D. ENVIRONMENT

1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions mounted

within NEMA waterproof enclosures and rated for operation at 0

degrees F to 150 degrees F.

2. Controllers used in conditioned space mounted in NEMA dust-proof

enclosures and rated for operation at 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F.

E. SERVICEABILITY: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication,

and processor.

F. MEMORY: ASC use nonvolatile memory and maintains BIOS and

programming information in event of power loss.

2.04 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE

A. Input/output points protected such that shorting of point to itself, to another

point, or to ground will cause no damage to controller. Input and output points

protected from voltage up to 24 V.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




B. Binary inputs (BI or DI) allow monitoring of On/Off signals from remote

devices. Binary inputs sense “dry contact” closure without external power

(other than that provided by controller) being applied.

C. Pulse accumulation input objects accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse

accumulation.

D. Analog inputs (AI) allow monitoring of low-voltage (0 to 10 VDC), current (4

to 20 mA), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD).

E. Binary outputs (BO or DO) provide for On/Off operation or pulsed low-

voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary outputs on building

and custom application controllers have three-position (On/Off/Auto) override

switches and status lights. Outputs selectable for either normally open or

normally closed operation.

F. Analog outputs (AO) provide a modulating signal for control of end devices.

Outputs provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA signal as required to

provide proper control of the output device. Analog outputs on building

controllers have status lights and two-position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch and

adjustable potentiometer for manual override. Analog outputs not exhibit drift

of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year.

G. TRI-STATE OUTPUTS: Provide tri-state outputs (two coordinated binary

outputs) for control of three-point floating type electronic actuators without

feedback. Use of three-point floating devices limited to zone control and

terminal unit control applications (VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating

coils, zone dampers, radiation, etc.). Control algorithms run zone actuator to

one end of its stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking.

2.05 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING

A. Control transformers UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type or

furnish over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits. Limit

connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity.

B. DC power supply output match output current and voltage requirements. Unit

operates between 32 degrees F and 120 degrees F.

C. Line voltage units UL listed and CSA approved.

D. Power line filtering. Provide transient voltage and surge suppression for

workstations and controllers.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




2.06 CONTROL PANELS

A. CONTROL PANELS:

1. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 rated. Outdoor enclosures shall be

NEMA 3R. Provide (hinged door) key-lock latch and removable

subpanels. Single key common to field panels and subpanels. In

existing campus or building settings, key lock to match existing keys.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices prewired

with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic

troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections UL listed

for 600-volt service, individually identified per control/interlock

drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control

terminations for field connection individually identified per control

drawings.

3. Provide ON/OFF power switch with overcurrent protection for control

power sources to each local panel.

4. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for enclosures in any mechanical

room or electrical room labeled with TCP number. Laminated plastic

to be 1/8-inch thick sized appropriately to make label easy to read.

5. Control panels shall meet the panel construction requirements of

Specification Section 40 67 00, Control System Equipment Panels and

Racks.

2.07 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS:

1. Room Thermostats: DDC 7-day programmable, with internal logic,

connected to appropriate control signal for unit. UL listed for

electrical rating, exposed set point adjustment on cover with heat

anticipator. Thermostat operates within 55 degrees F to 85 degrees F

setpoint range, with 2 degrees F maximum differential.

B. MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS:

1. Provide motorized dampers and electric actuators for automatically

controlled dampers

2. 4-20 volt motor actuators mounted on the outside of the damper frame

3. All necessary linkage to position the damper throughout its full

operating range

4. Dampers shall be provided with end switches to detect when damper is

open or closed, and actuator position shall have the ability to be

monitored.

C. ELECTRIC DAMPER/VALVE ACTUATORS.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




1. Provide mechanical or electronic stall protection for each actuator.

2. Where indicated provide internal mechanical, spring-return

mechanism or provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Non-

spring-return actuators have external manual gear release to position

damper/valve when actuator is not powered.

3. Proportional actuators accept 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA control

signal and provide 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range.

4. Actuator sized for torque required plus 25 percent; UL or CSA listed;

electronic current overload protection.

D. AIR FLOW METERS:

1. DUCT MOUNTED AIR FLOW STATION: Self-supporting

aluminum alloy tube with stainless steel mounting brackets. Probe and

sensor density quantity as recommended by manufacturer. Sensor use

thermal dispersion technology with two “bead in glass,” hermetically

sealed thermistor probes at each measuring point. Provide electronic

flow transmitter with CFM readout display and capable of 4-20 mA

output signal. Ebtron GTA116-PC.

E. RELAYS

1. Control relays UL listed plug-in type with dust cover and LED

“energized” indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage

be suitable for application.

2. Time delay relays UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable

time delay. Delay adjustable ±200 percent (minimum) from set point

or as indicated. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage be

suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure when not installed

in local control panel.

F. OVERRIDE TIMERS: Override timers spring-wound line voltage, UL Listed,

with contact rating and configuration as required by application. Provide 0-to-

6-hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified. Timer suitable for flush

mounting on control panel face and located on local control panels or where

shown.

G. CURRENT TRANSMITTERS:

1. AC current transmitters be self-powered, combination split-core

current transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo

amplifier with 4 to 20 mA two-wire output. Unit ranges 20 A full

scale, with internal zero and span adjustment and ±1 percent full-scale

accuracy at 500 ohm maximum burden.

2. Transmitter meets or exceeds ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and

UL/CSA recognized.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




3. Unit split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.

H. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: AC current transformers UL/CSA

recognized and completely encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic

material; ±1 percent accuracy at 5 A full-scale.

I. VOLTAGE TRANSMITTERS: AC voltage; self-powered single-loop (two-

wire) type; 4 to 20 mA output with zero and span adjustment; UL/CSA

recognized at 600 VAC rating and meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1. Ranges

include 100 to 130 VAC, 200 to 250 VAC, 250 to 330 VAC, and 400 to 600

VAC full-scale, adjustable, with ±1 percent full-scale accuracy with 500 ohm

maximum burden.

J. VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS: AC voltage transformers UL/CSA

recognized, 600 VAC rated; built-in fuse protection; suitable for ambient

temperatures of 40 degrees F-130 degrees F; ±0.5 percent accuracy at 24 VAC

and a 5 VA load.

K. OVERFLOW SWITCH: Insertion flow sensor, brass, impeller flow design

with analog transmitter unit. Data Industrial Model 220BR.

L. EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH: Red, mushroom type, pull out to operate.

M. END SWITCHES: Turret head Type SPDT. Square D Class 9007, Type

C54B2, or equal.

2.08 WIRING AND RACEWAYS

A. GENERAL: Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified

in applicable sections of Division 26.

B. Insulated wire to be copper conductors, UL labeled for 90 degrees C

minimum service.

C. Field panels and controllers to be supplied by building emergency power

system where systems being monitored or controlled are on emergency power.

Run control wiring as follows:

1. MECHANICAL ROOMS: In conduit

2. EXPOSED IN BUILDING SPACES: In conduit

3. CONCEALED IN BUILDING WALLS AND CEILINGS: Plenum

rated cable

4. CONCEALED IN BUILDING CEILINGS: Plenum rated cable in

cable tray


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




D. FIELD AND SUBFIELD PANELS: Voltage in panels not to exceed

120 volts.

E. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: Responsibility for correct voltage of

holding coils and starter wiring in pre-wired motor control centers interfacing

with automatic controls is included hereunder.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 REQUIREMENTS: SECTION 23 00 00

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and

verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may

properly commence.

B. Notify the Owner in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely

completion of the work.

C. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.

3.03 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING

A. Testing completed before Owner is notified of system demonstration.

B. Calibrate and prepare for service of instruments, controls, and accessory

equipment furnished under this specification.

C. Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground

faults.

D. Enable control systems and verify calibration and operation of input and

output devices.

E. Verify that system operation adheres to sequences of operation.

F. Commissioning and Verification: In addition to commissioning requirements

specified elsewhere, provide the following commissioning on the HVAC

instrumentation and controls system:

1. Control systems completely commissioned to ensure aspects of the

system are operating as intended and at optimum tuning.

2. Wiring connections verified and traced from field device to panel to

ensure proper connections.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




3. Measured values verified by a hand held calibrated device to validate

that value indicated by the control system is in fact the actual

measured value.

4. Loops properly tuned to obtain the desired control value. Each loop to

be "upset" and put back in control to demonstrate its ability to stabilize

quickly.

5. Provide a final point-by-point report submitted that indicates the date

of each verification, the results, and initialed on each page by the

person performing the reading.

3.04 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND TRAINING

A. SITE TESTING:

1. Contractor provides personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and

supplies necessary to perform testing. Owner's Representative will

witness and sign off on acceptance testing.

2. Contractor demonstrates compliance of completed control system with

Contract Documents. Using approved test plan, physical and

functional requirements of project demonstrated.

B. TRAINING:

1. GENERAL: Contractor conducts training courses for up to 3 other

designated personnel in operation and maintenance of system.

Training manuals provided for each trainee, with two additional copies

provided for archival at project site. Manuals include detailed

description of subject matter for each lesson. Copies of audiovisuals

delivered to Owner. Training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom

instruction, including two 15-minute breaks and excluding lunch time,

Monday through Friday, during normal first shift in effect at training

facility. Notification of any planned training given to Owner's

representative at least 15 days prior to training.

2. OPERATOR'S TRAINING I: First course taught at supplier's facility

for period of one consecutive training day. Upon completion, each

student should be able to perform elementary operations with guidance

and describe general hardware architecture and functionality of

system.

3. OPERATOR'S TRAINING II: Second course taught at project site for

a period of one training day after completion of contractor's field

testing. Course includes instruction on specific hardware configuration

of installed system and specific instructions for operating installed

system. Upon completion, each student should be able to start system,

operate the system, recover system after failure, and describe specific

hardware architecture and operation of system.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




4. OPERATOR'S TRAINING III: Third course taught at project site for

period of one training day no later than six months after completion of

the acceptance test. Course will be structured to address specific topics

that students need to discuss and to answer questions concerning

operation of system. Upon completion, students should be fully

proficient in system operation and have no unanswered questions

regarding operation of installed system.

3.05 WIRING

A. Provide electrical wiring required to control systems specified in this section.

Control and interlock wiring complies with national, state and local electrical

codes and Division 26 of this specification.

B. Power wiring required for building control panel(s) to be dedicated circuit(s).

C. Verify location of operator work station with Owner prior to installation.

D. NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring UL listed in approved raceway according to

NEC and Division 26 requirements.

E. Low-voltage wiring meets NEC Class 2 requirements. (Low-voltage power

circuits subfused when required to meet Class 2 current limit.)

F. Where NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires are in concealed and accessible

locations, including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in

raceway may be used provided that cables are UL Listed for intended

application.

G. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and

panels containing high-voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for

low-voltage wiring except for purpose of interfacing (e.g., relays and

transformers).

H. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run parallel along surface

or perpendicular to it and tied at 10 ft intervals.

I. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, supported from structural

members. Cables not to be supported by ductwork, electrical raceways,

piping, or ceiling suspension systems.

J. Wire-to-device connections made at terminal block or terminal strip. Wire-to-

wire connections at terminal block.

K. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring 24 V. If only higher voltages

are available, provide step-down transformers.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




L. Wiring installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between

termination points.

M. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors.

Maintain fire rating at penetrations.

N. Include one pull string in each raceway 1 in. or larger.

O. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures.

Enclosures include packaged equipment control panels unless they also

contain Class 1 starters.

P. Install raceway to maintain a minimum clearance of 6 in. from high-

temperature equipment (e.g., steam pipes or flues).

Q. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to structure and spaced

according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on

flexible duct strap or tie rods. Raceways may not be run on or attached to

ductwork.

R. Install insulated bushings on raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal

top end of vertical raceways.

S. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways not-to-

exceed 3-feet in length and be supported at each end. In areas exposed to

moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal

raceways to be used.

T. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at

both ends, and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections joined

with couplings. Terminations made with fittings at boxes.

U. Input and output terminations to be labeled at the controller to identify if they

are AI, DI, AD, DO, and function (i.e., pump start, OM Sensor.)

3.06 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for communication

cabling.

B. Verify integrity of network following cable installation.

C. Communication wiring unspliced length when that length is commercially

available; labeled to indicate origination and destination data.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




D. Grounding of coaxial cable in accordance with NEC regulations article on

“Communications Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding.”

3.07 INSTALLATION OF AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. GENERAL:

1. Install sensors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Room sensors installed on concealed junction boxes properly

supported by wall framing.

3. Low-limit sensors used in mixing plenums installed in a serpentine

manner horizontally across duct.

4. Pipe-mounted temperature sensors installed in wells with heat-

conducting fluid in thermal wells.

5. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north facing wall or screen,

complete with sun shield at designated location.

B. FLOW SWITCH: Use correct paddle for pipe diameter. Adjust flow switch in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. ACTUATORS:

1. GENERAL:

a. Mount and link control damper actuators according to

manufacturer's instructions.

b. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm

that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to

both open and closed positions.

2. ACTUATOR MOUNTING FOR DAMPER AND VALVE

ARRANGEMENTS TO COMPLY TO THE FOLLOWING:

a. DAMPER ACTUATORS: Do not install in the air stream

b. Use a weather proof enclosure (clear and see through) if

actuators are located outside.

c. Damper or valve actuator ambient temperature not-to-exceed

122 degrees F through any combination of medium

temperature or surrounding air. Provide appropriate air gaps,

thermal isolation washers or spacers, standoff legs, or

insulation as necessary. Mount per manufacturer's

recommendations.

d. Actuator cords or conduit to incorporate a drip leg if

condensation is possible. Do not allow water to contact

actuator or internal parts. Location of conduits in temperatures

dropping below dew point to be avoided to prevent water from

condensing in conduit and running into actuator.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




e. Damper mounting arrangements to comply to the following:

1) Furnish and install damper channel supports and sheet

metal collars.

2) Jack shafting of damper sections not allowed.

3) Multi-section dampers arranged so that each damper

section operates individually. Provide one electronic

actuator direct shaft mounted per section.

f. Size damper sections based on actuator manufacturers specific

recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure, and

damper type. In general: Damper section not to exceed 24 ft-sq.

with 1500 FPM face velocity.

g. Multiple section dampers of two or more arranged to allow

actuators to be direct shaft mounted on the outside of the duct.

h. Multiple section dampers of three or more sections wide

arranged with a 3-sided vertical channel (8-inch wide by 6-inch

deep) within the duct or fan housing and between adjacent

damper sections. Vertical channel anchored at the top and

bottom to the fan housing or building structure for support.

Connect sides of each damper frame to the channels. Holes in

the channel to allow damper drive blade shafts to pass through

channel for direct shaft mounting of actuators. Face open side

of channel downstream of the airflow, except for exhaust air

dampers.

i. Multiple section dampers to be mounted flush within a wall or

housing opening to receive either vertical channel supports as

described above or sheet metal standout collars. Sheet metal

collars (12-inch minimum) to bring each damper section out of

the wall to allow direct shaft mounting of the actuator on the

side of the collar.

D. CONTROL DAMPER:

1. Dampers installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Unless specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers

must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.

2. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between

frame and duct or opening to prevent leakage around perimeter of

damper.

E. AIR FLOW STATION: Install where required in ductwork and/or equipment

with manufacturer's recommended straight ductwork upstream and

downstream of air flow station, whichever is greater. Where equipment

manufacturer's standard airflow measuring station cannot read airflows at


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




required design velocities, provide appropriate air flow measuring station to

provide accurate reading throughout system design operations range.

END OF SECTION


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 8, 2020 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS



SECTION 23 09 93

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. See 23 09 00 Hvac Instrumentation And Control Performance Specifications

for all general requirements.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

DF – Degrees Fahrenheit

CFM – Cubic Feet per Minute

BTU – British Thermal Unit

mBTU – British Thermal Unit (1000s)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. See 23 09 00 Hvac Instrumentation And Control Performance Specifications

for all product requirements.

B. See 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems for all commissioning

requirements. Commissioning agent shall use this sequence in preparing their

commissioning plan, and verify the functionality of the units to these

sequences.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. Meet all requirements of Section 23 09 00 Hvac Instrumentation And Control

Performance Specifications

3.02 MAKEUP AIR UNITS (70-ASU-1 AND 72-ASU-1)

A. MODES SELECT:

1. ASU shall have ability to enter High/Low Flow and Summer/Winter

mode independently. If the unit does not receive Summer or Winter

mode signal from the PLC the unit shall turn off. Modes shall be per

mode table below


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




Makeup Air Unit Modes and Setpoints

MODE/Requirement 70-ASU-1 72-ASU-1

Airflow*

LOW 14,000 CFM 7,000 CFM

HIGH 28,000 CFM 14,000 CFM

Heating

Summer No Heat No Heat

Winter 60 DF** 60 DF

Alarm Varies (see table) Varies (see table)

Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down

Manual Override As set by user As set by user

*Verify exact airflow setpoints with owner. Owner shall be able to

adjust setpoints.

** Discharge air temperature

B. AIRFLOW

1. Units must accept a HIGH/LOW discrete output signal from the PLC.

Logic for the HIGH/LOW control is set at the PLC level as follows:

a. HIGH/LOW Airflow mode for 70-ASU-1:

1) If 72-EF-2 is running on LOW run 70-ASU-1 on LOW

2) If 72-EF-2 is running on HIGH run 70-ASU-1 on

HIGH

b. HIGH/LOW Airflow mode for 72-ASU-1:

1) If Belt Filter Press 1 or 2 is running run 72-ASU-1 on

HIGH

2) If no Belt Filter Press is running run 72-ASU-1 on

LOW

2. VFD will be field set and balanced to create High/Low setpoints that

shall provide the required airflow. TAB shall verify airflows to

confirm operation as required by this setting

a. Exception: In liu of hard setpoints for VFDs, an airflow sensor

may be provided to measure the exact airflow provided by the

ASUs, and the VFD may dynamically adjust to provide the

exact airflow. If this option is used, TAB shall still confirm

airflows provided by system in both modes. If this option is

used, VFD shall default to high.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




3. Airflow mode may be controlled by the same trigger that changes the

mode of the exhaust fans, provided that the controls monitors the

status of the exhaust fan.

4. If the exhaust fan is non-functional, ASU shall default to LOW.

C. HEATING MODE – SUMMER

1. Unit must accept discrete input from PLC that will cause unit to run in

Summer mode.

2. Bypass damper shall be in full heating coil bypass

3. Gas furnace shall be disabled

4. If discharge air temperature drops below 50 DF, enter winter mode for

24 hours, then return to summer mode.

D. HEATING MODE - WINTER

1. Unit must accept discrete input from PLC that will cause unit to run in

Winter mode.

2. During Winter mode the controls shall operate based on outside air

temperature, discharge air temperature, and modulating control

damper position. The modulating control damper controls how much

of the airflow passes through the hydronic heating coils, versus

bypassing the coils to enter directly into the system.

3. MODE: No Heat

a. This mode is intended to be used when no heating is required.

4. MODE: Primary Heat

a. This mode is intended to be used when heating can be provided

solely by the hydronic heating col. The modulating control

damper shall change the amount of air passing through the

heating coils to maintain discharge air temperature set point.

5. MODE: Backup Heat (Gas Heat)

a. This mode is intended to be used when the hydronic heat is

insufficient, due to boiler capacity issues or issues with the

heating loop. The gas heat shall turn on and modulate,

controlling discharge air temperature.

b. In this mode, the control damper shall direct 100% of the

outside air through the hydronic coils, to enable detection of

when hydronic heating can resume

c.

Mode Conditions Actions

No Heat Outside air is above setpoint -


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




Mode Conditions Actions

Outside air is below setpoint

Enter Primary Heat

Primary Heat Outside air is below setpoint

Discharge air is at or above setpoint

-


Discharge air is below setpoint

Control Damper is full open (no

bypass)

This codition persists for at least 5

minutes

Enter Backup Heat

Outside air is above setpoint

Discharge air is at or above setpoint

Enter No Heat

Backup Heat Outside air is below setpoint

Discharge air is at setpoint

-


Discharge air is at least 5 DF above

setpoint

Gas heat is at minimum

Enter Primary Heat for five

minutes. Monitor setpoint.

If setpoint is maintained

during those five minutes,

remain in Primary Heat

Otherwise, lock out this

trigger for 30 minutes, and

remain in Backup Heat


Discharge air is below setpoint

Control Damper is full open (no

bypass)

Gas Heat is full on

ALARM Low Heat to panel

Maintain Operation

E. ALARM CONDITIONS AND TRIGGERS:

1. The fire alarm contractor shall have override capability on functioning

from the fire alarm panel.

2. The controls shall have the ability to detect all faults below. If any of

the below faults are present open a discrete output contact Fault alarm

to PLC

a. NO AIRFLOW

b. LOW HEAT (as above in Backup Heat)

c. FLAME FAILURE


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




d. BYPASS DAMPER FAILURE

3. The controls shall have the ability to detect the below fault. If the

below fault is present open a discrete output contact Clogged Filter to

PLC.

a. CLOGGED FILTER

F. NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS:

1. Provide Ethernet IP network connection for communication to plant

SCADA network.

3.03 PACKAGE UNIT (72-ACU-1)

A. Package Unit shall be capable of entering heating mode, cooling mode,

economizer mode, and fan mode. CFMs per schedule

B. A descrete output from the PLC shall have the ability to turn the unit on and

off.

C. UNIT SETPOINTS:

1. Cooling: 75 DF

2. Heating: 70 DF

3. Night-time heating setback: 55 DF

D. UNOCCUPIED

1. When unit is outside scheduled occupancy hours, unit shall operate as

follows: Heating setpoint changed to night setback, fan mode

disabled, economizer mode disabled, cooling mode disabled. When

unit is not in heating mode outside occupied hours it shall be off.

E. HEATING MODE:

1. Unit shall enter mode when heating call is made.

2. Unit shall provide airflow and select gas heat from low/med/high to

provide heat to space to control temperature to setpoint.

3. Outside air damper shall be set to minimum

4. If unit remains in mode for at least 5 minutes, and setpoint is +3

degrees above heating setpoint, unit shall switch to fan mode.

F. COOLING MODE

1. Unit shall enter cooling mode when cooling call is made and outside

air temperature is above 75 or below 55 during occupied hours.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




2. Unit shall provide cooling to space.

3. If unit remains in mode for at least 5 minutes, and setpoint is -3

degrees below desired setpoint, unit shall switch to fan mode.

G. ECONOMIZER MODE

1. Unit shall enter economizer mode when cooling call is made and

outside air is between 55 and 75 during occupied hours. .

2. Relief damper shall modulate open. Outside air economizer shall

modulate full open.

3. If desired setpoint is not reached in at least 15 minutes, relief damper

shall modulate closed, outside air economizer shall modulate to

minimum, and unit shall switch to cooling mode. Unit shall not switch

back to economizer mode for 24 hours after this occurs.

4. Unit will operate in outside air economizer mode as designed by

manufacturer.



H. FAN MODE

1. Unit shall be in fan mode when no heating or cooling calls are made

and it is during occupied hours.

2. Unit shall provide outside air as scheduled.

3. If a heating or cooling call is made, unit shall exit fan mode and enter

mode as above.

I. ALARM CONDITIONS AND TRIGGERS:



2. The controls shall have the ability to detect all faults below. If any of

the below faults are present open a discrete output contact Fault alarm

to PLC.

3. ALARM the following:

a. NO AIRFLOW

b. FLAME FAILURE



PLC.

a. CLOGGED FILTER


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS




3.04 SPLIT SYSTEM (72-HTP-2, 72-BC-2, 72-ACU-2A, 72-ACU-2B)

A. Each split system shall operate independently. Branch controller and

Condenser shall operate per manufacturer controls logic independently of

external controls to ensure proper functioning of ACU.

B. A descrete output from the PLC shall have the ability to turn the unit on and

off.

C. UNIT SETPOINTS:

1. Cooling: 75 DF

2. Heating: 55 DF

D. COOLING MODE

1. Unit shall enter cooling mode if cooling call is made. Unit shall

modulate refrigerant flow to provide cooling to space.



E. HEATING MODE

1. Unit shall enter heating mode if heating call is made. Unit shall

modulate refrigerant flow to provide heating to space.

2. If unit remains in mode for at least 5 minutes, and setpoint is +3

degrees above heating setpoint, unit shall switch to fan mode.

F. BRANCH CONTROLLER

1. Unit shall provide refrigerant to terminal units with manufacturer-

provided controls

G. CONDENSER UNIT

1. Unit shall operate in heating and cooling per manufacturer provided

controls.

2. Unit shall automatically detect freeze conditions and initiate defrost

cycle per manufacturer recommendations

H. ALARM CONDITIONS AND TRIGGERS:



2. The controls shall have the ability to detect all faults below and cease

operation. If any of the below faults are present open a discrete output

contact Fault alarm to PLC.

a. NO AIRFLOW

b. COIL FREEZE


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS






PLC.

a. CLOGGED FILTER

END OF SECTION


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 8, 2020 HVAC PIPING


SECTION 23 20 00

HVAC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. SCOPE: This Section specifies provisions for materials, installation and

testing of HVAC piping, including:

1. Pipe Materials

2. Pipe Couplings and Flexible Pipe Pieces

3. Piping Specialties

4. Insulation.

B. This specification section is for activities during Schedule B only.






of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this

Section shall prevail.








Reference Title

ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping

B. Materials and equipment furnished under this Section shall be of

manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the design and

manufacture of the materials and equipment for a period of at least 5 years.

Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner that the quality is equal to the

materials and equipment made by the manufacturers specifically named

herein, if an alternate manufacturer is proposed.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

HVAC PIPING JANUARY 8, 2020


C. FACTORY QUALITY CONTROL: The Contractor shall test all products as

noted herein and by the reference specifications.

D. In addition, meet the following:

1. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of

the type specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of experience.

2. Welder Qualifications: Certify in accordance with ASME.

3. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 "Building Services

Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Provide safety valves

and pressure vessels with the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and

stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 01.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. PROCEDURES: Section 01 33 00.

B. ACTION SUBMITTAL ITEMS FOR THIS SECTION:

1. Manufacturer’s data to show that the following items conform to the

Specification requirements:

a. Pipe, fittings and accessories

b. Pipe couplings and flexible pipe pieces.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. Verify by excavation, inspection, and measurement all

installation conditions, including existing utilities and

structures, for buried OR all pipe before preparation of Shop

Drawings. Submit field measurements and photos with Shop

Drawings where exposed conditions are significantly different

than specified on the Drawings.

b. Layouts and Schematics: Submit detailed installation drawings

of all piping. Schematics may be submitted for piping 4 inches

and smaller. The Drawings and schematics shall include: pipe

support locations and types, fittings, valves, other

appurtenances.

c. Submit certified test reports as required herein.

d. All items that are submitted for use on potable water piping,

including, but not limited to, pipe and valve linings, solvent

cements, welding materials, gaskets and gasket lubricants and

additives in concrete or cement mortar shall be NSF certified

for use in water systems. Submit proof of NSF certification for

each item submitted.

3. Shop and field painting systems. Include manufacturer’s descriptive

technical catalog literature and specifications.

4. Samples:


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



a. Submit samples of gaskets and other materials where required

by the detailed specifications.

b. Solder and flux for copper pipe.

5. Testing Forms in accordance with Section 01 91 14.

1.04 APPURTENANCES

A. Furnish and install all necessary guides, inserts, anchors and assembly bolts,

washers and nuts, hangers, supports, gaskets, couplings and flanges; all other

appurtenant items shown on the Drawings, specified or required for the proper

installation and operation of the piping; devices included in or on the piping

equipment; and piping accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. General Piping System Requirements: Section 40 27 00.

B. Pipe and valve sizes are nominal inside diameter unless otherwise noted.

C. Construct vents of materials specified for the pipe system for which they

serve.

D. All materials delivered to the job site shall be new, free from defects, and

marked to identify the material, class, and other appropriate data such as

thickness for piping. Acceptance of materials shall be subject to strength and

quality testing in addition to inspection of the completed product. Acceptance

of installed piping systems shall be based on inspection and leakage tests as

specified hereinafter.

E. Provide pipe, tube, and fittings of the same type, fitting requirements, grade,

class, and the size and weight indicated or required for each service. Where

type, grade, or class is not specified, provide proper selection as determined

by installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing

regulations and industry standards.

2.02 PIPE MATERIALS

A. COPPER PIPE: Section 40 27 00.13.

B. STEEL PIPE: Section 40 27 00.03.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



2.03 PIPE COUPLINGS AND FLEXIBLE PIPE PIECES

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: For typical pipe joints refer to pipe material

specifications. Other joint devices shall be furnished where called for on the

Drawings.

B. PIPING CONNECTIONS:

1. Provide standard products recommended by manufacturers in service

specified which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping to

prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

2. Provide dielectric unions or waterways for transitions between

dissimilar metal piping.

2.04 PIPE INSULATION

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Sections 23 07 00 and 40 42 13.

1. Insulation shall meet the minimum requirements of the Washington

State Energy Code.

2. Delivery: Deliver insulation materials to the job in original packages

with manufacturer's "R" values clearly shown. Provide certification of

compliance.

3. Warning: The Contractor is warned that working with fiberglass or

rock wool materials may constitute a serious health hazard. The

Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of

the workers.

4. Insulation Protection Shields: Provide insulation protection shields at

all pipe supports for insulated piping.

5. The following table summarizes the insulation system by use and

service:

System Location Service

Temperature

Class

Insulation Thickness

(Inches)

Refrigerant All buildings EC Low 1-1.5

HHS, HHR Sections 23 07 00 and 40 42 13

6. For Service and Temperature Class: See Section 40 42 13.

7. ELECTRIC HEAT TAPE: Section 40 05 33.

2.05 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Section 40 05 15.

1. Supports for HVAC piping are generally not shown on the Drawings.

Where supports are not shown, it shall be the Contractor's


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



responsibility to support all such piping in accordance with the design

criteria stated hereinafter. Piping 2-½ inches and larger and all natural

gas piping shall be supported with pipe supports designed to resist

seismic loads. Piping smaller than 2-½ inches with non-hazardous

contents may be supported with non-seismic resistant supports.

2. Where not detailed or otherwise indicated, pipe support types and

spacing shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's Standardization

Society (MSS) Standard Practice No. SP-58 and No. SP-69, except as

superseded by the requirements of these Specifications. Hangers and

supports used as components of a fire protection system shall comply

with NFPA Standard No. 13 and be listed and labeled by UL and FM.

B. PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM DESIGN:

1. Design Loads: Pipe suspension shall be such as to prevent excessive

stress or excessive variation in supporting force while system is in

operation. Pipe supports shall support the sum of the weight of the

pipe, fittings, appurtenances, and contents. In addition, the pipe shall

be anchored to resist internal pressure forces tending to separate any

unrestrained joint at pressures 1-½ times the maximum working

pressure for the applicable service.

2. Seismic Loads: Section 01 88 15.

3. Location: All piping shall be supported in a manner that will prevent

undue strain on any valve, fitting, or piece of equipment. In addition,

pipe supports shall be provided at changes in direction or elevation,

adjacent to flexible couplings, at all nonrigid joints, and where

otherwise shown. Where piping connects to equipment, it shall be

supported by a pipe support and not by the equipment.

a. Maximum support spacing shall conform to the following

table:

Pipe Size Inches Pipe Material Maximum Spacing Feet

1-inch and smaller Iron or Steel

Copper

Plastic

Tubing

6

4-1/2

continuous

continuous

1-¼-inch to 2-inch Iron or Steel

Copper or Plastic

8

5

2-½-inch to 4-inch Iron or Steel

Copper or Plastic

10

6

6-inch to 8-inch Iron or Steel

Plastic

12

8


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



b. Piping penetrations through concrete walls and slabs are

considered to resist seismic loading, provided penetrations for

pipes 3 inches in diameter and larger are complete with a wall

flange.

c. Branch piping is not considered to provide resistance to

seismic forces.

4. Thermal Expansion Allowance:

a. Provide one rigid pipe support for each straight run of pipe and

between each pair of flexible couplings, flexible connectors, or

expansion loops for pipes listed below. Provide other supports

at the required spacing that allow sliding or rolling, as noted,

along the pipe axis:

1) PVC pipe larger than 1-inch in diameter (sliding inside

PVC sleeve).

2) Building heating hot water (rolling).

3) Domestic hot water (rolling).

b. Provide vertical support only, that is, no lateral support, within

4 feet of an angle or tee for pipes listed above.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Section 23 00 00 and Division 40.

1. Install heating water and refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME

B31.9 requirements.

B. General Handling and Placing:

1. Exercise great care to prevent injury to or scoring of the pipe lining

and coating, as applicable, during handling, transportation, or storage.

Do not store pipe on rough ground and do not roll the pipe on the

coating. Any damaged pipe sections, specials, or fittings shall be

repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor as satisfactory to

the Owner.

2. Carefully inspect each pipe, fitting, valve and accessory before

installation to insure there is no defective workmanship or

obstructions. Inspect the interior and exterior protective coatings and

patch all damaged areas in the field or replace to the satisfaction of the

Owner.

3. Place or erect all piping to accurate line and grade and backfill,

support, hang, or brace against movement as specified or shown on the

Drawings, or as required for proper installation. Remove all dirt and

foreign matter from the pipe interior prior to installation and

thoroughly clean all joints before joining.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



4. Use reducing fittings where any change in pipe size occurs. Do not use

bushings unless specifically noted on the Drawings. Use eccentric

reducing fittings wherever necessary to provide free drainage of lines.

5. Cast all metallic pipes and sleeves 6-inch and larger into new concrete

walls without blockout. Pipes 5 inches and smaller may be cast in

place or installed in a smooth core drilled hole using a link type seal at

the Contractor's option. Maintain at least ½-inch clearance between

reinforcing steel and metal pipe in penetrations.

C. General Exposed Piping Installation:

1. Unless shown otherwise, install piping parallel to building lines,

plumb, and level.

2. Install piping without springing or forcing the pipe in a manner that

would set up stresses in the pipe, valves, or connected equipment.

3. Set all pipe flanges level, plumb, and aligned. All flanged fittings shall

be true and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. All bolt holes in

flanges shall straddle vertical centerline of pipes.

4. Flexibility and Expansion: Provide flexible couplings, flexible hose, or

flexible spools for all piping connections to motor driven equipment

and where otherwise shown. The Contractor may install additional

flexible couplings at favorably reviewed locations to facilitate piping

installation, provided that he submits complete details describing

location, pipe supports, and hydraulic thrust protection. Anchor piping

subject to expansion or contraction in a manner permitting strains to be

evenly distributed. Sleeves for branches through walls from adjacent

mains shall be of sufficient size to allow for free side motion of

covered pipe in sleeves.

5. Install unions or flexible connections where shown on the Drawings,

and at all non-motor-driven equipment to facilitate removal of the

equipment.

6. Provide valves wherever equipment drain connections are furnished

and carry the discharge pipe to the nearest floor drain, drain trench or

sump. Where no receptacle for drain exists, install drain piping to

1-inch above the floor. Drain piping and valve materials shall conform

to the requirements of the system served.

7. Where piping conveying liquids passes over motor control centers,

electrical panels and other electrical devices, install a protective

drainage tray below the piping.

D. HVAC Piping Installation Requirements:

1. Provide access panels for concealed valves.

2. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry

practices.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



3. Align piping accurately at connections. Comply with ANSI B.31 Code

for Pressure Piping.

4. Locate piping runs, as specified, vertically and horizontally (pitched to

drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal

runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or

described by diagrams, details, and notations or, if not otherwise

specified, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct space or

block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping

close to walls, overhead construction, and other structural and

permanent-enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2-inch

where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but

allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated

piping for 1-inch clearance outside insulation. Whenever possible in

finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view by locating it

in column enclosures, hollow wall construction or above suspended

ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as

specified.

a. Do not run piping through transformer vaults, telephone,

elevator, electrical or electronic equipment spaces or

enclosures.

b. Concealed Piping Above Suspended Ceiling: Plan and

coordinate to avoid interferences; install to maintain suspended

ceiling heights shown on Architectural Drawings. Allow

sufficient space above removable ceiling panels for panel

removal. Locate piping so that valves are visible and accessible

horizontally and vertically from point of access to the ceiling

space.

c. Exposed Work: Run pipes parallel to the closest wall unless

otherwise shown on Drawings; maintain maximum headroom;

avoid light fixtures.

d. Insulation Space Allowance: In piping work, allow space for

pipe insulation and jackets. If interferences occur, move the

piping to accommodate insulation thickness specified.

e. Pipe Lengths: Do not use short lengths or nipples at locations

where a full length of pipe will fit.

f. Alignment Prior to Supporting and Anchoring: Place piping in

proper alignment and position prior to connection to anchors,

expansion loops, and equipment. Furnish jacking devices,

temporary steel structural members, and assembled structures

as necessary. Remove temporary equipment and structures

supplied by contractor at completion; such items to remain

Contractor property.

g. Valve and Equipment Connections: Piping not to place undue

stress on flanged valves and equipment connections. Mating

flange faces to be true and parallel to each other and not to


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



require springing of piping for assembly. Pipe hangers and

supports to carry the full weight of the pipe and fluid.

h. Piping Leaks: Correct immediately; use new materials; leak-

sealing compounds or peening not permitted.

i. Pressure Ratings of Fittings, Valves, and Devices in Piping

Systems: Pressure rating to be equal to or greater than the

maximum working pressure of the system.

j. Equipment Vents and Drains: Provide for coils and vessels

which contain water. Provide isolation valves and outlet valves

at piping high and low points to permit venting and draining of

the vessel without venting and draining connected piping.

Provide hose connections and caps on drain lines.

k. Escutcheon Plates: Where exposed insulated and un-insulated

piping passes through walls, floors, or ceilings; provide spring

clip type. Provide plates on both sides of wall or floor.

l. Penetration Firestopping: Section 07 84 13.

E. INSULATION INSTALLATION:

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Section 23 00 00 and 40 42 13.

2. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the

manufacturer’s printed instructions. Seal joints and seams to maintain

vapor barrier. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, and anchors.

Keep insulation material dry during application. Apply vapor barrier

on seams, joints, over staples, and at end butt to fittings.

3. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point

even with the top of the roof flashing. Seal with vapor barrier coating.

Apply insulation for exterior applications butted tightly to interior

insulation ends. Extend metal jacket for exterior insulation outside roof

flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal metal jacket

to roof flashing with vapor barrier coating.

4. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetration: Apply insulation

continuously through walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls.

Apply aluminum jacket with factory-applied moisture barrier over

insulation. Extend 2 inches from both surfaces of wall on partition.

Secure aluminum jacket with metal bands at both ends. Seal ends of

jacket with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with joint

sealer.

5. Whenever possible, slip insulation on pipe before making connections.

Seal joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible,

cut one side longitudinally and apply to the pipe. Seal seams and joints

with adhesive.

6. Cover exterior insulation, except for metal-jacketed insulation with

PVC fitting covers and seal circumferential joints with butt strips.

Paint all exterior PVC covering.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



3.02 COATINGS

A. COATING PROCEDURES: Section 09 90 00.

B. PRIMER COATING: Shop apply in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

C. FINISH COATING: Field apply in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

3.03 TESTING


1. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pumps,

compressors, tanks, and gauges, as required. Test piping systems

before insulation (if any) is installed and remove or disengage control

devices before testing. Where necessary, test sections of each piping

system independently, but do not use piping valves to isolate sections

where test pressures exceed local valve operating pressure rating. Fill

each section with water, compressed air, or nitrogen and pressurize for

the specified pressure and time.

2. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for

examination during test.

3. Notify Owner and Authority Having Jurisdiction 2 days before tests.

4. Drainage, Waste and Vent Piping. Test in accordance with governing

plumbing code or as follows: Test drainage and venting systems, with

necessary openings plugged, to permit system to be filled with water

and subjected to water pressure of minimum of 5 PSI head. System to

hold water without water level drop greater than 1/2 pipe diameter of

largest nominal pipe size within 24-hour period. Test system in

sections if minimum head cannot be maintained in each section. 5 PSI

head to be minimum pressure at highest joint.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 METAL DUCTS AND ACCESSORIESJANUARY 2020 23 31 13 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 23 31 13METAL DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 500, Test Methods forLouvers, Dampers and Shutters.

2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air ConditioningEngineers (ASHRAE) Handbook.

3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): A13.1, Scheme forthe Identification of Piping Systems.

4. Association of the Nonwoven Fabrics Industry (INDA): IST 80.6, WaterResistance (Hydrostatic Pressure).

5. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.b. A90/A90M, Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating

on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.c. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.d. A176, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.e. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and

Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip forPressure Vessels and for General Applications.

f. A480/A480M, Standard Specification for General Requirementsfor Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet andStrip.

g. A568/A568M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon,Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.

h. A653/A653M, Standard Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) bythe Hot-Dip Process.

i. A700, Standard Practices for Packaging, Marking, and LoadingMethods for Steel Products for Shipment.

j. A924/A924M, Specification for General Requirements for SheetSteel, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.


METAL DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES PW\DEN003\70833523 31 13 - 2 JANUARY 2020


k. A1008/A1008M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, SolutionHardened, and Bake Hardenable.

l. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-HighStrength.

m. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-AlloySheet and Plate.

n. C423, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and SoundAbsorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

o. C916, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct ThermalInsulation.

p. C1071, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct LiningInsulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material).

q. C1139, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass ThermalInsulation for Sound Absorbing Blanket and Board for MilitaryApplications.

r. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials.

s. E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmissionof Materials.

6. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): GeneralSpecifications for the Cleaning of Commercial Heating, Ventilation andAir Conditioning Systems.

7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):a. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems.b. 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-

Conditioning Systems.c. 96, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of

Commercial Cooking Operations.d. 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics

of Building Materials.e. 259, Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building

Materials.f. 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of

Textiles and Films.



8. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association(SMACNA):a. Duct Construction Standards.b. Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems.c. Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.d. Fire, Smoke, and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC

Systems.e. HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

9. UL:a. 181, Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.b. 214, Standard for Tests for Flame-Propagation of Fabrics and

Films.c. 555, Standard for Safety Fire Dampers.d. 555S, Standard for Safety Smoke Dampers.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. The following is a list of abbreviations which may be used in this section:

1. CFM: cubic feet per minute.2. FPM: feet per minute.3. PCF: pounds per cubic foot.4. WC: water column.

B. Sealing Requirements:

1. For the purpose of duct systems sealing requirements specified in thissection, the following definitions apply:a. Seams: Joining of two longitudinally (in direction of airflow)

oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between twojoints. All other duct surface connections made on perimeter aredeemed to be joints.

b. Joints, duct surface connections including:1) Girth joints.2) Branch and subbranch intersections.3) Duct collar tap-ins.4) Fitting subsections.5) Louver and air terminal connections to ducts.6) Access door, and access panel frames and jambs.7) Duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.




1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data:a. Rectangular, Rigid Round, and Oval Ductwork:

1) Schedules of duct systems, materials, joints, sealing, gaugeand reinforcement.

2) SMACNA Figure Numbers for each shop fabricated item.3) Reinforcing details and spacing.4) Seam and joint construction details.5) Hangers and supports, including methods for building

attachment, vibration isolation, and duct attachment.b. Ductwork Accessories:

1) Manufacturer’s product data including catalog sheets,diagrams, standard schematic drawings, installationinstructions and details, details of materials, construction,dimensions of individual components, and finishes, includingthe following items:a) Fittings and volume control damper installation (both

manual and automatic) details.b) Duct liner.c) Sealing materials.d) Dampers; include leakage, pressure drop, and

maximum back pressure data.e) Duct-mounted access panels and doors.f) Flexible ducts.g) Sheet metal fasteners.

2. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required bySection 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.


1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required bySection 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

2. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance asrequired by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, andTesting.

3. Record Drawings: Include duct systems routing, fittings details, andinstalled accessories and devices.




A. Industry Standards:

1. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, sheet metal ductwork shall beconstructed and installed in accordance with SMACNA DuctConstruction Standards relevant to ductwork system being provided.These standards are herein referenced as the SMACNA Manual, unlessotherwise indicated.

2. Comply with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook recommendations,except as otherwise indicated.

3. NFPA Compliance: NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork productsof types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been satisfactorilyused in similar service for not less than 5 years.

C. Suppliers of duct and fitting components shall provide on request the followinginformation:

1. Laboratory performance data for duct, including leakage rate, burstingstrength, collapse strength, seam strength, and pressure loss.

2. Laboratory performance data for fittings, including zero-length dynamiclosses.

D. Installer shall be a firm with at least 3 years’ experience of successfulinstallation on ductwork systems similar to that required for this Project.

E. Changes or alterations to layout or configuration of duct system shall be:

1. Specifically approved in writing by Engineer.2. Proposed layout shall provide original design results, without increasing

system total pressure.


A. Protect ductwork from dirt, water, and debris. During storage on Job Site,keep ends of ductwork covered to prevent foreign objects and water fromentering ductwork.

B. If fabricated sound-lined ductwork gets wet during installation, remove anddispose of ductwork from the Site.




C. Deliver sealant materials to Site in original unopened containers labeled withmanufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use,pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

D. Store and handle sealant materials in compliance with manufacturers’recommendations to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, high orlow temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

E. Deliver and store stainless steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protectivepaper, maintained through fabrication and installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Specified components of this ductwork system, including facings, mastics, andadhesives, shall have fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spreadwithout evidence of continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smokedeveloped, as per test conducted in accordance with ASTM E84 andNFPA 255 methods.

B. Ductwork thinner than 26-gauge will not be allowed.

C. Ductwork Interior Surfaces:

1. Smooth.2. No sheet metal parts, tabs, angles, or other items may project into air

ducts, unless otherwise specified.3. Seams and joints shall be external.4. For ductwork that is required to be reinforced, use only external

reinforcing.

2.02 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Construct metal duct systems from galvanized steel.

B. Where no specific ductwork materials are indicated in Specifications or onDrawings, galvanized steel sheet metal shall be basis of Contract.

C. Galvanized Steel Ductwork:

1. Comply with ASTM A653/A653M and ASTM A924/924M.2. Product Name: Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized Steel).3. Sheet Designation: CS Type B.



4. Applicable Specification: ASTM A653/A653M.5. (Zinc) Coating Designation: G90.6. Coating designation in accordance with Test Method A, ASTM A90/

A90M, and ASTM A924/A924M.7. Provide mill-phosphatized finish for ducts exposed to view and for ducts

scheduled to be painted.8. Provide sheet metal packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A700.

D. Exposed Ductwork: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view inoccupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfectionsincluding pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains, discoloration,and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, providereinforcements of same material as ductwork.

2.03 DUCT SEALING MATERIALS

A. General: The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive ormastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabricstrips and mastics.

B. Adhesives, Cements, Sealant, and Installation Accessories: As recommendedby duct manufacturer for application.

C. Water-Based Sealants:

1. Listed by manufacturer as nonflammable in wet and dry state.2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Foster; Series 32.b. Childers; CP-145A, 146.c. Rectorseal; Airlok 181.

2.04 DUCTWORK FASTENERS

A. General:

1. Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.2. Ductwork fasteners shall be same metal as duct being supported, unless

otherwise noted.




B. Self-Drilling Screws:

1. Galvanized Steel Ductwork System: Sheet metal screws shall be hexwasher head (HWH) TEKS® self-drilling type, formed from heat-treatedcarbon steel with zinc electroplated finish.

2.05 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS

A. Construct duct systems to pressure classifications indicated as follows:

1. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch WC, negative pressure.

B. Where no specific duct pressure designations are indicated in Specifications oron Drawings, 2-inch WC pressure class shall be basis of Contract.

2.06 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK

A. Fabricate rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC DuctConstruction Standards, Metal and Flexible, unless specified otherwise.

B. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are19 inches and larger and are 20-gauge or less, with more than 10 square feet ofunbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA Manual, unless they are lined orare externally insulated.

2.07 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK FITTINGS

A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other ductconstruction in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards, Metal and Flexible.

B. Elbows:

1. Fit square-turn elbows with vane side rails.2. Shop fabricate double-blade turning vanes of same material as ductwork.3. Fabricate with equal inlet and outlet.4. Rectangular radius elbows with inside radius of 3/4 of duct width in

direction of turn.5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Elgen; All-Tight.b. Duro-Dyne; Type TR.



2.08 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK BRANCH CONNECTIONS

A. Branch duct connections to rectangular duct mains shall be made using factoryfabricated fittings with spot welded tap to main duct connection.

2.09 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General:

1. Attachments, hangers, and supports for ductwork shall be in accordancewith SMACNA Manual referenced for type of duct system beinginstalled.

2. Duct hanging system shall be composed of three elements; upperattachment to building, hanger itself, and lower attachment to duct.

3. Wire hangers are not acceptable.4. Hanger Spacing:

a. Ducts Up to 60 inches in Largest Dimension: 10 feet, maximum.b. Ducts Over 61 inches in Largest Dimension: 8 feet, maximum.

B. Construction Materials:

1. Supporting devices including, but not limited to, angles used for supportand bracing, baseplates, rods, hangers, straps, screws, bolts shall be asfollows:a. Galvanized Steel Ductwork:

1) Indoors: Carbon steel, zinc electroplated.2) Outdoors: Carbon steel, hot-dipped galvanized after

fabrication.

C. Building Attachments:

1. Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural steel fastenersappropriate for building materials.

2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregateconcrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3. Upper Attachment (Concrete):a. Drive pin fastener and expansion nail anchor may be used for ducts

up to 18-inch maximum dimension.b. Threaded stud fastener may be used for ducts up to 36-inch

maximum dimension.c. Concrete attachments shall be made of steel.




D. Duct Fasteners: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;compatible with duct materials and conforming to requirements of ArticleDuctwork Fasteners.

E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A36/A36M,hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

2.10 DUCTWORK FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. General:

1. Factory fabricated metal-edged fabric flexible connectors for commercialor industrial applications.

2. Sheet metal permanently secured to fabric with double fabric fold, doublemetal crimp.

3. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B requirements.4. Airtight and waterproof.

B. Materials:

1. Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesivescomplying with UL 181, Class 1.

2. Metal Edges: Construct from same material as ductwork, unlessotherwise noted.

3. Fabric:a. Comply with NFPA 701 or UL 214 (except teflon coated).b. Woven polyester or nylon for most applications.c. Woven fiberglass for high temperature applications.d. Coating: Neoprene.

C. Construction:

1. Fold and crimp metal edge strips onto fabric as illustrated in SMACNAManual.

2. Standard Metal Edged Connectors: Strip of fabric 3 inches wide attachedto two strips of 3-inch-wide sheet metal.

3. Wide Metal Edged Connectors: Strip of fabric 4 inches wide attached totwo strips of 4-inch-wide sheet metal.

4. Extra Wide Metal Edged Connectors: Strip of fabric 6 inches wideattached to two strips of 6-inch-wide sheet metal.



D. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Ductmate; PROflex, Commercial.2. Ventfabrics.3. Duro-Dyne.

2.11 DUCT INSPECTION DOORS

A. General:

1. Insulated, gasketed, and at least 15 inches by 15 inches when ductdimensions are large enough.

2. On ductwork where largest side dimension is less than 16 inches, furnishinspection doors at least 8 inches by 8 inches.

3. Complete with necessary hardware and either Amerlock 10 or VentlockNo. 100 latches, and Ventlock Series No. 100 hinges.

4. Fabricated of same material as ductwork.

B. Round Spin-in Type Access Doors:

1. Size: 18-inch and 24-inch diameter will be acceptable in lieu ofcomparable size square or rectangular access doors specified herein.

2. Complete with insulation, spin-in frame, inner door, attachment cable,gaskets, three latches, and pull ring.

3. Manufacturer and Product: Flexmaster; Inspector Series.

C. Casing and Plenum Access Doors:

1. Size: 57 inches high by 24 inches wide minimum where possible.2. Complete with hardware, hinges, seals, and latch handles.3. Doors and frames shall be designed to close with pressure.4. Latch Handles: Ventlock, Series No. 260.5. Hinges: Ventlock, Series No. 200 and No. 300.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Ventlok.2. Duro-Dyne.3. Flexmaster.




2.12 MANUAL DAMPERS

A. Butterfly Manual Dampers:

1. Fabricate from two gauges heavier than duct in which installed, of samematerial as ductwork.

2. Align operating handle with damper blade.3. Provide 2-inch standoff bracket for insulated duct systems.4. Damper Manufacturers:

a. Ruskin.b. American Warming and Ventilating.

5. Operator Manufacturers:a. Accessible Ductwork: Ventlok; Type 620 or 635.b. Accessible Insulated Ductwork: Ventlok; Type 639.c. Concealed Ductwork: Ventlok; Type 677 with extended operating

rod and concealed regulator with plain cover.

B. Manual Opposed-Blade Balancing Dampers:

1. Externally operated gang airfoil, damper blades.2. Fabricate from same material as ductwork.3. Stainless steel or nylon sleeve bearings.4. Construction shall have interlocking edges and maximum 10-inch blade

width.5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Ruskin; CD102.b. American Warming and Ventilating; Model VC-31.

2.13 BACK DRAFT DAMPERS

A. General: Damper pressure drop ratings shall be based on tests and proceduresperformed in accordance with AMCA 500.

B. Steel Frame, Nonmetallic Blades:

1. Fabrication:a. Frame: 2 inches by minimum 18-gauge (51 mm by minimum

1.6 mm) galvanized steel with windstops to reduce backflow.b. Blades:

1) Style: Single piece, independent.2) Action: Parallel.3) Material: Noncombustible, neoprene coated fiberglass.4) Orientation: Horizontal.5) Width: Maximum 6 inches (152 mm).



c. Rear Bird Screen: Galvanized expanded metal.d. Mounting:

1) Suitable for mounting in vertical or horizontal airflow uppositions.

2) Configured for positions as shown on Drawings.e. Finish: Factory applied air-dried epoxy paint on steel damper parts.

2. Performance Data:a. Temperature Rating: Withstand minus 30 degrees to 200 degrees F

(minus 34 degrees to 93 degrees C).b. Maximum Back Pressure: 4-inch WC (1.0 kPa).c. Maximum System Air Velocity: 1,000 fpm (5.1 m/s).d. Maximum Spot Air Velocity: 1,200 fpm (6.1 m/s).

3. Accessories:a. Duct Transition Connection: Rectangular.b. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20-gauge thickness, minimum 8 inch

length.4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Ruskin; Model NMS2.b. Vent Products, Co.

C. Aluminum, Counterbalanced, Standard Duty:

1. Fabrication:a. Frame: 2 inches by minimum 0.06 inch (51 mm by minimum

1.5 mm), 6063-T5 extruded aluminum channel with front flangeand mitered corners.

b. Blades:1) Style: Single piece, overlap frame.2) Action: Parallel.3) Material: Minimum 0.025-inch (0.6 mm) 6063-T5 formed

aluminum.4) Width: Maximum 6 inches (152 mm).

c. Bearings: Corrosion-resistant, long-life, synthetic, formed as singlepiece with axles.

d. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically attached to blade edge.e. Linkage: Concealed in frame.f. Axles: Corrosion-resistant, long-life, synthetic, locked to blade and

formed as single piece with bearings.g. Counterbalances: Adjustable zinc plated steel weights mechanically

attached to blade enabling damper to operate over wide range ofpressures.




h. Mounting:1) Suitable for mounting in vertical, horizontal airflow up, and

horizontal airflow down positions.2) Configured for positions as shown on Drawings.

i. Finish: Factory applied air-dried epoxy paint on all damper parts.2. Performance Data:

a. Temperature Rating: Withstand minus 40 degrees to 200 degrees F(minus 40 degrees to 93 degrees C).

b. Maximum Back Pressure: 2-inch WC (500 Pa).c. Maximum Spot Air Velocity: 1,000 fpm (5 mps).d. Operation of Blades:

1) Start to Open: 0.01-inch WC (0.002 kPa).2) Fully Open: 0.06-inch WC (0.01 kPa).

e. Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.04-inch WC (0.01 kPa) at 1,000 fpm(305 mpm) through 24-inch by 24-inch (610 mm by 610 mm)damper.

3. Accessories:a. Duct Transition Connection: Rectangular.b. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20-gauge thickness, minimum 12-inch

length.4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Ruskin; Model CBD2.b. Greenheck; Series 160, 360, 460.

2.14 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

A. Louver and Grille Blank-Off Sections:

1. Fabricate from 20-gauge sheets of same material as louver/grille.2. Line with sound attenuation/insulating material.3. Shop-prime and paint outside face of blank-off section with two coats of

flat black exterior paint.

B. Auxiliary Drain Pans:

1. Dimensions: Minimum 6 inches larger in both dimensions than equipmentit is serving and 2 inches high, minimum.

2. Construction: 16-gauge stainless steel with welded joints. Pans shall bewatertight and have hemmed edges.

3. Drain Connection:a. Minimum 1-inch IPS or as shown on Drawings.b. Locate at lowest point of drain pan.



c. In lieu of drain connection, float switch may be installed. Floatswitch shall shut down air handling equipment upon sensing water.

C. Accessories Hardware:

1. Instrument Test Holes:a. Cast metal, material to suit duct material, including screw cap and

gasket and flat mounting gasket.b. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments.c. Provide in length to suit duct insulation thickness.

2. Flexible Duct Clamps:a. Stainless steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten

band with worm-gear action.b. Provide in sizes from 3 inches to 18 inches to suit duct size.

3. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof andresistant to gasoline, and grease.

2.15 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

A. Painted Identification Materials:

1. Stencils: Standard metal stencils, prepared for required applications withletter sizes generally comply with recommendations of ASME A13.1 forpiping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4-inch high lettersfor ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch-high letters for access door signsand similar operational instructions.

2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except asotherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray can formand grade.

3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated orin accordance with ASME A13.1 for colors for systems not identifiedherein.

B. Plastic Duct Markers

1. General:a. Provide manufacturer’s standard laminated plastic, color coded

duct markers. Conform to the following color code:1) Black Text on Yellow Background: Odorous Air.2) For other hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs

recommended by ASME A13.1.




C. Nomenclature to include the following:

1. Direction of air flow.2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust).

D. Manufacturers:

1. W.H. Brady, Co.2. Seton Identification Products.3. Craftmark.4. Brimar Industries, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Miscellaneous:

1. Install sheet metal ductwork and flexible ductwork in accordance withSMACNA Manual, NFPA 90A, and NFPA 90B.

2. Install ductwork using manufacturer’s recommended adhesives, cement,sealant, and insulation accessories.

3. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8-inch misalignmenttolerance and with internal surfaces smooth.

4. Interface Between Ductwork and Louvers: At locations where ductworkis connected to louver for either intake or exhaust purposes, ductworkshall be installed, sloped, and connected to louver so water enteringductwork system positively drains back to and out of louver.

B. Ductwork Location:

1. Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally, unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Avoid diagonal runs wherever possible.3. As indicated by diagrams, details, and notations or, if not otherwise

indicated, run ductwork in shortest route that does not obstruct usablespace or block access for servicing building and equipment.

4. In general, install as close to bottom of structure as possible.5. For ductwork concealed above ceiling, maximize clearance between

bottom of ductwork and top of ceiling construction.6. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other

structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.



7. Ductwork that must transition and drop below piping or other ductworkshall be transitioned back to bottom of structure immediately adjacent toobstruction.

C. Penetrations:

1. Provide duct sleeves or prepared openings for duct mains, duct branches,and ducts passing through roofs, walls and ceilings.

2. Clearances:a. For uninsulated ducts, allow 1-inch clearance between duct and

sleeve, except at grilles, registers, and diffusers.b. For insulated ducts, allow 1-inch clearance between insulation and

sleeve, except at grilles, registers, and diffusers.3. Closure Collars:

a. Minimum 4 inches wide on each side of walls or floors wheresleeves or prepared openings are installed.

b. Fit collars snugly around ducts and insulation.c. Same gauge and material as duct.d. Grind edges of collar smooth to preclude tearing or puncturing

insulation covering or vapor barrier.e. Use fasteners with maximum 6-inch centers on collars.

4. Packing: Mineral fiber in spaces between sleeve or opening and duct orduct insulation.

D. Concealment:

1. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductworkfrom view by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, orabove suspended ceiling.

2. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specificallyshown.

3. Limit clearance to 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure orconcealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any.

E. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Coordinate duct installation with installation of accessories, dampers,coil frames, equipment, controls, and other associated work of ductworksystem.

2. Ductwork shall be configured, positioned, and installed to permitinstallation of light fixtures as indicated on Drawings.

3. Coordinate ductwork layout with suspended ceiling, lighting andsprinkler head layouts and similar finished work.




4. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformervaults and other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

3.02 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK

A. General:

1. Where possible, install ductwork so seams and joints will not be cut forinstallation of grilles, registers, or ceiling outlets.

2. If cutting of seams or joints is unavoidable, reinforce cut portion tooriginal strength.

B. Low Pressure Taps:

1. Use bell mouth or conical fittings with integral locking quadrant damper.Spin-in fitting shall be sealed at duct tap with a gasket or sealed withsealant as specified for medium pressure ductwork.

2. Determine location of spin-in after outlet location is determined.3. Fitting shall be securely attached to shaft to prevent damper from

rotating around shaft.

C. Fittings:

1. Use bell-mouth or conical tee fittings for round duct takeoffs fromrectangular mains.

2. Use 45-degree entry fittings conforming to SMACNA requirements forrectangular takeoffs from rectangular or round mains.

3. Make offsets with maximum angle of 45 degrees.4. Use fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and

shape, and connections.

D. Rectangular Ductwork Transverse Joints:

1. Install each run with a minimum of joints.2. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at

connections kept to a minimum.3. Mechanical Joint Option:

a. Construct transverse joints with Ductmate 25/35 duct connectorsystems, Ductmate W.D.C.I. Heavy/Lite duct connector systems,or Ductlok J/E duct connector system. Slip-on duct flangeconnectors shall have integral sealant pocket with permanentlyflexible sealant.



b. When using Ductmate W.D.C.I. Heavy/Lite system, constructductwork in accordance to the Ductmate W.D.C.I. Heavy J andLight H Assembly Manual and Duct Construction Standards.

c. When using Ductlok J/E duct connector system, constructductwork in accordance with Ductlok’s Rectangular DuctConstruction Manual for Low, Medium, and High Pressure.

d. For longitudinal seams, use Pittsburgh lock seam sealed internallywith permanently elastic sealer such as Ductmate 5511M mastic.

e. Conform to SMACNA Class A sealing requirements.

3.03 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install ductwork with support systems in accordance with SMACNA Manual,unless otherwise noted.

B. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type,which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling.

C. Install additional bracing on ductwork as required, to prevent ballooning orbreathing.

D. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of eachbranch intersection.

E. Support vertical ducts at maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.

F. Upper attachments to structures shall have allowable load not exceeding 1/4 offailure (proof test) load, but are not limited to specific methods indicated.

G. In new construction, install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.

3.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Flexible Collars and Connections:

1. Use between fans and ducts.2. For round ducts, securely fasten flexible connections by zinc-coated steel

clinch-type draw bands.3. For rectangular ducts, lock flexible connections to metal collars.




3.05 DAMPERS

A. General:

1. Inspection:a. Inspect areas to receive dampers.b. Notify Engineer of conditions that would adversely affect

installation or subsequent utilization of dampers.c. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are

corrected.2. Install dampers at locations indicated on Drawings and in accordance

with manufacturer’s installation instructions.3. Install square and level.4. Handle damper using sleeve or frame. Do not lift damper using blades or

jack-shaft.5. Damper blades and hardware shall operate freely without obstruction.6. Damper blades and hardware that bind within frame or obstructed by

adjacent construction will not be acceptable.7. When installed, damper frames shall be gasketed or caulked to eliminate

leakage between duct and damper frames.8. Head and sill shall have stops.9. Suitable for installation in mounting arrangement shown.10. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening.

B. Manual Dampers:

1. Provide balancing dampers for grilles and diffusers as indicated onDrawings in branch duct as near main as possible.

2. Add or remove balancing dampers as requested by air balancing firm fornecessary control of air.

C. Back Draft Dampers:

1. Install dampers square and free from racking with blades runninghorizontally.

2. Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weightand to hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed.

3.06 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

A. Louver and Grille Blank-Off Sections: Attach airtight to louver or grille andinstall to allow for easy removal.



B. Inspection Plates and Test Holes:

1. Where required in ductwork for balance measurements.2. Test holes shall be airtight and noncorrosive with screw cap and gasket.3. Extend cap through insulation.

3.07 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints as follows:

1. In accordance with SMACNA requirements.

B. If no specific duct sealing requirements are specified, requirements ofSMACNA manual shall govern.

C. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.

D. Provide additional duct sealing as required to comply with Article DuctworkLeakage Testing.

E. Seal all audible leaks.

3.08 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTING

A. General:

1. Tests shall be conducted on completed ductwork systems.2. Testing of partial installations or limited sections of ductwork will not be

acceptable.3. All ductwork leakage test procedures and results shall be submitted to

Engineer for review.4. Engineer shall retain the right to witness some or all ductwork leakage

testing procedures.5. Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing at least 5 working days prior

to ductwork testing.

B. Leakage Criteria:

1. Assemble and install ductwork with maximum leakage limited as follows:a. Constant Volume Systems:

1) Exhaust Ductwork:a) Operating Pressure: 0-inch to 2-inch WC.

(1) Allowable Leakage: 2 percent of design airflow.




b) Operating Pressure: 3-inch and over WC.(1) Allowable Leakage: 1 percent of design airflow.

C. Leakage Testing Method:

1. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary test fans andcalibrated measuring devices to accomplish ductwork leakage test and todemonstrate that ductwork systems leakage rate is less than maximumrate specified.

2. Pressure testing shall be accomplished using a pressure blower with acalibrated orifice and manometer.

3. Blower shall maintain system design static pressure during test.4. Perform testing in accordance with procedures given in SMACNA

HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

3.09 BALANCING OF AIR SYSTEMS

A. Perform air balancing in accordance with requirements of Section 23 05 93,Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control.


A. Open ends of installed ductwork systems shall be covered to prevent dust,foreign objects and water from entering ductwork.

B. Ductwork systems shall not be used for air conveyance until adequate airfiltration devices are installed in air handling equipment, to prevent ingress ofconstruction dust.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Ductwork shall be cleaned of rust, dust, and debris, both internally andexternally, before placing in operation.

B. Before installing air outlets, use air handler to blow dry air through entiresystem at maximum attainable velocity. Provide temporary air filters for thisoperation.

C. If duct systems are found to contain construction debris at time of constructioncompletion Contractor shall provide complete ductwork system cleaning inaccordance with NADCA Standards.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 THERMOSET FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED JANUARY 2020 PLASTIC DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 23 31 16.16 - 1

SECTION 23 31 16.16 THERMOSET FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS

AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 500-D, Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating.

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125, and 250).

b. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through NPS 24.

c. B18.22.1, Plain Washers. 4. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

b. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.

c. C582, Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion Resistant Equipment.

d. D3982, Standard Specification for Contact Molded “Fiberglass” (Glass Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Duct and Hoods.

e. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association, Inc., (SMACNA): Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Duct: a. Statement of resins and reinforcing proposed for use. b. Pressure, vacuum, and temperature rating of duct.


THERMOSET FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PW\DEN003\708335 PLASTIC DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES JANUARY 2020 23 31 16.16 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

c. Dimensions of subassemblies to be shipped. d. Manufacturer’s data and descriptive literature for duct

accessories. e. Drawings showing layout, support, and joint details. f. Stamped and signed structural engineering design calculations. g. Information, details, and requirements for installation and support

of duct and torque values for flange bolting. h. Name of manufacturer.

2. Supports: a. Location plan. b. Type and details. c. Materials of construction. d. Stamped and signed structural engineering design calculations for

special supports. 3. Expansion Joints/Flexible Connectors:

a. Type and model. b. Materials of construction. c. Force required for expansion/contraction. d. Name of manufacturer.

4. Butterfly Dampers: a. Statement of resins and reinforcing proposed for use. b. Pressure, vacuum, and temperature rating. c. Materials of construction. d. Total weight including operator. e. Drawings showing overall dimensions and connection size. f. Type and model. g. Name of manufacturer.


1. Qualifications: a. Fabricator: List of references substantiating experience. b. Installer: Manufacturer’s certification that installer is qualified for

installation work. 2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 3. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by

Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 4. Manufacturer’s factory inspection report. 5. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 6. Detailed information on structural, mechanical, electrical, or other

modifications necessary to adapt the arrangement or details shown to the ductwork installation.



7. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

8. Damper and Blast Gate: AMCA 500-D leakage test results by AMCA-approved laboratory.

9. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.


A. Qualifications:

1. Fabricator: Minimum 5 years’ experience. 2. Installer: Minimum 5 years’ experience. 3. Joint Installer: Manufacturer certified.


A. Shipping:

1. Do not ship ducting by nesting small diameter components inside larger diameter components.

2. Protect flanged sections by bolting to wooden blinds 2 inches greater than outside diameter of flange.

3. For nonflanged components, use either rigid plugs inside ends to prevent deflection or protect with wooden boxes.

4. Crate materials whenever practical prior to shipment. 5. Firmly fasten and pad components shipped to prevent shifting or flexing

of components while in transit.


A. Temperature: Make field joints only when ambient temperature is above 55 degrees F and below 100 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Resin:

1. Resin System: Premium corrosion-resistant, fire-retardant vinylester, or other qualified thermosetting resin. Resin to be selected by fabricator, subject to approval of Engineer, and suitable for intended service with no fillers or thixotropic agents.



2. Liner Resin: Premium grade and corrosion resistant. 3. Structural wall resin may be of different chemical resistance, subject to

conditions of service and approval of Engineer. 4. Flame Spread Index: ASTM E84, less than 25; fire retardant additives

used only in structural layer. 5. Structural wall resin shall contain a minimum of 3 percent antimony

trioxide to achieve required flame spread index. 6. Add ultraviolet absorbers to surfacing resin to improve weather

resistance. 7. Color: Use no dyes, pigments, or colorants, except in exterior gel coat.

Exterior gel coat shall be white.

B. Reinforcement:

1. Veil: Chemical surfacing mat Type C (chemical) glass, 10 mils thick with finish and binder compatible with lay-up resin.

2. Corrosion Barrier: Resin-rich interior surface of nominal 100 mils to 120 mils thick, using chopped strand mat backing the veil. Use no additive in corrosion barrier.

3. Chopped Strand Mat: Type E glass, minimum 1-1/2 ounces per square foot, with silane finish and styrene soluble binder.

4. Continuous Roving for Chopper Gun Spray-Up: Type E glass. 5. Woven Roving: Type E glass, nominal 24 ounces per square yard, 4 by

5 weave, with silane type finish. 6. Continuous Roving for Filament Winding: Type E glass with silane type

finish.

C. Fasteners:

1. Bolts: ASTM A193/A193M, Type 316 stainless steel, ANSI coarse thread series, Grade B 8M hex head.

2. Nuts: ASTM A194/A194M, Type 316 stainless steel, Grade 8M. 3. Washers: ASME B18.22.1, flat, Type 316 stainless steel.

2.02 DUCTWORK

A. Design Requirements:

1. Conform to ASTM D3982 and/or SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual.

2. Duct manufacturer’s design for round section, including duct wall thickness and stiffeners.

3. Take into account expansion from seasonal temperature variations.



4. Duct manufacturer’s design for round section, including duct wall thickness and stiffeners. Wall thickness per SMACNA Thermoset FRP Manual to be a minimum 0.240-inch for 4-inch through 12-inch diameter, 0.280-inch for 14-inch through 42-inch diameter, and 0.420-inch for 43-inch through 72-inch diameter. Round duct to be fabricated per SMACNA filament wound (Type X) composites laminate Table 5-6.

B. Service Conditions:

1. System Maximum Pressure: 10.5 inches of water column. 2. System Maximum Vacuum: 12 inches of water column. 3. Location: Outside. 4. Ambient Temperature: 22 degrees F to 90 degrees F.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Physical Properties: Meet or exceed requirements of ASTM D3982 and ASTM C582.

B. Squareness of ends, fittings, elbows, and butt joints shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM D3982.

C. Keep use of flanges to a minimum; butt joints are preferred method of joining sections of duct.

D. Butt joints shall only be permitted in duct sections that are accessible for inside overlay. Internal overlay to consist of two layers of 1-1/2 ounce per square foot of fiberglass mat followed by one layer of surfacing veil, as a minimum.

E. Flanges for Duct to Duct and Duct to FRP Vessel Connections and Duct Wall Thicknesses: ASTM D3982, rated for specified pressure and vacuum, except FRP duct flanges shall be 3/4-inch thick minimum.

F. Flange dimensions (except thickness) and drilling patterns for flanges that connect to equipment or valves are to correspond to ASME B16.5, Class 150 or ASME B16.1, Class 125.

G. Furnish gussets on flanged nozzles from ducts.

H. Back Face of Flanges: Spot-faced, flat and parallel to flange face, and of sufficient diameter to accept ANSI metal washer under bolt head or nut.



I. Laminate:

1. Reinforce inner surface of ducts with resin-rich surfacing veil 10 mils thick to 20 mils thick.

2. Construct interior layer of resin reinforced with at least two plies of chopped strand mat; thickness at least 100 mils.

3. Glass content of combined inner surface and interior layer shall be 27 percent plus or minus 5 percent.

J. Duct and Fittings:

1. Type: Contact molded or filament wound, meeting requirements of ASTM D3982, except all flanges shall be a minimum of 3/4-inch thick.

2. Joints: Butt wrapped except flanged at connections to expansion joints, butterfly valves, blast gates, or mechanical equipment.

3. Fittings: Plain end or flanged, manufacturer’s standard sizes. 4. Gaskets: EPDM, 3/16-inch thick, full-face, Type A Durometer of

50 to 60. 5. Stiffened Duct: Where required and indicated on Drawings, extended

duct spans or cantilevered duct distances from support locations where flexible connectors are used may necessitate stiffening ribs or thicker structural walls. Provide duct design to accommodate required span length without exceeding allowable maximum duct deflection indicated herein and without exceeding maximum allowable duct stresses. Provide stamped calculations as required in Submittals paragraph herein.

K. Manufacturers:

1. Daniel Company. 2. ECS Environmental Solutions. 3. Ershigs. 4. Chemposite, Inc.

L. Supports:

1. Supports for FRP ductwork shall be provided per Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems and as shown on Drawings.

2. Ductwork to be designed to span supports as shown on Drawings. 3. Maximum Duct Deflection: 1/2 inch, including special sections at road

crossings. 4. Support Spacing:

a. 24 Inch Diameter and Larger: 16 feet, maximum. b. 20 Inch Diameter and Smaller: 12 feet, maximum.



M. Marking:

1. Identify each duct component with fabricator’s name, resin, minimum thickness, and date of manufacture.

2. Use permanent marking. Seal decals and labels into laminate exterior with resin.

3. For piece marking used for installation, use oil-based paint for easy removal.

N. Cure products to at least 90 percent of minimum Barcol hardness specified by resin manufacturer.

O. Expansion Joints/Flexible Connections:

1. Provide where indicated on Drawings or as required for proper duct installation.

2. Type: W-design configuration with integral flanges suitable for service with FRP duct.

3. Coordinate connections to duct or equipment to ensure matching drilling pattern.

4. Material: EPDM. 5. Backing Rings: 3/8-inch thick, minimum 1.75-inches wide, Type 316

stainless steel. Diameter and drilling in accordance with ASTM D3982. 6. Length: Minimum of 8 inches, maximum 12 inches, flange-to-flange. 7. Extension: 1 inch. 8. Compression: 4 inches. 9. Lateral Offset: 3 inches. 10. Thickness: 1/4-inch, minimum with 2-ply reinforcement. 11. Manufacturer and Product: Holz Rubber Company, Inc.; Style 945.

P. FRP Backdraft Dampers:

1. Backdraft dampers shall be of the multi-blade rectangular type complete with channel-type frame, blades, linkage, full-length axles, adjustable counterbalance assembly, and bearings.

2. Same inside dimensions as connecting fan discharge size or connecting ductwork.

3. Axles not less than 3/4 inch in diameter. 4. Shall be furnished with blade seals and jamb seals. 5. Backdraft dampers shall have a maximum leakage rate of 15 cubic feet

per minute per square foot of damper area, at a differential pressure of 5 inches W.C. AMCA leakage tests shall be furnished as part of the submittal.

6. Color: Exterior gel coat shall match ductwork.



7. Design Requirements: a. Each backdraft damper shall be designed for the following

conditions: 1) Air Temperature Range: 40 degrees F to 120 degrees F. 2) Maintained Differential Pressure Across Blades: 0.1-inch

W.C. 3) Design for a differential pressure of 14 inch W.C. minimum

when closed. 8. Materials:

a. FRP materials for backdraft dampers shall be same resin as used in ductwork.

b. Requirements for flame spread shall be same as required for ductwork.

9. Construction: a. Frames: Fiberglass reinforced plastic with resin as described

herein. b. Blades: Fiberglass reinforced plastic with resin as described

herein. Blade thickness and stiffeners as required to meet design conditions. Airfoil shape.

c. Shaft: Continuous Type 316 stainless steel rod. d. Bearings: Molded PTFE. e. Blade Stops: FRP with resin as described herein. f. Blade Seals: PTFE or Viton. g. Jamb Seals: PTFE or Viton. h. Flanges: As specified to match ductwork flanges or where

connected to fan discharge match bolt pattern and flange dimensions of fan discharge.

i. All hardware to be Type 316 stainless steel. j. Linkage: Type 316 stainless steel all out of airstream. k. Adjustable Counterbalance Assembly: Type 316 stainless steel all

out of airstream. 10. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Daniel Company; Model # 901 DanDRAFT. b. Swartwout; Model 426AF. c. ECS Environmental Solutions; BD series.

Q. Butterfly Dampers:

1. Dampers: a. Single-blade type, complete with frame, close-fitting axle, and

bearings. b. Same inside diameter as connecting ductwork.



c. Axles not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and shall be continuous through damper.

d. When used for isolation service, shall be furnished with blade seal and shaft seal.

e. When used for balancing only, shall be furnished with full circumference molded in blade stop.

f. Isolation dampers shall have maximum leakage rate of 0 cubic feet per minute per square foot of damper area, at a differential pressure of 30 inches WC.

2. Design Requirements: a. Each damper shall be designed for the following conditions:

1) Air Temperature Range: 50 degrees F to 100 degrees F. 2) Differential Pressure: 30-inch WC.

3. Materials: a. FRP materials for dampers shall be same resin as used in

ductwork. b. Requirements for flame spread and smoke development shall be

same as required for ductwork. 4. Construction:

a. Frames: Fiberglass reinforced plastic with resin as described herein and fabricated to ASME/ANSI RTP-1.

b. Blades: Fiberglass reinforced plastic with resin as described herein. Blade thickness and stiffeners as required to meet design conditions.

c. Axles: Type 316 stainless steel with nuts, bolts, and washers encapsulated in FRP. Shaft shall be completely replaceable and easily disassembled from the body and blade.

d. Bearings: Molded PTFE. e. Blade Stops: FRP with resin as described herein. f. Blade Seals: Neoprene. g. Shaft Seals: Neoprene. h. Flanges: Damper flanges shall be per NBS PS 15-69 Table 2,

hand lay-up integral to body per ASME RTP-1-2005 standard Figure 4-11.

5. Manual Actuators: a. Dampers smaller than 24-inch diameter shall be operating using

hand lever with locking quadrant. b. Provide all dampers 24-inch diameter and larger with hand-wheel

driven worm gear operators mounted to FRP stand-off plate made integral to damper body.



c. Worm gear operators shall be sized for the pressure rating and torque required to rotate the blade from opening to closed positions. A Type 316 stainless steel adaptor shall be used to connect the operator with the solid shaft made of the same material. The operator shall have a hand wheel handle and shall be epoxy coated to resist corrosion.

d. Dampers of all sizes, which are located at an elevation of 7 feet above the floor, shall be provided with chain wheel operators. Chain wheel sprockets along with anti-gagging chain guides and corrosion resistant chain link of appropriate lengths shall be coupled with worm gear operators as specified. Worm gear operator shaft diameters shall be sized large enough to withstand pull forces of 300 pounds. Chain wheel sprockets shall be manufactured by Babbitt Company, “or-equal. “

e. Worm gear operators shall be Model DT-12 as manufactured by Dyna Torque, “or-equal.”

6. Electric Actuators: a. For the following dampers, provide 480-volt electric actuator for

modulating service as specified in Section 40 27 02, Process Valves and Operators: 1) 75FV1001. 2) 75FV1002.

7. Manufacturers: a. Daniel Company. b. ECS Environmental Systems. c. Spundstrand.


A. Factory Inspection: Inspect fabrications for required construction, intended function and conformance with referenced standards.

B. Inspection of products is required prior to shipment, unless specifically waived in writing by Engineer.

C. Notify Engineer 1 week prior to estimated date of inspection.

D. Repairs authorized by Engineer shall be reinspected before final acceptance, unless specifically waived.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Verify dimensions and conditions in field.

B. Layout routing in straight lines parallel to building lines.

C. Coordinate support locations with layout and joints.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Ductwork:

1. Cut, fit, and install in accordance with duct manufacturer’s recommendations. The SMACNA manual may be used for guidance, but duct manufacturer’s recommendations shall take precedence.

2. Seal cut edges with compatible resin. 3. Ductwork shall be free of vibration when in operation. Vibration

isolation devices shall be provided and installed by Contractor. 4. Install plumb and straight and in proper alignment. 5. Provide for expansion and contraction of ductwork and fittings. 6. Anti-seize thread compound shall be applied to all nuts and bolts. 7. Flange bolts shall be tightened to torque values specified by

manufacturer. Install flat washer under each nut and bolt head.

B. Field Joints:

1. Provide material in kit form; one kit for one joint. 2. Make joints only when ambient temperature is above 55 degrees F and

below 100 degrees F. 3. Made by manufacturer certified installer.

C. Dampers: Unless otherwise necessary for proper operation of damper, axles shall be installed in horizontal position.

1. Verify proper operation of dampers to their full open and closed positions.

2. Drill 1/4-inch diameter weep hole above the bypass stack damper blade stop to drain rainwater from the bypass stack, as shown on Drawings. Seal hole with resin to prevent wicking.



3.03 FIELD TESTING

A. Field test ductwork after installation and before concealment or burying, with air test to 90 percent of maximum working pressure. Leaks shall be corrected and duct retested until no further leaks appear. Test methods shall be the following:

1. Foul Air Ductwork—Exposed Outdoors: a. Suction Side of Fan (Vacuum): Utilize smoke stick or smoke

emitter and pass along every field joint and flanged connection while system is operating under normal operating conditions. Smoke stick or smoke emitter to be passed along entire duct perimeter. Provide temporary enclosure to prevent impact due to wind, rain, and other outdoor environmental conditions. Observation of smoke entering ducting shall be evidence of gross leakage and shall be corrected by methods approved by Engineer.

b. Discharge Side of Fan (Pressure): Apply soap bubble mixture to every field joint and flanged connection; examine for leakage and correct as necessary by methods approved by Engineer. Conduct while system is operating under normal operating conditions.


A. Manufacturer’s Representative:

1. Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 1 person-day for installation assistance, including pre-installation

training of Contractor personnel in joint assembly, and inspection. b. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and

completion of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. After duct leakage testing, provide complete air balancing of entire system as described in Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control.



3.06 CLEANING

A. Blow ductwork clean using system fans; purged continuously for not less than 48 hours at a flow rate not less than design flow rate. If required, system fan shall be throttled on inlet side to prevent motor overload. Temporary screen shall be installed on system fan inlet to protect fan from entering debris.

B. Dampers shall be smooth, clean, and free of dirt when installed.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 ODOR CONTROL FANS JANUARY 2020 23 34 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 23 34 00 ODOR CONTROL FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Acoustical Society of America (ASA): S2.19, Mechanical Vibration—Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotors—Part 1, Determination of Permissible Residual Unbalance.

2. Air Movement and Control Association International (AMCA): a. 99, Standards Handbook. b. 201, Fans and Systems. c. 203, Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems. d. 204, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. e. 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified

Aerodynamic Performance Rating. f. 300, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. g. 301, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory

Test Data. 3. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 9, Load

Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning

Engineers (ASHRAE): 52.2, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.

5. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)

Apparatus. b. D2247, Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of

Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. c. D2794, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings

to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). d. D3363, Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. e. D4167, Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Fans

and Blowers. f. E413-87, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. g. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. h. E90-90, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of

Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.


ODOR CONTROL FANS PW\DEN003\708335 23 34 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 45, Standard on Fire

Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals. 8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 9. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

a. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. b. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning. c. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. d. SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning.

10. UL: 507, Safety Standard for Electric Fans.

1.02 DEFINITIONS


1. AC: Alternating Current. 2. CISD: Chemical Industry, Severe-Duty. 3. dB: Decibel. 4. DWDI: Double Width, Double Inlet. 5. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 6. hp: Horsepower. 7. ODP: Open Drip Proof. 8. SWSI: Single Width, Single Inlet. 9. TEFC: Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled. 10. TL: Transmission Loss. 11. UV: Ultraviolet. 12. XP: Explosion Proof.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Fans: a. Provide submittal data for the specified products:

1) Identification as referenced in Contract Documents. 2) Manufacturer’s name and model number. 3) Descriptive specifications, literature, and drawings. 4) Dimensions and weights for each component. 5) Fan sound power level data (reference 10 to power minus

12 watts) at design operating point. 6) Fan Curves:

a) Performance Curves Indicating: (1) Relationship of flow rate to static pressure for

three fan speeds.



(2) Brake horsepower curves. (3) Acceptable selection range (surge curves,

maximum revolutions per minute). (4) Static pressure, capacity, horsepower demand

and overall efficiency required at duty point, including drive losses.

b) For variable air volume applications, indicate operating points at 100, 80, 60 and 40 percent of design capacity on fan curves, including data to indicate effect of capacity control devices, such as inlet vanes on flow, pressure, and brake horsepower.

7) Capacities and ratings. 8) Construction materials. 9) Fan type, size, class, drive arrangement, discharge, rotation,

and bearings. 10) Wheel type, diameter, maximum revolutions per minute for

fan class, operating revolutions per minute, and tip speed. 11) Motor data, including service factor and operating

horsepower, as specified in Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

12) Fan shaft first critical speed. 13) Drive assembly horsepower rating. 14) Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and

numbers. 15) Vibration isolation, including sub-base and isolators. 16) Fan accessories, including inlet box, bearings, and shaft

seal. 17) Factory finish system. 18) Color selection charts where applicable. 19) Fiberglass Material: Statement of resins and reinforcing

proposed for use. b. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as

required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 2. Acoustical Enclosure:

a. Manufacturer’s literature, technical data, and standard details. b. Complete design certification signed and sealed by a professional

engineer registered in the State of Washington. Submittal at a minimum shall include the following: 1) Floor plan including all dimensions and doors. 2) Building enclosure details. 3) Structural anchorage details.

c. Mechanical details including equipment location, size, type, and layout.



d. Complete set of Drawings showing members, accessories, connections and anchorage indicating sizes, materials and finishes.

e. Complete set of building erection drawings showing a step-by-step construction sequence for the erection of the building. The erection drawings shall show the location of the building. The erection drawings shall show the location of all roof and wall accessories and the exact anchor bolt locations required for each accessory.

f. Complete acoustical modeling results and/or calculations sealed by a professional engineer confirming expected attenuation.


1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

2. Acoustical Enclosure: a. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. b. Manufacturer’s Certificate of proper installation. c. Certification that codes and referenced standards have been met. d. Complete building calculations stamped by a professional

Engineer licensed in the State of Washington. e. Washington Energy Code required lighting calculations.

3. Recommended procedures for protection and handling of products prior to installation.

4. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, for the following: a. Motors specified to be premium efficient type. b. FRP fans.

6. Fabrication, functional run test, and vibration test reports. 7. Operation and maintenance data in conformance with Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data. Include as-built version of equipment schedules, performance curves, bill of materials, and drawings.


A. Performance Ratings: Tested in accordance with AMCA 210.

B. Sound Ratings: Tested in accordance with AMCA 300. Fans must bear the AMCA seal for sound.

C. Fabrication: In accordance with AMCA 99.



D. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

E. Acoustical Enclosure:

1. Design acoustical enclosure system to meet requirements of applicable codes and standards in effect at time of permitting: a. IBC: International Building Code with Washington State

Amendments. b. IFC: International Fire Code. c. OSHA.


A. Deliver acoustical enclosure components in undamaged condition to Site only when ready for installation.

B. Protect products from damage and deterioration.

C. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


A. Provide manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of Work specified in this specification section found defective during a minimum period of 5 years and as stated below after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in the General Conditions.

B. Conditions: Finish on metal enclosure, accessories, flashing, and trim will not chalk, crack, check blister, peel, flake, chip, or lose adhesion for 5 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES

A. Some specific equipment requirements are listed in Equipment Schedule. Refer to Article Supplements.



2.02 GENERAL

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Fan shall operate at single stable point as indicated by fan curve. Fans having two potential operating points on a single RPM curve are not acceptable. Duty point shall be at least 10 percent below the crest of the fan curve.

2. Fan shall operate at a speed not greater than 90 percent of the maximum safe speed at selected design point.

3. Fan and motor combination shall be capable of operating at 105 percent of Supplier’s selected speed at design point. Motor shall not operate into motor service factor over the published range of flow at this higher speed.

4. Where inlet box is used, provide fan curves inclusive of inlet box losses.

B. Spark-Resistant Construction: Fans required to be spark-resistant shall comply with requirements of AMCA 99-0401.

C. Operating Limits: Fans designated to meet a specified fan class shall comply with requirements of AMCA 99-2408.

D. Acoustical Levels: Equipment selections shall produce sound power levels in each octave band no greater than shown in Equipment Schedule.

E. Fan Drives:

1. Drive assembly shall be sized for a minimum 140 percent of fan motor horsepower rating.

2. Fan Shafts: First critical speed of at least 125 percent of fan maximum operating speed.

3. Provide speed test openings at shaft locations. 4. Belts: Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type. 5. Motors:

a. Motors 20 hp or Smaller: 1) Variable pitch V-belt sheaves allowing at least 20 percent

speed variation. 2) Final operating point shall be at approximate sheave

midpoint. b. Motors Larger than 20 hp: Fixed-pitch sheaves. c. Furnish motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or bases.

6. Belt and Shaft Guards: a. Easily removable and to enclose entire drive assembly, meeting

federal, OSHA, and State of Washington requirements.



b. Guard faces of expanded metal having minimum 60 percent free area for ventilation.

c. Bright yellow finish.

F. Finishes:

1. Carbon Steel Parts: a. Factory finish as follows, unless indicated otherwise:

1) Parts cleaned and chemically pretreated with phosphatizing process.

2) Alkyd enamel primer. 3) Air dry enamel topcoat.

2. Aluminum Parts: Finished smooth and left unpainted, unless stated otherwise.

3. Stainless Steel Parts: Finished smooth and left unpainted. 4. Fiberglass Parts: Finished in accordance with Paragraph Fiberglass

Material.

2.03 UTILITY BLOWER, CENTRIFUGAL SWSI, FIBERGLASS

A. General:

1. Factory-assembled utility blower; including housing, fan wheel, drive assembly, motor, and accessories.

2. Fiberglass Construction: In accordance ASTM D4167. 3. Suitable to convey air at temperatures up to 250 degrees F. 4. Fan Performance: AMCA 99-2408 Class II. 5. Airstream Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Fiberglass Material:

1. Construction: Resin reinforced fiber cloth and mat. 2. Resin:

a. Vinyl ester or other qualified thermosetting resin. b. Selected by fabricator, subject to approval by Engineer and

suitable for intended service with no fillers or thixotropic agents. c. Premium grade and corrosion resistant. d. Structural wall resin may be of different chemical resistance,

subject to conditions of service and approval by Engineer. e. Flame Spread Index:

1) ASTM E84, less than 25; fire retardant additives used only in structural layer.

2) Structural wall resin shall contain a minimum of 3 percent antimony trioxide to achieve required flame spread index.



f. For outdoor locations, add ultraviolet absorbers to surfacing resin to improve weather resistance.

g. Color: 1) Use no dyes, pigments, or colorants, except in exterior gel

coat. 2) Exterior gel coat shall be gray.

3. Reinforcement: a. Veil: Chemical surfacing mat, Type C (chemical) glass veil. b. Chopped Strand Mat: Type E glass, minimum 1-1/2 ounces per

square foot, with silane finish and styrene soluble binder. c. Continuous Roving for Chopper Gun Spray-Up: Type E glass. d. Woven Roving: Type E glass, nominal 24 ounces per square yard,

4 by 5 weave, with silane type finish. 4. Laminate:

a. Inner Surface (Veil): 1) Resin rich, veil reinforced, 10 mils to 20 mils thick. 2) Use no additives. 3) Finish and binder compatible with lay-up resin. 4) Reinforcement Content: Not more than 20 percent.

b. Interior (Corrosion) Layer: 1) Resin rich, at least two plies of chopped strand mat, nominal

100 mils to 120 mils thick. 2) Use no additives. 3) Construct interior layer of resin reinforced with at least two

plies of chopped strand mat backing the veil. 4) Reinforcement Content: 25 plus or minus 5 percent.

c. Exterior (Structural) Layer: 1) Resin with mat, cloth, woven roving or chopped strand glass

reinforcement. 2) Enough resin present to prevent surface fiber show. 3) Exterior surface relatively smooth, with no exposed fibers or

sharp projections. d. Wall Thickness: As required for equipment structural integrity,

but no less than 3/16 inch.

C. Housing:

1. Material: Fiberglass. 2. Construction:

a. Curved scroll configuration. b. Integral flanges to ensure housing concentricity and housing

strength. c. Flanged inlet and outlet to permit duct connection. d. Drain connection located at lowest point of fan housing.



e. Inlet: 1) Die-formed bell mouth of fiberglass construction. 2) Fiberglass supports. 3) Bolted to housing to permit wheel removal.

3. Base/Pedestal: All-welded heavy gauge steel.

D. Wheel:

1. Material: Fiberglass. 2. Fan wheel speed not to exceed 90 percent of manufacturer’s listed safe

fan speed. 3. Centrifugal, one-piece, nonoverloading, backward inclined airfoil blade

type. 4. Wheel hub permanently bonded to shaft and completely encapsulated in

fiberglass.

E. Shaft, Bearings, Drive:

1. Shafts: a. Turned, ground, and polished Type 304 stainless steel. b. Ends drilled and tapped for wheel installation.

2. Bearings: a. Heavy-duty construction. b. Grease lubricated, precision antifriction ball, self-aligning type. c. Mounted in cast iron pillow block housing. d. Selected for average life (ABMA 9 L50) of not less than

200,000 hours operation at maximum cataloged operating speed. 3. Drives:

a. In accordance with Paragraph Fan Drives. b. Type: Direct. c. Arrangement: Arrangement 8.

F. Acoustical Enclosure:

1. System Performance: a. Occupancy Group: F-2 (Low Hazard – Factory / Industrial).

Structural Criteria: Refer to General Structural Notes on Drawings.

b. Interior Design Conditions: 1) Temperature, Degrees F: 100 degrees F (maximum).

c. Outside Design Conditions: 1) Temperature, Degrees F: 0 degree F to 100 degrees F. 2) Prevailing Wind Direction and Velocity: Refer to General

Structural Notes on Drawings.



3) Site Elevation: As shown on Drawings. 2. Enclosure shall consist of a double acoustical wall, freestanding frame

of structural shapes with stationary and hinged locking door panels. The frame shall be designed to allow complete breakdown for shipment. The panels and frame shall be removable for major equipment servicing. Enclosure shall be a weather-tight structure that has straight, plumb walls with square corners. The interior panel shall be perforated with a minimum of 2 inches of insulation behind. Roof shall be sloped at minimum 1/8 inch per foot away from main entrance door to accommodate drainage. Provide a minimum 24-inch clear isle width inside of enclosure.

3. Where indicated on the Area Classification and Materials Selection Table, the interior of the enclosure shall be rated as a Class 1, Division 2, Group D area.

4. Provide manufacturer’s standard acoustic double doors, each 30 inches wide by 84 inches high, locations as shown on Drawings.

5. Door Hardware: a. Locks: Mortise lock with lever handle, stainless steel. Key lockset

into Master Key system. b. Hinges: Manufacturer’s standard. c. Door closer with hold-open and stop device. d. Weather-stripping: Manufacturer’s standard.

6. Exhaust fan shall be provided to remove heat from the enclosure and to provide airflow for the drive motor. Provide manual control of exhaust fan. The exhaust fan shall be housed in a baffled noise insulated enclosure mounted on top of the acoustical enclosure. Inlet air shall flow through lined ducts to provide cooling air supply for the Odor Control Fan motor. For Class 1, Division 2, Group D classified units, fan shall be AMCA “C” spark-resistant construction and motors and controls shall be suitable for installation in Class 1, Division 2, Group D classified areas. Exhaust fan motor to be 460V, three-phase. See Electrical Drawings for exhaust fan controls.

7. Insertion loss characteristics of the total enclosure, when tested in accordance with ASTM E413 and ASTM E900 standards, shall not be less than the following:

Freq 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000 TL 22 24 31 42 52 61 66 66

8. Construction: Constructed of Type 316, stainless steel. 9. Design Requirements:

a. Structural Design: Each enclosure shall be designed for the structural design criteria provided in General Structural Notes on Drawings.



10. Provide and install interior 120-volt LED light fixtures, number as required, surface mounted. For Class 1, Division 2, Group D classified units, fixtures shall be rated for Class 1, Division 2, Group 2 areas. Specified foot candle level is 50 fc at 36 inches above the floor. A minimum of one light shall have 90 minute integral battery back. a. Lighting and lighting control shall comply with Washington

Energy Code. 11. Provide one exterior 20 amp, 120-volt, PVC toggle switch with a

gasketed, spring-loaded, PVC cover for manual control of light fixture(s). Switch shall be wired to interior lighting by Contractor. Switch shall be rated for Class 1, Division 2 space.

12. All wiring, disconnects, and conduit shall be in accordance with Division 26, Electrical.

13. Provide and install mounting channels for mounting equipment and piping as indicated. Mounting channels shall be securely fastened to walls of building with stainless steel hardware.

14. Minimum of four stainless steel lifting eyes installed on shelter. 15. Acoustic Enclosure Manufacturers:

a. VAW Systems. b. Aeroacoustic Corp. c. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.

G. Fan Accessories:

1. Provide as follows: a. Housing Access Doors: Bolted and gasketed. b. Flanged Inlet: Heavy fiberglass construction, factory drilled and

flanged. c. Flanged Outlet: Heavy fiberglass construction, factory drilled and

flanged. d. Shaft Seal: Fiberglass and neoprene construction, located at shaft

penetration of housing. e. Shaft and Bearing Guard: Carbon steel sheet metal for complete

coverage of shaft and bearings. f. Motor and Drive Cover:

1) Factory fabricated; OSHA type. 2) Carbon steel sheet metal construction. 3) Vented, openings sufficient size for proper motor cooling.

g. Unitary Subbase: 1) Structural metal subbase. 2) Bolted to bottom of fan base/pedestal. 3) Drilled for field installation of vibration isolators. 4) Coated as specified in Article Corrosion Protection Coating.



h. Vibration Isolators: 1) Rubber in shear, RIS, Neoprene. 2) Deflection: 0.25 inch.

i. Spark-Resistant Construction: 1) Carbon fiber veil impregnated in housing and wheel

fiberglass resin corrosion barrier. 2) Static grounding. 3) Classification: AMCA 99-0401 Type C and shall be suitable

for installation in Class 1, Division 2 classified areas. j. Corrosion Protection Coating:

1) Provide factory-applied corrosion protection coating on fan steel components.

2) Coating system shall be baked epoxy and shall be in accordance with Article Corrosion Protection Coating.

k. Fan Inlet Box: Where shown on Drawings, constructed from same resin as fan housing, rectangular inlet, round outlet matching fan inlet flange, low point drain, and independently supported to fan sub-base or concrete pad.

H. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Aerovent; Model BCF. 2. Hartzell; Series 41. 3. Verantis; Model CLUB. 4. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.

2.04 CORROSION PROTECTION COATING

A. General:

1. Factory-applied corrosion protection coating for application to fan components and accessories, where required by this section.

2. Quality Control: a. Verify dry film thickness before final baking. b. Finished coating system shall be free from voids, checks, cracks,

and blisters. 3. Surface Cleaning:

a. Clean parts to be coated as follows: 1) Immerse parts in heated cleaning solution to remove

lubricants, machining oils, and residual factory contamination.

2) Follow with immersion in potable water bath to neutralize and remove cleaning solution.



3) Chemical Pretreatment: Immerse parts in heated chemical solution, iron phosphate for steel, clear/yellow chromate for aluminum.

B. Baked Epoxy:

1. Material: Epoxy. 2. Surface Preparation: Sandblast surface to SSPC SP 10. 3. Application: Electrostatic spray. 4. Curing: Oven baked at a metal temperature not to exceed 400 degrees F. 5. Finished Thickness: 2.5-mil to 3.5-mil dry film thickness. 6. Performance:

a. Coating shall meet or exceed following criteria: 1) Salt Spray Test: Minimum 1,000-hour duration,

ASTM B117 test method. 2) Humidity Resistance: Minimum 1,000-hour duration,

ASTM D2247 test method. 3) Impact Resistance: 100 inch-pounds, ASTM D2794 test

method. 4) Pencil Hardness: 2H, ASTM D3363 test method. 5) Service Temperature: Maximum 230 degrees F, continuous.

2.05 MOTORS

A. General:

1. Fan motors shall comply with provisions of Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

2. Provide integral self-resetting overload protection on single-phase motors.

3. Motors for fans specified for use with variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty type.

4. Provide shaft grounding device on motors larger than 20 hp. 5. Motors shall not operate into service factor in any case.

B. Motor requirements shall be as follows, unless designated otherwise on Equipment Schedule:

1. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.

2. Winding Thermal Protection: None. 3. Space Heater: No. 4. Number of Speeds: Single. 5. Number of Windings: One. 6. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficient.



7. Shaft Type: Solid, carbon steel. 8. Mounting: As required for fan arrangement. 9. Service Factor: 1.15.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Equipment Identification Plates: Furnish 16-gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component and control panel in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 1/4-inch high block type black enamel filled equipment identification number and letters indicated in this Specification and as shown on Drawings.

B. Lifting Lugs: Furnish suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds.

2.07 SPARE PARTS

A. The following spare parts and special tools shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements:

Spare Parts Quantity

Shaft Coupling per fan size 1

Shaft Seal per fan size 2

B. One set of any special tools required to perform operation and maintenance activities and perform installation.


A. General:

1. Fan shall operate at single stable point as indicated by fan curve. Fans having two potential operating points on a single RPM curve are not acceptable.

2. Fan and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 110 percent of scheduled air quantity and static pressure. Motor shall not operate into motor service factor in any listed case.

3. Consider drive efficiency in motor selection according to manufacturer’s published recommendation or according to AMCA 203, Appendix L.



B. Testing Provisions:

1. Provide tachometer access holes large enough to accept standard tachometer drive shaft.

2. Center punch fan shaft to accommodate tachometer readings.

C. Acoustical Levels:

1. Perform noise tests in accordance with AMCA 300 and AMCA 301. 2. Fan sound power levels (dB, Reference 10-12 Watts) shall be no greater

than scheduled values.

D. Balancing:

1. Unless noted otherwise, each fan wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ASA S2.19 Grade G6.3.

2. Fans controlled by variable frequency drives shall be dynamically balanced at speeds 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of design revolutions per minute.

E. Vibration Test:

1. Each fan furnished with 5 hp or larger motor shall have factory run vibration test, including vibration signatures taken on each bearing in horizontal, vertical, and axial direction.

2. Vibration reading as measured at scheduled rotational speed shall not exceed the following values when fan is rigidly mounted: a. Direct Drive: 0.08 inch per second peak velocity.

3. Provide written records of run test and vibration test as part of Informational Submittals.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install Odor Control fans level and plumb.

B. Scroll Drains: Pipe drain connection through running trap to floor drain as shown on Drawings.

C. Labeling:

1. Label fans in accordance with Article Accessories. 2. Mark exhaust fans with arrows to indicate proper direction of rotation,

in accordance with NFPA 45.



D. Service Access: Locate units to provide access spaces required for motor, drive, bearing servicing, and fan shaft removal.

E. Equipment Support and Restraints:

1. Install floor-mounted units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, the seismic force required by code.

2. Secure vibration isolators to concrete equipment pad using anchor bolts cast in concrete base.

F. Connections:

1. Refer to Section 23 31 16.16, Thermoset Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Ducts and Accessories.

2. Isolate duct connections to Odor Control Fans with flexible connectors. 3. Install ductwork adjacent to fans to allow proper service and

maintenance.


A. Functional Tests:

1. Verify blocking and bracing used during shipping are removed. 2. Verify fan is secure on mountings and supporting devices, and

connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. 3. Verify proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors,

starters, and disconnect switches. 4. Verify cleaning and adjusting are complete. 5. Disconnect fan drive from motor; verify proper motor rotation direction,

and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. 6. Reconnect fan drive system; align and install shaft guards. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify manual and automatic volume control in connected ductwork are

in fully open position and a clear air flow path exists. 9. Verify operation of backdraft dampers and adjust linkage as required for

proper operation.

B. Performance Tests:

1. Perform air system balancing as specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control.

2. Test each fan to verify design air flow rates as specified. 3. Adjust motor speed as required to achieve design airflow. 4. Document the fan operating speed and static pressure at each fan inlet

and discharge at the design flow rate and at three additional conditions



to provide the data required for calculation of air flow rate as required by Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, supplement Loop Specifications.

C. Vibration Testing:

1. Perform field testing on rotating equipment, where specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control, to determine baseline, actual operating vibration.

2. If vibration limits described therein are exceeded, rebalance equipment in-place until design tolerances are met.

D. Acoustical Levels and Noise Testing:

1. Perform noise tests on sound enclosure emissions in accordance with ASTM E413 and ASTM E90.

2. Sound power levels (dB, Reference 10-12 Watts) shall be no greater than 65 dBA from fan acoustical enclosure footprint. Perform noise test on fan sound enclosure sound emissions after installation.


A. Fan Manufacturer’s Representative:

1. Present at site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection. b. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and

completion of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. c. 1 person-day for prestartup classroom or site training. d. 1 person-day for facility startup. e. 1 person-day for post-startup training of Owner’s personnel.

B. Noise Enclosure Manufacturer’s Representative:

1. Present at site, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 2 person-days for installation assistance and inspection. b. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and


C. Refer Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.



3.04 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes.

B. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturers’ written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.

3.05 SUPPLEMENT

A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this Specification.

1. Odor Control Fan Schedule.

END OF SECTION


FANSTAG 22FAN0201 22FAN0202 75FAN0201 75FAN0202

LOCATION

PRELIMINARY & PRIMARY

TREAT. ODOR CONTROL

PRELIMINARY & PRIMARY

TREAT. ODOR CONTROL

SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL

SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL

TYPE

UTILITY BLOWER

SWSI FIBERGLASS

UTILITY BLOWER

SWSI FIBERGLASS

UTILITY BLOWER

SWSI FIBERGLASS

UTILITY BLOWER

SWSI FIBERGLASS

FAN DATA AIRFLOW MAX CFM 22350 22350 16000 16000

@ SP IN W.G. 7 7 8 8

MIN CFM 19350 19350 16000 16000

SPEED RPM 1149 1149 1185 1185

DRIVE TYPE DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT

WHEEL TYPE BI BI BI BI

MIN. DIA. INCH 40.2 40.2 40.2 40.2

MAXIMUM BHP 36 36 27.37 27.37

SOUND DATA SOUND POWER LEVEL 63 95 95 95 95

dB (RE 10-12 W) 125 95 95 94 94

@ MID OCTAVE BAND 250 100 100 100 100

FREQUENCY (Hz) 500 92 92 91 91

1K 90 90 90 90

2K 88 88 87 87

4K 83 83 82 82

8K 77 77 77 77

ELECTRICAL DATA MOTOR HP 40 40 30 30

RPM 1200 1200 1200 1200

ENCL. TEFC TEFC TEFC TEFC

VOLT 460 460 460 460

PH 3 3 3 3

MAXIMUM LENGTH INCHES 78 78 78 78

DIMENSIONS WIDTH INCHES 100 100 96 96

HEIGHT INCHES 86 86 86 86

WEIGHT LBS 3750 3750 3500 3500

MANUFACTURER AEROVENT AEROVENT AEROVENT AEROVENT

MODEL NO. BCF BCF BCF BCF

APPLICABLE REMARKS:B, C, D, E, F,

G, H, IB, C, D, E, F,

G, H, IB, C, D, E, F,

H, IB, C, D, E, F,

H, I

ABBREVIATIONS: FC: FORWARD CURVED BI: BACKWARD INCLINED AF: AIR FOIL

REMARKS:

A: BELT DRIVE, ARRANGEMENT 9 F: UNITARY SUBBASE

B: DIRECT DRIVE, ARRANGEMENT 8 G: INLET BOX

C: CLOCKWISE WHEEL CONFIGURATION H:

D: UPBLAST FAN DISCHARGE

E: RUBBER IN SHEAR FEET I: VFD RATED MOTOR

FINAL NOISE LEVEL W/ACOUSTICAL ENCLOSURE TO BE 65 dBA 5 FEET FROM FAN (Q=2)

PW\DEN003\708335JANUARY 2020©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

ODOR CONTROL FANS23 34 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1


PW\DEN003\708335 HVAC FANSJANUARY 2020 23 34 01 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 23 34 01HVAC FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Acoustical Society of America (ASA): S2.19, Mechanical Vibration—Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotors—Part 1, Determinationof Permissible Residual Unbalance.

2. Air Movement and Control Association International (AMCA):a. 99, Standards Handbook.b. 201, Fans and Systems.c. 203, Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems.d. 204, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.e. 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified

Aerodynamic Performance Rating.f. 300, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.g. 301, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory

Test Data.3. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 9, Load

Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning

Engineers (ASHRAE): 52.2, Method of Testing General VentilationAir-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.

5. ASTM International (ASTM):a. B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)

Apparatus.b. D2247, Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of

Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity.c. D2794, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings

to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).d. D3363, Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.e. D4167, Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Fans

and Blowers.f. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 45, Standard on Fire

Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals.8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).


HVAC FANS PW\DEN003\70833523 34 01 - 2 JANUARY 2020


9. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):a. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning.b. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning.c. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.d. SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning.

10. UL: 507, Safety Standard for Electric Fans.

1.02 DEFINITIONS


1. AC: Alternating Current.2. CISD: Chemical Industry, Severe-Duty.3. dB: Decibel.4. DWDI: Double Width, Double Inlet.5. ECM: Electronically Commutated Motor.6. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic.7. hp: Horsepower.8. ODP: Open Drip Proof.9. SWSI: Single Width, Single Inlet.10. TEFC: Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled.11. UV: Ultraviolet.12. XP: Explosion Proof.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Provide following for specified products:a. Identification as referenced in Contract Documents.b. Manufacturer’s name and model number.c. Descriptive specifications, literature, and drawings.d. Dimensions and weights.e. Fan sound power level data (reference 10 to power minus

12 watts) at design operating point.f. Fan Curves:

1) Performance Curves Indicating:a) Relationship of flow rate to static pressure for various

fan speeds.b) Brake horsepower curves.c) Acceptable selection range (surge curves, maximum

revolutions per minute).



d) Static pressure, capacity, horsepower demand andoverall efficiency required at duty point, includingdrive losses.

2) For variable air volume applications, indicate operatingpoints at 100, 80, 60 and 40 percent of design capacity onfan curves including data to indicate effect of capacitycontrol devices such as inlet vanes on flow, pressure, andbrake horsepower.

g. Capacities and ratings.h. Construction materials.i. Fan type, size, class, drive arrangement, discharge, rotation, and

bearings.j. Wheel type, diameter, maximum revolutions per minute for fan

class, operating revolutions per minute, and tip speed.k. Motor data, including service factor and operating horsepower, as

specified in Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.l. Fan shaft first critical speed.m. Belt service factor.n. Drive assembly horsepower rating.o. Sheave horsepower rating.p. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and

numbers.q. Factory run test and vibration test reports.r. Vibration isolation.s. Factory finish system.t. Color selection charts where applicable.

2. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required bySection 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

3. “Or-Equal” Equipment:a. Where submitted equipment results in change to fan inlet or outlet

ductwork configuration shown on Drawings, submit system effectfactor calculations indicating increased static pressurerequirements as described in AMCA 201.

b. Where submitted equipment results in change to ductwork andequipment configuration shown on Drawings, submit detailedinformation on structural, mechanical, electrical, or othermodifications necessary to adapt arrangement to equipmentfurnished.


1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required bySection 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.




2. Recommended procedures for protection and handling of products priorto installation.

3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, for the following:a. Motors specified to be premium efficient type.b. FRP fans.

5. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance asrequired by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, andTesting.

6. Test reports.7. Operation and maintenance data in conformance with Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data. Include as-built version of equipmentschedules.


A. Performance Ratings: Tested in accordance with AMCA 210.

B. Sound Ratings: Tested in accordance with AMCA 300.

C. Fabrication: In accordance with AMCA 99.


A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts,special tools, and materials:

Item Quantity

Vee Belts One complete set per unit

B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common ProductRequirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Spark Resistant Construction: Fans required to be spark resistant shall complywith requirements of AMCA 99-0401.

B. Operating Limits: Fans designated to meet a specified fan class shall complywith requirements of AMCA 99-2408.



C. Acoustical Levels: Equipment selections shall produce sound power levels ineach octave band no greater than shown in Equipment Schedule.

D. Fan Drives:

1. Drive assembly shall be sized for a minimum 140 percent of fan motorhorsepower rating.

2. Furnish multiple drive belts where motor horsepower is 2 hp or larger.3. Sheaves:

a. Capable of providing 150 percent of motor horsepower.b. Unless otherwise noted, furnish belt-driven fans with cast iron or

flanged steel sheaves.4. Drive Adjustment:

a. When fixed-pitch sheaves are furnished, accomplish system airbalancing by either trial of different fixed-pitch sheaves or use oftemporary adjustable-pitch sheaves.

b. Provide trial and final sheaves, as well as drive belts, as required.5. Fan Shafts: First critical speed of at least 125 percent of fan maximum

operating speed.6. Provide speed test openings at shaft locations.7. Belts: Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type.8. Motors:

a. Motors 20 hp or Smaller:1) Variable pitch V-belt sheaves allowing at least 20 percent

speed variation.2) Final operating point shall be at approximate sheave

midpoint.b. Motors Larger than 20 hp: Fixed-pitch sheaves.c. Furnish motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or bases.

9. Weather Cover: For outdoor applications, factory fabricated driveassembly of same material as fan housing, unless specified otherwise.

10. Belt and Shaft Guards:a. Easily removable and to enclose entire drive assembly, meeting

federal, OSHA and State of Washington requirements.b. Guard faces of expanded metal having minimum 60 percent free

area for ventilation.c. Bright yellow finish.

E. Finishes:

1. Carbon Steel Parts:a. Factory finish as follows, unless indicated otherwise:

1) Parts cleaned and chemically pretreated with phosphatizingprocess.




2) Alkyd enamel primer.3) Air dry enamel topcoat.

2. Aluminum Parts: Finished smooth and left unpainted, unless statedotherwise.

3. Stainless Steel Parts: Finished smooth and left unpainted.4. Fiberglass Parts: Finished in accordance with Paragraph Fiberglass

Material.

2.02 INLINE FAN, CENTRIFUGAL, SQUARE

A. General:

1. Factory-assembled, centrifugal, inline fan, square housingconfiguration; including housing, fan wheel, drive assembly, motor andaccessories.

2. Bearing AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance.

B. Housing:

1. Construction: Minimum 18-gauge galvanized steel.2. Integral duct collars.3. Removable side panels, for ease of service.4. Field convertible for side air discharge configuration.5. Predrilled universal mounting brackets for vertical or horizontal

installation.6. Inlets: Aerodynamic aluminum venturi.7. Corrosion-resistant fasteners.8. Drive belt and bearings separated from air steam by enclosure.

C. Wheel:

1. Centrifugal backward inclined, 100 percent aluminum construction.2. Precision machined cast aluminum hub.3. Die-formed airfoil or backward inclined blades.4. Matched to inlet venturi.5. Attached to fan shaft with split taper lock bushing.

D. Shaft, Bearings, Drive:

1. Shafts:a. Turned, ground and polished carbon steel.b. Keyed for sheave installation.



2. Bearings:a. Grease lubricated, precision antifriction ball, self-aligning, pillow

block style, relubricatable or sealed type.b. Selected for average life (ABMA 9 L50) of not less than

200,000 hours operation at maximum cataloged operating speed.3. Drives:

a. Factory set to specified fan revolutions per minute.b. Type: Direct.

E. Performance and Capacities:

1. Airflow: 2,700 cfm.2. External Static Pressure: 0.9-inch WC.3. Fan: 1,271 rpm.4. Fan Static Efficiency: 50 percent.5. Motor: 1,300 rpm.6. Fan Motor bhp: 0.84 hp.7. Fan Motor hp: 1 hp.8. Electrical Characteristics: 115V, single-phase, 60-hz.9. Motor Enclosure: TEFC.10. Motor: ECM type as specified in Article Motors. Speed control

potentiometer shall be factory-mounted on motor.

F. Accessories:

1. Control Switch:a. NEMA-1 Rating.b. Toggle-style switch action.


1. Greenheck; Model SQ.2. Loren Cook; Model SQND.3. Twin City Fan (Aerovent); Model ISD.4. “Or-equal.”

2.03 MOTORS

A. General:

1. Fan motors shall comply with provisions of Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

2. Provide integral self-resetting overload protection on single-phasemotors.




3. Motors for fans specified for use with variable frequency drives shall beinverter duty type.

4. Motors shall not operate into service factor in any case.

B. Motor requirements shall be as follows, unless designated in thisspecification:

1. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loadssatisfactorily.

2. Winding Thermal Protection: None.3. Space Heater: No.4. Number of Speeds: Single.5. Number of Windings: One.6. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficient.7. Shaft Type: Solid, carbon steel.8. Mounting: As required for fan arrangement.9. Service Factor: 1.15.

C. Motors for sizes 1 hp and smaller and 115V single-phase power supply whereindicated on the process and instrumentation diagram (P&ID) Drawings shallcomply with the following:

1. Motor to be an electronic commutation (EC) motor specificallydesigned for fan applications. AC induction type motors are notacceptable. Motors shall be permanently lubricated with heavy-duty ballbearings to match the fan load and prewired to the specific voltage andphase. Internal motor circuitry shall convert AC power supplied to thefan to DC power to operate the motor.

2. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20 percent of full speed(80 percent turndown). Speed shall be controlled by a potentiometer dialmounted with the fan and motor assembly with signage with text “FANSPEED ADJUSTMENT BY AUTHORIZED TEST AND BALANCEPERSONNEL ONLY.”

3. Motor shall be a minimum of 85 percent efficient at all speeds. Where acontrol panel is specified under this section, panels shall be UL 508Alabeled and, unless noted otherwise, shall be rated for an available faultduty of 42,000 amps at 460 volts or 22,000 amps at 240 volts or less.



2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Equipment Identification Plates: Furnish 16-gauge stainless steelidentification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment componentand control panel in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 3/8-inch highengraved block type black enamel filled equipment identification number andletters indicated in this Specification and as shown on Drawings.

B. Lifting Lugs: Furnish suitably attached for equipment assemblies andcomponents weighing over 100 pounds.


A. General:

1. Fan shall operate at single stable point as indicated by fan curve. Fanshaving two potential operating points are not acceptable.

2. Fan and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 110 percentof scheduled air quantity and static pressure. Motor shall not operateinto motor service factor in any listed case.

3. Consider drive efficiency in motor selection according tomanufacturer’s published recommendation or according to AMCA 203,Appendix L.

B. Testing Provisions:

1. Provide tachometer access holes large enough to accept standardtachometer drive shaft.

2. Center punch fan shaft to accommodate tachometer readings.

C. Acoustical Levels:

1. Perform noise tests in accordance with AMCA 300 and AMCA 301.2. Fan sound power levels (dB, Reference 10-12 Watts) shall be no greater

than scheduled values.

D. Balancing:

1. Unless noted otherwise, each fan wheel shall be statically anddynamically balanced to ASA S2.19 Grade G6.3.

2. Fans controlled by variable frequency drives shall be dynamicallybalanced at speeds 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percentof design revolutions per minute.




E. Vibration Test:

1. Vibration reading as measured at scheduled rotational speed shall notexceed the following values when fan is rigidly mounted:a. Direct Drive: 0.08 inch per second peak velocity.

2. Written records of run test and vibration test shall be made availableupon request.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans level and plumb.

B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

C. Labeling:

1. Label fans in accordance with Article Accessories.2. Mark exhaust fans serving fume hoods with arrows to indicate proper

direction of rotation, in accordance with NFPA 45.

D. Service Access: Locate units to provide access spaces required for motor,drive, bearing servicing, and fan shaft removal.

E. Equipment Support and Restraints:

1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchorbolts cast in concrete base.

2. Seismic Restraint Snubbers: Install with sufficient clearance so unitisolators are not restricted for proper free isolation, but do limitmovement in all directions.

F. Connections:

1. Refer to Section 23 31 13, Metal Ducts and Accessories.2. Isolate duct connections to fans.3. Install ductwork adjacent to fans to allow proper service and

maintenance.



1. Verify blocking and bracing used during shipping are removed.



2. Verify fan is secure on mountings and supporting devices, andconnections to ducts and electrical components are complete.

3. Verify proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors,starters, and disconnect switches.

4. Verify cleaning and adjusting are complete.5. Disconnect fan drive from motor; verify proper motor rotation direction,

and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation.6. Reconnect fan drive system.7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.8. Verify manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke

dampers in connected ductwork are in fully open position.

B. Performance Tests:

1. Starting Procedures:a. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated revolutions per minute.b. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

2. Operational Test:a. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.b. Repair or replace malfunctioning units; retest as specified after

repairs or replacement is made.c. Test and adjust control safeties.d. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.



1. Present at site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:a. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.b. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and


B. Refer Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, and Section 01 91 14,Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Lubricate bearings.




C. Balancing:

1. Perform air system balancing as specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control.

2. For fans with ECM motor, field adjust speed as needed to attain designcondition. Permanently mark the speed setting at final balancecondition.

D. Vibration Testing:

1. Perform field testing on rotating equipment, where specified inSection 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC andOdor Control, to determine actual operating vibration.

2. If vibration limits described herein are exceeded, rebalance equipmentin-place until design tolerances are met.

3.05 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices,inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repairdamaged finishes.

B. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according tomanufacturers’ written instructions. Remove foreign material and constructiondebris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETSJANUARY 2020 23 37 00 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 23 37 00AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI): 880, AirTerminals.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): C636/C636M, Standard Practice forInstallation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile andLay-in Panels.

3. UL.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Noise Criteria; background sound rating method for indoor sound.

B. VAV: Variable air volume.

C. WC: Water column.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Manufacturer’s data and descriptive literature for products

specified.b. Furnish the following information for each type of diffuser,

register, and grille furnished:1) NC sound data.2) Static pressure loss data.3) Throw data.


AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PW\DEN003\70833523 37 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RETURN, EXHAUST AND TRANSFER GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. Louvered Return, Exhaust and Transfer Grilles and Registers (EG1):

1. Construction as follows:a. Material: Steel.b. Finish: Baked white enamel face finish.c. RR and ER Register Accessories:

1) Gang-operated opposed-blade volume control damper.2) Material to match grille.

2. Fixed horizontal louvers set at 35 degrees to 45 degrees.3. 1-inch minimum flat, rectangular frame.4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Krueger; S80/S580H Series.b. Carnes; Type RAAAH.c. Titus; 350 Series.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, grilles, and registers tight on their respective mountingsurfaces, level, plumb, and true with room dimensions.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 BOILER EXHAUST STACK JANUARY 2020 23 52 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 23 52 00 BOILER EXHAUST STACK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. CSD-1, Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired

Boilers. b. Section IV, Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers.

4. FM Global (FM). 5. Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI). 6. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors

and Generators. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 54, National Fuel Gas Code. b. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

8. Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA): Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.

9. UL: 674, Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Complete specifications, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature that include make, model, dimensions, and weight of equipment, for products specified.

2. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

3. Roof Penetrations and Base Supports: a. Condition assessment of existing roof penetrations and stack base

support framing members verifying sufficient capacity and suitability for continued service for new stacks; or


BOILER EXHAUST STACK PW\DEN003\708335 23 52 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

b. Shop drawings, calculations and installation instructions for new roof penetrations and stack base support members.

4. Guy Wire Eyebolt Roof Attachments: a. Condition assessment of existing roof deck at guy wire eyebolt

locations verifying sufficient capacity of roof deck for installation of new stainless steel eyebolts, and installation instructions for new eyebolts; or

b. Shop drawings, calculations and installation instructions for new eyebolts including roof deck modifications at eyebolt locations.



2. Recommended procedures for protection and handling of equipment and materials prior to installation.

3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.


A. Products manufactured within scope of standards published by UL shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide boiler exhaust stack replacement for two existing boilers. Boiler exhaust stack heights shall match existing.

2.02 BOILER EXHAUST STACK

A. Double Wall Boiler Exhaust Stack:

1. UL listed, Type PS with Type 316L stainless steel inverted cone style rain cap terminations with bird screens. Terminations and geometry shall match existing rain cap as shown on drawings. Rain cap thickness shall be 20-gauge, minimum.

2. Double wall insulated vent system, factory designed and built for installation shown and UL listed for boiler exhaust to 500 degrees F, minimum.

3. Inner liner shall be ASTM A240, Type 316L stainless steel, minimum 20-gauge.

4. Outer jacket shall be ASTM A240, Type 316L stainless steel.


PW\DEN003\708335 BOILER EXHAUST STACK JANUARY 2020 23 52 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

5. Provide 1-inch minimum fiber insulation between the inner liner and outer jacket.

6. System shall be warranted by the manufacturer for 10 years. 7. Coordinate plate support assembly, full ring assembly, expansion joints,

pipe support and anchorage locations as necessary to ensure proper alignment within the building and connection to boiler.

8. Stack shall be provided with 1-1/2-inch drain connection on removable branch tee cap on vertical stack runs.

9. Stack shall be freestanding with guy wires above the roof and supported from below the roof as shown on Drawings.

10. Stack manufacturer shall provide the design and shop drawings to the Contractor for coordination of the stack roof penetrations, supports, and guy anchors required to support the stack with design and performance requirements as stated in Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. These drawings shall be used for installation of the new stacks.

11. Breeching connecting the boiler to the main stack shall be fabricated from the same material as the stack with gas-tight connections to the boiler and the stack.

12. Insulating roof penetration thimble. 13. Manufacturer’s standard fittings as required.

B. Stack Accessories:

1. Sample Ports: Provide two, 3-inch diameter, ASTM A312, Type 316L, 40S sample ports with AWWA C228, Class SD blind flanges on each stack at 4 feet 6 inches above roof deck.

2. Guy wires attachment support rings, to attach guy wires to stack. 3. 1/4-inch diameter Guy wire cables with turnbuckles. 4. Guy wire tensioners to accommodate up to 3 inches thermal expansion. 5. See additional requirements of Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and

Bracing.


1. Selkirk; Metalbestos. 2. Van Packer. 3. Metal-Fab, Inc. 4. Industrial Chimney Company. 5. Jeremias Exhaust Systems.


A. Functional Test: Perform manufacturer’s standard test.


BOILER EXHAUST STACK PW\DEN003\708335 23 52 00 - 4 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Boiler Stack and Breeching:

1. Assemble individual sections of stack together to provide a completely supported stack.

2. Follow manufacturer’s drawings and directions for installation of stack.



1. Conduct on each boiler assisted by manufacturer’s representative as follows: a. Startup Assistance:

1) Inspect boiler stacks, and boiler breeching. 2) Initial startup of boiler and observe four subsequent starts.

END OF SECTION


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 8, 2020 AIR SUPPLY UNITS


SECTION 23 74 00

AIR SUPPLY UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. SCOPE: This section includes provisions for the materials, installation and

testing of air supply air units for rooftop, outdoor and indoor installations.

B. This specification section is for activities during Schedule B only.

C. Related Sections:

1. 23 00 00 – General Requirements

2. 23 08 00 – Commissioning of HVAC

3. 23 09 00 – Instrumentation and Control performance

4. 23 09 93 – Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls



1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE (IN ADDITION TO 23 00 00 OR DIV 00 AND DIV

01)






this Section shall prevail.








Reference Title

AHRI 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment

AHRI 410 Standard for Forced Circulation Air-Heating and Air-Cooling

Coils


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

AIR SUPPLY UNITS JANUARY 8, 2020


Reference Title

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems

NFPA 90B Standard for Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air

Conditioning Systems

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association

3. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY: Assign unit responsibility, as specified in

Section 23 00 00, to the air supply unit manufacturer for the air supply

units and accessories specified in this Section. The manufacturer is the

unit responsibility manufacturer and has unit responsibility, as defined

in Section 23 00 00, for the equipment specified in this Section. Where

packaged controls are provided, the manufacturer is also the unit

responsibility manufacturer and has unit responsibility for packaged

controls specified in this Section and Section 23 09 00. Provide a

completed and signed certificate of unit responsibility

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (IN ADDITION TO 23 00 00)

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. AHRI Certification: Provide AHRI certified and listed units.

C. AMCA Compliance: Products are to comply with performance requirements

and are to be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories are to comply with

NEMA standards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All fans shall bear the AMCA seal.

B. Motors shall comply with 23 34 00 2.01.C Provided factory mounted

disconnect switch for all 120-volt, 1-phase motors, type as specified in

Division 26 for the space in which the equipment is installed. All units shall

be equipped with integral motor starters unless otherwise specified.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



C. Protective Coatings: coat entire assembly, including roof curb. Corrosion-

resistant, factory applied coating per 23 00 00 in strict conformance with the

paint manufacturer's instructions.

2.02 AIR SUPPLY UNITS - 100 PERCENT OUTSIDE AIR VENTILATION AND

HEATING

A. 100 PERCENT OUTSIDE AIR CUSTOM AIR CONDITIONER WITH

ENERGY RECOVERY: 100 percent outside air cooling and heating unit.

Unit shall be designed to meet ANSI/ASHRAE 15, ASHRAE 62, and UL

Standard 1995. Air handling unit shall be configured for indoor installation on

a welded structural steel base with integral lifting lugs. Unit shall include the

following features:

1. Unit Cabinet: Fully insulated 2” double wall steel casing with interior

and exterior coated steel walls, per 23 00 00, and 2” thick 2 lb/ft3

polyurethane foam or injected foam insulation providing full coverage.

Cabinet shall include insulated stainless steel drain pan and sloped

condensate drain connection constructed of stainless steel.

2. Double wall, insulated, piano hinged access doors for access to the

control box, filter, coils, burner/furnace, exhaust/supply fans, energy

recovery heat exchanger, and any other areas requiring servicing. Each

door shall seal against a rubber gasket to help prevent air leakage and

be equipped to permit ease and safety during servicing. Doors and all

access points shall be located for access and coordinated with the

Drawings and the door swing shall be such as to open against system

pressures..

3. Fans:

a. All fans shall bear the AMCA seal.

b. Supply air fan: Unit shall be provided with a plenum type

supply air blower with a TEFC premium efficient blower

motor. Fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

Blower and motor shall be mounted on a unitary base and

internally isolated with 1” spring isolators. Spring isolator

assembly shall be coated per 23 00 00. Blower shall be coated

with a hi-pro polyester coating. Access door shall be tool

lockable and the door swing shall be such as to open against

system pressures..

c. Supply air stream: Provide inlet duct connection sleeve and

aluminum inlet damper with parallel 3-V blades. Outlet shall

be provided with a duct connection sleeve.

d. Fan bearings shall be rubber enclosed, self-aligned grease

lubricated ball or roller bearings rated for a minimum AFBMA

L 10 bearing life of 100,000 and 50,000 hours, respectively.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

AIR SUPPLY UNITS JANUARY 8, 2020


Bearing grease points shall be extended to accessible side of

unit for service.

4. Air temperature sensors for outside and supply air streams.

5. Accessible removable air filtration system for both supply and exhaust

(return) air streams. Supply unit with 2-inch replacement filters. Filter

racks shall be same construction as unit.

6. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location. Unit

shall include a complete self-contained low voltage control circuit

complete with starters, step down transformers, and other accessories

required for a complete functioning system. See Section 23 09 00 for

control requirements.

7. Hot Water Coil shall be AHRI Certified. Coil shall be constructed of

seamless copper tubing, permanently bonded to aluminum fins and

enclosed in a 16 gauge galvanized steel frame. Provide capacity

indicated at water flows no greater than scheduled. Coils shall have a

minimum working pressure of 150 psi and shall be leak tested under

water at 275 psi minimum. Provide coating for corrosion protection

per 23 00 00. Hot water coils shall be supplied with factory installed

drain and vent piping to unit casing exterior.

8. Direct fired furnace: Stainless steel heat exchanger tubes, draft

inducer, electronic spark ignition, suitable for use with gas pressure of

7 to 14 inches water column. Modulating gas fired furnace with 5:1

turndown and mid-fire start, with a two-speed ID fan.

B. INSTRUMENTATION: Provide all instrumentation required for complete

control and monitoring of the units in accordance with Section 23 09 00.

Instrumentation to be provided with the unit includes but is not limited to the

following:

1. DPDT air differential pressure switch for fan status

2. Supply air temperature and pressure sensors

3. Dirty Filter Sensor.

C. ROOF CURBS:.

1. See section 23 00 00.

D. SPARE PARTS: The following spare parts shall be provided:

1. One extra set of filters for each unit.

2. One set of fan belts for each unit.

E. MANUFACTURERS: Greenheck Model MSX; Carrier;.

2.03 CONTROLS

A. See Sections 23 09 00 and 23 09 93.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



PART 3 EXECUTION


3.02 INSTALLATION


B. EQUIPMENT MOUNTING: Install equipment the applicable Equipment

Mounting Systems in accordance with the Equipment Mounting Schedule

specified in Section 43 05 13.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Protect the roof from damage during installation. Secure factory touch-up

paint to repair scratches and minor damage to equipment prior to start-up.

Comb evaporator and condenser coils to repair any minor fin damage.

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. Install ducts and

piping adjacent to units to allow service and maintenance.

F. FUEL GAS PIPING: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 40.

Connect to furnace with shutoff valve, drip leg, and flexible hose rated for

exterior installation and natural gas service.

G. Install filters upstream of heating coils prior to fan operation.

3.03 ROOF CURBS

A. ROOF CURBS per Section 23 00 00.

3.04 COATINGS

A. COATING PROCEDURES: Section 23 00 00

3.05 TESTING


END OF SECTION


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 8, 2020 UNITARY HVAC EQUIPMENT


SECTION 23 81 00

UNITARY HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. SCOPE: This Section includes provisions for the materials, installation and

testing of unitary HVAC equipment, including:

1. Split System Heat Pump and Air Conditioning Equipment: 6 to

20 tons.

2. Packaged Outdoor Heat Pump and Air Conditioning Equipment: 5

Tons and Less



B. Section 23 08 00 Commissioning

C. Section 23 09 00 HVAC Instrumentation and Control Performance

D. Section 23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls






of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this

Section shall prevail.









PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

UNITARY HVAC EQUIPMENT JANUARY 8, 2020


Reference Title

ANSI/UL 1025 Electrical Air Heaters

ANSI/ASHRAE 15-2010: Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems

AHRI 210/240 Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump

Equipment

AHRI 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment

AHRI 340/360 Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning and

Heat Pump Equipment

AHRI 410 Standard for Forced Circulation Air-Heating and Air-

Cooling Coils

NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems

NFPA 90B Standard for Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air

Conditioning Systems

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association

UL 1995 Heating and Cooling Equipment

B. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY: Assign unit responsibilityto the unitary HVAC

equipment manufacturer for the equipment and accessories specified in this

Section. The manufacturer is the unit responsibility manufacturer and has unit

responsibility for the equipment specified in this Section. Where external

heating coils are provided, the manufacturer is also the unit responsibility

manufacturer and has unit responsibility for heating coils specified in

Section 23 82 00. Where packaged controls are provided, the manufacturer is

also the unit responsibility manufacturer and has unit responsibility for

packaged controls specified in this Section and Section 23 09 00. Provide a

completed and signed certificate of unit responsibility (Section 23 00 00).



B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Interior surfaces of units to meet erosion and growth resistance

requirements as well as construction requirements for equipment of

ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled

as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. AHRI Certification: Provide AHRI certified and listed units.

4. Energy-Efficient Ratio (EER): Meet the minimum (S)EER

requirement shown on Drawings.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



5. Coefficient of Performance (COP): Meet the minimum COP

requirement shown on Drawings.

6. Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF): Meet the minimum

HSPF requirement shown on Drawings.

7. AHRI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than

135,000 Btu/hr: Rate air-conditioner capacity according to

AHRI 210/240.

8. AHRI Compliance for Units with Capacities 135,000 Btu/hr and

Greater: Rate air-conditioner capacity according to AHRI 340/360.

9. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AHRI 270.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Air conditioner, heat pumps, and coil capacities, electrical characteristics,

special features and accessories shall be as specified in the equipment

schedules shown on the Drawings.

B. PROTECTIVE COATINGS: per Section 23 00 00.

C. ELECTRICAL: 120-volt, 1-phase equipment shall be provided with factory

installed, internally mounted, and UL approved non-fused disconnect switch.

Non-fused switch shall provide unit power shutoff and shall be accessible

from outside the unit and shall provide power off lockout capability.

D. CONTROLS: Provide complete, integrated packaged control systems for

unitary air conditioning equipment. Control systems shall be 24 volt. Provide

power for all control components from nearest electrical panel or as indicated

on the Drawings. Control systems shall include all necessary components,

transformers, accessories, wiring and conduits to provide complete and

automatic systems ready for full time operation.

E. System shall include heating, ventilation, and air conditioning controls to

automatically start and stop air equipment. The system shall provide space

heating and cooling sensing to maintain space temperatures as indicated on

the Drawings, provide control of outside air, return air and bypass duct

motorized dampers in order to utilize economizer cycle cooling effect. The

temperature controls shall automatically cause the system to operate in

cooling mode whenever any zone requires cooling which cannot be

accommodated by the operation economizer mode.

F. See Section 23 09 00 for additional requirements.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



2.02 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT: 6

TO 20 TONS

A. SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS: Heat pump shall be outdoor package,

factory assembled, air-to-air. Unit shall consist of scroll compressor, air-

cooled coil, condenser fan, all factory wiring, piping, controls, and refrigerant

charge shall be R-410A. Unit shall be configured for outdoor roof curb-mount

or outdoor equipment pad installation.

1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and

coated with a pre-painted baked enamel finish. Frame shall be

included with a heavy-gauge roll-formed perimeter base rail with

forklift slots.

2. Condenser fan shall be direct-drive propeller type with forward swept

fan blades and upward discharge, corrosion resistant shaft, and motor

suitable for multi-speed operation. Fan shall be statically and

dynamically balanced. Fan motor shall be totally-enclosed with

permanently lubricated ball bearings, and shall be provided with

internal thermal overload protection.

3. Compressor shall be hermetically sealed scroll type, mounted on

rubber vibration isolators, and covered with sound absorbing blanket.

Motor shall be NEMA rated and provided with internal overload to

protect against over-current and over-temperature. Compressor shall

be equipped with a crankcase heater.

4. Outdoor coil shall consist of seamless copper tubes with mechanically

bonded aluminum fins. Coils shall be provided with a flexible epoxy

polymer coating applied to entire coil surface without material

bridging between fins.

5. Electrical requirements shall be as shown on the schedules. All unit

power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location. Unit shall

include a complete self-contained low voltage control circuit complete

with starters, step down transformers, and other accessories required

for a complete functioning system.

6. Unit shall be equipped with a factory installed and internally mounted

115-volt, ground-fault circuit-interrupter (GFCI) type convenience

outlet. Outlet shall be powered from the main power supply to the

rooftop unit. Provide step-down transformer as required to power

outlet.

7. Manufacturers:

a. Heat Pump Systems: Outdoor heat pump shall be Mitsubishi

model PURY-HP96YNU-A


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



B. SPLIT SYSTEM AIR HANDLING UNITS FOR HEAT PUMP OR AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM: Unit shall be an electronic communicating

constant volume fan coil for operation using R-410A refrigerant, matching the

outdoor split system condensing unit or heat pump. Unit shall consist of

outside air economizer, filter housing, condensate drain, single point power

connection, all factory wiring, piping, and controls.

1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and

coated with a pre-painted baked enamel finish. Cabinet shall be fully

insulated with a minimum of ½-inch fire retardant material. Cabinet

shall include corrosion resistant drain pans with bi-directional sloping

capabilities. Include condensate drain trap. Frame shall be included

with a heavy-gauge roll-formed perimeter base rail with forklift slots.

2. Unit shall be equipped with a direct drive, multi-speed, forward-

curved fan. Fan shall have permanently lubricated bearings and

adjustable belt drives.

3. Coil shall consist of 3 or 4 row seamless copper tubes with

mechanically bonded aluminum fins. Coil shall include factory-

installed thermal expansion valve capable of external adjustment and

bypass line with check valve assembly to allow liquid flow from the

coil to the outdoor unit during heating mode.

4. Unit shall be equipped with a filter frame upstream of the cooling coil,

to take 2-inch cleanable or disposable type commercially available

filters. Disposable filters to be supplied with the unit. Filter access

shall be from either the right or left hand side of the unit.

5. Refrigerant piping between condensing unit or heat pump and air

handling unit shall be as recommended by the equipment

manufacturer.

6. Unit shall be equipped with outside air economizer for providing

outside air as specified on the Drawings. Economizer shall be fully

modulating capable of partial cooling. Outside air dry bulb thermostat

shall be provided for control of the economizer. Economizer damper

motor shall be 120 VAC, spring return and shall be powered by the air

handling unit unless noted otherwise.

7. Return Air Grille: Where required, grille shall be factory-supplied for

field installation on the unit’s return air opening.

8. Unit Subbase: Subbase assembly shall be factory-supplied for field

installation. Subbase shall elevate floor-mounted vertical units to

provide access for correct condensate drain connection.

9. Manufacturers:

a. Mitsubishi

b. LG

c. Daikin


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



2.03 PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND AIR CONDITIONING

EQUIPMENT: 5 TONS AND LESS

A. PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND AIR CONDITIONING

UNITS: Heat pump and air conditioning units shall be outdoor package,

factory assembled, fully self-contained, air-to-air unit for rooftop installation.

Unit shall consist of two-stage scroll compressor, air-cooled coil, condenser

fan, all factory wiring, piping, controls, and refrigerant charge shall be R-

410A. Unit shall be configured for outdoor roof curb-mount or equipment

pad installation. Unit shall include the following features:

1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel with a powder

coated finish and shall be fully insulated. Cabinet shall include a rust

proof base that is externally trapped, integrated sloped drain pan. Unit

shall provide single-panel accessibility to serviceable components for

maintenance.

2. Indoor fan shall be a direct driven, variable speed, double inlet type

with forward curved blades with corrosion resistant finish. Fan shall

be dynamically balanced.

3. Condenser fan shall be direct driven propeller type with aluminum

blades riveted to corrosion resistant steel supports. Fan shall discharge

vertically upward. Fan shall be dynamically balanced and shall

include a totally enclosed motor.

4. Compressor shall be hermetically sealed, two-stage scroll type

mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Compressor shall be equipped

with a crankcase heater.

5. Coils shall consist of seamless copper tubes with mechanically bonded

aluminum fins. Provide coils with corrosion resistant coating.

6. Unit shall be equipped with a refrigerant circuit containing an

adjustable thermostatic expansion valve.

7. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125ºF ambient outdoor

temperature per maximum load criteria of AHRI Standard 210.

8. Unit shall be equipped with indirect natural gas heat. Burners shall be

die-formed aluminized steel, with continuous slot and dual port

construction. Pilot burner shall be constructed of stainless steel. Heat

exchangers shall be of all-welded construction.

9. Unit shall be equipped with two position outside air damper for

100 percent outside air operation with fixed dry bulb enthalpy control.

Damper package shall consist of motorized outside damper,

barometric relief damper, bird screen, and rain hood.

10. Unit shall be equipped with a filter frame upstream of the cooling coil,

to take 2-inch cleanable or disposable type commercially available

filters. Disposable filters to be supplied with the unit. Filter access

shall be from either the right- or left-hand side of the unit.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



11. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location. Unit

shall include a complete self-contained low voltage control circuit

complete with starters, step down transformers, and other accessories

required for a complete functioning system.

12. Controls: Provide safeties and controls for the following:

a. Compressor overload

b. Overload

c. Low pressure

d. High pressure

e. Loss of charge

f. Coil freeze protection.

13. Manufacturers:

a. Carrier

b. Trane

c. York

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. EQUIPMENT MOUNTING:

1. PROCEDURES: Section 23 00 0046 05 29.

2. Install equipment the applicable Equipment Mounting Systems in

accordance with the Equipment Mounting Schedule specified in

Section 23 00 00

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Roof curbs to be mounted level on roof in accordance to NRCA manuals and

details. Secure to structure per engineered/sealed seismic installation details.

E. Provide external vibration isolation or isolation curb to prevent transmission

of unit-borne sound and vibration to building structure. Provide flexible

connection for electrical power and hot water piping.

F. Seal openings between curb, roof opening, ducts, electrical conduits, piping,

and building interior.

G. Protect the roof from damage during installation. Secure factory touch-up

paint to repair scratches and minor damage to equipment prior to start-up.

Comb evaporator and condenser coils to repair any minor fin damage.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



H. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. Install ducts and

piping adjacent to units to allow service and maintenance.

I. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make

final duct connections with flexible connectors per Section 23 30 00.

J. HOT WATER PIPING: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23.

Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancing valve and

union or flange at each connection.

K. Install filters upstream of heating coils prior to operation.

3.02 COATINGS

A. COATING PROCEDURES: Section 09 90 00.

B. PRIMER COATING: Shop apply in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

C. FINISH COATING: Field apply in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

3.03 TESTING


END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTSJANUARY 2020 26 05 02 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 26 05 02BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Requirements specified within this section apply to Division 26, Electrical.Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individualsections.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): National ElectricalInstallation Standards.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).b. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National ElectricalCode (NEC).


A. Provide anchorage and bracing design drawings, calculations, and relatedinformation where required under Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

B. Provide seismic certification per requirements of Section 01 45 33, SpecialInspection, Observation, and Testing, where required in that section forelectrical equipment listed.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Provide manufacturers’ data for nameplates, signs, and labels.2. Anchorage and bracing drawings and catalog information, as required by

Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads in Section 01 61 00,Common Product Requirements.


BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PW\DEN003\70833526 05 02 - 2 JANUARY 2020


B. Informational Submittals: Anchorage and bracing calculations, as required bySection 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads in Section 01 61 00,Common Product Requirements.


A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed bya nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable tothe AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.

B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards publishedby UL shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listingmark or label.

C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, andGroup of hazardous area indicated.

D. Provide system commissioning per Section 26 08 00, Commissioning ofElectrical Systems.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. See Area Classification and Material Selection Table in the general sheet onDrawings for area classifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment arerequired, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts ofmaterials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer.

B. Material and equipment installed in heated and ventilated areas shall be capableof continuous operation at their specified ratings within an ambienttemperature range of 40 degrees F to 104 degrees F.

C. Materials and equipment installed outdoors shall be capable of continuousoperation at their specified rating within the ambient temperature range statedin Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

D. Equip panels installed outdoors in direct sun with sun shields.



2.02 EQUIPMENT FINISH

A. Manufacturer’s standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated.If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance withSection 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

2.03 NAMEPLATES

A. Material: Laminated plastic.

B. Attachment Screws: Stainless steel.

C. Color: White, engraved to a black core.

D. Letter Height:

1. Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: 1/8 inch.2. Other Electrical Equipment: 3/8 inch.

2.04 SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Sign size, lettering, and color shall be in accordance with NEMA Z535.4.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, andraceway, unless specifically dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible foractual location of equipment and devices and for proper routing and support ofraceways, subject to approval of Engineer.

B. Check approximate locations of light fixtures, switches, electrical outlets,equipment, and other electrical system components shown on Drawings forconflicts with openings, structural members, and components of other systemsand equipment having fixed locations. In the event of conflicts, notify Engineerin writing.

C. Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unlessotherwise specified.

D. Keep openings in boxes and equipment closed during construction.




E. Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural memberor building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully performcutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings,paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage ofconduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following suchwork, restore surfaces to original condition.

3.02 ANCHORING, BRACING, AND MOUNTING

A. Equipment anchoring and mounting shall be in accordance with manufacturer’srequirements for Project design criteria provided in Section 01 61 00, CommonProduct Requirements, to meet the requirements of Section 01 88 15,Anchorage and Bracing.

3.03 COMBINING CIRCUITS INTO COMMON RACEWAY

A. Circuits on Drawings indicate functional wiring requirements for power andcontrol circuits. Circuits may be combined into common raceways inaccordance with the following requirements:

1. Analog control circuits from devices in same general area to samedestination.a. No power or ac discrete control circuits shall be combined in same

conduit with analog circuits.b. No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC

control circuits, fire alarm circuits, paging system circuits shall becombined with power or Class 1 circuits.

c. Analog circuits shall be continuous from source to destination. Donot add TJB, splice, or combine into a multi-pair cable withoutauthorization of Engineer.

d. Raceways shall be sized per General Circuit and RacewaySchedule and do not exceed 40 percent fill.

e. Changes shall be documented on record drawings.2. Discrete control circuits from devices in the same general area to the

same destination.a. No analog control circuits shall be combined in same conduit with

discrete circuits.b. No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC

control circuits, fire alarm circuits, and paging system circuits shallbe combined with power or Class 1 circuits.

c. Raceways shall be sized per the General Circuit and RacewaySchedule and do not exceed 40 percent fill.

d. Changes shall be documented on record drawings.



3. Power circuits from loads in same general area to same source location,such as panelboard, switchboard, or low voltage motor control center.a. Lighting Circuits: Combine no more than three circuits to a single

raceway. Contractor shall be responsible for increasing conduit andconductor size if derating is required by NEC.

b. Receptacle Circuits, 120 Volt Only: Combine no more than threecircuits to a single raceway. Provide a separate neutral conductorfor each circuit. Contractor shall be responsible for increasingconduit and conductor size if derating is required by NEC.

c. All Other Power Circuits: Do not combine power circuits withoutauthorization of Engineer.

3.04 NAMEPLATES, SIGNS, AND LABELS

A. Arc Flash Protection Hazard Signs:

1. Field mark new drives, motor control centers, panelboards, starterenclosures, and disconnects to warn qualified persons of potential arc-flash hazards. Locate marking so to be clearly visible to persons beforeworking on energized equipment. See 26 08 00, ElectricalCommissioning, for application.

2. Use arc flash hazard boundary, energy level, PPE level and description,shock hazard, bolted fault current, and equipment name from studyrequired in Section 26 05 70, Electrical Systems Analysis, as basis forwarning signs.

B. Available Fault Current Signs:

1. Field mark equipment to indicate the maximum available fault current atthe equipment. Marking shall include the following information:a. Equipment name or identification.b. Available fault current at the equipment.c. Date the fault current calculations were performed.

2. Use bolted fault current and equipment name from study required inSection 26 05 70, Electrical Systems Analysis.

3. Where existing electrical systems are modified, completely removeexisting fault current labels if present, and install new markings inaccordance with the above requirements.

C. Multiple Power Supply Sign: Install permanent plaque or directory at eachequipment location denoting other services, feeders, and branch circuitssupplying the enclosure, and the area served by each.




D. Equipment Nameplates:

1. Provide a nameplate to label electrical equipment including motorcontrol centers, panelboards, motor starters, transformers, terminaljunction boxes, disconnect switches, switches and control stations.

2. Motor control center, transformer, and terminal junction box nameplatesshall include equipment designation.

3. Disconnect switch, starter, and control station nameplates shall includename and number of equipment powered or controlled by that device.

4. Panelboard nameplates shall include equipment designation, servicevoltage, and phases.

3.05 LOAD BALANCE

A. Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads anddistribution equipment.

B. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards,panelboards, motor control centers, and other equipment where balancing isrequired.

C. When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads,maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory thatlists final circuit arrangement.

3.06 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices andequipment by removing debris and vacuuming.

B. Touchup Paint:

1. Touchup scratches, scrapes and chips on exterior and interior surfaces ofdevices and equipment with finish matching type, color, and consistencyand type of surface of original finish.

2. If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entireequipment in a manner that provides a finish equal to or better thanfactory finish, that meets requirements of Specification, and is acceptableto Engineer.

3.07 PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATION

A. Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effectsof moisture on insulation and contact surfaces.



B. When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at Contractor’sconvenience in areas where subject to dampness, moisture, dirt or otheradverse atmosphere until completion of construction, ensure adequateprotection from these atmospheres is provided and acceptable to Engineer.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALSJANUARY 2020 AND METHODS©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 26 05 04 - 1

SECTION 26 05 04BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and

Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloyand High-Strength Low Alloy Formability.

b. E814, Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA).3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 18,

Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors.4. International Society of Automation (ISA): RP12.06.01, Wiring

Practices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation–Part 1:Intrinsic Safety.

5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum).b. C12.1, Code for Electricity Metering.c. C12.6, Phase-Shifting Devices Used in Metering, Marking and

Arrangement of Terminals.d. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors,

and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts.e. ICS 5, Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot

Devices.f. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches

(600 Volts Maximum).6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical

Code (NEC).7. UL:

a. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.b. 248, Standard for Low Voltage Fuses.c. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with

Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors.d. 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case

Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.


BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW\DEN003\708335AND METHODS JANUARY 202026 05 04 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

f. 943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.g. 1059, Standard for Terminal Blocks.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Provide manufacturers’ data for the following:a. Control devices.b. Control relays.c. Circuit breakers.d. Fused switches.e. Nonfused switches.f. Magnetic contactors.g. Intrinsic safety barriers.h. Enclosures: Include enclosure data for products having

enclosures.2. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by


B. Informational Submittals: Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations asrequired by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.


A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts andspecial tools:

1. Fuses, 0 Volt to 600 Volts: Six of each type and each current ratinginstalled.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMAL MAGNETIC, LOWVOLTAGE

A. General:

1. Type: Molded case.2. Trip Ratings: 15 amps to 800 amps.3. Voltage Ratings: 120, 240, 277, 480, and 600V ac.4. Suitable for mounting and operating in any position.5. UL 489.



B. Operating Mechanism:

1. Overcenter, trip-free, toggle type handle.2. Quick-make, quick-break action.3. Locking provisions for padlocking breaker in OPEN position.4. ON/OFF and TRIPPED indicating positions of operating handle.5. Operating handle to assume a CENTER position when tripped.

C. Trip Mechanism:

1. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.2. Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X

to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps.3. Two and three pole, common trip.4. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole.5. Test button on cover.6. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.7. Do not provide single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties where

multi-pole circuit breakers are shown.

D. Short Circuit Interrupting Ratings: Equal to, or greater than, available faultcurrent or interrupting rating shown.

E. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker asspecified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 5-mA groundfault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection ofpersonnel).

1. Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker.2. Push-to-test button.

F. Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter (EGFI): Where indicated, equip breakerspecified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 30-mA groundfault (UL-listed for equipment ground fault protection).

G. Magnetic Only Type Breakers: Where shown; instantaneous trip adjustmentwhich simultaneously sets magnetic trip level of each individual polecontinuously through a 3X to 10X trip range.

H. Accessories: Shunt trip, auxiliary switches, handle lock ON devices,mechanical interlocks, key interlocks, unit mounting bases, double lugs asshown or otherwise required. Shunt trip operators shall be continuous dutyrated or have coil-clearing contacts.



I. Connections:

1. Supply (line side) at either end.2. Mechanical wire lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown.3. Lugs removable/replaceable for breaker frames greater than

100 amperes.4. Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating breaker or

conductor ampacity.5. Use bolted bus connections, except where bolt-on is not compatible with

existing breaker provisions.

J. Enclosures for Independent Mounting:

1. See Article Enclosures.2. Service Entrance Use: Breakers in required enclosure and required

accessories shall be UL 489 listed.3. Interlock: Enclosure and switch shall interlock to prevent opening cover

with switch in the ON position. Provide bypass feature for use byqualified personnel.

2.02 FUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE

A. UL 98 listed for use and location of installation.

B. NEMA KS 1.

C. Short Circuit Rating: 200,000 amps rms symmetrical with Class R, Class J, orClass L fuses installed.

D. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type withexternal markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.

E. Connections:

1. Mechanical lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown.2. Lugs removable/replaceable.3. Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors at NEC 75 degrees C

ampacity.

F. Fuse Provisions:

1. 30-amp to 600-amp rated shall incorporate rejection feature to reject allfuses except Class R.

2. 601-amp rated and greater shall accept Class L fuses, unless otherwiseshown.



G. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

H. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ONposition. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

2.03 NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE

A. NEMA KS 1.

B. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type withexternal markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.

C. Lugs: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.

D. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

E. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ONposition. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

2.04 FUSE, 250-VOLT AND 600-VOLT

A. Power Distribution, General:

1. Current-limiting, with 200,000 ampere rms interrupting rating.2. Provide to fit mountings specified with switches.3. UL 248.

B. Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 1 Amp to 600 Amps:

1. Class: RK-1.2. Type: Dual element, with time delay.3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Bussmann; Types LPS-RK (600 volts) and LPN-RK (250 volts).b. Littelfuse; Types LLS-RK (600 volts) and LLN-RK (250 volts).

C. Cable Limiters:

1. 600V or less; crimp to copper cable, bolt to bus or terminal pad.2. Manufacturer and Product: Bussmann; K Series.

D. Ferrule:

1. 600V or less, rated for applied voltage, small dimension.2. Ampere Ratings: 1/10 amp to 30 amps.3. Dual-element time-delay, time-delay, or nontime-delay as required.



4. Provide with blocks or holders as indicated and suitable for location anduse.

5. Manufacturers:a. Bussmann.b. Littlefuse, Inc.

2.05 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH

A. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5Designation A600.

B. Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard.

C. Indicating Light: Push-to-test.

D. Pushbutton Color:

1. ON or START: Black.2. OFF or STOP: Red.

E. Pushbutton and selector switch lockable in OFF position where indicated.

F. Legend Plate:

1. Material: Aluminum.2. Engraving: Enamel filled in high contrasting color.3. Text Arrangement: 11-character/spaces on one line, 14-character/spaces

on each of two lines, as required, indicating specific function.4. Letter Height: 7/64 inch.


1. Heavy-Duty, Oil-Tight Type:a. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P.b. Square D Co.; Type T.c. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type 10250T.

2. Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type:a. Square D Co.; Type SK.b. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P.c. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type E34.d. Crouse-Hinds; Type NCS.



2.06 TERMINAL BLOCK, 600 VOLTS

A. UL 486E and UL 1059.

B. Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes.

C. Capable of termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment,panels, or boxes.

D. Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providingdirect contact with wire between compression screw and yoke.

E. Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivitymetal.

F. Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal.

G. Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection.

H. Terminals:

1. Capable of wire connections without special preparation other thanstripping.

2. Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space.3. Individual, rail mounted.

I. Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field-marked tags.

J. Manufacturers:

1. Weidmuller, Inc.2. Ideal.3. Electrovert USA Corp.

2.07 MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAY

A. Industrial control with field convertible contacts rated 10 amps continuous,7,200VA make, 720VA break.

B. NEMA ICS 2, Designation: A600 (600 volts).

C. Time Delay Relay Attachment:

1. Pneumatic type, timer adjustable as shown.2. Field convertible from ON delay to OFF delay and vice versa.



D. Latching Attachment: Mechanical latch, having unlatching coil and coilclearing contacts.


1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; D26 Type M.2. General Electric Co.; Type CR120A.3. Square D; Type X.

2.08 TIME DELAY RELAY

A. Industrial relay with contacts rated 5 amps continuous, 3,600VA make,360VA break.

B. NEMA ICS 2 Designation: B150 (150 volts).

C. Solid-state electronic, field convertible ON/OFF delay.

D. One normally open and one normally closed contact (minimum).

E. Repeat accuracy plus or minus 2 percent.

F. Timer adjustment from 1 second to 60 seconds, unless otherwise indicated onDrawings.


1. Square D Co.; Type XO.2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type D26MR.3. General Electric Co.; Type CR120.

2.09 RESET TIMER

A. Drive: Synchronous motor, solenoid-operated clutch.

B. Mounting: Semiflush panel.

C. Contacts: 10 amps, 120 volts.

D. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Eagle Signal Controls; Bulletin 125.2. Automatic Timing and Controls; Bulletin 305.



2.10 MAGNETIC CONTACTOR

A. UL listed.

B. Electrically operated, electrically held.

C. Main Contacts:

1. Power driven in one direction with mechanical spring dropout.2. Silver alloy with wiping action and arc quenchers.3. Continuous-duty, rated 20 amperes or as shown.4. Poles: Two.

D. Control: Two-wire.

E. Auxiliary Contacts: One normally open and one normally closed, rated7200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, A600 per NEMA ICS 5.

F. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.


1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Class A201.2. General Electric Co.; CR 353.3. Square D Co.; Class 8910.

2.11 MAGNETIC LIGHTING CONTACTOR

A. Comply with NEMA ICS 2; provide UL 508 listing.

B. Electrically operated by dual-acting, single coil mechanism.

C. Inherently interlocked and mechanically held in both OPEN and CLOSEDposition.

D. Main Contacts:

1. Double-break, continuous-duty, rated 20 amperes, 600 volts, withstandrating of 14,000 amps rms symmetrical at 480 volts.

2. Marked for electric discharge lamps, tungsten, and general purposeloads.

3. Position not dependent on gravity, hooks, latches, or semipermanentmagnets.

4. Capable of operating in any position.5. Visual indication for each contact.



E. Auxiliary contact relay for two-wire control.

F. Fully rated neutral terminal.

G. Provision for remote pilot lamp with use of auxiliary contacts.

H. Clamp type, self-rising terminal plates for solderless connections.

I. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

J. Manufacturers and Products:

1. ASCO.2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Class A202.3. General Electric Co.; Class 360 (electrically held).4. Square D; Class 8903, Type L (electrically held).

2.12 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS

A. Carbon Steel Framing Channel:

1. Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge minimum, ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 33.

2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

B. Paint Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with electro-deposited rust inhibiting acrylic or epoxy paint.

C. PVC-Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with 40-milpolyvinyl chloride coating.

D. Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, Type 316 stainless steel, 12-gaugeminimum.

E. Extruded Aluminum Framing Channel:

1. Material: Extruded from Type 6063-T6 aluminum alloy.2. Fittings fabricated from Alloy 5052-H32.

F. Nonmetallic Framing Channel:

1. Material: Fire retardant, fiber reinforced vinyl ester resin.2. Channel fitting of same material as channel.3. Nuts and bolts of long glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.



G. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.2. Unistrut Corp.3. Aickinstrut.

2.13 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIER

A. Provides a safe energy level for exposed wiring in a Class I, Division 1 orDivision 2 hazardous area when circuit is connected to power source innonhazardous area.

B. Rating: Power source shall be rated 24V dc, nominal, with not more than250 volts available under fault conditions.

C. Contact Rating: 5 amps, 250V ac.

D. Mounting: Rail or surface.


1. MTL, Inc.; Series 2000 or Series 3000.2. R. Stahl, Inc.

2.14 MAJOR EQUIPMENT MATTING

A. Provide matting having a breakdown of 20 kV minimum.

B. Manufacturer: U.S. Mat and Rubber Company.

2.15 ENCLOSURES

A. Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely paintedusing an electrodeposition process so interior and exterior surfaces as well asbolted structural joints have a complete finish coat on and between them.

B. Color: Manufacturer’s standard color (gray) baked-on enamel, unlessotherwise shown.

C. Barriers: Provide metal barriers within enclosures to separate wiring ofdifferent systems and voltage.

D. Enclosure Selections: See Area Classification and Material Selection Table inthe General sheets on Drawings.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.02 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH

A. Install heavy-duty, oil-tight type in nonhazardous, indoor, dry locations,including motor control centers, control panels, and individual stations, unlessotherwise shown.

B. Install heavy-duty, watertight and corrosion-resistant type in nonhazardous,outdoor, or normally wet areas, unless otherwise shown.

3.03 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL

A. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment,raceway, and cable tray systems.

B. Channel Type:

1. See Area Classification and Material Selection Table for material typesfor a given area classification.

2. Aluminum Railings: Devices mounted on aluminum railing shall usealuminum framing channel.

C. Paint cut ends prior to installation with the following:

1. Carbon Steel Channel: Zinc-rich primer.2. Painted Channel: Rust-inhibiting epoxy or acrylic paint.3. Nonmetallic Channel: Epoxy resin sealer.4. PVC-Coated Channel: PVC patch.

3.04 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS

A. Install in compliance with ISA RP12.06.01.

B. Arrange conductors such that wiring from hazardous areas cannot short towiring from nonhazardous area.

C. Stencil “INTRINSICALLY SAFE CIRCUIT” on all boxes enclosing barriers.



3.05 MAJOR EQUIPMENT MATTING

A. Install 36-inch width at motor control centers and panelboards.

B. Matting shall run full length of all sides of equipment that have operatorcontrols or afford access to devices.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 CONDUCTORSJANUARY 2020 26 05 05 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 26 05 05CONDUCTORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM):a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.b. B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.c. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper

Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.d. B496, Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric-

Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors.2. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association, Inc. (ICEA):

a. S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification.b. S-73-532, Standard for Control Thermocouple Extensions and

Instrumentation Cables.c. T-29-520, Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests with

Theoretical Heat Input of 210,000 Btu/hour.3. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA):

a. CC 1, Electric Power Connectors for Substations.b. WC 57, Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and

Instrumentation Cables.c. WC 70, Standard for Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for

the Distribution of Electrical Energy.4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).b. 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of

Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.5. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): TIA-568-C,

Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.6. UL:

a. 13, Standard for Safety for Power-Limited Circuit Cables.b. 44, Standard for Safety for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and

Cables.c. 62, Standard for Safety for Flexible Cord and Cables.d. 486A-486B, Standard for Safety for Wire Connectors.e. 486C, Standard for Safety for Splicing Wire Connectors.


CONDUCTORS PW\DEN003\70833526 05 05 - 2 JANUARY 2020


f. 510, Standard for Safety for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene,and Rubber Insulating Tape.

g. 1569, Standard for Safety for Metal-Clad Cables.h. 1581, Standard for Safety for Reference Standard for Electrical

Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data:a. Wire and cable.b. Wire and cable accessories.

B. Informational Submittals: Factory Test Report for conductors 600 volts andbelow.


A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):

1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by theAHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationallyrecognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to theAHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standardspublished by UL shall conform to those standards and shall have anapplied UL listing mark.

B. Fiber Installer Qualifications:

1. Individuals with at least 3 years of experience with projects utilizingfiber optic cable in compliance with TIA 568-C.3.

2. Certified by fiber cable manufacturer.3. Lead cabling installation personnel shall have BICSI Installer 2 or

Technician certification.

C. Fiber Tester Qualifications: Individuals with at least 3 years of experiencewith projects utilizing fiber optic cable in compliance with TIA 568-C.3.

1. Technician: Successfully attended training program, which includestesting with an OLTS and an OTDR and have obtained a certificate asproof thereof. Certificate may have been issued by the followingorganizations or an equivalent organization:a. Manufacturer of fiber optic cable and fiber optic connectors.



b. Manufacturer of test equipment used for field certification.c. Other independent training organizations acceptable to Owner.d. Lead cabling installation personnel shall have BICSI Installer 2 or

Technician certification.

D. Fiber Optic System: Provide connectors/coupling, splicing enclosures,mounting hardware, and miscellaneous accessories for fibers by samemanufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70.

B. Conductor Type:

1. 120-Volt and 277-Volt Lighting, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper.2. 120-Volt Receptacle Circuits, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper.3. All Other Circuits: Stranded copper.4. Where copper conductors 1/0 AWG or larger are shown, aluminum

conductors of equivalent current-carrying capacity in conduit sizesrequired by NFPA 70 may be substituted.

C. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2, except for sizes No. 6 and larger, withXHHW-2 insulation.

D. Direct Burial and Aerial Conductors and Cables:

1. Type USE/RHH/RHW insulation, UL 854 listed, orType RHW-2/USE-2.

2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements ofNEMA WC 70.

E. Flexible Cords and Cables:

1. Type SOW-A/50 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation inaccordance with UL 62.

2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements ofNEMA WC 70.

F. Aluminum Conductors: Compact stranding, aluminum alloy with XHHW-2insulation.




2.02 600-VOLT RATED CABLE

A. General:

1. Type TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical TrayFlame Test at 70,000 Btu per hour, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725.

2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer’s name, maximumworking voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and ULlisting mark.

3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit.4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations,

75 degrees C wet locations.5. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant.

B. Type 3, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair,designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data logapplications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.

1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness.2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic

polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.3. Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD.4. Conductors:

a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric,meeting requirements of ASTM B8.

b. 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire.c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.d. Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon.e. Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red.

5. Manufacturers:a. Okonite Co.b. Alpha Wire Corp.c. Belden.

C. Type 4, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Singletriad, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data logapplications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.

1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal.2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic

polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.3. Dimension: 0.32-inch nominal OD.



4. Conductors:a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric,

meeting requirements of ASTM B8.b. 20 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire.c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.d. Jacket: 4-mil nylon.e. Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and blue.

5. Manufacturers:a. Okonite Co.b. Alpha Wire Corp.c. Belden.

D. Type 8, Multiconductor Adjustable Frequency Drive Power Cable:

1. Conductors:a. Class B, stranded coated copper.b. Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL

Type XHHW-2.c. Grounding Conductors: Insulated stranded copper.

2. Sheath:a. UL 1277 Type TC, 90 degrees C.b. Continuous shield, A1/polyester foil, drain wires, overall copper

braid.3. Outer Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) per UL 1569.4. Cable Sizes:

ConductorSize

MinimumGround

Wire Size(AWG)

No. ofInsulated

Conductors

Max.Outside

Diameter(Inches)

MinimumJacket

Thickness(Mils)

12 AWG 12 4 0.655 50

10 AWG 10 4 0.769 50

8 AWG 8 4 0.940 50

6 AWG 6 4 1.038 50

4 AWG 4 4 1.180 50

2 AWG 2 4 1.351 50

5. Manufacturers and Products:a. Alpha Wire; Series V.b. Belden; Series 29500.c. LAPP USA; OLFLEX VFD Slim.




2.03 300-VOLT RATED CABLE

A. General:

1. Type PLTC, meeting requirements of UL 13 and NFPA 70, Article 725.2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer’s name, maximum

working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and ULlisting mark.

3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit.4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 105 degrees C.5. Passes Vertical Tray Flame Test.6. Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant.

B. Type 24, Twisted Pair Fire Alarm Cable, Shielded: Power limited fireprotective signaling circuit cable meeting requirements of NFPA 70,Article 760.

1. Cable: Pass NFPA 262, 70,000 Btu flame test and listed by OregonState Fire Marshall.

2. Outer Jacket: Red in color, identified along its entire length as fireprotective signaling circuit cable.

3. Conductors:a. Solid, tinned, or bare copper, shielded, with stranded tinned

copper drain wire.b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC.c. Shield: Aluminum/mylar spiral wound along entire length.

4. Cable Sizes:

Wire Size

Maximum OutsideDiameter(Inches)

Nominal JacketThickness(Inches)

12 0.36 0.042

14 0.32 0.042

16 0.26 0.037

18 0.23 0.037

5. Manufacturers:a. West Penn Wire.b. Coleman Cable, Inc.



2.04 SPECIAL CABLES

A. Type 30, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Telephone and Data Cable, 300V:

1. Category 6 UTP, UL listed, and third party verified to comply withTIA/EIA 568-C Category 6 requirements.

2. Suitable for high speed network applications including gigabit ethernetand video. Cable shall be interoperable with other standards compliantproducts and shall be backward compatible with Category 5 andCategory 5e.

3. Provide four each individually twisted pair, 23 AWG conductors, withFEP insulation and blue PVC jacket.

4. NFPA 70 Plenum (CMP) rated; comply with flammability plenumrequirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 262.

5. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1-inch minimum at a temperatureof minus 20 degrees C maximum without jacket or insulation cracking.

6. Manufacturer and Product: Belden; 7852A.

B. Fiber Optic Cable:

1. Multimode, 50/125 and 62.5/125-micron, graded-index for use inbackbone and horizontal distribution subsystems, meets or exceeds therequirements of TIA 568-C.3, including the following specifications:a. Maximum Mean Fiber Loss:

1) 3.5 dB per km at 850 nm.2) 1.5 dB per km at 1,300 nm.

b. Minimum OFL Bandwidth:1) OM3-1500 MHz•km minimum at 850 nm; TIA 492AAAC.2) 500 MHz•km minimum at 1,300 nm.

c. Distance Capacity per IEEE 802.3:1) 100Mbit Ethernet: OM3 300 m at 850 nm and 2,000 m at

1,310 nm.

2.05 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE orTHHN/THWN, insulation.

B. Direct Buried: Bare stranded copper.




2.06 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

A. Tape:

1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, ScotchBrand 33+, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements ofUL 510.

2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic,Scotch Brand 88.

3. Arc and Fireproofing:a. 30-mil, elastomer.b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) 3M; Scotch Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass clothtapebinder.

2) Plymouth; 53 Plyarc, with 77 Plyglas glass cloth tapebinder.

B. Identification Devices:

1. Sleeve:a. Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed

black markings.b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Raychem; Type D-SCE or ZH-SCE.2) Brady, Type 3PS.

2. Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stampedon plate.

3. Tie-On Cable Marker Tags:a. Chemical-resistant white tag.b. Size: 1/2 inch by 2 inches.c. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type CM-SCE.

4. Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat-shrink sleeve, 2-inchminimum.

C. Connectors and Terminations:

1. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors:a. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.2) Burndy; Insulug.3) ILSCO.

2. Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator:a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70,

75 degrees C ampacity.b. Seamless.



c. Manufacturers and Products:1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.2) Burndy; Insulink.3) ILSCO; ILSCONS.

3. Self-Insulated, Freespring Wire Connector (Wire Nuts):a. UL 486C.b. Plated steel, square wire springs.c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts.2) Ideal; Twister.

4. Self-Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector:a. Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel.b. Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel.c. Manufacturers:

1) 3M Co.2) Thomas & Betts.3) Marrette.

5. Fiber Optics Connectors:a. Comply with TIA/EIA 604 2, TIA/EIA 604 3, TIA/EIA 604 12,

and TIA 568 C.3.b. ST connectors.c. Pull Strength: 0.2 N minimum.d. Durability: Sustain minimum 500 mating cycles without violating

other requirements.1) Ferrules: Free-floating low loss ceramic.2) Polarizing key on duplex connector systems.

e. Attenuation:1) In accordance with TIA 568 C.3.2) Maximum of 0.75 dB per connector pair.

f. Manufacturer: AMP.

D. Cable Lugs:

1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1.2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal.3. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators:

a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70,75 degrees C ampacity.

b. Manufacturers and Products:1) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed.2) Burndy; Hydent.3) ILSCO.




4. Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators:a. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts; Locktite.2) Burndy; Quiklug.3) ILSCO.

E. Cable Ties:

1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable.2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP.

F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation:

1. Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin.2. Single wall for insulation and strain relief.3. Dual wall, adhesive sealant lined, for sealing and corrosion resistance.4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON.b. Raychem; RNF-100 and ES-2000.

G. Data Cable Accessories: Terminators, connectors, and junctions necessary fora complete Ethernet System.

2.07 PULLING COMPOUND

A. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-basedlubricant; UL listed.

B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead-covered wire and cable.

C. Approved for intended use by cable manufacturer.

D. Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, andfiberglass raceways.

E. Manufacturers:

1. Ideal Co.2. Polywater, Inc.3. Cable Grip Co.

2.08 WARNING TAPE

A. As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.




A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations.

B. Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unlessnoted otherwise.

C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum pullingtensions and minimum bending radii.

D. Terminate conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A-486B forcopper conductors and aluminum conductors.

F. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-center spacing as required by equipment terminals.

G. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults,cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by someother means, bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposedlength with cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on center.

H. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pullingwires or cables.

I. Concrete-Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors,pull through each raceway a mandrel approximately 1/4 inch smaller thanraceway inside diameter.

3.02 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below:

1. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at eachend, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlappingturns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide.

2. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.




3. Colors:

System Conductor Color

All Systems EquipmentGrounding

Green

240/120 Volts,Single-Phase, Three-Wire

Grounded NeutralOne Hot Leg

Other Hot Leg

WhiteBlackRed

208Y/120 Volts,Three-Phase, Four-Wire

Grounded NeutralPhase APhase BPhase C

WhiteBlackRedBlue

240/120 Volts, Three-Phase, Four-Wire,Delta, Center Tap,Ground on Single-Phase

Grounded NeutralPhase A

High (wild) LegPhase C

WhiteBlack

OrangeBlue

480Y/277 Volts,Three-Phase, Four-Wire

Grounded NeutralPhase APhase BPhase C

WhiteBrownOrangeYellow

Note: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation.

4. Tracer: Outer covering of white with identifiable colored strip, otherthan green, in accordance with NFPA 70.

3.03 FIBER OPTIC CABLE

A. Specified fiber counts, routing, origination, and terminating points areindicated on Drawings.

B. Installation by manufacturer’s certified installer.

C. Install cables in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

D. Install cable directly from shipping reels. Ensure that cable is:

1. Not dented, nicked, or kinked.2. Not subjected to pull stress greater than manufacturer’s specification.3. Not bent to a radius below manufacturer’s minimum bend radius.



4. Not subjected to treatment that may damage fiber strands duringinstallation.

E. Cables per Conduit or Innerduct: In accordance with NFPA 70 NEC conduitfill limitations.

F. If calculation indicates cable will attenuate signals more than 8 dB, reroutemay be allowed if approved by Engineer.

G. Connector: Insertion loss on multimode connections exceeding 0.5 dB and0.4 dB on single-mode connections not permitted.

H. Identification:

1. Identify cable on both ends, in access holes, and pull points.2. In accordance with TIA 606.

I. Arrange cable, equipment, and hardware to provide neat appearance andaccessibility for servicing.

J. Access Holes:

1. Provide supports for cables in access and handholes.2. While maintaining minimum bend radius, lace cables neatly to supports

to keep them out of way of personnel.

3.04 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify power, instrumentation, and control conductor circuits at eachtermination, and in accessible locations such as manholes, handholes, panels,switchboards, motor control centers, disconnects, pull boxes, and terminalboxes.

B. Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit.

C. Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than onecircuit, add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to makeit unique.

D. Method:

1. Conductors 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bondmarkers.

2. Cables and Conductors 2 AWG and Larger:a. Identify with marker plates or tie-on cable marker tags.b. Attach with nylon tie cord.




3. Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted.

3.05 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

A. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring inlighting and receptacle circuits.

B. Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distributionconductors 6 AWG and larger, unless specifically indicated or approved byEngineer.

C. Connections and Terminations:

1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. Wire nuts are not allowed onstranded conductors.

2. Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators forinstrumentation and control, circuit conductors.

3. Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connectionof power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller.

4. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators forinstrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors 4 AWG through2/0 AWG.

5. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators forpower circuit conductors 3/0 AWG and larger.

6. Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuitconductors 10 AWG and larger.

7. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressureconnection.

8. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connectormanufacturer.

9. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used.10. Where aluminum conductors are provided, apply oxide-inhibiting

compound at joints and terminations.11. Compression Lugs:

a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shallprovide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release untilcrimp is complete.

b. Make connections of copper pigtail to aluminum conductor bymeans of compression type barrel connector and insulate withtape.

c. Install connectors designed for aluminum conductors utilizingcompression barrel termination of conductor and terminating indual rated lug.

d. Do not use plier type crimpers.



D. Do not use soldered mechanical joints.

E. Splices and Terminations:

1. No splices of analog or data cables allowed.2. Insulate uninsulated connections.3. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape or single wall heat

shrink.4. Outdoors, Dry Locations: Use flame retardant, cold- and weather-

resistant tape or single wall heat shrink.5. Below Grade and Wet or Damp Locations: Use dual wall heat shrink.

F. Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps.

G. Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers:

1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure.2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal,

remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective stripsof insulating material to protect the conductors.

H. Control and Instrumentation Wiring:

1. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control andinstrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated,locking-fork compression lugs.

2. Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and inaccordance with terminal manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes usingterminal strips.

4. Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be madeunder Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for ProcessSystems, leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled connections.

5. Cable Protection:a. Under Infinite Access Floors: May install without bundling.b. All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex

conduit under floor or grouped into bundles at least 1/2 inch indiameter.

c. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables.d. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over

shield.

I. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, installminimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feetin other assemblies.




3.06 UNDERGROUND DIRECT BURIAL CABLE

A. Install in trench as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

B. Warning Tape: Install approximately 3 inches above cable, aligned parallel to,and within 12 inches of centerline of the run.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 GROUNDING AND BONDINGJANUARY 2020 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C2, NationalElectrical Safety Code (NESC).

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National ElectricalCode. (NEC).

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:a. Product data for the following:

1) Mechanical connectors.2) Compression connectors.



1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National ElectricalCode (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, provide material andequipment labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratoryor other organization acceptable to the AHJ to provide a basis forapproval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standardspublished by UL:a. Confirm conformance with UL standards.b. Supply with an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUND ROD

A. Material: Copper.

B. Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch.


GROUNDING AND BONDING PW\DEN003\708335FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 202026 05 26 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

C. Length: 8 feet.

2.02 GROUND CONDUCTORS

A. As specified in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

2.03 CONNECTORS

A. Compression Type:

1. Compress-deforming type; wrought copper extrusion material.2. Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller.3. Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4 AWG and

larger.4. Barrels prefilled with oxide-inhibiting and antiseizing compound and

sealed.5. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy Corp.; Hyground Irreversible Compression.b. Thomas and Betts Co.c. ILSCO.

B. Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloymaterial.

1. Manufacturers:a. Burndy Corp.b. Thomas and Betts Co.

2.04 GROUNDING WELLS

A. Ground rod box complete with cast-iron riser ring and traffic cover marked“GROUND ROD.”


1. Christy Co. No. G5.2. Lightning and Grounding Systems, Inc.; I-R Series.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Grounding: In compliance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.

B. Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment withgrounding electrode conductor to grounding electrode system.



C. Ground each separately derived system neutral with common groundingelectrode conductor to grounding electrode system.

D. Bond together all grounding electrodes that are present at each building orstructure served to form one common grounding electrode system.

E. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposednoncurrent-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways,ground conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connections, andmetal piping systems.

F. Shielded Power Cables: Ground shields at each splice or termination inaccordance with recommendations of splice or termination manufacturer.

G. Shielded Instrumentation Cables:

1. Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal.2. Expose shield minimum 1 inch at termination to field instrument and

apply heat shrink tube.3. Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than one point.

3.02 WIRE CONNECTIONS

A. Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors andcontrol circuits above 50 volts.

B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install equipment groundingconductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

C. Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings.

D. Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipmentcontaining a ground bus.

E. Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus.

F. Bolt connections to equipment ground bus.

G. Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and tointermediate metallic enclosures.

H. Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment groundingsystem with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inchmachine screws.


GROUNDING AND BONDING PW\DEN003\708335FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 202026 05 26 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

I. Metallic Equipment Enclosures: Use furnished ground lug; if none furnished,tap equipment housing and install solderless terminal connected to box withmachine screw. For circuits greater than 20 amps use minimum 5/16-inchdiameter bolt.

3.03 MOTOR GROUNDING

A. Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motorfeeder raceway; connect to motor frame.

B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment groundingconductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

C. Motors Less Than 10 hp: Use furnished ground lug in motor connection box.If none furnished, provide compression, spade-type terminal connected toconduit box mounting screw.

D. Motors 10 hp and Above: Use furnished ground lug in motor connection box.If none furnished, tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnishcompression, one-hole, lug type terminal connected with minimum 5/16-inchbrass threaded stud with bolt and washer.

E. Circuits 20 Amps or Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing. Installsolderless terminal with minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt.

3.04 GROUND RODS

A. Install full length with conductor connection at upper end.

B. Install with connection point below finished grade, unless otherwise shown.

C. Space multiple ground rods by one rod length.

D. Install to 8 feet below local frost depth.

3.05 GROUNDING WELLS

A. Install for ground rods located inside buildings, asphalt and paved areas, andwhere shown on Drawings.

B. Install riser ring and cover flush with surface.

C. Place 6 inches of crushed rock in bottom of each well.



3.06 CONNECTIONS

A. General:

1. Abovegrade Connections: Install mechanical, or compression-typeconnectors; or brazing.

2. Belowgrade Connections: Install compression type connectors.3. Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to

allow good metal-to-metal contact.4. Notify Engineer prior to backfilling ground connections.

B. Compression Type:

1. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer’s recommendations.2. Install connectors of proper size for grounding conductors and ground

rods specified.3. Install using connector manufacturer’s compression tool having proper

sized dies and operate per manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Mechanical Type:

1. Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosioninhibitor before making connection.

2. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer’s recommendations.3. Do not conceal mechanical connections.

3.07 METAL STRUCTURE GROUNDING

A. Bond metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements togrounding system.

B. Bond electrical equipment supported by metal platforms to the platforms.

C. Provide electrical contact between metal frames and railings supportingpushbutton stations, receptacles, and instrument cabinets, and racewayscarrying circuits to these devices.

3.08 SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Connect surge arrestor ground terminals to equipment ground bus.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 2020 26 05 33 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): HB, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. c. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and

Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

d. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

e. D149, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies.

3. National Electrical Contractor’s Association, Inc. (NECA): Installation standards.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). c. RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized

Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. d. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. e. TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC

Conduit and Tubing. f. TC 6, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for

Underground Installation. g. TC 14, Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and

Fittings. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical

Code (NEC). 6. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 569B, Commercial

Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.


RACEWAY AND BOXES PW\DEN003\708335 26 05 33 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

7. UL: a. 1, Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 5, Standard for Safety for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings. c. 6, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel. d. 6A, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit –

Aluminum, Red Brass and Stainless. e. 360, Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. f. 514B, Standard for Safety for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable

Fittings. g. 651, Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC

Conduit and Fittings. h. 651A, Standard for Safety for Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit

and HDPE Conduit. i. 870, Standard for Safety for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and

Associated Fittings. j. 1660, Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic

Conduit. k. 1684, Standard for Safety for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin

Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. l. 2024, Standard for Safety for Optical Fiber and Communication

Cable Raceway.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s Literature: a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit. b. PVC Schedule 40 conduit. c. PVC Schedule 80 conduit. d. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit. e. Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit. f. Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid-tight conduit. g. Flexible metal, nonliquid-tight conduit. h. Conduit fittings. i. Device boxes for use in hazardous areas. j. Junction and pull boxes used at or below grade. k. Large junction and pull boxes. l. Terminal junction boxes.

2. Precast Manholes and Handholes: a. Dimensional drawings and descriptive literature. b. Accessory information.

3. Equipment and machinery proposed for bending metal conduit. 4. Method for bending PVC conduit less than 30 degrees.



5. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

6. Conduit Layout: a. Provide drawings for conduit installations. b. Provide proposed raceway routing for spray valves and heat trace

at Facility 10 and Facility 20. c. Provide plan and section showing arrangement and location of

conduit and duct bank required for: 1) Low voltage feeder and branch circuits. 2) Instrumentation and control systems. 3) Communications systems. 4) Empty conduit for future use.

d. Reproducible; scale not greater than 1 inch equals 20 feet.



2. Manufacturer’s certification of training for PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit installer.



1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within scope of standards published by UL shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

B. PVC-Coated, Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit Installer: Certified by conduit manufacturer as having received minimum 2 hours of training on installation procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):

1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.



2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated protective layer.

B. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. 2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed

or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors. 3. Furnish without factory-formed bell.

C. PVC Schedule 80 Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. 2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed

or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.

D. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA RN 1 and ETL. 2. Material:

a. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6. b. Exterior Finish: PVC coating, 40-mil nominal thickness; bond to

metal shall have tensile strength greater than PVC. c. Interior Finish: Urethane coating, 2-mil nominal thickness.

3. Threads: Hot-dipped galvanized and factory coated with urethane. 4. Bendable without damage to interior or exterior coating.

E. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors. 2. Material: Galvanized steel with extruded PVC jacket.

F. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of UL 1. 2. Material: Galvanized steel.

G. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Material: PVC core with fused flexible PVC jacket. 2. UL 1660 listed for:

a. Dry Conditions: 80 degrees C insulated conductors. b. Wet Conditions: 60 degrees C insulated conductors.

3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Carlon; Carflex or X-Flex. b. T & B; Xtraflex LTC or EFC.



2.02 FITTINGS

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:

1. General: a. Meet requirements of UL 514B. b. Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw and threadless

compression fittings not permitted. 2. Bushing:

a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Series BU-I. 2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HB.

3. Grounding Bushing: a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for

150 degrees C, with solderless lugs. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Appleton; Series GIB. 2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HBLG.

4. Conduit Hub: a. Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat with bonding screw. b. UL listed for use in wet locations. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Appleton, Series HUB-B. 2) O-Z/Gedney; Series CH. 3) Meyers; ST Series.

5. Conduit Bodies: a. Sized as required by NFPA 70. b. Manufacturers and Products, Normal Conditions:

1) Appleton; Form 35 threaded unilets. 2) Crouse-Hinds; Form 7 or Form 8 threaded condulets. 3) Killark; Series O electrolets. 4) Thomas & Betts; Form 7 or Form 8.

c. Manufacturers, Hazardous Locations: 1) Appleton. 2) Crouse-Hinds. 3) Killark.

6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer. 7. Unions:

a. Concrete tight, hot-dip galvanized malleable iron. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Appleton; Series SCC bolt-on coupling or Series EC three-piece union.



2) O-Z/Gedney; Type SSP split coupling or Type 4 Series, three-piece coupling.

8. Conduit Sealing Fitting: a. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Appleton; Type EYF, EYM, or ESU. 2) Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS or Type EZS. 3) Killark; Type EY or Type EYS.

9. Drain Seal: a. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Appleton; Type EYD. 2) Crouse-Hinds; Type EYD or Type EZD.

10. Drain/Breather Fitting: a. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Appleton; Type ECDB. 2) Crouse-Hinds; ECD.

11. Expansion Fitting: a. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Deflection/Expansion Movement: a) Appleton; Type DF. b) Crouse-Hinds; Type XD.

2) Expansion Movement Only: a) Appleton; Type XJ. b) Crouse-Hinds; Type XJ. c) Thomas & Betts; XJG-TP.

12. Cable Sealing Fitting: a. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit. b. For Conductors with OD of 1/2 Inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at

connector entry. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Appleton; CG-S. 2) Crouse-Hinds; CGBS.

B. PVC Conduit and Tubing:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 3. 2. Type: PVC, slip-on.

C. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Fittings: Rigid galvanized steel type, PVC coated by conduit

manufacturer.



3. Conduit Bodies: Cast metal hot-dipped galvanized or urethane finish. Cover shall be of same material as conduit body. PVC coated by conduit manufacturer.

4. Finish: 40-mil PVC exterior, 2-mil urethane interior. 5. Overlapping pressure-sealing sleeves. 6. Conduit Hangers, Attachments, and Accessories: PVC-coated. 7. Manufacturers:

a. Robroy Industries. b. Ocal.

8. Expansion Fitting: a. Manufacturer and Product: Ocal; OCAL-BLUE XJG.

D. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing rated for 105 degrees C.

2. Insulated throat and sealing O-rings. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Thomas & Betts; Series 5331. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series 4Q.

E. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Body: Galvanized steel or malleable iron. 3. Throat: Nylon insulated. 4. 1-1/4-Inch Conduit and Smaller: One screw body. 5. 1-1/2-Inch Conduit and Larger: Two screw body. 6. Manufacturer and Product: Appleton; Series 7400.

F. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Type: High strength plastic body, complete with lock nut, O-ring,

threaded ferrule, sealing ring, and compression nut. 3. Body/compression nut (gland) design to ensure high mechanical pullout

strength and watertight seal. 4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Carlon; Type LT. b. O-Z/Gedney; Type 4Q-P. c. Thomas & Betts; Series 6300.



G. Flexible Coupling, Hazardous Locations:

1. Approved for use in atmosphere involved. 2. Rating: Watertight and UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1 and 2

areas. 3. Outer bronze braid and an insulating liner. 4. Conductivity equal to a similar length of rigid metal conduit. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type ECGJH or Type ECLK. b. Appleton; EXGJH or EXLK.

H. Watertight Entrance Seal Device:

1. New Construction: a. Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring,

pressure ring, grommet seal, and pressure clamp. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type FSK or

Type WSK, as required. 2. Cored-Hole Application:

a. Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring, and membrane clamp.

b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Series CSM.

2.03 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

A. Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc-plated or cadmium-plated.

B. Cast Metal:

1. Box: Malleable iron. 2. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, malleable iron, with stainless steel

screws. 3. Hubs: Threaded. 4. Lugs: Cast mounting. 5. Manufacturers and Products, Nonhazardous Locations:

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type FS or Type FD. b. Appleton; Type FS or Type FD. c. Killark.

6. Manufacturers and Products, Hazardous Locations: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type GUA or Type EAJ. b. Appleton; Type GR.



C. PVC-Coated Cast Metal:

1. Type: One-piece. 2. Material: Malleable iron, cast ferrous metal, or cast aluminum. 3. Coating:

a. Exterior Surfaces: 40-mil PVC. b. Interior Surfaces: 2-mil urethane.

4. Manufacturers: a. Robroy Industries. b. Ocal.

D. Nonmetallic:

1. Box: PVC. 2. Cover: PVC, weatherproof, with stainless steel screws. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Carlon; Type FS or Type FD, with Type E98

or Type E96 covers.

2.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Outlet Box Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article Outlet and Device Boxes.

B. Conduit Bodies Used as Junction Boxes: As specified under Article Fittings.

C. Large Sheet Steel Box:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Box: Code-gauge, galvanized steel. 3. Cover: Full access, screw type. 4. Machine Screws: Corrosion-resistant.

D. Large Cast Metal Box, Hazardous Locations:

1. NEMA 250 Type 7 or Type 9 as required for Class, Division, and Group involved.

2. Box: Cast ferrous metal, electro-galvanize finished or copper-free aluminum with drilled and tapped conduit entrances.

3. Cover: Hinged with screws. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type EJB. b. Appleton; Type AJBEW.



E. Large Stainless Steel Box:

1. NEMA 250 Type 4X. 2. Box: 14-gauge, ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316 stainless steel, with

white enamel painted interior mounting panel. 3. Cover: Hinged with clamps. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Robroy Industries. c. Wiegman.

F. Large Steel Box:

1. NEMA 250 Type 1. 2. Box: 12-gauge steel, with white enamel painted interior and gray primed

exterior, over phosphated surfaces. Provide gray finish as approved by Engineer.

3. Cover: Hinged with clamps. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Robroy Industries. c. Wiegman.

G. Large Nonmetallic Box:

1. NEMA 250 Type 4X. 2. Box: High-impact, fiberglass-reinforced polyester or engineered

thermoplastic, with stability to high heat. 3. Cover: Hinged with clamps. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Conduit hubs and mounting lugs. 6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type NJB. b. Carlon; Series N, C, or H. c. Robroy Industries.

H. Concrete Box, Nontraffic Areas:

1. Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension. 2. Cover: Steel diamond plate with locking bolts. 3. Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown. 4. Size: 10 inches by 17 inches, minimum.



5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Utility Vault Co.; Series 36-1017. b. Christy, Concrete Products, Inc.; N9. c. Quazite; “PG” Style.

I. Concrete Box, Traffic Areas:

1. Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension and bottom slab. 2. Cover: Steel checked plate; H/20 loading with screw down. 3. Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown. 4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Christy, Concrete Products, Inc.; B1017BOX. b. Utility Vault Co.; 3030 SB.

2.05 TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX

A. Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown.

B. Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer.

C. Terminal Blocks:

1. Separate connection point for each conductor entering or leaving box. 2. Spare Terminal Points: 25 percent, minimum.

2.06 PRECAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. Concrete Strength: Minimum, 3,000 psi compressive, in 28 days.

B. Loading: AASHTO, H-20 in accordance with ASTM C857.

C. Access: Provide cast concrete 6-inch or 12-inch risers and access hole adapters between top of manhole and finished grade at required elevations.

D. Drainage:

1. Slope floors toward drain points, leaving no pockets or other nondraining areas.

2. Provide drainage outlet or sump at low point of floor constructed with a heavy, cast iron, slotted or perforated hinged cover, and a minimum 4-inch outlet and outlet pipe.

E. Raceway Entrances:

1. Provide on all four sides. 2. Provide knockout panels or precast individual raceway openings.



3. At entrances where raceways are to be installed by others, provide minimum 12-inch-high by 24-inch-wide knockout panels for future raceway installation.

F. Embedded Pulling Iron:

1. Material: 3/4-inch-diameter stock, fastened to overall steel reinforcement before concrete is placed.

2. Location: a. Wall: Opposite each raceway entrance and knockout panel for

future raceway entrance. b. Floor: Centered below manhole or handhole cover.

G. Cable Racks:

1. Arms and Insulators: Adjustable, of sufficient number to accommodate cables for each raceway entering or leaving manhole, including spares.

2. Wall Attachment: a. Adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs not

permitted. b. Insert Spacing: Maximum 3 feet on center for inside perimeter of

manhole. c. Arrange in order that spare raceway ends are clear for future cable

installation.

H. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Material: Machined cast iron. 2. Diameter: 32 inches. 3. Cover Type: Indented, solid top design, with two drop handles each. 4. Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20. 5. Cover Designation:

a. Cast, on upper side, in integral letters, minimum 2 inches in height, appropriate titles: 1) Above 600 Volts: ELECTRIC HV. 2) 600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV.

I. Handhole Frames and Covers:

1. Material: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized. 2. Cover Type: Solid, hinged, of checkered design. 3. Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20.



4. Cover Designation: a. Burn by welder, on upper side in integral letters, minimum

2 inches in height, appropriate titles: 1) 600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV.

J. Hardware: Steel, hot-dip galvanized.

K. Furnish knockout for ground rod in each handhole and manhole.

L. Manufacturers:

1. Utility Vault Co. 2. Penn-Cast Products, Inc. 3. Concrete Conduit Co. 4. Associated Concrete Products, Inc. 5. Pipe, Inc.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Duct Bank Spacers:

1. Modular Type: a. Nonmetallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes. b. Suitable for all types of conduit. c. Manufacturers:

1) Underground Device, Inc. 2) Carlon.

2. Template Type: a. Nonmetallic, custom made one-piece spacers. b. Suitable for all types of conduit. c. Material: HDPE or polypropylene, 1/2-inch minimum thickness. d. Conduit openings cut 1 inch larger than conduit outside diameter. e. Additional openings for stake-down, rebar, and concrete flow

through as required. f. Manufacturer and Product: SP Products; Quik Duct.

B. Identification Devices:

1. Raceway Tags: a. Material: Permanent, nylon. b. Shape: Round. c. Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved. d. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted.



2. Warning Tape: a. Material: Polyethylene, 4-mil gauge with detectable strip. b. Color: Red. c. Width: Minimum 3 inches. d. Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below

tape. e. Identifying Letters: Minimum 1-inch-high permanent black

lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. f. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Panduit; Type HTDU. 2) Reef Industries; Terra Tape.

3. Buried Raceway Marker: a. Material: Sheet bronze, consisting of double-ended arrows,

straight for straight runs and bent at locations where runs change direction.

b. Designation: Engrave to depth of 3/32 inch; ELECTRIC CABLES, in letters 1/4 inch high.

c. Minimum Dimension: 1/4 inch thick, 10 inches long, and 3/4 inch wide.

C. Raceway Coating: Clean and paint in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

D. Heat Shrinkable Tubing:

1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Semi-flexible with meltable adhesive inner liner. 3. Color: Black. 4. Manufacturers:

a. Raychem. b. 3M.

E. Wraparound Duct Band:

1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hot-melt adhesive.

2. Width: 50 mm minimum. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type TWDB.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Conduit and tubing sizes shown are based on use of copper conductors. Reference Section 26 05 05, Conductors, concerning conduit sizing for aluminum conductors.

B. Comply with NECA Installation Standards.

C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.

D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.

E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust-tight seals until time for pulling in conductors.

F. Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate may collect above sealing fitting.

G. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point.

H. Group raceways installed in same area.

I. Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from parallel runs.

J. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid obstruction of passageways.

K. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planes.

L. Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell with reinforcing steel.

M. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.

N. Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit, PVC-coated galvanized conduit, or IMC installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound.

O. Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors, wires, or cables.



P. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams without Engineer approval.

Q. Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under slab, with no part embedded within slab.

R. Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed.

S. Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and Category 6 data cables in strict conformance with the requirements of TIA 569B.

3.02 REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUITS

A. Where Drawings indicate existing conduits may be reused, they may be reused only where they meet the following criteria.

1. Conduit is in useable condition with no deformation, corrosion, or damage to exterior surface.

2. Conduit is sized per the NEC. 3. Conduit is of the type specified in Contract Documents. 4. Conduit is supported as specified in Contract Documents.

B. Conduit shall be reamed with wire brush, then with a mandrel approximately 1/4 inch smaller than raceway inside diameter then cleaned prior to pulling new conductors.

3.03 INSTALLATION IN CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

A. Minimum Cover: 2 inches, including fittings.

B. Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel location or configuration.

C. Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to ensure raceways remain in position.

D. Conduit larger than 1 inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls, foundations, columns, or beams unless approved by Engineer.

E. Slabs and Walls (Requires Engineer Approval):

1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of slab or wall thickness. 2. Install within middle two-fourths of slab or wall. 3. Separate conduit less than 2-inch trade size by a minimum ten times

conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown.



4. Separate conduit 2-inch and greater trade size by a minimum eight times conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown.

5. Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with minimum separation of 1 inch.

6. Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside dimension of expansion/deflection fittings at expansion joints.

7. Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water surface elevation in walls of water holding structures.

F. Columns and Beams (Requires Engineer Approval):

1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of beam thickness. 2. Conduit cross-sectional area not to exceed 4 percent of beam or column

cross section.

3.04 CONDUIT APPLICATION

A. Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch.

B. Exposed: See Area Classification and Material Selection Table on the general sheets of Drawings.

C. Direct Earth Burial:

1. Rigid galvanized steel. 2. PVC Schedule 40 for ac circuits, PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel for

dc circuits. 3. PVC Schedule 80. 4. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

D. Concrete-Encased Ductbank: PVC Schedule 40 for ac circuits, PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel for dc circuits.

E. Under Slabs-on-Grade: PVC Schedule 40 for ac circuits, PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel for dc circuits.

F. Transition from Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

G. Under Equipment Mounting Pads: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

3.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type transformers, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other locations



approved by Engineer where flexible connection is required to minimize vibration:

1. Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible, liquid-tight conduit. 2. Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible. 3. Wet or Corrosive Areas: Flexible, nonmetallic liquid-tight. 4. Dry Areas: Flexible, metallic liquid-tight. 5. Hazardous Areas: Flexible coupling suitable for Class I, Division 1

and 2 areas.

B. Suspended Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Flexible steel, nonliquid-tight conduit.

C. Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas Required to be Oiltight and Dust-Tight: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.

D. Flexible Conduit Length: 18 inches minimum, 60 inches maximum; sufficient to allow movement or adjustment of equipment.

3.06 PENETRATIONS

A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown.

B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not permitted.

C. Apply heat shrinkable tubing to metallic conduit protruding through concrete floor slabs to a point 2 inches above and 2 inches below concrete surface.

D. Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout dry-pack, or use watertight seal device.

E. Entering Structures:

1. General: Seal raceway at first box or outlet with oakum or expandable plastic compound to prevent entrance of gases or liquids from one area to another.

2. Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor: a. Provide a watertight seal. b. Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal

device on each side. c. With Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device

on accessible side. d. Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal

device into construction with one or more integral flanges.



e. Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal device in a permanent, watertight manner.

3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: a. Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer. b. Terminate conduit with flexible nonmetallic conduit at junction

box or condulet attached to exterior surface of equipment prior to penetrating equipment.

c. Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant, as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.

4. Corrosive-Sensitive Areas: a. Seal conduit passing through chlorine room walls. b. Seal conduit entering equipment panel boards and field panels

containing electronic equipment. c. Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant, as specified in

Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 5. Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and install

watertight entrance seal device. 6. Nonwaterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without Concrete

Encasement): a. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or watertight

entrance seal device. b. Fill space between raceway and sleeve with expandable plastic

compound or oakum and lead joint, on each side. 7. Manholes and Handholes:

a. Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings. b. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall. c. Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of

wall, unless otherwise shown.

3.07 SUPPORT

A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 requirements. Do not exceed 10 feet in any application. Do not support from piping, pipe supports, or other raceways.

B. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze.

C. Application/Type of Conduit Strap:

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Zinc coated steel, pregalvanized steel or malleable iron.

2. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: PVC-coated metal. 3. Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic or PVC-coated metal.



D. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:

1. Wood: Wood screws. 2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. 3. Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by

powder charge, with lock washers and nuts. 4. Steelwork: Machine screws.

E. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or hangers.

3.08 BENDS

A. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance.

B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable diameter, 15 inches minimum.

C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.

D. Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending.

E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so that bends are parallel.

F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of run, and raceways are same size.

G. PVC Conduit:

1. Bends 30 Degrees and Larger: Provide factory-made elbows. 2. 90-Degree Bends: Provide rigid steel elbows, PVC-coated where direct

buried. 3. Use manufacturer’s recommended method for forming smaller bends.

H. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility.



3.09 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS

A. Provide on raceways at structural expansion joints and in long tangential runs.

B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 25 degrees F maximum temperature variation.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.10 PVC CONDUIT

A. Solvent Welding:

1. Apply manufacturer recommended solvent to joints. 2. Install in order that joint is watertight.

B. Adapters:

1. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type. 2. PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit or IMC: PVC female adapter.

C. Belled-End Conduit: Bevel unbelled end of joint prior to joining.

3.11 PVC-COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Tools and equipment used in cutting, bending, threading and installation of PVC-coated rigid conduit shall be designed to limit damage to PVC coating.

C. Provide PVC boot to cover exposed threading.

3.12 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES

A. Cast Metal Enclosure: Install manufacturer’s premolded insulating sleeve inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs.

B. Nonmetallic, Cabinets, and Enclosures:

1. Terminate conduit in threaded conduit hubs, maintaining enclosure integrity.

2. Metallic Conduit: Provide ground terminal for connection to maintain continuity of ground system.



C. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:

1. General: a. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is

not required. b. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal

boxes having threaded hubs. c. Utilize sealing locknuts or threaded hubs on sides and bottom of

NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures. d. Terminate conduits at threaded hubs at the tops of NEMA 3R and

NEMA 12 boxes and enclosures. e. Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at NEMA 4 and

NEMA 4X boxes and enclosures. 2. Rigid Galvanized Conduit:

a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure. b. Install grounding bushing at source enclosure. c. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment

ground bus or ground pad. 3. Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide gland compression, insulated

connectors. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable

iron connectors. 5. Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquid-tight strain

relief connectors. 6. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Provide PVC-coated,

liquid-tight, metallic connector. 7. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut,

except where threaded hubs required above.

D. Motor Control Center and Free-Standing Enclosures:

1. Terminate metal conduit entering bottom with grounding bushing; provide grounding jumper extending to equipment ground bus or grounding pad.

2. Terminate PVC conduit entering bottom with bell end fittings.

3.13 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS

A. Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one manhole, handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour.

B. Cover: Maintain minimum 2-foot cover above conduit and concrete encasement, unless otherwise shown.



C. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.

D. Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same transverse line.

E. Union type fittings not permitted.

F. Spacers:

1. Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers designed for such purpose, to secure and separate parallel conduit runs in a trench or concrete encasement.

2. Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support of the type conduit used, but in no case greater than 10 feet.

G. Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement.

H. Transition from Underground to Exposed: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

I. Installation with Other Piping Systems:

1. Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation. 2. Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation. 3. Installation over valves or couplings not permitted.

J. Metallic Raceway Coating: At couplings and joints.

K. Provide expansion fittings that allow minimum of 4 inches of movement in vertical conduit runs from underground where exposed conduit will be fastened to or will enter building or structure.

L. Provide expansion/deflection fittings in conduit runs that exit building or structure belowgrade. Conduit from building wall to fitting shall be PVC-coated rigid steel.

M. Concrete Encasement:

1. As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Concrete Color: Red.

N. Backfill: As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

3.14 UNDER SLAB RACEWAYS

A. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.



B. Support raceways so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement.

C. Install raceways with no part embedded within slab and with no interference with slab on grade construction.

D. Raceway spacing, in a single layer or multiple layers:

1. 3 inches clear between adjacent 2-inch or larger raceway. 2. 2 inches clear between adjacent 1-1/2-inch or smaller raceway.

E. Multiple Layers of Raceways: Install under slab on grade in trench below backfill zone, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

F. Individual Raceways and Single Layer Multiple Raceways: Install at lowest elevation of backfill zone with spacing as specified herein. Where conduits cross at perpendicular orientation, installation of conduits shall not interfere with placement of under slab fill that meets compaction and void limitations of earthwork specifications.

G. Under slab raceways that emerge from below slab to top of slab as exposed, shall be located to avoid conflicts with structural slab rebar. Coordinate raceway stub ups with location of structural rebar.

H. Fittings:

1. Union type fittings are not permitted. 2. Provide expansion/deflection fittings in raceway runs that exit building

or structure below slab. Locate fittings 18 inches, maximum, beyond exterior wall. Raceway type between building exterior wall to fitting shall be PVC-coated rigid steel.

3. Couplings: In multiple raceway runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same traverse line.

3.15 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

A. General:

1. Install plumb and level. 2. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in

wiring or raceway system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 3. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required;

seal unused openings. 4. Install galvanized mounting hardware in industrial areas.



B. Size:

1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural conditions. Box extensions not permitted. a. Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such

that conduit knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space. 2. Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal device box, unless otherwise

required for installed fixture. 3. Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch device box.

C. Locations:

1. Drawing locations are approximate. 2. To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features,

relocate outlets as directed by Engineer. 3. Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout,

unless otherwise shown.

D. Mounting Height:

1. General: a. Dimensions given to centerline of box. b. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or

finish, adjust up or down to avoid interference. c. Do not straddle CMU block or other construction joints.

2. Light Switch: a. 48 inches above floor. b. When located next to door, install on lock side of door.

3. Thermostat: 54 inches above floor. 4. Telephone Outlet:

a. 15 inches above floor. b. 6 inches above counter tops. c. Wall Mounted: 52 inches above floor.

5. Convenience Receptacle: a. General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor. b. General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom

or side flush with top of backsplash, or 6 inches above counter tops without backsplash.

c. Industrial Areas, Workshops: 48 inches above floor. d. Outdoor Areas: 24 inches above finished grade.

6. Special-Purpose Receptacle: 48 inches above floor or as shown. 7. Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings.



E. Flush Mounted:

1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of

boxes flush with finished surface. 3. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive

box.

F. Supports:

1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.

2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows: a. Wood: Wood screws. b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields. c. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. d. Steelwork: Machine screws.

3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.

4. Provide plaster rings where necessary. 5. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally

supported.

G. Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where required by fixture terminal temperature.

H. Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate strength to support fixture.

3.16 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. General:

1. Install plumb and level. 2. Installed boxes shall be accessible. 3. Do not install on finished surfaces. 4. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and

allowed by applicable codes. 5. Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are

required and allowed by applicable codes. 6. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate

conductor installation. 7. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or

redirect multiple conduit runs.



8. Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of three right-angle bends.

B. Flush Mounted:

1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive

box. 3. Make edges of boxes flush with final surface.

C. Mounting Hardware:

1. Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Galvanized. 2. Noncorrosive Wet Areas: Stainless steel. 3. Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel.

D. Supports:

1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.

2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows: a. Wood: Wood screws. b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields. c. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. d. Steelwork: Machine screws.

3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.

4. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported.

E. At or Belowgrade:

1. Install boxes for belowgrade conduit flush with finished grade in locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways.

2. If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location.

3. Obtain Engineer’s written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas, roadways, or walkways.

4. Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights.

3.17 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. Excavate, shore, brace, backfill, and final grade in accordance with Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.



B. Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined.

C. Install such that raceway enters at nearly right angle and as near as possible to end of wall, unless otherwise shown.

D. Grounding: As specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

E. Identification: Field stamp covers with manhole or handhole number as shown. Stamped numbers to be 1-inch minimum height.

3.18 EMPTY RACEWAYS

A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.

B. Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells.

C. Provide nylon pull cord.

D. Identify, as specified in Article Identification Devices, with waterproof tags attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point.

3.19 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Raceway Tags:

1. Identify origin and destination. 2. For exposed raceways, install tags at each terminus, near midpoint, and

at minimum intervals of every 50 feet, whether in ceiling space or surface mounted.

3. Install tags at each terminus for concealed raceways. 4. Provide nylon strap for attachment.

B. Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above underground or concrete-encased raceways. Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of run.

C. Buried Raceway Marker:

1. Install at grade to indicate direction of underground raceway. 2. Install at bends and at intervals not exceeding 100 feet in straight runs. 3. Embed and secure to top of concrete base, sized 14 inches long, 6 inches

wide, and 8 inches deep; top set flush with finished grade.




A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction.

B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over conduit openings during construction.

C. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.

D. Touch up coating damage to PVC-coated conduit with patching compound approved by manufacturer. Compound shall be kept refrigerated according to manufacturers’ instructions until time of use.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSISJANUARY 2020 26 05 70 - 1©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 26 05 70ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. C57.12.00, Standard General Requirements for Liquid-ImmersedDistribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers.

b. 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination ofIndustrial and Commercial Power Systems.

c. 399, Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial PowerSystem Analysis.

d. 1584, Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations.3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.4,

Product Safety Signs and Labels.4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).b. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.

5. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA): 29 CFR, Part 1910Subpart S, Electrical.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Short Circuit Study: Submit prior to review of electrical equipment shopdrawings.

2. Protective Device Coordination Study: Submit within 45 days afterapproval of short circuit study.

3. Initial Arc Flash Study: Submit initial study with protective DeviceCoordination Study.

4. Final Arc Flash Study: Submit final study prior to equipmentenergization.

5. Arc flash hazard labels; submit sample with initial study.6. Electronic files on thumb drive of final studies including all engineering

software input files, output reports, and libraries.


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS PW\DEN003\70833526 05 70 - 2 JANUARY 2020



A. Short circuit and protective device coordination and arc flash studies shall beprepared by manufacturer furnishing equipment new equipment or aprofessional electrical engineer registered in the State of Washington.


A. Initial complete short circuit study shall be submitted and reviewed beforeEngineer will review Shop Drawings for motor control center or low-voltageadjustable frequency drives.

B. Initial complete protective device coordination and arc flash studies shall besubmitted within 45 days after approval of initial short circuit study.

C. Final arc flash study shall be submitted and accepted prior to energization ofthe electrical equipment.

D. Revised short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash studies, andarc flash labels shall be submitted 10 days before energizing electricalequipment.

E. Final short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash studies shall becompleted prior to Project Substantial Completion. Final version of study shallinclude as-installed equipment, materials, and parameter data or settingsentered into equipment based on study.

F. Submit final arc flash labels described herein and in compliance withNEMA Z535.4 prior to Project Substantial Completion.

1.05 GENERAL STUDY REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment and component titles used in the studies shall be identical toequipment and component titles shown on Drawings.

B. Perform studies using one of the following electrical engineering softwarepackages:

1. SKM Power Tools for Windows.2. ETAP.3. Paladin.4. Easy Power.



C. Perform complete fault calculations for each existing source combination.

1. Source combination may include present and future power companysupply circuits, large motors, or generators.

D. Utilize proposed and existing load data for study obtained from ContractDocuments and obtained from field investigation of system configuration,wiring information, and equipment.

E. Existing System and Equipment:

1. Extent of existing system to be included in study is limited to systemelements that affect new system and equipment. Include faultcontribution of existing motors and equipment in study.

2. Include impedance elements that affect new system and equipment.3. Include protective devices in series with new equipment.

F. Device coordination time-current curves for low voltage distribution system;include individual protective device time-current characteristics.

1.06 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY

A. General:

1. Prepare in accordance with IEEE 399.2. Use cable impedances based on copper conductors, except where

aluminum conductors are specified or shown.3. Use bus impedances based on copper bus bars, except where aluminum

bus bars are specified or shown.4. Use cable and bus resistances calculated at 25 degrees C.5. Use medium-voltage cable reactances based on use of typical dimensions

of shielded cables with 133 percent insulation levels.6. Use 600-volt cable reactances based on use of typical dimensions of

THHN/THWN conductors.7. Use transformer impedances 92.5 percent of “nominal” impedance based

on tolerances specified in IEEE C57.12.00.

B. Provide:

1. Calculation methods and assumptions.2. Typical calculation.3. Tabulations of calculated quantities.4. Results, conclusions, and recommendations.5. Selected base per unit quantities.




6. One-line diagrams.7. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault

contribution characteristics.8. Impedance diagrams.9. Zero-sequence impedance diagrams.

C. Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties foran assumed three-phase bolted fault at each:

1. Motor control centers.2. Standby generators.3. Branch circuit panelboards.4. Future load contributions as shown on one-line diagram.

D. Verify:

1. Equipment and protective devices are applied within their ratings.2. Adequacy of motor control centers bus bars to withstand short circuit

stresses.3. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short circuit heating, in

addition to normal load currents.

E. Tabulations:

1. General Data:a. Short circuit reactances of rotating machines.b. Cable and conduit material data.c. Bus data.d. Transformer data.e. Circuit resistance and reactance values.

2. Short Circuit Data (for each source combination):a. Fault impedances.b. X to R ratios.c. Asymmetry factors.d. Motor contributions.e. Short circuit kVA.f. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

3. Equipment Evaluation:a. Equipment bus bracing, equipment short circuit rating,

transformer, cable, busway.b. Maximum fault current available.



F. Written Summary:

1. Scope of studies performed.2. Explanation of bus and branch numbering system.3. Prevailing conditions.4. Selected equipment deficiencies.5. Results of short circuit study.6. Comments or suggestions.

G. Suggest changes and additions to equipment rating and/or characteristics.

H. Notify Engineer in writing of existing circuit protective devices improperlyrated for new fault conditions.

I. Revise data for “as-installed” condition.

1.07 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. General:

1. Prepare in accordance with IEEE 242.2. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves for

distribution system, graphically displayed on conventional log-log curvesheets.a. Provide separate curve sheets for phase and ground fault

coordination for each scenario.b. Each curve sheet to have title and one-line diagram that applies to

specific portion of system associated with time-current curves onthat sheet. Limit number of devices shown to four to six.

c. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type,function, and, if applicable, recommended tap, time delay,instantaneous and other settings recommended.

d. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflectingmaximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to whichdevice is exposed.

e. Apply motor protection methods that comply with NFPA 70.

B. Plot Characteristics on Curve Sheets:

1. Low-voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, includingmanufacturers tolerance bands.

2. Pertinent transformer full-load currents at 100 percent.3. Transformer magnetizing inrush currents.




4. Transformer damage curves; appropriate for system operation andlocation.

5. ANSI transformer withstand parameters.6. Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.7. Motor overload relay settings for motors greater than 40 hp.8. Ground fault protective device settings.9. Other system load protective devices for largest branch circuit and feeder

circuit breaker in each motor control center.

C. Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected Transformer:

1. Secondary Line-to-Ground Fault Protection: Primary protective deviceoperating band within transformer’s characteristics curve, including apoint equal to 58 percent of IEEE C57.12.00 withstand point.

2. Secondary Line-to-Line Faults: 16 percent current margin betweenprimary protective device and associated secondary device characteristiccurves.

D. Tabulate Recommended Protective Device Settings:

1. Relays:a. Current tap.b. Time dial.c. Instantaneous pickup.d. Electronic settings data file.

2. Circuit Breakers:a. Adjustable pickups.b. Adjustable time-current characteristics.c. Adjustable time delays.d. Adjustable instantaneous pickups.e. I2t In/Out.f. Electronic settings data file.

E. Written Summary:

1. Scope of studies performed.2. Summary of protective device coordination methodology.3. Prevailing conditions.4. Selected equipment deficiencies.5. Results of coordination study.6. Appendix of complete relay and circuit breaker electronic setting files,

submit electronic data files from manufacturer’s software.7. Comments or suggestions.



1.08 ARC FLASH STUDY

A. Perform arc flash hazard study after short circuit and protective devicecoordination study has been completed, reviewed and accepted.

B. Perform arc flash study in accordance with NFPA 70E, OSHA 29 CFR,Part 1910 Subpart S, and IEEE 1584.

C. Base Calculation:

1. For each major part of electrical power system, determine the following:a. Flash hazard protection boundary.b. Limited approach boundary.c. Restricted approach boundary.d. Incident energy level.e. Glove class required.

D. Produce arc flash hazard labels that list items in Paragraph Base Calculationand the following additional items:

1. Bus name.2. Bus voltage.

E. Produce bus detail sheets that list items in Paragraph Base Calculation and thefollowing additional items:

1. Bus name.2. Upstream protective device name, type, and settings.3. Bus line-to-line voltage.

F. Produce arc flash evaluation summary sheet listing the following additionalitems:

1. Bus name.2. Upstream protective device name, type, settings.3. Bus line-to-line voltage.4. Bus bolted fault.5. Protective device bolted fault current.6. Arcing fault current.7. Protective device trip/delay time.8. Breaker opening time.9. Solidly grounded column.10. Equipment type.11. Gap.




12. Arc flash boundary.13. Working distance.14. Incident energy.

G. Analyze short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash calculationsand highlight equipment that is determined to be underrated or causes incidentenergy values greater than 8 cal/cm2. Propose approaches to reduce energylevels.

H. Prepare report summarizing arc flash study with conclusions andrecommendations, which may affect integrity of electric power distributionsystem. As a minimum, include the following:

1. Equipment manufacturer’s information used to prepare study.2. Assumptions made during study.3. Reduced copy of one-line drawing; 11 inches by 17 inches maximum.4. Arc flash evaluations summary spreadsheet.5. Bus detail sheets.6. Arc flash hazard labels printed in color on thermally bonded adhesive

backed UV and weather-resistant labels.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ARC FLASH HAZARD LABELS

A. Arc flash hazard labels printed in color on thermally bonded adhesive backed,UV- and weather-resistant labels. See Article Arc Flash Study.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to values established byprotective device coordination and arc flash hazard studies. Coordinate withSection 26 08 00, Commissioning of Electrical Systems.

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplishconformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Notify Engineer in writing of required major equipment modifications.



D. Provide laminated one-line diagrams (minimum size 11 inches by 17 inches) topost on interior of electrical room doors.

E. Provide arc flash hazard labels on equipment as specified in this section.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 COMMISSIONING OFJANUARY 2020 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 26 08 00 - 1

SECTION 26 08 00COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM):a. D877/D877M, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown

Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes.b. D923, Standard Practices for Sampling Electrical Insulating

Liquids.c. D924, Standard Test Method for Dissipation Factor (or Power

Factor) and Relative Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) ofElectrical Insulating Liquids.

d. D971, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of OilAgainst Water by the Ring Method.

e. D974, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number byColor-Indicator Titration.

f. D1298, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density, orAPI Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Productsby Hydrometer Method.

g. D1500, Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of PetroleumProducts (ASTM Color Scale).

h. D1524, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of UsedElectrical Insulating Liquids in the Field.

i. D1533, Standard Test Method for Water in Insulating Liquids byCoulometric Karl Fischer Titration.

j. D1816, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltageof Insulating Liquids Using VDE Electrodes.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):a. 43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of

Electric Machinery.b. 81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance,

and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System.c. 450, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and

Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for StationaryApplications.

d. C2, National Electrical Safety Code.


COMMISSIONING OF PW\DEN003\708335ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 202026 08 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

e. C37.20.1, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage (1000 Vacand below, 3200 Vdc and below) Power Circuit BreakerSwitchgear.

3. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): ATS, AcceptanceTesting Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): AB 4,Guidelines for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded CaseCircuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications.

5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).b. 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment

Maintenance.c. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.d. 101, Life Safety Code.

6. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies(NICET).

7. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): CFR 29,Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational Submittals:

1. Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests:a. Testing firm qualifications.b. Schedule for performing inspection and tests.c. List of references to be used for each test.d. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s).e. Sample copy of individual device test form.f. Sample copy of individual system test form.

2. Energization Plan:a. Prior to initial energization of electrical distribution equipment;

include the following:1) Owner’s representative sign-off form for complete and

accurate arc flash labeling and proper protective devicesettings for equipment to be energized.

2) Staged sequence of initial energization of electricalequipment.

3) Lock-Out-Tag-Out plan for each stage of the progressiveenergization.

4) Barricading, signage, and communication plan notifyingpersonnel of newly energized equipment.

3. Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical itemtested within 30 days after completion of test.



4. Operation and Maintenance Data:a. In accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance

Data.b. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been

reviewed by Engineer and returned, insert a copy of each inOperation and Maintenance Manual.

5. Programmable Settings:a. At completion of Performance Demonstration Test, submit final

hardcopy printout and electronic files on compact disc of as-leftsetpoints, programs, and device configuration files for:1) Protective relays.2) Intelligent overload relays.3) Adjustable frequency drives.4) Power metering devices.5) Uninterruptible power supplies.6) Electrical communications modules.


A. Testing Firm Qualifications:

1. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as anunbiased testing authority.

2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers ofelectrical equipment and systems being tested.

3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing andinspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems.

4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical TestTechnologist by NICET or NETA and having a minimum of 5 years’testing experience on similar projects.

5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA.6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to Project at ratio not to exceed two

certified to one noncertified assistant or apprentice.7. Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive Project

report outlining services performed, results of such services,recommendations, actions taken, and opinions.

8. In compliance with OSHA CFR 29, Part 1910.7 criteria foraccreditation of testing laboratories or a full member company ofNETA.

B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to or greater thanrequirements established by NETA ATS.

C. Test Instrument Calibration: In accordance with NETA ATS.




A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment listed herein has beeninstalled.

B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.

1. Scheduled with Owner prior to de-energization.2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating

plant equipment.

C. Notify Owner at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energizedelectrical equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Perform tests in accordance with requirements of Section 01 91 14,Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

B. Tests and inspections shall establish:

1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer’stolerances and standards.

2. Installation operates properly.3. Equipment is suitable for energization.4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and

NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 101, and IEEE C2.

C. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industrystandards, and manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Set, test, and calibrate circuit breakers, overloads, adjustable frequency drivesand other applicable devices in accordance with values established by shortcircuit, and coordination studies as specified in Section 26 05 70, ElectricalSystems Analysis.

E. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanicalmovement.

F. Adjust and set electromechanical electronic relays and sensors to correspondto operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer.



G. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approvedSubmittals.

H. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness.

I. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.

J. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, withcalibrated torque wrench/screw driver to manufacturer’s recommendations, oras otherwise specified in NETA ATS.

K. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended bymanufacturer.

L. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts.

M. Inform Engineer of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.

N. Investigate and repair or replace:

1. Electrical items that fail tests.2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.3. Damaged electrical equipment.

O. Electrical Enclosures:

1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior.2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior.3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces.4. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer door and panel sections

having dented surfaces.5. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer poor fitting doors and

panel sections.6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking

devices.7. Replace missing or damaged hardware.8. Finish:

a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars.b. If required because of extensive damage, as determined by

Engineer, refinish entire assembly.

P. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and typerequired by the Contract Documents or approved Submittals.



3.02 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP

A. Voltage Field Test:

1. Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded andunloaded conditions.

2. Unbalance Corrections:a. Make written request to power company to correct condition if

balance (as defined by NEMA) exceeds 1 percent, or if voltagevaries throughout the day and from loaded to unloaded conditionmore than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal.

b. Obtain written certification from responsible power companyofficial that voltage variations and unbalance are within theirnormal standards if corrections are not made.

B. Equipment Line Current Tests:

1. Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment.2. Make line current check after power company has made final

adjustments to supply voltage magnitude or balance.3. If phase current for a piece of equipment is above rated nameplate

current, prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifiescause of problem and corrective action taken.

3.03 PANELBOARDS

A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Include the following inspections and related work:a. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate

compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings andpanelboard schedules.

b. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical componentsand other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer’sinstruction manual.

c. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment andfit of components.

d. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibratedtorque wrench. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for propertorque values.

e. Perform visual and mechanical inspection for overcurrentprotective devices.



B. Electrical Tests:

1. Include the following items performed in accordance withmanufacturer’s instruction:a. Insulation Resistance Tests:

1) Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance withNETA ATS, Table 100.1.

2) Each phase of each bus section.3) Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.4) With breakers open.5) With breakers closed.6) Control wiring except that connected to solid state

components.7) Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic

values established by manufacturer.b. Ground continuity test ground bus to system ground.

3.04 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM


1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 4 and larger for:a. Physical damage.b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram.c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer’s minimum

allowable bending radius where applicable.d. Color coding conformance with specification.e. Proper circuit identification.

2. Mechanical Connections for:a. Proper lug type for conductor material.b. Proper lug installation.c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12,

unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables for:

a. Proper shield grounding.b. Proper terminations.c. Proper circuit identification.

4. Control Cables for:a. Proper termination.b. Proper circuit identification.

5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals andgrounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices.



B. Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 4 and Larger:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:a. Utilize 1,000V dc megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated

conductors and 500V dc megohmmeter for 300-volt insulatedconductors.

b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacentconductors for 1 minute.

c. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of samelength and type.

d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable

connections.

C. Low-voltage cable tests may be performed by installer in lieu of independenttesting firm.

3.05 SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM


1. Proper blade pressure and alignment.2. Proper operation of switch operating handle.3. Adequate mechanical support for each fuse.4. Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse.5. Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS,

Table 100.12.6. Proper phase barrier material and installation.7. Verify fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram or approved

Submittals.8. Perform mechanical operational test and verify electrical and

mechanical interlocking system operation and sequencing.


1. Insulation Resistance Tests:a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with

NETA ATS, Table 100.1.b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole.c. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values

established by manufacturer.



2. Contact Resistance Tests:a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse

holder.b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or

similar switches.

3.06 MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 100 amperesand larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 50 amperes and larger.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Proper mounting.2. Proper conductor size.3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.4. Cracked casings.5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS,

Table 100.12.6. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation.7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or

one-line diagram.8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated

conductors.

C. Electrical Tests:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:a. Utilize 1,000V dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt circuit

breakers.b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for

1 minute.c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for

1 minute.d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.

2. Contact Resistance Tests:a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole.b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles

and similar breakers.3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:

a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay.b. Short-time pickup and delay.c. Ground fault pickup and delay.d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.



e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be withinmanufacturer’s published time-current characteristic toleranceband, including adjustment factors.

f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4,Table 5-3. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.7.

g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established byNEMA AB 4, Table 5-4. Alternatively, use NETA ATS,Table 100.8.

3.07 GROUNDING SYSTEMS


1. Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control center, panelboard, andswitchgear assemblies for proper connection and tightness.

2. Ground bus connections in motor control center, panelboard, andswitchgear assemblies for proper termination and tightness.

3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding.4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and

tightness.5. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds

were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained.


1. Fall-of-Potential Test:a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of

main ground system’s resistance.b. Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no

greater than 5 ohm(s).2. Two-Point Direct Method Test:

a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement ofground resistance between main ground system, equipmentframes, and system neutral and derived neutral points.

b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main groundsystem resistance by 0.50 ohm.

3.08 GROUND FAULT SYSTEMS

A. Inspection and testing limited to:

1. Zero sequence grounding systems.2. Residual ground fault systems.



B. Visual and Manual Inspection:

1. Neutral main bonding connection to ensure:a. Zero sequence sensing system is grounded ahead of neutral

disconnect link.b. Ground strap sensing system is grounded through sensing device.c. Neutral ground conductor is solidly grounded.

2. Verify control power has adequate capacity for system.3. Manually operate monitor panels for:

a. Trip test.b. No trip test.c. Nonautomatic rest.

4. Zero sequence system for symmetrical alignment of core balancetransformers about current carrying conductors.

5. Relay check for pickup and time under simulated ground faultconditions.

6. Verify nameplate identification by device operation.


1. Test system neutral insulation resistance with neutral ground linkremoved; minimum 1 megohm.

2. Determine relay pickup by primary current injection at the sensor. Relaypickup current within plus or minus 10 percent of device dial or fixedsetting.

3. Test relay timing by injecting 300 percent of pick-up current or asspecified by manufacturer. Relay operating time in accordance withmanufacturer’s time-current characteristic curves.

4. Test system operation at 55 percent rated control voltage, if applicable.5. Test zone interlock system by simultaneous sensor current injection and

monitoring zone blocking functions.

3.09 AC INDUCTION MOTORS

A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 5 hp and larger.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Proper electrical and grounding connections.2. Shaft alignment.3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways.4. Operate motor and check for:

a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.b. Overheating.c. Correct rotation.



d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, ormotor inherent protectors for functionability and proper operation.

e. Excessive vibration, in excess of values in NETA ATS,Table 100.10.

5. Check operation of space heaters.


1. Insulation Resistance Tests:a. In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by

NETA ATS, Table 100.1 for:1) Motors 200 hp and less for 1-minute duration with

resistances tabulated at 30 seconds and 60 seconds.b. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values

established by manufacturers.2. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions.3. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load

conditions and nameplate full-load amperes.

3.10 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


1. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.2. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices.3. Proper overload protection for each motor.4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages.5. Proper operation of drawout elements.6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system.7. Check door and device interlocking system by:

a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position.b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED

position.8. Check nameplates for proper identification of:

a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram.b. Pushbuttons.c. Control switches.d. Pilot lights.e. Control relays.f. Circuit breakers.

9. Verify fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to ContractDocuments.



10. Verify current and potential transformer ratios conform to ContractDocuments.

11. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as partof motor control center.

12. Control Wiring:a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective

devices with elementary diagrams.b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling.c. Check for proper conductor identification.d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections.

13. Exercise active components.14. Inspect contactors for:

a. Correct mechanical operations.b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure.c. Correct torque of connections.

15. Compare overload heater rating with full-load current for proper size.16. Compare motor protector and circuit breaker with motor characteristics

for proper size.17. Perform phasing check on double-ended motor control centers to ensure

proper bus phasing from each source.


1. Insulation Resistance Tests:a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with

NETA ATS, Table 100.1.b. Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on

each phase.c. Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for 1 minute

on each phase.d. Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase

with starter contacts closed and protective devices open.e. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.

2. Current Injection through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full-Load Current and Monitor Trip Time:a. Trip time in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.b. Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds.

3. Control Wiring Tests:a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits.b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal board and each

device terminal.c. Insulation resistance test at 1,000V dc on control wiring, except

that connected to solid state components; 1 megohm minimuminsulation resistance.



4. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation.

C. Low Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives:

1. Functional Test:a. Conduct on each controller.b. Inspect controller for electrical supply termination connections,

interconnections, proper installation, and quiet operation.c. Vibration Test:

1) Complete assembly, consisting of motor, load, and flexibleshafting, connected and in normal operation shall notdevelop amplitudes of vibration exceeding limitsrecommended by HIS.

2) Where loads and drives are separated by intermediateflexible shafting, measure vibration both at top motorbearing and at two points on top pump bearing, 90 degreesapart.

d. Record test data for report.2. Performance Test:

a. Conduct on each controller.b. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.c. Test for continuous 12-hour period without malfunction.d. Demonstrate performance by operating continuous period while

varying application load, as input conditions allow, to verifysystem performance.

e. Record test data for report.3. Test Equipment:

a. Use Dranetz, Model No. 626-PA, harmonic distortion monitor andSeries 626 disturbance analyzer or equivalent instrument todocument results.

b. Provide diagnostic plug-in test card complete with instructions,multiposition selector switch, and meters or built-in diagnosticcontrol panel or ROM-based processor for monitoring ac, dc, anddigital signals to assist in troubleshooting and startup of drive.

3.11 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY

A. Provide thermographic survey per NETA ATS Table 100.18 of connectionsassociated with branch feeder conductors No. 4 and larger at each:

1. Low voltage switchgear.2. Low voltage motor control center.3. Panelboard.



B. Provide thermographic survey of feeder conductors No. 4 and largerterminating at:

1. Motors rated 50 hp and larger.2. low voltage disconnect switches.

C. Remove necessary enclosure metal panels and covers prior to performingsurvey.

D. Perform with equipment energized during periods of maximum possibleloading per NFPA 70B, Section 20.17.

E. Do not perform survey on equipment operating at less than 40 percent of ratedload. If plant load is insufficient, perform test with supplemental load bankproducing rated load on item being measured.

F. Use thermographic equipment capable of:

1. Detecting emitted radiation.2. Converting detected radiation to visual signal.3. Detecting 1 degree C temperature difference between subject area and

reference point of 30 degrees C.

G. Temperature Gradients:

1. 3 degrees C to 7 degrees C indicates possible deficiency that warrantsinvestigation.

2. 7 degrees C to 15 degrees C indicates deficiency that is to be correctedas time permits.

3. 16 degrees C and above indicates deficiency that is to be correctedimmediately.

H. Provide written report of:

1. Areas surveyed and the resultant temperature gradients.2. Locations of areas having temperature gradients of 3 degrees C or

greater.3. Cause of heat rise and actions taken to correct cause of heat rise.4. Detected phase unbalance.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS JANUARY 2020 26 20 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 26 20 00 LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section applies to low-voltage AC induction motors, whether or not referenced by a motor-driven equipment specification. If equipment specification section deviates from this section in requirements, such as application, horsepower, enclosure type, mounting, shaft type, or synchronous speed, then those listed requirements shall take precedence over this section.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and

Generators. b. 620, Guide for the Presentation of Thermal Limit Curves for

Squirrel Cage Induction Machines. c. 841, Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry—Premium

Efficiency Severe Duty Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors—Up to and Including 370 kW (500 hp).

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum). b. MG 1, Motors and Generators.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

5. UL: a. 83, Standard for Safety for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and

Cables. b. 674, Standard for Safety for Electric Motors and Generators for

Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. c. 2111, Standard for Safety for Overheating Protection for Motors.


LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS PW\DEN003\708335 26 20 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. CISD-TEFC: Chemical industry, severe-duty enclosure.

B. EXP: Explosion-proof enclosure.

C. Inverter Duty Motor: Motor meeting applicable requirements of NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Parts 30 and 31.

D. Motor Nameplate Horsepower: That rating after any derating required to allow for extra heating caused by the harmonic content in the voltage applied to the motor by its controller.

E. ODP: Open drip-proof enclosure.

F. TEFC: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled enclosure.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Descriptive information. 2. Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 3. Additional Rating Information:

a. Motor power wiring diagram. b. Service factor. c. Locked rotor current. d. No load current. e. Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (for example,

variable torque) and minimum allowable motor speed for that load classification.

f. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and power factor. 4. Enclosure type and mounting (such as, horizontal, vertical). 5. Dimensions and total weight. 6. Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1

and NFPA 70. 7. Bearing type. 8. Bearing lubrication. 9. Bearing life. 10. Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motor thermal protection. 11. Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 12. Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the

motor. 13. Anchorage and bracing data sheets and drawings as required by





1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

2. Factory test reports. 3. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as

required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

4. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. General Electric. 2. MagneTek. 3. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc., Motors and Drives Division. 4. Baldor. 5. U.S. Electrical Motors. 6. TECO-Westinghouse Motor Co. 7. Toshiba International Corp., Industrial Division. 8. WEG Electric Motors Corp.

2.02 GENERAL

A. For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and accessories of a single manufacturer.

B. In order to obtain single source responsibility, use a single supplier to provide drive motor, its driven equipment, and specified motor accessories.

C. Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1.

D. For motors used in hazardous (classified) locations, Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D, and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G provide motors that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark.

E. Provide motors specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with a NEMA design letter classification to fit the application.



F. Lifting lugs on motors weighing 100 pounds or more.

G. Operating Conditions:

1. Maximum ambient temperature not greater than 50 degrees C. 2. Provide motors suitable for operating conditions without reduction in

nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding rated temperature rise. 3. Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

2.03 HORSEPOWER RATING

A. As designated in motor-driven equipment specification.

B. Constant Speed Applications: Brake horsepower of driven equipment at any operating condition not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor.

C. Adjustable Frequency and Adjustable Speed Applications (Inverter Duty Motor): Driven equipment brake horsepower at any operating condition not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor.

2.04 SERVICE FACTOR

A. Inverter-Duty Motors: 1.0 at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

B. Other Motors: 1.15 minimum at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

2.05 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RATING

A. System Frequency: 60 Hz.

B. Voltage Rating:

1. Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment specification:

Voltage Rating

Size Voltage Phase

1/2 hp and smaller 115 1

3/4 hp through 400 hp 460 3

450 hp and larger 4,000 3



C. Suitable for full voltage starting.

D. Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage.

2.06 EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR

A. For all motors except single-phase, under 1 hp, multispeed, short-time rated and submersible motors, or motors driving gates, valves, elevators, cranes, trolleys, and hoists:

1. Efficiency: a. Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59. b. Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with

NEMA MG 1 or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.

2. Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load shall be manufacturer’s standard or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.

2.07 LOCKED ROTOR RATINGS

A. Locked rotor kVA Code F or lower, if motor horsepower not covered by NEMA MG 1 tables.

B. Safe Stall Time: 12 seconds or greater.

2.08 INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Single-Phase, Fractional Horsepower Motors: Manufacturer’s standard winding insulation system.

B. Motors Rated Over 600 Volts: VPI windings in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

C. Three-phase and Integral Horsepower Motors: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment specification, Class B or Class F at nameplate horsepower and designated operating conditions, except provide Class B with Class B rise insulation for EXP and DIR motors.

2.09 ENCLOSURES

A. Conform to NEMA MG 1.

B. TEFC: Furnish with drain hole with porous drain/weather plug.



C. Explosion-Proof (EXP):

1. TEFC listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous locations.

2. Drain holes with drain and breather fittings. 3. Integral thermostat opening on excessive motor temperature in

accordance with UL 2111 and NFPA 70. 4. Terminate thermostat leads in terminal box separate from main terminal

box.

D. Chemical Industry, Severe-Duty (CISD-TEFC): In accordance with Article Special Motors.

2.10 TERMINAL (CONDUIT) BOXES

A. Oversize main terminal boxes for motors.

B. Diagonally split, rotatable to each of four 90-degree positions. Threaded hubs for conduit attachment.

C. Except ODP, furnish gaskets between box halves and between box and motor frame.

D. Minimum usable volume in percentage of that specified in NEMA MG 1, Section 1, Paragraph 4.19 and NFPA 70, Article 430:

Terminal Box Usable Values

Voltage Horsepower Percentage

Below 600 15 through 125 500



Above 600 All sizes 200

E. Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in each terminal box.

F. Coordinate motor terminal box conduit entries versus size and quantity of conduits shown on Drawings.



2.11 BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION

A. Horizontal Motors:

1. 3/4 hp and Smaller: Permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings, or regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs.

2. 1 hp through 400 hp: Regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs.

3. For Direct Drive Equipment: Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life for ball and roller bearings as defined in ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.

4. For Belt Driven Equipment: Minimum 30,000 hours L-10 bearing life for ball and roller bearings as defined in ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.

B. Vertical Motors:

1. Thrust Bearings: a. Antifriction Plate type (Kingsbury) bearing. b. Manufacturer’s standard lubrication 100 hp and smaller. c. Minimum 50,000 hours L-10 bearing life.

2. Guide Bearings: a. Manufacturer’s standard bearing type. b. Manufacturer’s standard lubrication. c. Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life.

C. Oil Lubrication Systems:

1. Oil reservoirs with sight level gauge. 2. Oil fill and drain openings with opening plugs. 3. Provisions for necessary oil circulation and cooling.

D. Inverter Duty Rated Motors Larger than 25 hp, Bearing Isolation: Provide electrically isolated bearings to prevent stray current damage.

2.12 NOISE

A. Measured in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

B. Maximum Sound Level for Motors Controlled by Adjustable Frequency Drive Systems: 3 dBA higher than NEMA MG 1.

2.13 BALANCE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

A. In accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 7.



2.14 EQUIPMENT FINISH

A. Protect Motor for Service Conditions:

1. ODP Enclosures: Indoor industrial atmospheres. 2. Other Enclosures: Outdoor industrial atmospheres, including moisture

and direct sunlight exposure.

B. External Finish: Field painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

C. Internal Finish: Bore and end turns coated with clear polyester or epoxy varnish.

2.15 SPECIAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Screen Over Air Openings: Corrosion-resistant on motors with ODP, WPI, and WPII enclosures meeting requirements for guarded machine in NEMA MG 1, and attached with stainless steel screws.

B. Nameplates:

1. Raised or stamped letters on stainless steel or aluminum. 2. Display motor data required by NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 10.39 and

Paragraph 10.40 in addition to bearing numbers for both bearings. 3. Premium efficiency motor nameplates to display NEMA nominal

efficiency, guaranteed minimum efficiency, full load power factor, and maximum allowable kVAR for power factor correction capacitors.

C. Anchor Bolts: Provide meeting manufacturer’s recommendations and of sufficient size and number for specified seismic condition.

2.16 SPECIAL MOTORS

A. Requirements in this article take precedence over conflicting features specified elsewhere in this section.

B. Chemical Industry, Severe-Duty (CISD-TEFC):

1. In accordance with IEEE 841. 2. TEFC in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 3. Suitable for indoor or outdoor installation in severe-duty applications

including high humidity, chemical (corrosive), dirty, or salty atmospheres.

4. Motor Frame, End Shields, Terminal Box, and Fan Cover: Cast iron.



5. Ventilating Fan: Corrosion-resistant, nonsparking, external. 6. Drain and Breather Fittings: Stainless steel. 7. Nameplate: Stainless steel. 8. Gaskets between terminal box halves and terminal box and motor frame. 9. Extra slinger on rotor shaft to prevent moisture seepage along shaft into

motor. 10. Double shielded bearings. 11. 125,000 hours minimum L-10 bearing life for direct-connected loads. 12. External Finish: Double-coated epoxy enamel. 13. Coated rotor and stator air gap surfaces. 14. Insulation System, Windings, and Connections:

a. Class F insulation, Class B rise or better at 1.0 service factor. b. Multiple dips and bakes of nonhygroscopic polyester varnish.

15. Service Factor: a. At 40 Degrees C Ambient: 1.15. b. At 65 Degrees C Ambient: 1.00.

16. Safe Stall Time Without Injurious Heating: 20 seconds minimum.

C. Severe-duty Explosion-proof: Meet requirements for EXP enclosures and CISD-TEFC motors.

D. Multispeed: Meet requirements for speeds, number of windings, and load torque classification indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.

E. Inverter Duty Motor:

1. Motor Supplied Power by Adjustable Voltage and Adjustable Frequency Drives: Inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA Parts 30 and 31.

2. Provide winding insulation rated 1,600 peak volts, minimum. 3. Meet or exceed NEMA MG 1 corona inception voltage rating. 4. Provide one insulated bearing. See Article Bearings and Lubrication. 5. Suitable for operation over entire speed range indicated. 6. Provide forced ventilation where speed ratio is greater than published

range for motor provided. 7. When installed in Division 1 hazardous (classified) location, provide

motor identified by manufacturer as suitable use with a variable speed drive in a Division 1 location.

8. When installed in Division 2 hazardous (classified) locations, provide motor identified by manufacturer as suitable for use with a variable speed drive in a Division 2 location.



9. Shaft Grounding Device, Motors Larger than 20 hp: Furnish with shaft grounding brush or conductive micro fiber shaft grounding ring solidly bonded to grounded motor frame in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. a. Manufacturers:

1) Grounding Brush: Sohre Turbomachinery, Inc. 2) Grounding Ring: EST-Aegis.

2.17 FACTORY TESTING

A. Tests:

1. In accordance with IEEE 112 for polyphase motors. 2. Routine (production) tests in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Test

multispeed motors at all speeds. 3. For energy efficient motors, test efficiency and power factor at

50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of rated horsepower: a. In accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, and NEMA MG 1,

Paragraph 12.59. and Paragraph 12.60. b. For motors 500 hp and larger where facilities are not available to

test by dynamometer (Test Method B), determine efficiency by IEEE 112, Test Method F.

c. On motors of 100 hp and smaller, furnish certified copy of motor efficiency test report on an identical motor.

B. Test Report Forms:

1. Routine Tests: IEEE 112, Form A-1. 2. Efficiency and power factor by Test Method F, IEEE 112, Forms F-1,

F-2, and F-3. 3. Temperature Test: IEEE 112, Form A-2.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

B. Align motor carefully and properly with driven equipment.

C. Secure equipment to mounting surface with anchor bolts.




A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative at Site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for installation assistance, inspection, equipment testing, and startup assistance for motors larger than 20 hp.

B. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PANELBOARDS JANUARY 2020 26 24 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. National Electrical Contractor’s Association (NECA): 407, Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. 289, Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. c. KS 1, Enclosed Switches. d. PB 1, Panelboards. e. PB 1.1, General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and

Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical

Code (NEC). 4. UL:

a. 67, Standard for Panelboards. b. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. c. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with

Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. d. 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and

Circuit Breaker Enclosures. e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. f. 870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings. g. 943, Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. h. 1699, Standard for Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s data sheets for each type of panelboard, protective device, accessory item, and component.

2. Manufacturer’s shop drawings including dimensioned plan, section, and elevation for each panelboard type, enclosure, and general arrangement.

3. Tabulation of features for each panelboard type to include the following: a. Protective devices with factory settings. b. Provisions for future protective devices.


PANELBOARDS PW\DEN003\708335 26 24 16 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

c. Space for future protective devices. d. Voltage, frequency, and phase ratings. e. Enclosure type. f. Bus and terminal bar configurations and current ratings. g. Provisions for circuit terminations with wire range. h. Short circuit current rating of assembled panelboard at system

voltage. i. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of auxiliary

components. j. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by




2. Manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions. 3. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as



A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this section that are listed and labeled as defined in NEC Article 100.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Square D Co. 4. Siemens.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Provide low voltage panelboards for application at 600V or less in accordance with this section. Provide equipment in accordance with NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and UL 67.



B. Wire Terminations:

1. Provide panelboard assemblies, including protective devices, suitable for use with 75 degrees C or greater wire insulation systems at NFPA 70, 75 degrees C conductor ampacity, and in accordance with UL 486E.

2. Lugs for termination of conductors shall comply with Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

3. Lugs for termination of copper feeder phase and neutral conductors shall be replaceable, bolted mechanical or crimp compression type.

C. Load Current Ratings:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, load current ratings for panelboard assemblies, including bus and circuit breakers, are noncontinuous as defined by NEC. Continuous ratings shall be 80 percent of noncontinuous rating.

2. Where indicated “continuous” or “100 percent”, selected components and protective devices shall be rated for continuous load current at value shown.

D. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Integrated equipment short circuit rating for each panelboard assembly shall be no less than the indicated SCCR.

E. Series-Connected Short Circuit Current Ratings: Panelboards shall be fully rated; application of series-connected device ratings is unacceptable.

2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Overcurrent Device Mounting and Arrangement: Design panelboards to accommodate device installation and replacement without disturbing adjacent devices and without removing main bus.

B. Overcurrent Protective Devices: In accordance with NEMA KS 1, UL 98, and UL 489. Protective devices shall be adapted to panelboard installation.

C. Provisions for Future Overcurrent Device:

1. Provide space, mountings and bus connections such that like device may be installed without additional hardware.

2. Panel openings shall be closed with individual removable cover for each provision for future device.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, “spaces” in panelboards shall be fully equipped provision for future like devices.



4. Provisions for future devices shall be suitable devices rated no less than 60 amperes.

D. Branch Protective Devices:

1. Provide Wire Lug Load Connections: Mechanical or crimp compression type, removable/replaceable, and suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating switch nor conductor ampacity.

2. Provide a nameplate for each circuit, blanks for spares.

2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General: Thermal-magnetic unless otherwise indicated, quick-make, quick-break, molded case, of indicating type showing ON/OFF and TRIPPED positions of operating handle. Circuit breakers shall comply with Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

B. Bus Connection: Bolt-on circuit breakers in 480Y/277-volt, and plug-in circuit breakers in 208Y/120 and 240/120-volt panelboards.

C. Trip Mechanism:

1. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. 2. Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X

to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps. 3. Two and three pole, common trip. 4. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole. 5. Test button on cover. 6. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.

D. Unacceptable Substitution:

1. Do not substitute single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties for multi-pole breakers.

2. Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole spaces.

E. Specialty Breakers:

1. Where indicated, provide breakers with the following features: a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Rated to trip on 5-mA

ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection of personnel). Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker. Breaker shall include push-to-test and reset buttons.



b. Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter (EGFI): Where indicated, equip breaker with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 30-mA ground fault (UL listed for equipment ground fault protection).

c. Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker with arc fault sensor to detect and trip the circuit breakers when an arcing fault occurs (UL 1699 listed).

2.05 ENCLOSURES

A. General:

1. Provide as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

2. Type 1, Type 3R, and Type 3S material code-gauge, hot-dip galvanized sheet steel with reinforced steel frame.

3. Provide surface-mount panelboard from trim with same dimensions as box front.

B. Finish: Rust inhibitor prime followed by manufacturer’s standard gray baked enamel or lacquer.

C. NEMA 250 Type 1 Branch Panelboard Enclosure:

1. Secure front trim to box with concealed trim clamps. 2. Overlap flush panelboards front trims with box nominal 3/4 inch on all

sides. 3. Provide door in panelboard front trim, with concealed hinges, to access

protective device operating handles. 4. Provide multi-point latching for doors over 30 inches in height. 5. Door Lock: Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock; all panelboards

keyed alike, with two milled keys each lock. 6. Circuit Directory: Metal frame with transparent plastic face and

enclosed card, mounted inside each panel door.

2.06 BUSSING AND TERMINAL BARS

A. Bus:

1. Material: Copper full sized throughout length. 2. Provide for mounting of future protective devices along full length of

bus regardless of number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and tap as required for current and future positions.



B. Equipment Ground Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of ground conductors, and bonded to box.

1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions.

2. Provide individual termination points for all other grounding conductors such as feeder, grounding electrode, etc.

C. Neutral Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of neutral conductors, and isolated from box.

1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions.

2. Provide individual termination points for all other neutral conductors.

D. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances for future protective device ampere ratings indicated.

2.07 MINI-POWER CENTER (MPC)

A. General: Transformer, primary and secondary main circuit breakers, and secondary panelboard section enclosed in NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure.

B. Transformer:

1. Type: Dry, self-cooled, encapsulated. 2. Insulation: Manufacturer’s standard, with UL 1561 temperature rise. 3. Full capacity, 2-1/2 percent voltage taps, two above and two below

normal voltage. 4. Primary Voltage: As shown on Drawings. 5. Secondary Voltage: As Shown on Drawings.

C. Panelboard: UL 489, fully-rated.

1. Type: Thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, indicating, with noninterchangeable molded case circuit breakers.

2. Number and Breaker Ampere Ratings: Refer to Panelboard Schedule.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Square D Co.



2.08 SPECIAL FEATURES

A. General: Where indicated on Drawings or schedules, provide special features as specified.

B. Surge Arresters:

1. Provide protective device within panelboard as disconnecting means and short circuit protection per manufacturer’s recommendation.

2. Provide factory mounting within panelboard utilizing UL-recognized mounting device.

C. Unless indicated otherwise, provide direct bus-connected and factory-installed SPDs inside distribution equipment.

D. SPD Operating Conditions: Capable of performing at ambient temperatures between minus 40 degrees C and 60 degrees C, at relative humidity ranging from 0 percent to 95 percent, and at altitudes ranging from sea level to 12,000 feet.

E. Connect SPDs through a fused switch or circuit breaker as selected by manufacturer. Provide overcurrent protection to allow full surge handling capabilities and afford safety protection from thermal overloads and short circuits.

F. SPD Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): No less than the SCCR of distribution equipment.

G. Design SPD devices to protect all modes (L-L, L-N, L-G, N-G) of electrical system being used.

H. Power Filter: Include a high-frequency extended range power filter for each SPD complimentary listed to UL 1283 as an electromagnetic interference filter.

I. Provide SPDs with the following monitoring and diagnostics:

1. LED-type indication lights to show normal and failed status of each protected phase.

2. Surge event counter. 3. Form C dry contact which operates when unit fails.

J. Provide UL Type 2 SPDs.



K. EMI/RFI Noise Suppression: Minus 50 dB attenuation at 100 kHz, tested per MIL-STD 220C.

L. Voltage Protection Rating (VPR):

Voltage Rating L-N N-G L-G L-L

208Y/120 800 800 800 1200

480Y/277 1200 1200 1200 2000

240 ∆ -- -- 1200 1200

480 ∆ -- -- 2000 2000

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.1, and manufacturers’ written installation instructions.

B. Install securely, plumb, in-line and square with walls.

C. Install top of cabinet trim 78 inches above floor, unless otherwise shown. Install cabinet so tops of protective device operating handles are no more than 78 inches above the floor.

D. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle and wrap with nylon wire ties.

G. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish.

H. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard.

I. Provide engraved identification for each protective device.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL JANUARY 2020 26 24 19 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 26 24 19 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which shall be followed for this section:

1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). b. C37.20.7, Guide for Testing Metal Enclosed Switchgear Rated up

to 38 kV for Internal Arcing Faults. 2. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 402, Standard for

Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum). b. ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements. c. ICS 2, Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated

600 Volts. d. ICS 2.3, Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600V.

e. ICS 18, Motor Control Centers. f. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment

Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical

Code (NEC). 5. UL:

a. 98, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. b. 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and

Circuit Breaker Enclosures. c. 845, Motor Control Centers.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

B. N.C.: Normally Closed.

C. N.O.: Normally Open.

D. SPD: Surge Protection Device.


LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL PW\DEN003\708335 26 24 19 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Descriptive information. 2. Itemized Bill of Material. 3. Dimensional drawings, including for individual cubicles. 4. Front Panel Elevations, including adjustments to existing motor control

centers. 5. Conduit entrance locations. 6. Bus Data: Provide means and product data for attachment to existing

MCC bus. 7. Protective Devices: Copies of time-current characteristics. 8. Communications protocol setup and parameter setting information for

plant control system communication programming. 9. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by

Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 10. Anchoring instructions and details. 11. Typed Tabulation:

a. Motor name; tag (equipment) numbers as shown on Drawings. b. Motor horsepower. c. Nameplate full load current. d. Measured load current and voltage. e. Overload model number and setting. f. Protective device trip settings. g. Manufacturer’s solid state starter switch or dip switch or program

settings. h. Attach above typed, tabulated data to a copy of starter

manufacturer’s overload relay or setting selection tables for starters provided.

12. Individual control diagrams for each motor or controlled equipment. 13. One-line diagrams. 14. Schematic (elementary) diagrams. 15. Outline diagrams. 16. Individual Interconnection diagrams.



2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3. Factory test reports, certified.



4. Control System Network Interface Testing Report, in accordance with Article Equipment Communications Testing (ECT) of Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.

5. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Provide products manufactured within scope of UL that conform to UL Standards and have applied UL Listing Mark.

B. Components and structures required to be assembled outside of the manufacturer’s facility due to equipment not being the end product of one manufacturer, per Specifications, shall be by a UL 508 certified facility.


A. Shipping Splits: Established by Contractor to facilitate ingress of equipment to final installation location within building.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section manufactured by:

1. Allen-Bradley. 2. Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Like Items of Equipment: End product of one manufacturer, unless otherwise specified.

B. Make adjustments necessary to wiring, conduit, disconnect devices, motor starters, branch circuit protection, and other affected material or equipment to accommodate motors actually provided under this Contract.

C. Controllers: NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, Class A.

D. Control Transformer:

1. Two winding, 120-volt secondary, primary voltage to suit. 2. Two current-limiting fuses for primary circuit.



3. One fuse in secondary circuit with blown fuse indicator. 4. Mount within starter unit.

E. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

F. Lifting lugs on equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds.

G. Anchor Bolts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

H. Seismic Zone and Importance Factor: As specified in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

I. Operating Conditions:

1. Ambient Temperature: Maximum 45 degrees C. 2. Altitude: Above sea level. 3. Equipment to be fully rated.

J. Enclosures: In accordance with NEMA 250.

K. Equipment Finish:

1. Electrocoating process applied over rust-inhibiting phosphated base coating.

2. Exterior Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

2.03 SEPARATELY MOUNTED MOTOR CONTROL

A. Manually Operated Starter, Fractional Horsepower:

1. Rating: 16 amperes continuous at 277 volts maximum. 2. Single-phase, nonreversing, full voltage with overload protection. 3. Toggle operated. 4. Enclosure: Per the area classification and material selection table on

Drawings. 5. Neon Light: Red. 6. Handle guard/lock-off attachment.

B. Manually Operated Starter, Integral Horsepower:

1. Rating: Horsepower rated to maximum of 10 horsepower at 600 volts with overload protection.

2. Single-phase or three-phase, nonreversing, full voltage. 3. Control: Pushbutton. 4. Enclosure: As shown on Drawings.



5. Locking in OFF position. 6. Two spare auxiliary, field-changeable contacts.

C. Combination Full-Voltage, Magnetic Starter:

1. Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volts, UL labeled for 22,000 amperes at 480 volts short circuit capacity with overload protection.

2. Three-phase, nonreversing, full voltage. 3. Control: As shown on Drawings. 4. Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector. 5. Enclosure: As shown on Drawings. 6. Pilot Lights: Red–ON and Green–OFF. 7. Padlockable operating handle, capable of up to three locks.

D. Thermal Motor Overload Protection:

1. Inverse-time-limit characteristic. 2. Heater: Bimetallic overload, adjustable trip, or directly heated melting

alloy, ratchet principle type element. 3. Relay Trip: Quick, Class 10. 4. Manual reset. 5. Provide in each ungrounded phase. 6. Mount within starter unit.

2.04 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

A. General:

1. In accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 18, and UL 845 for new structures and UL 508 for existing structures.

2. Voltage Rating: As shown. 3. Short Circuit Rating: Match existing enclosure as shown on Drawings

amperes rms symmetrical at 480 volts for entire motor control center as a complete assembly.

4. Main and branch circuit breakers, controllers, wire connections, and other devices to be front mounted and accessible, unless otherwise noted.

5. NEMA ICS 18, Part 3. a. Class: I. b. Type: A.



B. Enclosure:

1. Type: Match existing motor control center structure. 2. Vertical Section Standard Indoor Dimensions for NEMA 1 Type:

a. Nominal, 90 inches high, 20 inches wide, 21 inches deep. b. Alternative width dimensions of 24 inches and 30 inches are

acceptable for oversize devices or panels. c. Do not exceed space shown.

3. Construction: a. Sheet steel reinforced with channel or angle irons. b. Butt sections flush, end-to-end against similar section without

bolts, nuts, or cover plates causing interference. c. Removable top cover plates and bottom cover plates. d. Removable plates on end panels for future bus extension.

4. Section Mounting: Removable formed-steel channel sills and lifting angles. a. Wiring Compartment: Match existing motor control center

manufacturer arrangement. 5. Terminal board compartment at unit space indicated with 20 percent

spare terminals. 6. Unit Compartment: Individual compartments separated by steel barriers

for each starter, feeder, or other unit capable of being wired from front without unit removal.

7. Compartment Doors: Separate hinged doors for each starter, feeder, or other unit.

8. Door Interlocking: Mechanically interlock starter and feeder doors so doors cannot be opened with unit energized. Provide defeater mechanism to allow intentional access and energizing at any time by qualified individual.

9. External disconnect handles with ON/OFF and trip positions showing, padlockable in OFF position with up to three-lock capability.

10. Cable Entrance: Control and feeder circuits enter from top and bottom. 11. Bus: Connect to existing bus of existing motor control center.

C. Bus:

1. Horizontal Power Bus: a. Three-phase tin-plated, entire width of control center, rated as

shown. b. Construct to allow future extension of additional sections. c. Pressure type solderless lugs for each incoming line cable. d. Isolated from top horizontal wireway.

2. Vertical Power Bus: a. Three-phase tin-plated, full height of section, rated 300 amperes.



b. Sandwich type bus insulation providing deadfront construction with starter units removed except for bus stab openings.

c. Insulated and isolated barrier, complete with shutters. 3. Ground Bus: Copper, bare, rated 300 amperes, entire width of control

center and in each vertical wireway. 4. Bus Bracing: Match existing.

D. Motor Controller Unit:

1. Provide indicated individual components and control devices including pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, control relays, time delay relays, and elapsed time meters as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

2. Construction: a. Drawout combination type with stab connections for starters

NEMA ICS, Size 5 and smaller. b. Bolt-on combination type with cable connection to riser for

starters NEMA ICS, Size 6 and larger. c. Readily interchangeable with starters of similar size. d. Pull-apart unit control wiring terminal boards capable of accepting

up to 2#14 AWG wires minimum on all units. 3. Motor Controller Communications:

a. Communicate the following commands and status with the plant control system via the Ethernet/IP: 1) Receive Commands:

a) RUN/STOP. b) SPEED (Adjustable Frequency Drives Only).

2) Status Feedback: a) STOPPED/RUNNING. b) LOCAL/REMOTE. c) SPEED (Adjustable Frequency Drives Only). d) FAIL. e) Current. f) Line Voltage.

b. Communication Devices: Connect to the Plant Control System as shown on the Network Block Diagrams in the Contract Documents.

4. Starters: a. NEMA ICS 18, standard rating, except none smaller than

NEMA ICS, Size 1. b. Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volt, UL labeled for

65,000 amperes at 480 volts short circuit capacity with overload protection.

c. Three-phase, nonreversing, unless specified otherwise.



d. Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector. e. Combination Full Voltage, Magnetic Starter:

1) Control: As shown on Drawings. 2) Pilot Lights: Red–ON and Green–OFF.

f. Combination Adjustable Frequency Drive, Solid State Starter: Drives as specified in Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System.

g. Padlockable operating handle when de-energized with up to three-lock capability.

h. Unit door interlocked to prevent opening when disconnect is in CLOSED position.

i. Mechanical interlocked to prevent placing disconnect in ON position when unit door is open.

j. Minimum Dimensions: 12 inches high by full section width, less vertical wireway.

5. Adjustable Frequency Drive: As defined in Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives. a. Individual cubicles able to be installed in existing Eaton structures

via UL 508 certified facility. b. Provide extension and mounting kits as required to accommodate

adjustable frequency drives. 6. Disconnecting Device:

a. As indicated. b. Padlockable in OPEN position for up to three locks.

7. Circuit Breaker: a. Meet requirements of UL 489. b. Molded case with manufacturer’s recommended trip setting for

maximum motor protection. c. Thermal-magnetic trip. d. Tripping indicated by operating-handle position. e. Interrupting capacity required for connection to system with short-

circuit capacity indicated. 8. Thermal Motor Overload Protection:

a. Inverse-time-limit characteristic. b. Heater: Bimetallic overload, adjustable trip, or directly heated

melting alloy, ratchet principle type element. c. Relay Trip: Quick, Class 10. d. Manual reset. e. Provide in each ungrounded phase. f. Mount within starter unit.

9. Motor Thermal Protector Interface: Manual-reset interposing relay for connection to motor-mounted thermal protector system.



10. Ground Fault Protection: Where indicated and as specified in Paragraph Main Protective Device and Feeder Units, except provide instantaneous operation device.

E. Control Unit:

1. Disconnecting Device: Pull-apart terminal blocks capable of de-energizing external source control circuits in unit.

2. Control Devices: As indicated and as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

3. Control Wiring: a. Copper, 14 AWG, minimum. b. Permanent sleeve type markers with wire numbers applied to each

end of wires. c. Terminate wires using insulated locking fork or ring type crimp

terminals. d. Terminate current transformer leads on shorting type terminal

blocks.

F. Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches, Elapsed Time Meters, Control Relays, Time-Delay Relays, and Reset Timers: As specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

G. Nameplates:

1. As specified in Section 26 05 02, Basic Electrical Requirements. 2. Provide for each motor control center and each unit. 3. Engrave with inscription shown on single-line diagram. 4. Provide blank nameplates on spaces for future units. 5. Attach with stainless steel panhead screws on face of control center.


A. Factory Testing:

1. Applicable Standards: NEMA ICS 18, UL 845, and NEC Article 430, Part VIII.

2. Perform standard factory inspection and tests in accordance with NEMA requirements to verify components have been designed to Specification, assembled in accordance with applicable standards, and each unit functions in accordance with electrical diagrams.

3. Actual operation shall be performed wherever possible. Otherwise, inspect and perform continuity checks.

4. Verify component devices operated correctly in circuits as shown on diagrams or as called for in Specifications.



5. Control Circuits and Devices: a. Energize circuit at rated voltage. b. Operate control devices. c. Perform continuity check.

6. Equipment: Verify devices functioned by energizing potential to rated values with connection to devices made at outgoing terminal blocks.

7. Perform dielectric tests on primary circuits and equipment, except potential transformers. a. Tests: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-around with 60-cycle test

voltages applied for 1 second at 2,640 volts. 8. Verify equipment passed tests and inspection. 9. Provide standard factory inspection and test checklists, and final

certified and signed test report.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install equipment in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, IEEE C2, NECA 402, Submittals, and manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

2. Secure equipment to mounting pads with anchor bolts of sufficient size and number adequate for specified seismic conditions.

3. Install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall. 4. Coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary feeders. 5. Grout mounting channels into floor or mounting pads. 6. Retighten current-carrying bolted connections and enclosure support

framing and panels to manufacturer’s recommendations. 7. Motor Data:

a. Provide typed, self-adhesive label attached inside each motor starter enclosure door displaying the following information: 1) Motor served by tag number and equipment name. 2) Nameplate horsepower. 3) Motor code letter. 4) Full load amperes. 5) Service factor. 6) Installed overload relay catalog number.

B. Circuit Breakers:

1. Field adjust trip settings of motor starter magnetic-trip-only circuit breakers.



2. Adjust to approximately 11 times motor rated current. 3. Determine motor rated current from motor nameplate following

installation.

C. Thermal Overload Relay:

1. Select and install overload relays and apply settings after actual nameplate full-load current rating of motor has been determined.

2. Initial Settings: In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.


A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for the following services at Job Site or classroom as designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:

1. 1/2 person-day for installation assistance, and inspection of installation. 2. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing. 3. 1 person-day for plant startup. 4. 1/2 person-day for training of Owner’s personnel.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 WIRING DEVICES JANUARY 2020 26 27 26 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

2. Federal Specifications (FS): a. W-C-596G, General Specification for Connector, Electrical,

Power. b. W-S-896F, Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted

(General Specification). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits.

b. C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits.

4. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 1, Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.

5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. FB 11, Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors of the Pin and Sleeve

Type for Hazardous Locations. c. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. d. WD 6, Wiring Devices – Dimensional Specifications.


7. UL: a. 498, Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. b. 508, Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. c. 943, Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. d. 1010, Standard for Safety for Receptacle-Plug Combinations for

Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. e. 1436, Standard for Safety for Outlet Circuit Testers and Similar

Indicating Devices. f. 1449, Standard for Safety for Surge Protective Devices (SPD).


WIRING DEVICES PW\DEN003\708335 26 27 26 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer’s product data for wiring devices.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SWITCHES

A. Switch, General Purpose:

1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-S-896F. 2. Totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switch and screw terminal. 3. Rivetless one-piece brass or copper alloy contact arm with silver alloy

contact. 4. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent

lamp loads. 5. Rating: 20 amps, 120/277 volts. 6. Automatic grounding clip and integral grounding terminal on mounting

strap. 7. Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices

where indicated: a. Three-way and four-way.

8. Manufacturers and Products, Industrial Grade: a. Cooper Arrow Hart; AH1220 Series. b. Bryant; 4901 Series. c. Hubbell; 1221 Series. d. Leviton; 1221 Series.

B. Switch, Motor Rated:

1. Type: Two-pole or three-pole, manual motor starting/disconnect switch without overload protection.

2. UL 508 listed. 3. Totally enclosed snap-action switch. Quick-make, slow-break design

with silver alloy contacts. 4. Minimum General Purpose Rating: 30 amperes, 600V ac. 5. Minimum Motor Ratings:

a. 2 horsepower for 120V ac, single-phase, two-pole. b. 3 horsepower for 240V ac, single-phase, two-pole. c. 15 horsepower for 480V ac, three-phase, three-pole.

6. Screw-type terminal. 7. Lockable.



8. Manufacturers and Products: a. Cooper Arrow Hart. b. Hubbell Bryant; HBL78 Series. c. Leviton.

2.02 RECEPTACLES

A. Receptacle, General Purpose:

1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-C-596G. 2. Duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding type with screw type wire

terminals. 3. Impact resistant nylon cover and body, with finder grooves in face,

unless otherwise indicated. 4. One-piece mounting strap with integral ground contact (rivetless

construction). 5. Contact Arrangement: Contact to be made on two sides of each inserted

blade without detent. 6. Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps, unless

otherwise indicated. 7. Size: For 2-inch by 4-inch outlet box. 8. Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices

where indicated: a. Listed weather-resistant per NEC 406.8 for installation in damp or

wet locations. 9. Industrial Grade Manufacturers and Products:

a. Cooper Arrow Hart; 5362 Series. b. Hubbell Bryant; HBL5362 Series. c. Leviton; 5362 Series.

B. Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter:

1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle. 2. Listed Class A to UL 943, tripping at 5 mA. 3. Rectangular smooth face with push-to-test and reset buttons. 4. Listed weather-resistant per NEC 406.8 for installation in damp or wet

locations. 5. Feed-through Capability: 20 amps. 6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Hubbell Bryant; GFTR20 Series. b. Cooper Arrow Hart; WRVGF20 Series. c. Leviton; 7899 Series.



C. Receptacle, Corrosion-Resistant:

1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle. 2. Nickel coated metal parts. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Hubbell Bryant; HBL53CM62 Series. b. Leviton; 53CM-62 Series. c. Cooper Arrow Hart; 5362CR Series.

2.03 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION DEVICES

A. Wiring devices for hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010.

B. Switch:

1. Industrial grade, totally enclosed, ac type, with tumbler switch. 2. Capable of three-way or four-way operation where indicated on

Drawings. 3. Rating: 20 amps at 120/277 volts. 4. Material: Cast aluminum back body and cover. 5. Hazardous Area Ratings: NEMA 7D, suitable for Class I, Group C and

Group D locations. 6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Killark; XS Series. b. Appleton; EDS Series.

C. Switch, Motor Rated:

1. Enclosed manual motor starter-type, three-pole, nonreversing without overloads.

2. Minimum Motor Rating: 10 horsepower, 480V ac, three-phase, three-pole.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 7. 4. Operator: External handle with padlocking provisions. 5. Manufacturer and Product: Eaton; Type B101.

D. Receptacles, General:

1. Contain integral switch which must be closed to energize circuit. 2. Design shall permit only an approved plug to be energized.

a. Actuation of switch shall require plug be inserted and rotated approximately 45 degrees.

b. Plug shall lock into this position preventing unintended disengagement.



c. To remove, plug shall be turned opposite direction as engagement and pulled straight out.

E. General Purpose Receptacle, Explosion Proof, 125 Volts, 20 Amps:

1. Dead front, interlocked, circuit breaking. 2. Receptacle Cover: Spring loaded closes when plug is removed. 3. Enclosure: Corrosion-resistant, aluminum alloy with less than

0.4 percent copper. 4. Finish: Electrostatically applied and baked powder epoxy/polyester. 5. External Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Switch Chamber: Factory sealed to contain switch’s arcing components 7. Hazardous Area Ratings: Suitable for Class I, Division 2 NEMA 7D. 8. Provide matching plug with each receptacle. 9. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Ark Guard 2, Series ENR. b. EGS/Appleton Electric; U-Line. c. Killark, a division of Hubbell Inc.; UGR/UGP.

F. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Explosion-Proof:

1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Hazardous Area Ratings: NEMA 7D suitable for Class I, Group C and Group D locations.

3. Provide matching plug with each receptacle. 4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Killark; Acceptor Series UGFI. b. Appleton; EFSXXX-2023GFI.

2.04 DEVICE PLATES

A. Sectional type plate not permitted.

B. Nylon:

1. Material: Specification grade, 0.10-inch minimum thickness, noncombustible, thermosetting.

2. Color: To match associated wiring device. 3. Mounting Screw: Oval-head metal, color matched to plate.

C. Stainless Steel:

1. Material: Specification grade, one-piece, 0.040-inch nominal thickness stainless steel.



2. Finish: ASTM A167, Type 302/304, satin. 3. Mounting Screw: Oval-head, finish matched to plate.

D. Cast Metal:

1. Material: Copper-free aluminum, with gaskets. 2. Screw: Oval-head stainless steel.

E. Sheet Steel:

1. Finish: Zinc electroplate. 2. Screws: Oval-head stainless steel. 3. Manufacturers:

a. Appleton. b. Crouse-Hinds.

F. Weatherproof:

1. Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 1: a. Gasketed, cast-aluminum, with individual cap over each

receptacle opening. b. Mounting Screw and Cap Spring: Stainless steel. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Crouse-Hinds; Type WLRD-1. 2) Appleton; Type FSK-WRD.

2. Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 2: a. UL listed for wet location while in use. b. Polycarbonate cover. c. Locking type. d. Manufacturer and Product: TayMac; Type Multi-Mac.

3. Switch: a. Gasketed, cast-metal or cast-aluminum, incorporating external

operator for internal switch. b. Mounting Screw: Stainless steel. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Crouse-Hinds; DS-181 or DS-185. 2) Appleton; FSK-1VTS or FSK-1VS.

G. Raised Sheet Steel: 1/2-inch high zinc- or cadmium-plated steel designed for one-piece drawn type sheet steel box.



2.05 FINISHES

A. Wiring device catalog numbers specified in this section do not designate device color. Unless otherwise indicated, or required by code, provide colors as specified below.

B. Wiring Device: Gray.

C. Special purpose and hazardous location devices may be manufacturer’s standard color (black).

D. Corrosion-resistant receptacle may be manufacturer’s standard color (yellow).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Ensure device and its box are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device box and do not cut holes for box with router that is guided by riding against outside of box.

2. Keep outlet box free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device box in brick or block wall such that cover plate does not cross a joint, unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated or directed to cross joint, trowel joint flush with face of wall.

4. Install wiring device after wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. Length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.



4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and

foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided outlet box is

large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in length.

5. Use torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

6. When conductors larger than 12 AWG are installed on 15-amp or 20-amp circuits, splice 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

7. Tighten unused terminal screws on device. 8. Device Plates:

a. Do not use oversized or extra deep plate. b. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet box when standard device

plate does not fit flush or does not cover rough wall opening.

3.02 SWITCH INSTALLATION

A. Switch, General Purpose:

1. Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. 2. Install with switch operation in vertical position. 3. Install single-pole, two-way switch such that toggle is in up position

when switch is on.

B. Switch, Motor Rated:

1. Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. 2. Install with switch operation in vertical position such that toggle is in up

position when ON. 3. Install within sight of motor when used as disconnect switch.



C. Occupancy Sensor, Wall Switch: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.03 RECEPTACLE INSTALLATION

A. Duplex Receptacle:

1. Install with grounding slot up, except where horizontal mounting is shown, in which case install with neutral slot up.

2. Ground receptacle to box with grounding wire only. 3. Weatherproof Receptacle:

a. Install in cast metal box. b. Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle

opening. 4. Ground Fault Interrupter: Install feed-through model at locations where

ground fault protection is specified for “downstream” conventional receptacles.

5. Special-Purpose Receptacle: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 DEVICE PLATE INSTALLATION

A. Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure tight fit to box.

B. Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surface without use of mat or similar material. Plaster fillings will not be acceptable.

C. Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box, unless plate has no sharp corners or edges.

D. Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch.

E. Type (Exterior):

1. Switch: Weatherproof. 2. Receptacle in Damp Location: Weatherproof Type 1. 3. Receptacle in Wet Location: Weatherproof Type 2.

F. Type (Interior):

1. Nylon. 2. Surface Mounted, Metal Box:

a. General Purpose Areas (Dry, Nonprocess): Sheet steel. b. Other Areas: Cast metal.



3. Surface Mounted, Aluminum Box: a. General Purpose Areas: Stamped. b. Other Areas: Cast metal.

4. Surface Mounted, Sheet Steel Box: Raised sheet steel. 5. Surface Mounted, Cast Box: Cast. 6. Surface Mounted, Nonmetallic Box: Manufacturer’s standard. 7. Receptacle Shown as Weatherproof on Drawings: Weatherproof Type 1.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Use tape labels for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles in dry indoor locations.

1. Degrease and clean device plate surface to receive tape labels. 2. Use 3/16-inch Kroy black letters on white background, unless otherwise

indicated. 3. Identify panelboard and circuit number from which item is served on

face of plate.

B. Identify conductors with durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections, and prepare test reports.

B. Test Instrument for 125-Volt 20-Amp Receptacle: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

C. Using test plug, verify device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

D. Line Voltage Range: 105 volts to 132 volts.

E. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-Amp Load: Less than 6 percent; 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.

F. Ground Impedance: 2 ohms, maximum.

G. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

H. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE JANUARY 2020 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 26 29 23 - 1

SECTION 26 29 23 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA): 359-A-1, Special Colors. 2. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

b. 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems.

c. C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

4. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum). b. CP 1, Shunt Capacitors. c. MG 1, Motors and Generators. d. WC 57, Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extensions, and

Instrumentation Cables. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 79, Electrical Standard

for Industrial Machinery.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Terms that may be used in this section:

1. AFD: Adjustable frequency drive. 2. CMOS: Complementary metal oxide semiconductor. 3. CSI: Current source inverter. 4. EMU: Energy monitoring unit. 5. GTO: Gate turn-off thyristor. 6. MPR: Motor protection relay. 7. MTBF: Mean time between failure. 8. PWM: Pulse width modulation. 9. ROM: Read only memory. 10. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. 11. RTU: Remote Telemetry Unit.


LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE PW\DEN003\708335 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM JANUARY 2020 26 29 23 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

12. Rated Load: Load specified for equipment. 13. Rated Speed: Nominal rated (100 percent) speed specified for

equipment. 14. TDD: Total demand distortion. 15. THD: Total harmonic distortion. 16. TTL: Transistor transistor logic.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Composite drive/motor efficiency (CE) is defined as ratio of motor shaft kW to drive input kW. AFD system minimum requirements: a. At 60-Hz drive output and 100 percent load, CE equals

92 percent. b. At 50-Hz drive output and 60 percent load CE equals 89 percent. c. At 40-Hz drive output and 30 percent load CE equals 84 percent. d. At 30-Hz drive output and 12.5 percent load CE equals

77 percent. 2. Rated Continuous Operation Capacity: Not less than 1.15 times full load

current rating of driven motor, as indicated on motor nameplate, and suitable for continuous operation at continuous overload which may be imposed on motor by driven pump operating over specified speed range.

B. Design Requirements:

1. Drive system consisting of adjustable frequency controller, drive motor, auxiliary items, and components necessary for complete operating system.

2. Other equipment is being powered from same bus as adjustable frequency drives. Ensure proper operation of drives and other loads under normal and emergency conditions.

3. Furnish AFDs rated on basis of actual motor full load nameplate current rating times the service factor. a. See motor driven equipment sections.

4. Drive System: Convert incoming three-phase, 60-Hz ac power to variable voltage, adjustable frequency output for adjustable speed operation of a standard ac induction squirrel-cage motor, using pulse-width-modulation (PWM) technique to produce adjustable frequency output.

5. System rated for continuous industrial duty and suitable for use with NEMA MG 1, Design B motors.



6. Incoming Line Circuit Breaker: Provide positive means of disconnecting incoming power, and overcurrent protection for drive system.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Overall drive system operating data, including efficiencies, input currents, and power factors, at driven equipment actual load and rated system input voltage, at 0, 40, 60, 80, 100, and 110 percent of rated speed.

2. AFD output pulse maximum peak voltage, pulse rise time, and pulse rate of rise including justification for proposed deviation from specified values. Include motor manufacturer’s certification motor insulation will withstand long-term overvoltages caused at motor terminals due to specified output pulse data or proposed deviation from this data.

3. Complete system rating, including nameplate data, continuous operation load capability throughout speed range of 0 percent to 120 percent of rated speed.

4. Complete adjustable frequency controller rating coordinated with motor full load nameplate current rating; list controller special features being supplied.

5. Controller, reactor, dv/dt filter (if applicable), and isolating transformer (if applicable) dimensional drawings; information on size and location of space for incoming and outgoing conduit.

6. Maximum heat dissipation from enclosure. 7. Layout of controller face showing pushbuttons, switches, instruments,

and indicating lights. 8. Complete system operating description. 9. Complete system schematic (elementary) wiring diagrams. 10. Complete system interconnection diagrams between controller, drive

motor, and related components or controls external to system, including wire numbers and terminal board point identification.

11. One-line diagram of system, including component ratings. 12. Description of diagnostic features being provided. 13. Descriptive literature for control devices, such as relays and timers. 14. Itemized bill-of-materials listing system components. 15. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by





1. Statement of Supplier qualifications. 2. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by

Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 5. Factory functional test reports. 6. Certified copy of test report for identical motor tested in accordance

with NEMA MG 1-12.53a and IEEE 112, Test Method B, showing rated load, rated speed efficiency meeting or exceeding specified values; motors not as specified will be rejected.

7. Field test reports. 8. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as


9. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of 1 year and 5 years. Include list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information.

10. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.

11. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Components and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. Allen Bradley; 755 Series. 2. No “or-equals” or substitutions allowed.

2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 degrees F to 104 degrees F.

B. Storage Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to 158 degrees F.

C. Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent relative (noncondensing).



D. Altitude: 0 foot to 3,300 feet.

E. Frequency Stability: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of maximum frequency.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Drive Units:

1. Incorporate switching power supply operating from dc bus, to produce PWM output waveform simulating sine wave and providing power loss ride through of 2 milliseconds at full load, full speed.

2. Current-limiting semiconductor fuses for protection of internal power semiconductors.

3. Employ diode bridge rectifier providing constant displacement power factor of 0.95 minimum at all operating speeds and loads.

4. Use transistors for output section, providing a minimum 97 percent drive efficiency at full speed, full load.

5. Employ dc power discharge circuit so that after removal of input power dc link capacitor voltage level will decay below 50V dc within 1 minute after de-energizing following NEMA CP 1 and NFPA 79. Design dc link capacitor for a MTBF of 5 years.

6. Operate with open circuited output. 7. Input Voltage: 480V ac plus or minus 10 percent. 8. Output Voltage: 0 volt to 480 volts, three-phase, 0-Hz to 66-Hz,

minimum. 9. Maximum peak voltage of PWM AFD output pulse of 1,000 volts, with

pulse rise time of not less than 2 microseconds, and maximum rate of rise of 500 volts per microsecond. Maximum frequency of PWM AFD output pulse (carrier) frequency of 3,000-Hz. Should magnitudes of these characteristics be more stressful to motor insulation than specified values, furnish insulation systems on motors suitable for proposed values.

10. Motor Audible Noise Level: When operating throughout speed range of PWM AFD, no more than 3 dBA above that designated in NEMA MG 1 for same motor operated at constant speed with a 60-Hz supply voltage.

11. Short-Time Overload Capacity: 125 percent of rated load in rms current for 1 minute following full load, full speed operation.

12. Equipment Short-Circuit Rating: Suitable for connection to system with maximum source three-phase, bolted fault, short-circuit available of 42,000 amps rms symmetrical at 480 volts.

13. Furnish drives with 5 percent input line harmonic distortion mitigation mounted within equipment enclosure.

14. Furnish with dv/dt filter on output of drive, mounted within equipment enclosure, where shown on Drawings.



15. Diagnostics: a. Comprehensive for drive adjustment and troubleshooting:

1) Memory battery backup; 100-hour minimum during power loss.

2) Status messages will not stop drive from running but will prevent it from starting.

3) Fault Condition Messages and History: a) First fault protection function to be activated, ability

to store six successive fault occurrences in order. Minimum faults numerically: (1) Overcurrent (time and instantaneous). (2) Overvoltage. (3) Undervoltage (dc and ac). (4) Overtemperature (drive, motor windings, motor

bearing, pump bearing). (5) Serial communication fault. (6) Short-circuit/ground fault (motor and drive). (7) Motor stalled. (8) Semiconductor fault. (9) Microprocessor fault. (10) Single-phase voltage condition.

16. Drive Protection: a. Fast-acting semiconductor fuses. b. Overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent trip. c. Dc undervoltage protection, 70 percent dropout. d. Dc overvoltage protection, 130 percent pickup. e. Overtemperature, drive, inverter, converter, and dc link

components. f. Overtemperature, motor, and pump. g. Single-phase protection. h. Reset overcurrent protection (manual or automatic reset). i. Active current limit/torque limit protection. j. Semiconductor fault protection. k. Short-circuit/ground fault protection. l. Serial communication fault protection. m. Microprocessor fault. n. Surge protection for transient overvoltage (6,000 volts, 80 joule

surge, tested per IEEE C62.41). o. Visual display of specific fault conditions.

17. Operational Features: a. Use manufacturer’s standard unless otherwise indicated. b. Sustained power loss. c. Momentary power loss.



d. Power interruption. e. Power loss ride through (0.1 second). f. Start on the fly. g. Electronic motor overload protection. h. Stall protection. i. Slip compensation. j. Automatic restart after power return (ability to enable/disable

function). k. Critical frequency lockout (three selectable points minimum, by

1.5-Hz steps in 10-Hz bands, to prevent resonance of system). l. Drive maintenance system software for complete programming

and diagnostics. m. Ground fault protection, drive, and motor. n. Operate with no motor connected to output terminals.

B. Rectifier: Three-phase 6-pulse full wave diode bridge rectifier to provide constant dc voltage to drive’s dc bus.

C. Furnish series choke and capacitors on dc bus to reduce ripple in rectifier output and to reduce harmonic distortion reflected into incoming power feeders.

D. Controller: Microprocessor-controller PWM inverter to convert to dc voltage to variable voltage, adjustable frequency, three-phase ac output. Output voltage shall vary proportionally with frequency to maintain constant ratio of volts to hertz up to 60-Hz; above 60-Hz, voltage shall remain constant with drive operating in constant horsepower output mode.

E. Enclosure:

1. Located in existing Eaton/Cutler-Hammer motor control center as shown on Drawings, see Section 26 24 19, Low-Voltage Motor Control. Not to exceed dimensions shown on Drawings. a. Provide kit(s), as needed, to accommodate Allen-Bradley drives in

Eaton motor control centers. 2. Freestanding: See Area Classification and Material Selection Table on

Drawings: a. Gasketed, enclosure for mounting against wall, completely front

accessible, and hinged doors. Properly sized to dissipate heat generated by controller within limits of specified operating conditions (including ambient temperature and ambient airflow). Enclosure not to exceed dimensions shown on Drawings.



3. Cable termination compartment door interlocked main circuit breaker, defeatable (lockable in the open position), emergency stop pushbutton, alphanumeric keypad and display, and operator’s controls. Components and controls specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

4. Wire drive from below and above for power and control wiring. 5. Size forced-ventilation for periodic operation to cool each unit with

maximum room ambient temperature of 95 degrees F. Furnish redundant fans such that if one fan fails remaining fans furnish adequate ventilation for drive when operating at maximum capacity. Furnish filters on ventilation intakes.

6. Wiring: a. Bundle stranded copper wiring neatly with nylon tie wraps or with

continuous plastic spiral binding. b. Label each terminal for permanent identification of leads. c. Identify each wire at each end with imprinted mylar adhesive-

back wire markers. d. Incorporate in as-installed wiring diagrams for wire and terminal

numbers shown. e. Wiring across door hinge, use 19-strand, NEMA WC 57 Class C

stranding looped for proper twist rather than bending at hinge. f. Wire connections internal to panels by crimp-on terminal types. g. For multiple enclosure systems, complete interconnection wiring

with gasketed enclosure openings for wiring. h. Multipoint plug receptacles for control wiring crossing equipment

shipping splits. 7. Selector switches, indicating lights, potentiometers, instruments,

protective devices, and major system components identified by means of mechanically attached, engraved, laminated nameplates.

F. Operator Interface:

1. Controls: a. Mount drive local control on front door of enclosure and include

control switch and membrane type keypad for the following operator functions: 1) START (when in LOCAL mode). 2) STOP (when in LOCAL mode). 3) Speed increase (when in LOCAL mode). 4) Speed decrease (when in LOCAL mode). 5) Parameter mode selection (recall programmed parameters).



6) LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE control selection (in remote, furnish for remote RUN command digital input and speed increase/decrease via remote 4 mA to 20 mA analog signal).

7) Fault reset, manual for faults, except loss of ac voltage which is automatic upon return.

8) RUN/preset speed. 9) Parameter lock, password or key switch lockout of changes

to parameters. 10) Start disable, key switch or programmed code.

2. Control circuit disconnect shall de-energize circuits in units that are not de-energized by main power disconnect device.

3. 120 volts, single-phase, 60-Hz circuits for control power and operator controls from internal control power transformer.

4. Arrange component and circuit such that failure of a single component cannot cause cascading failure(s) of other component(s).

5. Alphanumeric Display: a. During normal operation and routine test, the following

parameters shall be available: 1) Motor current (percent of drive rated current). 2) Output frequency (Hertz). 3) Output voltage. 4) Running time. 5) LOCAL/REMOTE indicator. 6) Status of digital inputs and outputs. 7) Analog input and output values. 8) Output motor current per leg. 9) All test points.

6. Adjustable Parameters: a. Set drive operating parameters and indicate in numeric form.

Potentiometers may not be used for parameter adjustment. Minimum setup parameters available: 1) Frequency range, minimum, maximum. 2) Adjustable acceleration/deceleration rate. 3) Volts per Hertz (field weakening point). 4) Active current limit/torque limit, 0 percent to 140 percent of

drive rating. 5) Adjustable voltage boost (IR compensation). 6) Preset speed (adjustable, preset operating point). 7) Provision for adjustment of minimum and maximum pump

speed to be furnished as function of 4 mA to 20 mA remote speed signal.



G. Signal Interface:

1. Digital Input: a. Accept a remote RUN command contact closure input. b. High temperature contact closure input from field mounted motor

temperature monitoring relay. 2. Digital Output: Furnish three discrete output dry contact closures rated

5 amps at 120V ac. a. DRIVE RUNNING. b. DRIVE FAULT (with common contact closure for all fault

conditions). c. DRIVE IN REMOTE MODE.

3. Analog Input: When LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in REMOTE, control drive speed from remote 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc signal. a. Make provisions for adjustment of minimum and maximum motor

speed which shall result from this signal. b. Factory set this adjustment to comply with operating speed range

designated in driven equipment specifications. c. Frequency resolution shall be 0.1 percent of base speed.

4. Analog Output: Furnish two 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc signals for actual frequency, actual load.

5. Ethernet/IP.

H. Accessories:

1. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible location.

2. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds. 3. Anchor Bolts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

2.04 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Enclosure:

1. Primer: One coat of rust-inhibiting coating. 2. Finish:

a. Interior: One coat white enamel. b. Exterior: One coat manufacturer’s standard gray enamel or

EIA 359-A-1, No. 61. 3. Manufacturer’s standard enamel finish.




A. Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function.

B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all control panels actually furnished.

C. Record test data for report.

D. Functional Test:

1. Perform following tests: a. Test diodes, transistors, and GTOs at a thermal level of

125 degrees C. b. Test TTL and CMOS chips at 70 degrees C. c. Test printed circuit boards while heat cycled to maximum

temperature of 65 degrees C. d. Test run power sections at maximum 40 degrees C for 12 hours

and run with motors for 6 hours. e. Test assembled drive at maximum 40 degrees C and full load, full

speed for 4 hours. f. Test power capacitors and active components. g. Operate controller with motor throughout its specified range, and

at rated power supply load for 1 hour. h. Resonance: When harmonic filters are furnished to meet specified

harmonic distortion requirements, perform analysis and furnish documentary evidence that filter elements do not resonate with remainder of system parameters at harmonic frequencies present.

E. Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

3.02 MANUFACTURERS’ SERVICES


1. Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.



b. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

c. 1/2 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training. d. 1 person-day for facility startup. e. 1/2 person-day for post-startup training of Owner’s personnel.

B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PIPE BONDING AND TEST STATIONS JANUARY 2020 26 42 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 26 42 01 PIPE BONDING AND TEST STATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Wood Preservers’ Association (AWPA): a. C2, Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties, and Mine Ties Preservative

Treatment by Pressure Processes. b. P9, Standards for Solvents and Formulations for Organic

Preservative Systems. 2. NACE International (NACE): RP0169, Control of External Corrosion

on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). b. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. c. WC 70, Nonshielded Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for

the Distribution of Electrical Energy.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Electrical Isolation: Condition of being electrically isolated from other metallic structures (including, but not limited to, piping, reinforcement, casings) and the environment as defined in NACE RP0169.

B. Electrically Continuous Pipeline: Pipeline that has a linear electrical resistance equal to or less than the sum of the resistance of the pipe plus the maximum allowable bond resistance for each joint as specified in this section.

C. Ferrous Metal Pipe: Pipe made of steel or iron, or pipe containing steel or iron as a principal structural material, except reinforced concrete pipe.

D. Foreign-Owned: Buried pipe or cable not specifically owned or operated by Owner.

E. Lead, Lead Wire, Joint Bonds, Pipe Connecting Wires, Cable: Insulated copper conductor; the same as wire.


PIPE BONDING AND TEST STATIONS PW\DEN003\708335 26 42 01 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Catalog cuts and information for products proposed for use.


1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

2. Field Test Reports, including results of insulator testing. 3. Qualifications of Cathodic Protection Specialist.


A. Cathodic Protection Specialist Qualifications: NACE International certified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRES

A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70.

B. Joint Bond:

1. General: Single-conductor, stranded copper wire with 600-volt HMWPE insulation. Supply joint bonds complete with formed copper sleeve on each end of wire.

2. Push-On, Mechanical, or Flanged Joints: 2 AWG wires, 18 inches long. 3. Flexible Coupling Joints: 2 AWG wires, 24 inches long, with two

12-inch-long THHN insulated 12 AWG wire pigtails, as manufactured by Erico Products Inc. (Cadweld), Cleveland, OH.

4. Insulated Flexible Coupling Joints: 8 AWG wire, 18 inches long, with one 12-inch-long THHN insulated 12 AWG wire pigtail.

C. Test Station: Single-conductor, 12 AWG stranded copper with 600-volt TW, THWN, or THHN insulation and single-conductor, 8 AWG stranded copper with 600-volt TW, THWN, or THHN insulation.

D. Insulation Colors: As shown on Drawings.

E. Wire Labels:

1. Materials shall be suitable for permanent identification. 2. Plastic, paper, or cloth markers will not be permitted.



3. Each pipe test wire shall include pipe diameter and pipe type, reference electrode, casing, or galvanic anode, as applicable.

2.02 CATHODIC PROTECTION TEST STATIONS

A. Flush Mounted:

1. Test Box: Concrete body cast with cast-iron ring, with a minimum weight of 55 pounds and minimum dimensions of 8-inch inside diameter and 12 inches long. Furnish extensions as required to penetrate concrete surfaces by 4 inches minimum. Furnish with a 12-pound cast-iron lid with letters “TS” or words “Test Station” cast into lid.

2. Terminal Block: Plastic or glass-reinforced, 1/4-inch-thick laminate terminal board with minimum dimensions of 4 inches by 6 inches. Furnish terminal block with five nickel-plated brass, Type 304 stainless steel or Type 316 stainless steel studs, washers, and lock washers.

3. Manufacturer and Products: Brooks; Models 1RT or 3RT.

B. Post Mounted (Standard):

1. Test Box: Cast aluminum suitable for threaded mounting to a 1-inch or larger rigid galvanized conduit.

2. Terminal Block: Plastic or glass-reinforced laminate, 1/4 inch thick with five terminals. Terminals shall have special heads to keep them from turning or shall be easily accessible from both sides of terminal block without requiring its removal. Terminal studs, washers, and nuts shall be nickel-plated brass, Type 304 stainless steel or Type 316 stainless steel.

3. Mounting Structure: 4-inch by 4-inch by 5-foot-long preservative-treated wood post. Wood post shall be pressure treated with waterborne preservative intended for fresh water or soil contact in accordance with AWPA C2 and AWPA P9.

4. Mounting Hardware: Conduit straps and hardware required to mount test station to post shall be galvanized steel.

5. Manufacturer and Product: Testox; 700 series test station.

2.03 PERMANENT REFERENCE ELECTRODES

A. Prepackaged Copper-Copper Sulfate Reference Electrodes:

1. Material: Permanent type, copper-copper sulfate reference electrode suitable for direct burial with a minimum design life of 15 years.

2. Dimensions: 1-1/2-inch diameter by 6 inches long, minimum.



3. Wire: 12 AWG stranded copper wire with yellow, 600-volt TW, THWN, or THHH insulation. Wire shall be attached to electrode and insulated with manufacturer’s standard connection. Connection shall be stronger than the wire.

4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Borin Manufacturing; Model SRE-007-CUY. b. Electrochemical Devices, Inc.; Model UR-CUG-CW. c. GMC Electrical, Inc.; Model CU-1-UGPC.

2.04 THERMITE WELD MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Thermite weld materials consist of wire sleeves, welders, and weld cartridges according to weld manufacturer’s recommendations for each wire size and pipe or fitting size and material.

2. Welding materials and equipment shall be product of a single manufacturer. Interchanging materials of different manufacturers is not acceptable.

B. Molds: Graphite; ceramic “One-Shot” molds not acceptable.

C. Adapter Sleeves:

1. For 12 AWG, 4 AWG, and 2 AWG wires. 2. Prefabricated factory sleeve joint bonds or bond wires with formed

sleeves made in field are acceptable. Attach field-formed joint bond sleeves with appropriate size and type of hammer die furnished by thermite weld manufacturer.

3. Extend wire conductor 1/4 inch beyond end of sleeve.

D. Cartridges: Cast-iron thermite weld cartridges for cast and ductile iron pipe and fittings.

1. Maximum Cartridge Size: 25 grams for steel and 32 grams for cast and ductile iron materials, respectively.



E. Welders and Cartridges: For attaching copper wire to pipe material:

Pipe Material Weld Type Cartridge Size,

Max.

4 AWG Wire and Smaller:

Steel HA, VS, HC 25 gm

Ductile Iron HB, VH, HE 32 gm

Cast Iron HB, VH, HE 32 gm

2 AWG Joint Bonds:

Steel FS 25 gm

Ductile or Cast Iron FC 32 gm

Concrete Cylinder Pipe HA, GR 32 gm

F. Welding Materials Manufacturers:

1. Erico Products Inc. (Cadweld), Cleveland, OH. 2. Continental Industries, Inc. (Thermo-Weld), Tulsa, OK.

G. Thermite Weld Coating:

1. Thermite Weld Caps: Prefabricated weld cap with coating and suitable primer, such as Handy Cap II with Royston Primer 747, as manufactured by Royston Laboratories, Inc.

2. Use products recommended by pipe or fitting coating manufacturer to repair spot damage at thermite weld connections not covered by standard pipeline coating repair procedure or thermite weld cap.


A. Mastic Coating: TC Mastic (Brush Applied) as manufactured by Tapecoat Co., Evanston, IL.

B. Wire Connectors: One-piece, tin-plated crimp-on lug connector as manufactured by Burndy Co. or Thomas and Betts.

C. Compression Connectors:

1. For in-line, tap, and multisplice furnish “C” taps made of conductive wrought copper, sized to fit wires being spliced.

2. Manufacturer and Product: Burndy; Type “YC.”



D. Silver Brazing Alloy: 15 percent silver content; 1,185 degrees F to 1,300 degrees F melting range.

E. Electrical Tape:

1. Linerless rubber high-voltage splicing tape and vinyl electrical tape suitable for moist and wet environments.

2. Manufacturer and Products: 3M Products; Scotch 130 C and Scotch 88.

2.06 CONCRETE

A. Furnish as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.07 INSULATING JOINTS

A. As specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping – General.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Construct system of pipe connecting wires and pipe joint bonds to form an electrically continuous pipeline, insulating joints, and test stations.

3.02 PIPE JOINT BONDING

A. Electrically bond joints of buried steel and iron pipe, including vault and manhole piping and fittings, and including restrained joints, except joints specified to be threaded, welded, or insulated.

B. Install two joint bond wire assemblies at each joint that requires bonding for pipeline sizes greater than or equal to 12 inch diameter. For pipelines smaller than 12 inches, provide one joint bond wire assembly.

C. Use thermite weld process for electrical connection of wires to pipe and fittings.

D. Test each bonded joint for continuity.

3.03 TEST STATION INSTALLATION

A. Determine location of test stations based on actual site conditions and as approved by Engineer.



B. Locate test stations as shown on Drawings and as follows:

1. Install Type I test station at buried insulated joints.

C. Attach test wires to pipe.

D. Locate flush mounted test stations directly over pipeline, except in areas of heavy traffic conditions. Where heavy traffic conditions exist, locate test stations to side of street.

E. Locate post mounted test stations directly over pipe and at protected locations such as fences, road crossings, and edges of cultivated land.

F. Bury test and reference electrode wires a minimum of 36 inches below finished grade.

G. Make wire connections to test station terminals with crimp-on spade lug terminals, except where solid wire is specified or terminal strips with tubular clamps are used.

H. Wire Labels:

1. Install on conductors in boxes. 2. Position markers in boxes so they do not interfere with operation and

maintenance.

3.04 CONDUITS

A. Secure conduits entering test station boxes with double locknuts, one on outside and one on inside.

B. Install insulated bushings and insulated throat connectors on ends of rigid metallic conduit.

C. Use watertight couplings and connectors. Install and equip boxes and fitting to prevent water from entering conduit or box. Seal unused openings.

3.05 CONCRETE

A. Concrete for flush mounted test stations shall conform to requirements for concrete in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.



3.06 REFERENCE ELECTRODE INSTALLATION

A. Remove plastic or paper wrapper and place reference electrode within pipeline trench excavation 6 inches from below centerline of pipe in a vertical or horizontal position. Install reference electrode within 18 inches of foreign pipelines or as directed by Engineer, between foreign and Owner’s pipeline.

B. Place native trench material around the reference electrodes, 6 inches minimum. Terminate wires in test stations.

3.07 WIRE CONNECTIONS

A. Thermite Weld:

1. Use thermite weld method for electrical connection of copper wire to steel, ductile, and cast-iron surfaces. Observe proper safety precautions, welding procedures, thermite weld material selection, and surface preparation recommended by welder manufacturer. Ensure that pipe or fitting wall thickness is of sufficient thickness that thermite weld process will not damage integrity of pipe or fitting wall or protective lining.

2. After weld connection has cooled, remove slag, visually inspect, and physically test wire connection by tapping with a hammer; remove and replace defective connections.

3. On pipe and fittings with dielectric linings, make weld connection on shop tab provided or on a thick metal section to minimize damage to lining and coating. After weld is made, coat weld with coating repair material.

4. Install prefabricated thermite weld cap over each completed connection. Repair exposed metal surfaces not covered by thermite weld cap in accordance with coating manufacturer’s recommendations. Repair damage to pipe lining in accordance with lining applicator’s recommendations. For thermite weld connections to pipe, apply insulating resin, then specified joint coating at each completed connection. Repair exposed metal surfaces not covered by resin or pipe coating in accordance with coating manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Make wire connections to concrete cylinder pipe by thermite welding to shop welded steel studs or plates provided on pipe for this purpose. Clean steel studs to bright metal before thermite welding. Coat completed wire connection with cement mortar.



B. Silver Solder:

1. Use for electrical connection of copper wire to thin-wall steel tubing (0.035-inch wall and less) or copper or stainless steel pipe.

2. Before connection is made, flux area around connection with a suitable flux for materials being welded.

3. Weld copper sleeved wire to fluxed area with silver brazing alloy in such a manner that completed connection is free of cracks or crevices.

4. After connection is completed, remove remaining flux by wire brushing.

3.08 WIRE INSULATION REPAIR

A. Handle wires with care. Splices for damage to wire insulation shall be required by spirally wrapping (50 percent overlap, minimum) with two coats of high-voltage rubber splicing tap and two layers of vinyl electrical tape. Make wire splices with suitable sized compression connectors or mechanically secure and solder with rosin cored 50/50 solder. Splices shall be approved by Engineer.

3.09 INSULATED JOINTS

A. Install insulated joints to electrically isolate pipeline from other structures as specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General.


A. Electrical Continuity Testing:

1. Provide necessary equipment and materials, and make electrical connections to pipe as required to test continuity of bonded joints.

2. Conduct continuity test on buried joints that are required to be bonded. Test electrical continuity of joint bonds after bonds are installed but before backfilling of pipe.

3. Have Cathodic Protection Specialist monitor tests of bonded joints. 4. Test electrical continuity of completed joint bonds using either a digital

low resistance ohmmeter or by Calculated Resistance Method, at Contractor’s option. a. Digital Low Resistance Ohmmeter Method:

1) Provide the following equipment and materials: a) One Biddle Model 247001 digital low resistance

ohmmeter. b) One set of duplex helical current and potential hand

spikes, Biddle Model No. 241001, cable length as required.



c) One calibration shunt rated at 0.001 ohm, 100 amperes, Biddle Model No. 249004.

2) Test Procedure: a) Measure resistance of joint bonds with low resistance

ohmmeter in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

b) Use helical hand spikes to contact pipe on each side of joint, without touching thermite weld or bond.

c) Clean contact area to bright metal by filing or grinding and without surface rusting or oxidation.

d) Record measured joint bond resistance on test form described herein.

e) Repair damaged pipe coating. b. Calculated Resistance Method:

1) Provide the following equipment and materials: a) One dc ammeter (meter or clamp-on) with full scale

reading of 100 amperes and a minimum resolution of 1 ampere or a 100-ampere shunt with a voltmeter as specified herein.

b) One high resistance electronic voltmeter with a dc low range of 200 millivolts full scale to a dc high range of 20 volts full scale and capable of a minimum resolution of 1 millivolt (two voltmeters are required if a shunt is used).

c) One knife switch, safety switch, or time controlled relay suitable for test current.

d) Two electrical probes for the voltmeter. e) Insulated wire suitable for carrying the test current,

length as required. f) One dc power supply with a steady capacity of

50 amperes minimum; storage batteries are not an acceptable power supply.

g) Test Procedure: Either tightly clamp or thermite weld current wire connections to the pipe. Determine wire size for the test current, and do not exceed 1,000 feet in length.

c. Apply a minimum direct current of 50 amperes. d. Measure voltage drop across each joint with voltmeter by

contacting pipe on each side of joint. Voltmeter connections to bond wire or thermite welds will not be acceptable.

e. Measure current applied to test span and voltage drop across joint simultaneously.



f. Record measured voltage drop and current for each joint of test form described herein and calculate bond resistance in accordance with the following formula:

R=E

I

Where: R = Resistance of the joint bond. E = Measured voltage drop across the joint, in volts. I = Test current applied to the pipe test span, in amperes.

5. Joint Bond Acceptance: a. Joint Bond Resistance: Less than or equal to the maximum

allowable bond resistance values in Table 1.

Table 1

Joint Type

Max. Allowable Resistance

1 Bond/Joint 2 Bonds/Joint

Push-On or Mechanical 0.000325 ohm 0.000162 ohm

Flexible Coupling 0.000425 ohm 0.000212 ohm

Concrete Cylinder 0.000200 ohm 0.000100 ohm

b. Replace joint bonds that exceed the allowable resistance. Retest replacement joint bonds for compliance with bond resistance.

c. Repair defective joint bonds discovered during energizing and testing.

6. Record Tests of Each Bonded Pipeline: a. Description and location of pipeline tested. b. Starting location and direction of test. c. Date of test. d. Joint type. e. Test current and voltage drop across each joint and calculated

bond resistance (Calculated Resistance Method only). f. Measured joint bond resistance (Digital Low Resistance

Ohmmeter method only). g. Record test information on a form that includes information listed

above.



B. Insulated Joint Testing:

1. Provide Engineer with 3 days’ advance notice before beginning tests. 2. Cathodic Protection Specialist shall monitor the tests. 3. Test each joint after assembly with insulator tester in accordance with

manufacturer’s written instructions. 4. For insulating flanges, test and record insulating values of each bolt in

addition to the completed flange. 5. Replace damaged or defective insulation parts. 6. Correct defects identified during testing.

3.11 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Measure structure-to-soil potential of pipeline at each test station using equipment specified herein. Structure-to-soil potential measurements shall be made at surface with a portable copper-copper sulfate reference electrode and permanent reference electrode installed at each test station.

B. Tabulate structure-to-soil potential measurements, with date and test location, and submit to Owner.

3.12 SUPPLEMENT

A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this Specification.

1. Joint Bond Continuity Test Schematic.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 GALVANIC ANODE CATHODIC JANUARY 2020 PROTECTION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 26 42 02 - 1

SECTION 26 42 02 GALVANIC ANODE CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B843, Standard Specification for Magnesium Alloy Anodes for

Cathodic Protection. b. G97, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Evaluation of

Magnesium Sacrificial Anode Test Specimens for Underground Applications.


1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Ferrous Metal Pipe: Pipe made of steel or iron, and pipe containing steel or iron as a principle structural material, except reinforced concrete.

B. Lead, Lead Wires, Joint Bonds, Cable: Insulated copper conductor; the same as wire.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Catalog cuts and other information for products to be used.


1. Compliance Statement: Provide compliance statement that galvanic anode composition meets chemical requirements specified herein.

2. Field test reports. 3. Cathodic Protection Specialist qualifications.


A. Cathodic Protection Specialist Qualifications: National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) certified.


GALVANIC ANODE CATHODIC PW\DEN003\708335 PROTECTION SYSTEM JANUARY 2020 26 42 02 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS


A. Packing and Shipping: Provide electrode packaged in a plastic or heavy paper bag of sufficient thickness to protect electrode, backfill, and cloth bag during normal shipping and handling.

B. Store prepackaged anodes off the ground and keep them dry. Protect against weather, condensation, and mechanical damage. Immediately remove wet or mechanically damaged prepackaged anodes from Site. Handle anodes with care to prevent loss of backfill material. Do not lift or hold anodes by lead wire.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GALVANIC ANODES

A. Magnesium Anodes:

1. Composition: High potential magnesium, ASTM B843, Grade M1C. 2. Open Circuit Potential and Electrochemical Capacity:

a. Open Circuit Potential: Negative 1.70 volts or more negative to a copper-copper sulfate reference electrode.

b. Electrochemical Capacity: 490 ampere hours at 50 percent efficiency, minimum.

c. As determined by laboratory testing using ASTM G97. 3. Dimensions:

a. Length: 21 inches minimum. b. Bare Weight: 32 pounds minimum.

B. Anode Wire: Furnish each anode with 12 AWG stranded copper wire with TW or THWN insulation, 10 feet long or length as required to reach test station without wire splices.

C. Wire-to-Anode Connection: Manufacturer’s standard. Anode connection shall be stronger than the wire.

D. Backfill:

1. Composition: a. Ground Hydrated Gypsum: 75 percent. b. Powdered Wyoming Bentonite: 20 percent. c. Anhydrous Sodium Sulfate: 5 percent.

2. Grain Size: 100 percent passing through a 20-mesh screen and 50 percent retained by a 100-mesh screen.



3. Mixture: Thoroughly mixed and firmly packaged around galvanic anode within cloth bag by means of adequate vibration.

4. Quantity of backfill shall be sufficient to cover surfaces of anode to a depth of 1 inch.

2.02 CATHODIC PROTECTION TEST STATION

A. As specified in Section 26 42 01, Pipe Bonding and Test Stations.


A. Compression Connectors:

1. For in-line, tap, and multisplice compression connectors furnish “C” taps made of conductive wrought copper, sized to fit wires being spliced.

2. Manufacturer and Product: Burndy; Type YC.

B. Wire Connectors: One-piece, tin-plated crimp-on lug connector as manufactured by Burndy Co. or Thomas and Betts.

C. Splicing Tape: Linerless rubber high-voltage splicing tape suitable for moist and wet environments; Scotch 130C and Scotch 88, as manufactured by 3M Products.

D. Earthfill: Native soil free of roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and rocks.

2.04 THERMITE WELD MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Thermite wire sleeves, welders, and weld cartridges according to manufacturer’s recommendations for each wire size, pipe or fitting size, and material.

2. Welding materials and equipment shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Interchanging materials of different manufacturers will not be acceptable.

B. Molds: Graphite. Ceramic “One-Shot” molds are not acceptable.

C. Cartridges:

1. Cast-iron thermite weld cartridges for cast and ductile iron pipe and fittings.



2. Maximum Cartridge Size: a. 25 grams for steel material. b. 32 grams for cast and ductile iron materials.

D. Welding Materials Manufacturers:

1. Erico Products Inc. (Cadweld), Cleveland, OH. 2. Continental Industries, Inc. (Thermo-Weld), Tulsa, OK.

E. Thermite Weld Caps:

1. Prefabricated weld cap with coating and suitable primer. 2. Handy Cap II with Royston Primer 747, as manufactured by Royston

Laboratories, Inc.

2.05 COATING REPAIR MATERIAL FOR PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. As recommended by pipe or fitting coating manufacturer for spot damage at thermite weld connections not covered by standard pipeline coating repair procedure or thermite weld cap.

B. Material: 100 percent solids epoxy that cures in submerged or buried conditions.


1. Carboline, St. Louis, MO; Carboguard A-788 Splash Zone Mastic. 2. Raven Linings, Tulsa, OK; Aquatapoxy A-7.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Construct galvanic anode cathodic protection system on specified buried steel, ductile iron and cast iron, as specified herein.

B. Conform to NFPA 70.

3.02 GALVANIC ANODE INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install galvanic anodes 1 foot below pipe invert and 5 feet from pipeline.

2. Alternate anode placement on opposite sides of pipe.



3. Provide minimum anode spacing of 2 feet from other unprotected pipelines.

4. Install anodes as shown on Drawings or as specified herein. 5. Thoroughly compact earthfill around each anode to a point 1 foot above

anode. Stop backfill below grade to allow for placing of topsoil, when required.

6. Bury anode wires a minimum of 24 inches below finish grade.

B. Steel Pipe: Locate anodes as shown on Drawings or as specified. Provide a minimum of one magnesium anode for each buried pipeline or at a minimum of every 20 feet.

C. Ductile Iron and Cast-Iron Pipe: Install anodes as shown on Drawings or as specified. Provide a minimum of one magnesium anode for each buried pipeline or at a minimum of every 20 feet.

3.03 WIRE CONNECTIONS TO PIPE

A. Make electrical connection of copper wire to steel, ductile, and cast iron surfaces using thermite weld method. Observe proper safety precautions, welding procedures, thermite weld material selection, and surface preparation as recommended by manufacturer. Assure pipe or fitting wall thickness is of sufficient thickness that thermite weld process will not damage integrity of pipe or fitting wall or protective lining.

B. Before connection is made, clean surface to bare metal by making a 2-inch by 2-inch window in coating, and then filing or grinding surface to produce a bright metal finish. Grinding shall be with a vitrified type grinding wheel; use of resin, rubber, or shellac impregnated type grinding wheels is not acceptable. Prepared metal surface shall be dry.

C. Install wire sleeves on the ends of the wires before welding to metal surface. Perform thermite welding in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. After weld connection has cooled, remove slag and physically test wire connection by tapping with a hammer; remove and replace defective connections.

D. Install prefabricated thermite weld cap over each completed connection. Repair exposed metal surfaces not covered by thermite weld cap in accordance with coating manufacturer’s recommendations. Repair damage to pipe lining in accordance with lining applicator’s recommendations.



3.04 WIRE INSULATION REPAIR

A. Repair splices or damage to wire insulation by spirally wrapping (50 percent overlay, minimum) with two coats of splicing tape and two layers of vinyl electrical tape. Make wire splices with suitable sized compression connectors or mechanically secure and solder with rosin cored 50/50 solder. Splices shall be approved by Engineer.

3.05 TEST STATION INSTALLATION

A. As specified in Section 26 42 01, Pipe Bonding and Test Stations.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 SECURITY SYSTEMS JANUARY 2020 28 13 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 28 13 00 SECURITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Related sections include, but not limited to, the following:

1. Division 01, General Requirements. 2. Division 08, Openings. 3. Section 26 05 05, Conductors. 4. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 32 31 13, Chain Link Fences and Gates.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Security access and intercom operating system and application software. 2. Access Control System (ACS) and intercom component requirements. 3. Security system integration and startup.

1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Documents and Division 01, General Requirements, apply to this Section.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. ACS: Access Control System.

B. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity.

C. Identifier: A credential card; keypad personal identification number; or code, biometric characteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry-control database for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

D. LAN: Local area network.

E. NVR: Network video recorder.

F. RF: Radio frequency.


SECURITY SYSTEMS PW\DEN003\708335 28 13 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

G. SCADA System: Plant operating, PLC control system. Not provided as part of the security system.

H. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

I. USB: Universal serial bus.

J. Wiegand: Type of communication protocol.

1.05 DESIGN INTENT

A. Access Control System: Provide access control on new man gate and at the main vehicle gate as shown on Drawings.

1. The main gate will open via a card reader, keypad, free exit loop, and/or pushbutton control at the operations building.

2. Access control software will be located on a workstation for enrollment and alarm annunciation.

B. Intercom System: An intercom station shall be located at the main gate that calls back to the intercom software on the security work station in the operations building. The intercom software in the operations building will have the capability to open the main gate. Additionally, the intercom shall have mobile capability to allow remote operation from authorized user cell phones that use the mobile intercom application. The intercom system provides a video image of the gate caller through the master intercom station which has a small video screen, and also through the mobile application.

C. Network Connections: The security systems, including ACS and intercom, shall be independent from the existing wastewater treatment plant network systems.

1.06 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Vehicle approaching vehicle gate, wishing to enter.

1. Using Card Reader: a. Scan identification card on either card reader scanner.

1) If denied access through card access system, driver can use gate intercom to request access.

2) If approved access, driver waits for gate to fully open, otherwise gate remains closed and driver exits gate area.

b. Driver proceeds through gate. c. Gate will close automatically upon vehicle clearing safety loop(s).



2. Using Keypad: a. Driver enters pass key on the 10-digit keypad. b. Driver waits for gate to fully open. c. Driver proceeds through gate. d. Gate will close automatically upon vehicle clearing safety loop(s).

3. Using Intercom: a. Driver presses the call button on the intercom faceplate. b. Driver speak with staff member via master intercom station. c. Intercom has a built-in fixed color camera so the master intercom

station phone unit back at the plant (or mobile cell phone for remote use) can view the driver’s face.

d. There are two intercom heights, one standard height for commercial vehicles and one height for trucks, each with their own intercom and integrated camera unit.

4. Using Knox Box: a. To open Knox box, qualified first responding (e.g., fire

department) personnel are required to have a proper key to open the Knox box.

b. Insert key and open Knox box. c. First responder to use included access card at gate card reader to

activate gate.

B. Vehicle approaching vehicle gate, exiting.

1. Exiting Gate: a. To exit, vehicle approaches gate slowly and waits for gate to fully

open before exiting. b. Driver proceeds through gate. c. Gate will close automatically upon vehicle clearing safety loop(s).

C. Person approaching man gate wishing to enter.

1. Person wishing to enter calls plant staff via cell phone before entering. 2. Man gate does not have automated entry capability, so plant staff will

need to manually open the gate to allow the person entry.


A. The Subcontractor shall design, install, program, and calibrate a complete and functional security system and intercom system with integration to gate operation as described in this Section and as shown on Drawings:

1. Provide security components at locations shown on Drawings. The components shown on Drawings are a minimum. The Subcontractor is responsible for providing any additional components required to make a



complete and functional system that meets the functional intent of Drawings and Specifications.

2. The Subcontractor is responsible for selecting the appropriate wire and cable types to provide a fully functional system. Conduit paths are shown on Drawings for coordination purposes only. It is the responsibility of the Subcontractor to ensure that adequate raceways and boxes are provided before installation. Additional conduit requirements must be coordinated with other trades and submitted for review prior to start of Work.

3. The Subcontractor is responsible for sizing and locating all power supplies required for the security system.

4. The security system shall be capable of handling all locations shown on Drawings, and an additional 25 percent future capacity, including all power supplies and network switches.

5. The security system shall have provisions for programming access cards through software provided by the Subcontractor. This will permit programming of the access control system to grant access to specific doors based on the privileges granted to the holder of that card.

B. The ACS system shall be fully integrated to provide a robust security system that is capable of restricting access, and automatically assessing alarm events by displaying video of the affected area.

C. Access Control System:

1. Panel Locks: ACS panel enclosures to be locked, using the same type of lock and key as currently used by the City for panels in other facilities. Coordinate with the City for lock information.

2. Panel Tamper: ACS panel enclosures to have a tamper switch that alerts the S/ACS system that the door is opened.

D. Wiring: Security wiring is to be protected within conduit or raceways. Where possible, conduits shall be routed within the interior of the building, concealed from view and tampering.

E. Wiring Integrity: All interconnecting and network wiring between security components will be monitored for integrity so that an abnormal condition (wire-to-wire short, wire break, or wire ground-fault condition) is automatically indicated to the user upon arming the system.

F. Backup Power: All security components to be provided with a seamless backup power source.

1. 15 minutes minimum for UPS power, 4 hours minimum for battery power.



2. Backup power sources may include battery units, auxiliary power supplies, uninterruptible power supply (UPS) units, or generators.

1.08 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Security access system shall use a single database for access-control and credential-creation functions.

B. Distributed Processing: A fully distributed processing system.

1. Access-control information, including time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data, shall be downloaded to controllers so each controller can make access-control decisions.

2. If communications with the front end are lost, controllers shall automatically buffer event transactions until communications are restored, at which time buffered events shall be uploaded to the front end.

C. System Network Requirements:

1. System components shall be interconnected and shall provide automatic communication of status changes, commands, field-initiated interrupts, and other communications required for proper system operation.

2. Communication shall not require operator initiation or response and shall return to normal after partial- or total-network interruption, such as power loss or transient upset.

3. System shall automatically annunciate communication failures to the operator and shall identify the communications link that has experienced a partial or total failure.

4. Communications controller may be used as an interface between the front end system and the field device network. Communications controller shall provide functions required to attain the specified network communications performance.

D. Field equipment shall include controllers, sensors, and controls.

1. Controllers shall serve as an interface between the front end and sensors and controls.

2. Data exchange between the front end and the controllers shall include down-line transmission of commands, software, and databases to controllers.

3. The up-line data exchange from the controller to the front end shall include status data such as intrusion alarms, status reports, and entry-control records.

4. Controllers are classified as alarm-annunciation or entry-control type.



E. System Response to Alarms:

1. Field device network shall provide a system end-to-end response time of 1 second or less for every device connected to the system.

2. Alarms shall be annunciated at the front end within one second of the alarm occurring at a controller or at a device controlled by a local controller, and within 100 ms if the alarm occurs at the front end.

3. Alarm and status changes shall be displayed within 100 ms after receipt of data by the front end.

4. This response time shall be maintained during system heavy load. 5. Opening of a door using an authenticated card shall shunt the BMS and

not generate an alarm. Card reader, electric door strike, and BMS shall be calibrated accordingly.

F. False-Alarm Reduction: The design of the front end and controllers shall contain features to reduce false alarms. Equipment and software shall comply with SIA CP-01.

G. Error Detection:

1. Use a cyclic code method to detect single- and double-bit errors, burst errors of eight bits or fewer, and at least 99 percent of all other multibit and burst errors between controllers and the front end.

2. Interactive or product error-detection codes alone will not be acceptable. 3. A message shall be in error if one bit is received incorrectly. 4. Retransmit messages with detected errors. 5. Allow for an operator-assigned two-digit decimal number to each

communications link representing the number of retransmission attempts.

6. Front end shall print a communication failure alarm message when the number of consecutive retransmission attempts equals the assigned quantity.

7. Monitor the frequency of data transmission failure for display and logging.

H. Data Line Supervision: System shall initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines.

I. Door/Gate Hardware Interface:

1. Comply with requirements in Division 08, Openings, for door hardware required to be monitored or controlled by the security access system.

2. For motorized gate requirements, see Section 32 31 13, Chain Link Fences and Gates.



3. Electrical characteristics of controllers shall match the signal and power requirements of door hardware.

1.09 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets for each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Reference each product to a location on Drawings.

2. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. a. Diagrams for cable management system. b. Detailed Point to Point Wiring Diagrams. Showing all power,

signal, and control wiring, including routing and termination points on each device.

c. UPS, battery and charger calculations for security panels. d. Power supply calculations showing that they are capable of

handling power consumption including 25 percent future capacity. e. Video storage calculations for each video storage unit indicating

duration of video storage provided. Calculations shall be in MS Excel format.

f. Programming Matrix: Showing how all components will operate. g. Anchorage and bracing drawings and catalog information, as

required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.


1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

2. Example graphical human machine interface (HMI) screen layout for access control and video surveillance systems. a. Indicate proposed screen hierarchy, navigation, graphical symbols

and colors used. b. Include proposed text for point descriptions, alarms and status

messages. Text and graphics shall be approved prior to data entry. 3. Security Alarm Integration: Provide an example of the proposed

integration of alarms between access control and video surveillance systems.



4. Network Cyber Security: Provide a detailed description of the network protection steps proposed to be undertaken to ensure cyber security, including, but not limited to, whitelisting authorized IP addresses, blocking unnecessary network services, eliminating access to the public Internet, changing default passwords, etc. Provide specific steps to be implemented and proposed example password(s) to be used.

5. Operation and Maintenance Data: For security system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data, include the following: a. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating

specifications, design guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.

b. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions.

c. System photos of completed installation. Refer to Part 3, Execution.

6. Test Reports: Final test reports showing that the system has been programmed calibrated and operates as intended.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. Cable installer must have on staff a registered communication distribution designer (RCDD) certified by Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain controllers, Identifier readers, and all software through one source.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

E. Comply with SIA DC-01, SIA DC-03, and SIA DC-07.


A. Electronic Components:

1. Store in temperature- and humidity-controlled environment in original manufacturer's sealed containers. Maintain ambient temperature between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F (10 degrees C and



30 degrees C), and not more than 80 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

2. Open each container; verify contents against packing list; and file copy of packing list, complete with container identification, for inclusion in operation and maintenance data.

3. Save original manufacturer's containers and packing materials and deliver as directed under provisions covering extra materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. S2 NetBox:

1. Maximum Number of Cardholders: 20,000. 2. Maximum Number of Readers Supported: 14. 3. Unique User Roles: 16. 4. Storage Capacity: 20GB 5. Dimensions: 17 inch by 17.5 inch by 8.25 inch. 6. Weight: 10 pounds. 7. AC input: 1.5A. 8. Hardware Warranty: 2 years. 9. Software Warranty: 1 year. 10. No External Software Installation is Required: Software comes reloaded

on the NetBox. 11. Manufacturer and Product:

a. S2; S2-NB4-E2R-WM. b. “Or-equal.”

2.02 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING PANEL (ACS MODULE)

A. Panel shall be compatible with ACS software platform – S2 Netbox.

B. Panel enclosure shall be NEMA 4, Type 316L stainless steel, water proof, prewired, with prepunched knockouts, removable backplane, and dual key set.

2.03 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL

A. General:

1. Furnish and install fiber optic patch panel to provide a secure place to terminate fiber optic cables.

2. Features: a. Compartments: Two – one for fiber optic, one for jumpers for

individual equipment.



b. Fiber Guide: Guide to wind slack fiber optic cable, provides controlled long-radius bends.

c. Connectors Minimum 12 ST connectors for entry and exit, “or-equal.”

d. Fiber Compatibility: Simplex, 12 fiber, 62.5 micro-meter multimode.

e. Size: Maximum 8 inches by 7 inches by 3 inches. f. Splice Holder: Includes 6-slot, 4-inch splice holder;

accommodates up to 12 heat-shrink splices. 3. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Corning; Single-Panel Housing (SPH) and Closet-Connector Housing (CCH) Panel, ST Compatible Adapters.

b. “Or-equal.”

2.04 FIBER OPTIC MEDIA CONVERTERS

A. General:

1. Furnish and install fiber optic converters to convert Ethernet signal transmitted over copper conductors to Ethernet signal transmitted over fiber.

2. Environmental: a. Minus 40 degrees C to plus 75 degrees C. b. 5 percent to 95 percent humidity, noncondensing. c. Input Power: 12V dc to 48V dc. d. Input Signal: 10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45 connectors). e. Output Signal: 100BASE-FX-1300nMM (ST connectors). f. Manufacturer and Product: Transition Networks;

Model Transition SISTF-1011-211-LRT.

2.05 ETHERNET SURGE PROTECTION UNIT – SINGLE PORT

A. General:

1. Protection for power connections 120-volt. 2. Protection for communication, signal, control, and low-voltage power

connections. 3. Furnish and install Ethernet surge protection for all Ethernet

connections to devices mounted outdoors. Protected devices shall include, but not be limited to IP video cameras, radar, intercom, etc.

4. Point of use surge protector to be installed at the network switch end and equipment end of devices, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.



5. Characteristics: a. Port: Single port. b. Service Voltage: 48V. c. Clamping Voltage: 72V. d. Protection Modes: Line-ground, line-line. e. Surge Current Rating: 20,000A per pair. f. Power Handling: 144 W. g. Data Rate: 1000 Mbps. h. Connection Method: Shielded RJ45 in/out; compatible with CAT6

cabling. i. PoE+ compatible. j. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees C to plus 70 degrees C. k. Manufacturer and Product:

1) DITEK; Model DTK-MRJPOES. 2) “Or-equal.”

2.06 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCH

A. General:

1. Furnish and install industrial Ethernet switch as specified in the following: a. Managed hardened PoE+ Ethernet network switch. b. Features: Store-and-forward architecture with 16 Gbps switching,

loop protection and supports LLDP protocol. c. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees C to plus 75 degrees C. d. Class I, Div. 2 Certification. e. Input Power: 48V dc to 57V dc, redundant power inputs with

reverse polarity protection and overload current protection. f. Data Transfer Rate (copper): 10/100/1000 Mbps,

14,880/148,800 pps. g. Ports:

1) Four 10/100/1000 Base-T PoE+ ports (30 watts per port, all four ports simultaneously).

2) Two 10/100/1000 Base-T RF-45 ports. 3) Two 100/1000 Base-X SFP ports. 4) Manufacturer and Product: Transition Networks;

Model SISPM1040-362-LRT, Managed Industrial Switch. 5) Power Supply: Transition Networks, Model 25104, 120W

industrial DIN rail mounted 48V dc power supply.



2.07 POWER SUPPLIES (PS)

A. Mounted in a self-contained enclosure with continuous hinge and integral point of use battery backup capable of powering auxiliary devices for 4 hours in the event of a power loss.

B. 120-volt, single-phase input.

C. UL listed.

D. Power Supply Requirement:

1. Power Supply requirements shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. DC Voltage: 54V. b. Voltage Range: 27V dc to 54V dc. c. Efficiency: 95 percent. d. Power: 321.3 W.

2. Manufacturer and Product: a. Mean Well; HLG-320H-54. b. “Or-equal.”

2.08 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Furnish, install and configure UPS in the equipment cabinet as shown on Drawings. The UPS shall be equipped with simple network management protocol (SNMP) Web Management as well.

B. The design basis for UPS units are show below.

C. Hardware Specification:

1. Enclosure-Mount: a. 900 VA, 480 W Ultra-Compact Line-Interactive UPS. b. Maintains sine-wave 120-V nominal output over an input range of

83V to 147V. c. Input:

1) NEMA 5-15P (120V) Input Plug/Output: 6 NEMA 5-15R (120V) outlets – as 6 battery supported outlets and 6 surge-only outputs.

d. Half-load Runtime: 8.4 minutes at 240W. e. Dimensions: 4-inch high by 12-inch long by 7-inch wide.



2.09 BATTERY UNITS

1. Battery assemblies shall use lithium iron phosphate battery units. 2. Batteries shall be sized to provide meet backup requirements noted in

Design Criteria within this Section and Drawings. 3. Product:

a. Relion Lipo lithium iron phosphate battery. b. “Or-equal.”

2.10 CARD READER, KEYPAD, AND CREDENTIAL CARDS

A. HID Reader/Keypad Mounted Card Reader:

1. Furnish and install HID card reader and keypad device. 2. Dimensions: 5-inch by 5-inch by 1-inch. 3. Peak Current Draw: 120mA. 4. Average Current Draw: 100mA. 5. Manufacturer and Product:

a. HID; Model Proximity ProxPro with Keypad 5355. b. “Or-equal.”

2.11 GATE HARDWARE INTERFACE

A. Electric Latches, Locks and Strikes: Power and signal shall be from the controller. Electric door hardware specified within Division 08, Openings.

2.12 GATE STANCHION

A. 72-Inch Dual Headed, Gooseneck Pedestal:

1. Furnish and install dual headed pedestal. 2. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Pedestal Pro; Model 72-DSP-3-12-12. b. “Or-equal.”

2.13 KNOX BOX

A. Knox Box:

1. Furnish and install knox box at entry gate. Confirm suitability with local Fire Department Authority.

2. Manufacturer and Product: a. Knox-Box; Model 3200. b. “Or-equal.”



2.14 INTERCOM SYSTEM

A. 2N Intercom:

1. Furnish and install IP and SIP video intercom at entry gate. 2. Manufacturer and Product:

a. 2N; Model 01337-001. b. “Or-equal.”

3. Must purchase Enhanced Video License to pull video into an NVR. 2N; Model 01377-001, “or-equal.”

2.15 INTERCOM MOUNTING

A. Intercom devices at gate shall be surface mounted to dual height pedestal.

2.16 INTERCOM MASTER STATION

A. Intercom master station shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Display: 7-inch LCD screen. 2. Wire Type: Cat6. 3. Mobile Capability: Yes. 4. Power Options: PoE. 5. Manufacturer and Product:

a. 2N; Model 01668-001. b. “Or-equal.”

6. Desk Stand also required: a. 2N; Model 01425-001. b. “Or-equal.”

2.17 INTERCOM MOBILE STATION AND INTEGRATION

A. For mobile capabilities allowing the plant staff the ability to answer intercom calls, the My2N mobile video phone app must be downloaded. This can be directly purchased from “my2n.com.” This is a monthly subscription service that charges $2.20 per device per month. For example, two intercoms at a dual pedestal gate and two smart phones, the total would be $8.80 per month.

B. Contractor to program intercom call roll-over function for priority users. For example, if the intercom master station is not answered, then the system rolls to User 1 to answer on their mobile device. If User 1 doesn’t pick up the intercom call from their mobile device, the system rolls over to User 2 to answer the intercom call, etc. The 2N intercom system has the ability to dial 16 numbers at once, or cascade them, or set time profiles.



2.18 DESKTOP SECURITY MONITOR/WORKSTATION

A. The desktop security monitor is to comply with the following minimum requirements:

1. Display Type: 24-inch capacitive touch screen. 2. Brightness (typical): 250 cd/m2. 3. Resolution: 1920 by 1080. 4. Response: 8ms response time. 5. Connectivity: VGA, HDMI, USB. 6. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Dell; P2419H. b. “Or-equal.”

B. The desktop workstation to comply with the following minimum requirements:

1. Processor: Intel Core i5-8500, 6 Core, 9MB Cache, 3.0GHz. 2. Graphics: 4.1GHz Turbo w/ HD Graphics 630. 3. Operating System: Windows 10 Pro 64bit. 4. Hard Drive Capacity: 1 TB. 5. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Dell; Precision 3430 Workstation. b. “Or-equal.”

2.19 OUTDOOR GATE SECURITY ENCLOSURE

A. 30-inch by 24-inch by 12-inch stainless steel enclosure, housing security access control module, power supply, network switch, fiber optic patch panel and media converter.

1. 0.075-inch Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Mounting hardware, sealing washers and hole plugs included. 3. Removeable and interchangeable doors. 4. Black zinc die cast key-locking/pad-locking handles.

2.20 CABLES

A. Refer to Section 26 05 05, Conductors, for security system cable requirements.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, underground conduit and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine rough-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs, controllers, card readers, network switches, patch panels, media converters and other cable-connected devices to verify actual locations of conduit and back boxes before device installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with recommendations in SIA CP-01.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA 606-A, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.

C. Obtain detailed Project planning forms from manufacturer of access-control system; develop custom forms to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans and specifications and publish as Project planning documents for review and approval.

1. Record setup data for workstation. 2. For each Location, record setup of controller features and access

requirements. 3. Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up

access levels for doors. 4. Set up groups, facility codes, linking, and list inputs and outputs for

each controller. 5. Assign action message names and compose messages. 6. Set up alarms. Establish interlocks between alarms, and intruder

detection. 7. Develop user-defined fields. 8. Propose setups for key control. 9. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification. 10. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration. 11. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of

the test.



12. Develop cable and asset-management system details; input data from construction documents. Include system schematics and Visio Technical Drawings in electronic format.

3.03 CABLING

A. Comply with NECA 1, Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.

B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

D. Install network cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 6 rating of components and fiber-optic rating of components, and that ensure Category 6 and fiber-optic performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

E. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

F. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel location.

G. Connections to external wiring between field panels and system devices to be made on terminal strips within a terminal box or the equipment enclosure. Connections may be made either with terminal spade lugs set on the conductors with a special setting tool or with approved pressure-type terminal blocks. A terminal cabinet to be installed at each point where a circuit riser originates or at any point along a circuit where a tap is made.

H. Wiring splices or taps are not permitted.

I. Device circuit wiring to be color coded.

J. Conductors are not to be installed in the same outlet box, junction box, or conduit with conductors of lighting or power systems.

K. Power and non-power limited wiring to be kept separate.



3.04 CABLE APPLICATION

A. Comply with TIA 569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

B. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded if recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware.

C. TIA 232-F Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 50 feet (15 m).

D. TIA 485-A Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 4,000 feet (1,220 m).

E. Card Readers:

1. Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for the functions specified.

2. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, install No. 22 AWG wire or larger if maximum distance from controller to the reader is 250 feet (75 m), and install No. 20 AWG wire or larger if maximum distance is 500 feet (150 m).

3. For greater distances, install “extender” or “repeater” modules recommended by manufacturer of the controller, or utilize fiber optic cable.

4. Install minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and keypads that draw 50 mA or more.

F. Install minimum No. 16 AWG cable from controller to electrically powered locks. Do not exceed 250 feet (75 m).

G. Install minimum No. 18 AWG ac power wire from transformer to controller, with a maximum distance of 25 feet (8 m).

3.05 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Comply with IEEE 1100, Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment.

C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.



E. Signal Ground:

1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators. 3. Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground

terminal in each equipment room and wiring closet. 4. Provide a dedicated ground cable from gate security enclosure to a

dedicated grounding rod located in a suitable location.

3.06 INSTALLATION

A. Enclosure: Mount enclosure plumb at a height shown on Drawings or as submitted within Shop Drawings.

B. Card Reader: Install card reader and related components per manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Intercom: Install intercom and related components per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.07 IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with applicable requirements in Section 26 05 05, Conductors, and with TIA/EIA 606-A.

B. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered within the panel or cabinet.

C. At completion, Owner’s network database, cable and asset management software and database shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.08 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE

A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform database tests for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to the Owner.




A. Perform Tests and Inspections:

1. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Network Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bidirectional, Category 6 tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test according to TIA/EIA 568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards - Part 1: General Requirements. Link performance for UTP cables must comply with minimum criteria in TIA/EIA 568-B.1.

2. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to, measurements of power-supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment.

3. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed. a. Include the following tests:

1) The system is properly calibrated and adjusted in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2) The system is free from grounded or open circuits. 3) The control equipment will indicate when a ground or open

circuit occurs. 4) Contact-initiating devices are operating normally. 5) Confirm power supply output voltages are within

appropriate tolerance range, and that the battery and charger indicate proper charge and operation where batteries and battery charging systems are used.

6) Simulate power failure and test all components when system is operating on battery or uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Confirm no loss of functionality occurs.



7) Where fiber optic cable is used, use an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) to document attenuation (optical power loss) in both directions from the ends of each fiber cable.

8) Confirm all exterior-mounted Ethernet network components (cameras, exterior network switches) are equipped with appropriate surge protection.

9) Where Ethernet networks are used, document the following using network testing means, such as PSPing or similar software: a) Network Bandwidth Throughput: Maximum rate at

which frames can be transmitted from the source to the destination with zero lost frames or errors.

b) Network Latency: The total time it takes for a frame to travel from source to destination. The minimum, average, and maximum latency values for each frame size shall be reported.

b. The communication and device operation within each panel, between each panel and the head-end controls, and among all panels and the head-end controls as an entire system is established and verified.

c. The appropriate communication and alarm annunciation are demonstrated upon a test simulation program being loaded and executed.

d. Gate Testing: 1) Provide the following additional ACS tests indicated below:

a) Access Granted – No Entry: (1) Present a valid card at the reader – do not open

gate. (2) Validate card reader LED turns green and gate

unlocks. (3) Validate card reader LED turns red and gate

relocks. (4) Mark result on testing sheet.

b) Operation Time: Document actual time between gate unlock and lock (typically less than 5 seconds).

c) Access Granted – Valid Entry: (1) Present a valid card at the reader. (2) Validate card reader LED turns green and gate

activates. (3) Validate card reader LED turns red and door

relocks. (4) Mark result on testing sheet.



2) Provide the following intercom tests as indicated below: a) Call from gate intercom answered via Intercom

Master Station: (1) Confirm calls come through clearly and are

audible. (2) Confirm video images are in focus from gate

intercom unit showing driver. Adjust intercom lens as necessary to obtain clear image.

(3) Confirm intercom can initiate gate opening. b) Call from gate intercom answered via mobile device.

(1) Confirm calls roll over from master station to next mobile device on call list.

(2) Confirm calls come through clearly and are audible.

(3) Confirm video images are in focus from gate intercom unit showing driver. Adjust intercom lens as necessary to obtain clear image.

(4) Confirm intercom can activate gate opening.

C. Photo Documentation:

1. Provide photo documentation of installation as noted below: a. Access Control:

1) Card Reader At Gates – Field Devices: a) Provide photo of the unsecured side of the gate.

Include all devices in the picture (photo to be taken from ground to include surrounding area and labeling) (photo to be taken from 3 feet to 8 feet distance).

b) Provide photo of secured side of gate. Include all devices in picture (photo to be taken from ground to include surrounding area and labeling) (photo to be taken from 3 feet to 8 feet distance).

c) Provide photo of Card Reader (photo to be taken from 3 feet to 8 feet distance).

d) Provide photo of the gate contact and stanchion (photo to be taken from 3 feet to 8 feet distance).

2) Intercom At Gates – Field Devices: a) Provide photo of intercom unit (photo to be taken

from 3 feet to 8 feet distance). b) Provide photo of the stanchion (photo to be taken

from 3 feet to 8 feet distance).



3) Security Panel: a) Provide photo of panel layout with door closed and

wall location (photo to be taken from 3 feet to 8 feet distance).

b) Provide photo of interior of panel with door open (photo to be taken from 3 feet to 8 feet distance).

c) Provide photo of individual panel components, separately (photo to be taken from 1 foot to 3 feet distance).

d) Provide photo of power supply(ies) with door(s) open (photo to be taken from 1 foot to 3 feet distance).

e) location for power (photo to be taken from 1 foot to 3 feet distance).

f) Provide photo of incoming wire entry into S/ACS panel, network switch, patch panel and media converter (photo to be taken from 1 foot to 3 feet distance).

D. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were developed in Article Preparation, and with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for operators, management, and security personnel.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Maintain strict security during the installation of equipment and software. Rooms housing the control station, and workstations that have been powered up shall be locked and secured with an activated burglar alarm and access-control system reporting to a central station complying with UL 1610, Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units, during periods when a qualified operator in the employ of Subcontractor is not present.

END OF SECTION